D800001X312

April 2021

DeltaV™ M-series Hardware Installation and

Reference
 Copyright Emerson 2021. All rights reserved. The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. The
DeltaV logo is a mark of one of the Emerson family of companies. All other marks are the property of their respective owners. The
contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while diligent efforts were made to ensure their
accuracy, they are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or implied, regarding the products or services
described herein or their use or applicability. All sales are governed by our terms and conditions, which are available on request.
We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of our products at any time without notice.

See the CE statement in Chapter 2.

Emerson Automation Solutions

1100 W. Louis Henna Blvd.
Round Rock, TX 78681

2
 Contents
D800001X312 April 2021

Contents
Welcome.....................................................................................................................xiii
Chapter 1 Overview..................................................................................................................... 15
1.1 The DeltaV System......................................................................................................................... 15
1.2 DeltaV System Equipment..............................................................................................................15
1.2.1 DeltaV Control Network.............................................................................................................. 17
1.2.2 DeltaV Remote Network..............................................................................................................20

Chapter 2 Installing Your DeltaV System...................................................................................... 23

2.1 CE Statement................................................................................................................................. 24
2.2 China RoHS.....................................................................................................................................24
2.3 Important Information about Hazardous Live Voltages...................................................................24
2.4 Installation Planning....................................................................................................................... 24
2.4.1 Tools Required for Installation..................................................................................................... 25
2.4.2 Site Preparation...........................................................................................................................25
2.4.3 Wiring Guidelines........................................................................................................................ 26
2.4.4 Power Guidelines.........................................................................................................................26
2.4.5 Torque Limits.............................................................................................................................. 26
2.4.6 Getting Started with DeltaV Hardware........................................................................................ 26
2.5 Installing the System...................................................................................................................... 28
2.5.1 Installing the DIN Rails and Carriers............................................................................................. 28
2.5.2 DIN Rail Recommendations......................................................................................................... 28
2.5.3 Installing the 2-Wide Power Controller Carrier............................................................................. 30
2.5.4 Installing the I/O Interface Carrier................................................................................................31
2.5.5 Connecting Bussed Field Power................................................................................................... 31
2.5.6 Extending Bussed Field Power......................................................................................................32
2.5.7 Installing Extender Cables............................................................................................................36
2.5.8 Installing the DeltaV I/O Interface................................................................................................36
Installing an I/O Terminal Block............................................................................................................. 36
Installing an I/O Card............................................................................................................................. 38
Installing a Redundant Terminal Block................................................................................................... 38
Installing a Redundant I/O Card............................................................................................................. 39
2.5.9 Installing the DeltaV Controller....................................................................................................39
2.5.10 Installing the DeltaV System Power Supply................................................................................ 40
2.5.11 DeltaV hardware ready for transportation................................................................................. 44
2.5.12 Installing the DeltaV Workstation.............................................................................................. 44
2.5.13 Setting up the DeltaV Control Network..................................................................................... 45
Control Network Installation Requirements...........................................................................................46
Install the Control Network Cables........................................................................................................ 48

iii
Contents
April 2021 D800001X312

Connecting the Control Network to a Plant LAN.................................................................................... 50

2.5.14 Connecting Power to the System...............................................................................................51
2.5.15 Setting Up the DeltaV Remote Network.................................................................................... 53
2.5.16 Setting Up a Network Time Server............................................................................................. 54
IP Addresses.......................................................................................................................................... 54
Subnet Mask..........................................................................................................................................55

Chapter 3 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System...............................................57

3.1 Checking Out Your System............................................................................................................. 57
3.1.1 Step 1. Checking the Cable Connections..................................................................................... 57
3.1.2 Step 2. Checking the Power Supply Voltages............................................................................... 57
3.1.3 Step 3. Checking the LED Indicators on Each Device.................................................................... 58
System Power Supply LEDs.................................................................................................................... 58
M-series Controller LEDs........................................................................................................................59
Remote Interface Unit LEDs................................................................................................................... 60
Media Converter LEDs........................................................................................................................... 61
DeltaV Fiber Switches LEDs....................................................................................................................62
DeltaV Controller Firewall LEDs..............................................................................................................62
AI 8-Channel Card LEDs......................................................................................................................... 63
AI 16-Channel Card LEDs....................................................................................................................... 65
AO 8-Channel Card LEDs........................................................................................................................66
AS-Interface Card LEDs.......................................................................................................................... 68
DeviceNet Card LEDs............................................................................................................................. 68
DI 8-Channel Card LEDs......................................................................................................................... 69
DI Mass Connection Board LEDs.............................................................................................................71
DO 8-Channel Card LEDs....................................................................................................................... 71
DO 32-Channel Card LEDs..................................................................................................................... 72
DO Mass Connection Board LEDs...........................................................................................................72
Fieldbus H1 Card LEDs........................................................................................................................... 73
Isolated Input Card LEDs........................................................................................................................74
Multifunction Card LEDs........................................................................................................................ 74
Profibus DP Card LEDs........................................................................................................................... 75
RTD, ohms and Thermocouple, mV Cards LEDs..................................................................................... 76
Sequence of Events Card LEDs............................................................................................................... 77
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 LEDs................................................................................................. 78
VIM 2 card LEDs..................................................................................................................................... 79
I.S. AI 8-Channel HART Card LEDs.......................................................................................................... 80
I.S. AO 8-Channel HART Card LEDs.........................................................................................................82
I.S. DI 16-Channel Card LEDs..................................................................................................................82
I.S. DO 4-Channel Card LEDs.................................................................................................................. 83
MD20 and MD30 Smart Switch LEDs..................................................................................................... 84
RM100 and FP20 Smart Switch LEDs......................................................................................................86

iv
 Contents
D800001X312 April 2021

3.1.4 Step 4. Testing the Field Wiring Connections...............................................................................88

3.2 Troubleshooting Your System........................................................................................................ 88
3.2.1 Using the DeltaV Explorer............................................................................................................ 89
Status Indicators....................................................................................................................................89
3.2.2 Using the Workstation Diagnostics..............................................................................................90
3.2.3 Using DeltaV Diagnostics............................................................................................................ 90
3.2.4 Troubleshooting Guide................................................................................................................90
3.3 Getting Help...................................................................................................................................93
3.4 Hazardous Area Installation Manuals, NAMUR Installation Manuals, and ATEX Instruction Sheets...94
3.5 Technical Service............................................................................................................................ 94

Appendix A Environmental Specifications....................................................................................... 95

A.1 Environmental Specifications for the DeltaV System...................................................................... 95

Appendix B Carrier Specifications................................................................................................... 99

B.1 2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier................................................................................... 99
B.2 2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier.................................................................................................. 100
B.3 4-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier.........................................................................................101
B.4 8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier.........................................................................................105
B.5 1-Wide Horizontal Carrier Extenders and Cables........................................................................... 106
B.5.1 Add External Power at the Left Carrier Extender.........................................................................107
B.5.2 Cabling Examples...................................................................................................................... 108
B.6 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier..............................................................................111
B.7 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier............................................................................................... 112
B.8 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier............................................................................... 113
B.9 8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carrier..................................................................................... 114
B.10 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders....................................................................................... 115
B.11 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier........................................................................ 116
B.12 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier............................................................................... 117
B.13 Fieldbus H1 Carrier..................................................................................................................... 118
B.14 Intrinsically Safe Power Supply Carrier........................................................................................ 120
B.15 Intrinsically Safe 8-Wide Horizontal Carrier.................................................................................121
B.16 Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator Carrier................................................................................... 122

Appendix C Interface Specifications.............................................................................................. 125

C.1 I/O Cards...................................................................................................................................... 125
C.1.1 DeltaV Series 2 I/O.................................................................................................................... 126
C.1.2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA............................................................................................................. 127
C.1.3 AI, 8-Channel, 1-5 VDC..............................................................................................................133
C.1.4 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART.................................................................................................135
C.1.5 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA............................................................................................................139
C.1.6 AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus........................................................................... 142
C.1.7 AS-Interface.............................................................................................................................. 145

v
Contents
April 2021 D800001X312

C.1.8 DeviceNet................................................................................................................................. 147

C.1.9 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact.......................................................................................... 149
C.1.10 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated...............................................................................................153
C.1.11 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact...................................................................................... 155
C.1.12 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated.............................................................................................156
C.1.13 DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact...................................................................................... 157
C.1.14 DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated.............................................................................................159
C.1.15 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact...................................................................................... 160
C.1.16 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side.......................................................................................... 163
C.1.17 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated.............................................................................................167
C.1.18 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side......................................................................... 169
C.1.19 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated............................................................................ 171
C.1.20 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side........................................................................................ 173
C.1.21 Fieldbus H1 and Series 2 H1.....................................................................................................176
C.1.22 Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus...............................................................................................179
C.1.23 Isolated Input.......................................................................................................................... 181
C.1.24 Multifunction.......................................................................................................................... 185
C.1.25 Profibus DP............................................................................................................................. 187
C.1.26 RTD, ohms.............................................................................................................................. 189
C.1.27 Sequence of Events................................................................................................................. 192
C.1.28 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485........................................................................................... 195
C.1.29 Thermocouple, mV................................................................................................................. 198
VIM 2 card........................................................................................................................................... 200
C.2 Intrinsically Safe I/O Cards............................................................................................................ 201
C.2.1 I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART............................................................................................. 202
C.2.2 I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA...................................................................................................... 203
C.2.3 I.S. DI, 16-Channel.....................................................................................................................206
C.2.4 I.S. DO, 4-Channel..................................................................................................................... 207
C.3 Terminal Blocks............................................................................................................................ 209
C.3.1 I/O Terminal Blocks................................................................................................................... 209
C.3.2 Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block....................................................................................................... 210
C.3.3 Series 2 H1 Terminal Block........................................................................................................ 211
C.3.4 Simplex H1 4-Port Terminal Block............................................................................................. 212
C.3.5 Simplex 2-Wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block.......................................................... 213
C.3.6 Simplex 4-Wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block.......................................................... 214
C.3.7 Simplex 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block.................................................................. 215
C.3.8 Simplex 32-Channel Discrete Input Terminal Block....................................................................216
C.3.9 Simplex 32-Channel Discrete Output Terminal Block.................................................................217
C.3.10 Interface Terminal Block..........................................................................................................218
C.3.11 Isolated Input Terminal Block.................................................................................................. 219
C.3.12 Profibus DP Terminal Block......................................................................................................220

vi
 Contents
D800001X312 April 2021

C.3.13 RTD, ohms Terminal Block.......................................................................................................222

C.3.14 Thermocouple Terminal Block.................................................................................................222
C.3.15 32-Channel Terminal Block......................................................................................................223
C.3.16 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block.................................................................................224
C.3.17 4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block...................................................................... 226
C.4 Redundant Terminal Blocks.......................................................................................................... 227
C.4.1 Redundant Analog Input Terminal Block................................................................................... 227
C.4.2 Redundant 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block.................................................................228
C.4.3 Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block................................................................................ 229
C.4.4 Redundant 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block..............................................................230
C.4.5 Redundant Discrete Terminal Block...........................................................................................231
C.4.6 Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Input Plus Terminal Block........................................................232
C.4.7 Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Output Plus Terminal Block.....................................................233
C.4.8 Redundant H1 Terminal Block................................................................................................... 234
C.4.9 Redundant H1 4-Port Terminal Block.........................................................................................235
C.4.10 Redundant Interface Terminal Block........................................................................................236
C.4.11 Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block....................................................................................237
C.5 Mass Termination Blocks.............................................................................................................. 239
C.5.1 10-Pin Mass Termination Block..................................................................................................240
C.5.2 16-Pin Mass Termination Block..................................................................................................241
C.5.3 24-Pin Mass Termination Block..................................................................................................242
C.5.4 40-Pin Mass Termination Block..................................................................................................243
C.5.5 Redundant Analog Input 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block specifications................................... 245
C.5.6 Redundant Analog Output 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block specifications................................ 246
C.5.7 Redundant Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination Block.........................................................248
C.5.8 Redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Termination Block......................................................249
C.5.9 Simplex Analog Input 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block specifications........................................251
C.5.10 Simplex Analog Output 48-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications..........................................252
C.5.11 Simplex Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination Block............................................................253
C.5.12 Simplex Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Termination Block.........................................................255
C.6 Signal Conditioning Cards............................................................................................................ 256
C.6.1 16-Channel Analog Input 4-20 mA Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O....................... 256
C.6.2 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 24 VDC Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O.....................263
C.6.3 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O...........265
C.6.4 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC, Isolated Signal Conditioning Card for
PLC-5/1771 I/O.............................................................................................................................. 269
C.6.5 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 24 VDC Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O..................272
C.6.6 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O................274
C.6.7 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC, Isolated Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O..277
C.6.8 16-Channel PLC-5 250 VAC/150 VDC DO Relay Signal Conditioning Card..................................279
C.6.9 Mounting brackets for signal conditioning cards....................................................................... 283

vii
Contents
April 2021 D800001X312

C.7 Mass Connection Boards.............................................................................................................. 287

C.7.1 AI/AO Mass Connection Board .................................................................................................. 287
C.7.2 DI Mass Connection Board.........................................................................................................290
C.7.3 DI Plus Mass Connection Board .................................................................................................295
C.7.4 DO Mass Connection Board....................................................................................................... 299
C.7.5 Connecting DI and DO Mass Connection Boards........................................................................303
C.8 Intrinsically Safe Terminal Blocks.................................................................................................. 304
C.8.1 I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block.................................................................................................... 304
C.8.2 I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block.................................................................................................. 306
C.9 I/O Interface Keying......................................................................................................................307
C.9.1 Intrinsically Safe I/O Interface Keying.........................................................................................312

Appendix D DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit.......................................................315

D.1 Controller Specifications.............................................................................................................. 315
D.2 Remote Interface Unit..................................................................................................................316
D.3 Fiber-Optic Media Converter........................................................................................................ 317

Appendix E System Power Supply Specifications...........................................................................319

E.1 System Power Supply (AC/DC)......................................................................................................319
E.2 System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)..............................................................................................321
E.3 Intrinsically Safe System Power Supply..........................................................................................324

Appendix F Workstation and Monitor Specifications.................................................................... 325

F.1 Primary and Secondary Channel Ethernet Card Specifications - Plant LAN Interface Card.............. 325
F.2 Multiple Monitors......................................................................................................................... 325
F.3 Touch Screens.............................................................................................................................. 325

Appendix G Control Network Specifications.................................................................................. 327

G.1 Third Party Switches and Cable.................................................................................................... 327
G.1.1 8-Port 10/100Mbit Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Port.............................................328
G.1.2 24-Port 100Mbit Fiber Switch....................................................................................................329
G.1.3 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Ports........................................................ 329
G.1.4 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch.......................................................................................................330
G.1.5 12-Port SFP Managed Switch.....................................................................................................331
G.1.6 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots............................................................. 332
G.1.7 24-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots.................................................. 332
G.1.8 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch.....................................................................................333
G.1.9 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch with One Fiber Port......................................................334
G.1.10 8-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 1 Gigabit Multi-Function Port................................................. 334
G.1.11 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 RJ45 Ports..........................................................................335
G.1.12 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 Gigabit Multi-Function Ports..............................................336
G.1.13 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 RJ45 Ports..........................................................................337
G.1.14 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 Gigabit Multi-Function Ports..............................................338
G.1.15 Fiber-Optic Gigabit Transceivers............................................................................................. 338

viii
 Contents
D800001X312 April 2021

G.1.16 Fiber-Optic Ethernet Transceivers........................................................................................... 339

G.1.17 Twisted Pair Gigabit Transceiver............................................................................................. 340
G.2 DeltaV Fiber Switches.................................................................................................................. 341
G.3 DeltaV Smart Switches and Media Modules..................................................................................343
G.3.1 DeltaV MD Base Smart Switches and Media Modules................................................................ 344
G.3.2 Power Specifications for the MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches..................................................353
G.3.3 DeltaV RM100 Base Smart Switches and Media Modules...........................................................355
G.3.4 Power Specifications for the DeltaV RM100 Smart Switches......................................................358
G.3.5 DeltaV RM104 Smart Switches..................................................................................................359
G.3.6 Power specifications for the DeltaV RM104 Smart Switches...................................................... 360
G.3.7 DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches..................................................................................................... 361
G.3.8 Power Specifications for the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches......................................................... 363
G.4 Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules.....................................................................363
G.4.1 Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications................................................................................................364
G.4.2 Cable Accessory Specifications..................................................................................................365
G.4.3 Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies..................................................................................... 365
G.4.4 Straight-Through Cable Pin Outs...............................................................................................367
G.4.5 Crossover Cable Pin Outs.......................................................................................................... 367
G.5 DeltaV Control Networks............................................................................................................. 368
G.5.1 Extending a DeltaV Control Network with Media Converters.....................................................369
G.5.2 10Mbit Hub Example.................................................................................................................369
G.5.3 10/100Mbit Network Examples.................................................................................................370
G.5.4 Fiber-Optic and Twisted Pair Network Star................................................................................ 371
G.5.5 Twisted Pair Network Star Using Twisted Pair Switches............................................................. 373
G.5.6 Twisted Pair Cascaded Network Using Twisted Pair Switches.................................................... 375
G.5.7 Twisted Pair Cascaded Networks with Fiber Links ..................................................................... 377
G.5.8 100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network.................................................................................. 379
G.5.9 Gigabit Twisted Pair Network Cascade...................................................................................... 381
G.5.10 Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Cascade..................................................................................... 383
G.5.11 Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 3750 Switches.................................................... 385
G.5.12 100Mb Fiber-Optic Star...........................................................................................................387
G.5.13 100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network................................................................................ 389
G.5.14 Gigabit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network.................................................................................. 391
G.5.15 Gigabit Fiber-Optic Cascaded Network................................................................................... 393
G.5.16 Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star............................................................................................ 395
G.5.17 100Mbit Fiber-Optic Network Star.......................................................................................... 397
G.5.18 100Mbit Multimode Fiber-Optic Network ...............................................................................399
G.6 Example Networks with DeltaV Smart Switches........................................................................... 401
G.6.1 DeltaV Smart Switches in a Twisted Pair Network with a Twisted Pair Uplink............................. 401
G.6.2 DeltaV Smart Switches in Twisted Pair Network with SFP and Fiber-Optic Uplinks..................... 403
G.6.3 DeltaV Smart Switches with Fiber and Twisted Pair Uplinks ...................................................... 406

ix
Contents
April 2021 D800001X312

G.6.4 RM104 Smart Switch network with fiber-optic and twisted-pair uplinks.................................... 408
G.6.5 DeltaV Smart Switches in a Twisted Pair Network......................................................................409
G.7 DeltaV Controller Firewall............................................................................................................ 413
G.7.1 DeltaV Firewall IPD Network Examples...................................................................................... 416
DeltaV Firewall IPD with Single Controllers and Switches..................................................................... 416
DeltaV Controller Firewall with Single Controllers and the Single Port Fiber Switch..............................418
DeltaV Firewall IPD with Multiple Controllers.......................................................................................419
G.8 The Management Station.............................................................................................................422
G.8.1 Connecting the Management Station....................................................................................... 423
G.9 Managing Switches and the DeltaV Firewall IPD........................................................................... 423
G.10 Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses.................................................................................................... 424
G.11 DeltaV Zones............................................................................................................................. 427
G.12 1420 Wireless Gateway..............................................................................................................428

Appendix H DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies............................................................................ 429

H.1 Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power Supplies................... 430
H.2 Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC............................................... 432
H.3 Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC.....................................................................................................434

Appendix I Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines...............................................................435

I.1 Selecting an Enclosure................................................................................................................... 435
I.2 Power Dissipation Considerations..................................................................................................438
I.3 Example Enclosure Selection Calculations......................................................................................442

Appendix J System Power Guidelines........................................................................................... 443

J.1 System Power Supply (AC/DC).......................................................................................................443
J.2 System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC).............................................................................................. 443
J.3 100-240 VAC to 12 VDC 15 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply ............................................................... 447
J.4 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 5 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply..................................................................451
J.5 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 10 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply................................................................454
J.6 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 20 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply................................................................458
J.7 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 40 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply................................................................461
J.8 12-48 VDC 20 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Module................................................... 464
J.9 12-24 VDC 40 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Module................................................... 468
J.10 12-24 VDC 80 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Module................................................. 472
J.11 Sizing the I.S. System Power Supply.............................................................................................475
J.12 Legacy Bulk Power Supplies for System Power............................................................................. 476
J.13 Sizing the Legacy Bulk Power Supply for Bussed Field Power and System Power.......................... 476
J.14 Using Multiple System Power Supplies.........................................................................................476
J.14.1 System Power Supply (AC/DC)..................................................................................................477
J.14.2 System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)......................................................................................... 481
J.15 Using Multiple Legacy Bulk Power Supplies for Redundancy and Load Sharing.............................482
J.15.1 Using OR-ing Diodes with Legacy Bulk Power Supplies..............................................................483

x
 Contents
D800001X312 April 2021

Appendix K Bussed Field Power Guidelines....................................................................................489

K.1 Implementing Bussed Field Power for Applications using DI and DO Cards................................... 489
K.2 Sizing R-C Snubbers......................................................................................................................492

Appendix L Controller Redundancy.............................................................................................. 493

L.1 Installing a Redundant Controller..................................................................................................493
L.2 Powering Redundant Controllers.................................................................................................. 494

Appendix M DeltaV Vertical Carriers.............................................................................................. 495

M.1 VerticalPLUS Carriers................................................................................................................... 495
M.2 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carriers........................................................................... 496
M.3 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carriers............................................................................. 496
M.4 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carriers............................................................................................ 497
M.5 8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carriers...................................................................................497
M.6 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders and Cables.......................................................................499
M.7 Installing VerticalPLUS Carriers.................................................................................................... 501
M.7.1 Installing the DIN Rail Stop....................................................................................................... 501
M.7.2 Installing and Removing the Carriers........................................................................................ 502
Installing VerticalPLUS Carriers............................................................................................................ 502
Removing VerticalPLUS Carriers.......................................................................................................... 504
M.7.3 Extending LocalBus Power to Other Carriers............................................................................. 504
Extend power from left to right 8-wide VerticalPLUS carriers............................................................... 506
Extending power from right to left 8-wide VerticalPLUS carriers.......................................................... 506
M.7.4 Inserting System Power............................................................................................................ 507
M.7.5 Using Bussed Field Power with VerticalPLUS Carriers................................................................ 508
Extending Bussed Field Power to VerticalPLUS Carriers........................................................................ 508
M.7.6 Legacy Vertical Carriers............................................................................................................ 512
4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carriers............................................................................... 513
8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carriers.......................................................................................514
Adding External Power to a Legacy Vertical System............................................................................. 516
Cables for Legacy Vertical Systems...................................................................................................... 520
Calculating the Total Length of a Legacy Vertical System.....................................................................521
DIN Rail Recommendations................................................................................................................. 522
Installing the 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carriers.......................................................... 522
Installing the 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carriers..................................................................523
Installing the Cables............................................................................................................................ 525

Appendix N Installation Worksheets............................................................................................. 527

N.1 Installation Information Checklist................................................................................................ 527
N.2 Worksheets for Calculating Power Requirements.........................................................................527
N.3 Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power................... 529
N.4 Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power.......................................................................534
N.5 Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Power Input.............................................. 536

xi
Contents
April 2021 D800001X312

N.6 Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input.........................................................538

N.7 Worksheet for Bulk Power Requirements..................................................................................... 540
N.8 Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power Requirements...................................................... 541

Appendix O Intrinsically Safe I/O................................................................................................... 543

O.1 Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator................................................................................................ 545
O.2 Intrinsically Safe Carrier Extenders............................................................................................... 546

Appendix P Product Type Numbers for DeltaV M-series Hardware................................................ 549

Glossary.................................................................................................................................... 553
Units Used in This Manual....................................................................................................................553
Acronyms Used in This Manual............................................................................................................ 554
Terms Used in This Manual.................................................................................................................. 555

Index .................................................................................................................................. 559

xii
 Welcome
D800001X312 April 2021

Welcome
Welcome to the Emerson DeltaV digital automation system. The DeltaV system offers
easy-to-install hardware and powerful, user-friendly software for advanced process control
scaled to the system size you need

About This Manual

This manual is designed to help you install your DeltaV system and get it started up
quickly. It is divided into three chapters, 15 appendices, a glossary, and an index.
• Chapter 1, Overview, provides general information on the DeltaV system hardware.
• Chapter 2, Installing Your DeltaV System, provides recommendations for system
installation preparation, lists the required tools, provides a brief description of the
steps required for system installation, and includes detailed instructions and diagrams
for system installation.
• Chapter 3, Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System, provides guidelines
to help ensure that your system is installed properly and to help you troubleshoot
hardware problems.
• The Appendices include specifications, wiring diagrams, and other detailed
information on the system devices.
• The Glossary defines the units, abbreviations, and terms used in this manual. A more
complete glossary can be found in the DeltaV Books Online.

Related Documentation
The Release Notes KBA has important updates for system installation.
Books Online contains a System Administration and Maintenance manual for help in
troubleshooting and the Installing Your DeltaV Zone 1 Intrinsically Safe Hardware manual.
DeltaV Power and Grounding contains instructions for properly preparing your site for
electrical power and grounding.
The Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV Digital Automation System manual contains important
information about installing a fieldbus system.
The Installing Your DeltaV Safety Instrumented System Hardware manual contains
information about installing DeltaV SIS hardware.
Refer to Chapter 3 for information on locating Hazardous Area Installation manuals,
NAMUR NE 21 Installation manuals and ATEX Instruction sheets.

Assumptions
It is assumed that you have read DeltaV Power and Grounding and have followed the
instructions for properly preparing your site for electrical power and grounding before
installing your DeltaV system. The Site Preparation Guide for DeltaV Automation Systems is
available from your Emerson Process Management representative or sales office.
This manual, Installing Your DeltaV Digital Automation System, shows factory tested and
supported wiring connections. If your system requires a different configuration, contact
your Emerson Process Management representative or sales office for help with design or

xiii
review. It is assumed that all installation and maintenance procedures described in this
document are performed by qualified personnel and that the equipment is used only for
the purposes described

Conventions
Warning
A warning describes a critical procedure that must be followed to prevent a safety risk or
equipment damage.

CAUTION
A caution describes a procedure that must be followed to prevent equipment malfunction.

Note
A note is a procedure, condition, or statement that will help you understand and operate
your system.
 Overview
D800001X312 April 2021

1 Overview
This chapter provides general information on the DeltaV system hardware. Refer to the
appendices for specifications and guidelines.

1.1 The DeltaV System

The DeltaV automation system consists of the following components:
• One or more I/O subsystems that process information from field devices
• One or more controllers that perform local control and manage data and
communications between the I/O subsystem and the Control Network
• Power supplies
• One or more workstations that provide a graphical user interface to the process
• A Control Network that provides communication between system nodes
Figure 1-1 shows an overview diagram of the DeltaV system.

Figure 1-1: DeltaV System Overview Diagram

1.2 DeltaV System Equipment

The DeltaV system uses DIN rail-mounted interconnecting carriers and components that
are designed for installation in an enclosure. The carriers provide power and
communication connections. The I/O subsystem and the controllers are modular; they
simply plug onto the carriers for installation. DeltaV system equipment consists of:

15
Overview
April 2021 D800001X312

• Power Controller Carriers and I/O Interface Carriers that mount horizontally or
vertically on DIN rails. The number in the carrier name (such as 8-wide I/O interface
carrier) refers to the number of slots available for connecting the equipment to the
carrier.
• LocalBus that consists of an internal power bus on the Power Controller Carrier, busses
on the associated I/O interface carriers, and connecting cables. The LocalBus supplies
power to the controller and the I/O subsystem and provides communications
connections between cards. System power (12 VDC) can be shared along the length of
the LocalBus. The length of the LocalBus, including all cabling, cannot exceed 6.5 m
(21.3 ft.). The LocalBus at this length can support eight, 8-wide carriers; two, 2-wide
carriers; and, three carrier extenders. The length requirement is the same for vertically
mounted systems.

Figure 1-2: LocalBus

• DeltaV I/O subsystem that includes I/O terminal blocks and I/O cards. Terminal blocks
snap onto the I/O interface carrier to provide screw terminations for field wiring. I/O
cards snap over the I/O terminal block on the carrier and convert field signals to a
digital format for control and communications. You can install the I/O terminal blocks
and connect field wiring before installing the other devices, thus reducing installation
and maintenance costs. Many of the DeltaV Series 2 cards support redundancy. Series
2, redundant capable cards are configured, autosensed, upgraded, and operated just
like the pre-Series 2 cards. Series 2 simplex cards can function as drop-in replacements
for pre-Series 2 simplex cards of the same type.
• DeltaV Controller that performs local control and manages communication between
the I/O subsystem and the Control Network. It mounts on the right slot of the 2-wide
Power Controller carrier for horizontal installations and to the right of a power supply

16
 Overview
D800001X312 April 2021

on the 4-wide Power Controller carrier for vertical installations for M-series carriers. You
can add an additional controller for controller redundancy.
• DeltaV system power. The DeltaV system supports a system power supply (AC/DC)
and a system power supply (Dual DC/DC) as well as an Intrinsically Safe system power
supply.
• DeltaV Workstations that provide graphical user interfaces to help you configure your
system, perform extensive diagnostic checks, operate your process, and gather
reporting and historical data. The DeltaV System Identifier, shipped in your License
Pack, is a connector that plugs into the Universal Serial Bus (USB) on your
ProfessionalPLUS workstation. It gives each DeltaV system a unique identification that
allows you to install or download changes to the system. The system identifier is not
required for the system to continue running or to restart the system after it has been
running.
• Bulk power supplies supply power to the system or to field devices. Power to the
system is isolated from power to field devices.

Related information
I/O Cards
System Power Guidelines
Workstation and Monitor Specifications
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

1.2.1 DeltaV Control Network

The Control Network is an isolated Ethernet local area network (LAN) that provides
communication between the controllers and workstations. It uses standard Ethernet hubs
and switches for communications connections. An optional 10Base-T/100Base-TX switch
can be added for networks with more than 20 controllers and 32 nodes.
The Control Network is dedicated to the DeltaV system. A separate Ethernet interface is
provided via the DeltaV ProfessionalPLUS and Application Station to connect the DeltaV
system to a plant-wide LAN. The primary way to connect a plant LAN to the DeltaV system
is through either or both the ProfessionalPLUS and Application station. The only way to run
non-DeltaV applications (other than Microsoft Excel) is through a DeltaV Application
Station.

CAUTION
Connecting unapproved non-DeltaV equipment to the DeltaV Control Network can cause
unpredictable operation of the system.

The DeltaV Control Network has been designed to be redundant for communications
reliability. The Control Network is composed of Primary and Secondary communication
channels that are implemented with separate Ethernet NIC cards as well as separate
network hubs and switches for each channel.
Note
Care must be taken when designing your network to not have large amounts of network
traffic running through the area control network across switches which are also used for

17
Overview
April 2021 D800001X312

control (for example, controllers and CIOCs). Failing to do so can result in the control
integrity being compromised causing ACN switchovers and device dropouts.

Standard Category 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable must be used for Control
Networks with distances of up to 100 meters (328 feet) between Ethernet ports. Refer to
“Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules” for cable specifications. For
distances of up 2 kilometers (6562 feet) between Ethernet ports, 19 inch rack-mounted
switches with a fiber-optic interface or small form factor switches with fiber-optic ports
can be used. Refer to “DeltaV Fiber Switches” for information on a small form factor switch
with fiber-optic ports. Be sure to specify the fiber-optic option when ordering the 19 inch
rack-mounted switch. Also, fiber-optic communication channels are preferable when:
• Possible electromagnetic noise interference might exist and standard cable does not
provide sufficient protection.
• Ground isolation and protection from near lightning strikes are required for building to
building communication links.
The following sections contain network diagrams that provide an overview of possible
network configurations for DeltaV systems. Refer to Control Network Specifications for
detailed installation diagrams and instructions including requirements for Ethernet shield
orientations, rules for connecting switches in cascade and star topologies, identification of
fiber-optic and twisted pair cable connectors, switch configuration, and other important
installation requirements.
If your DeltaV system consists of one workstation and one controller only, you can connect
the DeltaV network without using a hub. The cable must be routed directly from the
workstation to the controller. Figure 1-3 shows an example of a no hub system. Refer to
Control Network Specifications for the cable pinouts in a no hub system.

Figure 1-3: No Hub System Example

Note
The no-hub cable is for systems with no Control Network Hub. Its wiring is different from
that of the standard Ethernet cables used with DeltaV Control Network Hubs.

18
 Overview
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure 1-4: Control Network Example (2 nodes)

Figure 1-5: Control Network Example (8 nodes)

Related information
Control Network Specifications
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules
DeltaV Fiber Switches

19
Overview
April 2021 D800001X312

1.2.2 DeltaV Remote Network

The DeltaV Remote Network is an Ethernet 10/100BaseT local area network (LAN) that
provides communications between remote workstations and the DeltaV system. The
DeltaV Remote Network can be a dedicated LAN that contains only DeltaV remote
workstations, or it can be the plant-wide LAN that contains other personal computers or
ethernet devices such as printers. A DeltaV Remote Network uses one or more Ethernet
switches for communications connections. A router must be used to minimize network
traffic between the plant-wide LAN and the DeltaV system.
The DeltaV Remote Network is connected to the DeltaV system through a DeltaV
Application Station or the ProfessionalPLUS workstation running DeltaV Remote Access
Services (RAS) server. To support the engineering applications and the DeltaV Guardian
application on remote workstations and to upload displays from any workstation, the
remote network must also be connected to the ProfessionalPLUS workstation. To support
accessing batch data or to control batches from any workstation, the remote network
must also be connected to the Application station.
Note
The Application Station and ProfessionalPLUS nodes are not automatically designated as
remote servers during the installation process. If you enable remote network redundancy
for your remote nodes when you configure the workstation in DeltaV Explorer, you must
also enable remote network redundancy (in DeltaV Explorer) for the ProfessionalPLUS and
any of the Application Station nodes that are connected to the remote network. If remote
network redundancy is not enabled, you will be unable to view the data remotely if the
Primary network connection is lost.

The DeltaV Remote Network can be simplex or redundant. Additional Ethernet interface
cards, separate from the control network interfaces, can be added to the Application
Station and ProfessionalPLUS workstations to support the DeltaV Remote Network.
The wiring and installation for the remote network should follow the same guidelines as
the control network.
The remote network is also designed to support various network connectivity options,
such as Microwave or leased line type connections as well as standard direct LAN
connections. When using a slow network link option, remote workstations can be
connected through a Remote Application Station. The Remote Application Station is
connected through an Application Station on the DeltaV Control Network. This type of
connection increases communication performance through the slow network link.
There are many possible remote network layouts for various system sizes and connection
options. Figure 1-6 shows a remote network dedicated to the DeltaV system. Both the
Application Station and the ProfessionalPLUS workstation are functioning as RAS servers.

20
 Overview
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure 1-6: Dedicated Remote Network

Remote operator station Remote operator station Remote operator station

Primary
remote Secondary
network remote
network

Cisco 2950 Cisco 2950

twisted pair switch twisted pair switch

Operator Operator
Primary
Pro Plus station station App station
control
network Secondary
control
network
Cisco 2950 Cisco 2950
twisted pair switch twisted pair switch

Figure 1-7 shows the use of a router to minimize network traffic between the DeltaV
system and a remote plant LAN. Both the Application Station and the ProfessionalPLUS
workstation are functioning as RAS servers.

21
Overview
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure 1-7: Remote Plant-Wide LAN Connected to a DeltaV System

Remote Remote
operator operator
station station
Plant LAN

Cisco 2950
twisted pair switch

Router
Cisco 2950
twisted pair switch

Primary Operator Operator

control Pro Plus station station App station
network

Cisco 2950 Cisco 2950

twisted pair switch twisted pair switch

Secondary
control network

Related information
Control Network Specifications
Wiring Guidelines

22
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

2 Installing Your DeltaV System

This chapter provides detailed instructions and diagrams for system installation. It
includes recommendations for planning the installation and provides a brief overview of
the steps required for system installation.
This chapter describes installations that are mounted vertically on horizontal carriers.
For Class I Division 2 installations, refer to the document DeltaV Scalable Process System,
Class I Division 2 Installation Instructions, (12P1293) on the DeltaV Documentation Library
DVD.
For Zone 2 installations, refer to the document DeltaV Scalable Process System, Zone 2
Installation Instructions, (12P2046) on the DeltaV Documentation Library DVD.
For NAMUR NE 21 installations, refer to the document DeltaV Digital Automation System
Namur NE 21 Installation Instructions, (12P2822) on the DeltaV Documentation Library
DVD.
For Marine Certified DeltaV installations, refer to the following installation requirements.
These requirements allow the DeltaV system to support the reduced EMC interference
requirements at the Marine Navigation Frequencies. Marine certification is approved for
24 V powered systems only. For additional requirements and for a list of the specific
DeltaV equipment that is approved for marine installation, refer to the specific certifying
agency.
For all exposed deck locations:
• Install the DeltaV system in an IP66/NEMA 4 enclosure with EMC-reduction shielding
(15 dB minimum) such as the Stahl Series 8125/8126 enclosures. The Stahl Series
8125/8126 enclosures are Emerson Alliance Program products.
• The door of the enclosure must remain closed during normal operation. Opening the
door defeats EMC-reduction shielding and protection from electrostatic discharge.
Open the door only for maintenance and repair performed by certified, trained
personnel.
• Include an EMC power line filter such as a Tyco S series or equivalent on all DC input
leads at the DeltaV system's enclosure with the filter grounded at the enclosure.
For non-exposed deck locations:
• Install the DeltaV system in an enclosure suitable for your environment with EMC-
reduction shielding (15 dB minimum).
• The door of the enclosure must remain closed during normal operation. Opening the
door defeats EMC-reduction shielding and protection from electrostatic discharge.
Open the door only for maintenance and repair performed by certified, trained
personnel.
• Include an EMC power line filter such as a Tyco S Series or equivalent on all DC input
leads at the DeltaV system's enclosure with the filter grounded at the enclosure.
Note
All electrical installations must conform to applicable federal, state, and local codes and
regulations. All installation and maintenance procedures described in this document must

23
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

be performed by qualified personnel and all equipment must be used only for the
purposes described. If the equipment is used in a manner not specified, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.

Related information
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

2.1 CE Statement
Note
This manual describes installation and maintenance procedures for products that have
been tested to be in compliance with appropriate CE directives. To maintain compliance,
these products must be installed and maintained according to the procedures described in
this document. Failure to follow the procedures may compromise compliance.

2.2 China RoHS

DeltaV products manufactured on or after 1 July 2016 and shipped by Emerson into China
will be China RoHS compliant. For more information, refer to the following URL:
http://www2.emersonprocess.com/en-US/brands/deltav/documentation/Pages/Product-
Certificates.aspx

2.3 Important Information about Hazardous Live

Voltages
Warning
The AC input and output I/O cards and carriers may have hazardous live voltages present
on the input or output terminals. These devices switch or sense the presence of 120 VAC
or 250 VAC field power. Ensure that proper safety precautions, such as de-energizing field
power, are observed during installation, maintenance, or any time wiring changes are
made to any of the following devices:
• KJ4001X1-BE1: 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier
• KJ4002X1-BA1 and BB1: Left and Right 8-Wide Legacy Vertical Carriers
• KJ4003X1- BA1 and BB1: Left and Right VerticalPLUS Carriers
• KJ3207X1: Series 2 AC input Cards
• KJ3209X1 and KJ3210X1: Series 2 AC output cards
• KJ4001X1-CA1: I/O Terminal Block
• KJ4001X1-CB1: Fused I/O Terminal block

2.4 Installation Planning

The appendices in this manual contain reference information to help you plan system
installation.

24
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

• Appendix A Environmental Specifications

• Appendix B Carrier Specifications
• Appendix C Interface Specifications
• Appendix D Controller Specifications
• Appendix E System Power Supply Specifications
• Appendix F Workstation and Server Specifications
• Appendix G Control Network Specifications
• Appendix H Bulk Power Supply Specifications
• Appendix I Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
• Appendix J System Power Guidelines
• Appendix K Bussed Field Power Guidelines
• Appendix L Controller Redundancy
• Appendix M DeltaV Vertical Carriers
• Appendix N Installation Worksheets
• Appendix O Intrinsically Safe I/O

2.4.1 Tools Required for Installation

You need the following tools to install a DeltaV system:
• Standard electrical tools (voltmeter, wire cutter, wire stripper, pliers, screwdriver)
• Standard installation tools (screwdrivers, drill with standard bits)
• Ethernet cable tools (crimper, cable tester)
Please see the workstation instructions for information on the tools needed to install the
workstation and its peripherals.

2.4.2 Site Preparation

Properly designed and installed power distribution, ground networks, and signal wiring are
part of site preparation and are extremely important for optimum DeltaV system
operation. Even the best control system can only perform as well as the electrical
foundation on which it is built. Clean input power, single-point grounding, and adequate
shielding from outside electrical interference are a must.
Power distribution, ground networks, and signal wiring should be installed before the
system is installed. Use the manual, DeltaV Power and Grounding, as your resource for
proper site preparation.
Note
Some images in this manual show bullet style wiring connections. This style is used for
reference only and splicing wires into wires to emulate bullet connections is never
recommended by Emerson. Always use terminal-to-terminal wiring.

25
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

2.4.3 Wiring Guidelines

The power and grounding terminals and field termination points on the I/O subsystem and
the system power supplies are designed to accept 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) stranded or solid
wire. To select wire, calculate the maximum current limit expected for each wire. Local
electrical codes define the wire size required for a specific current.
Shielded twisted pair wiring is recommended for low-level signal wiring to reduce
susceptibility to noise. You can order an I/O carrier with a shield bar (to terminate the
shields from field wiring) or without a shield bar (where termination is not necessary).

2.4.4 Power Guidelines

The removable connectors on the System Power Supplies and legacy Bulk Power Supplies
are not designed to interrupt current flow in circuits under load and can be damaged if
used for this purpose. If you need to disconnect power, use a separate component such as
a knife blade fuse terminal block or breaker that is designed for this purpose. Multiple
manufacturers make knife blade fuse terminal blocks that provide a disconnect function
and fusing for the supply. If you use a fuse or breaker in the disconnect circuit, size it
appropriately for the load.

2.4.5 Torque Limits

When you install the DIN rails and DeltaV equipment, do not exceed the maximum torque
limits for the mounting screws.
Table 2-1: Maximum Torque Limits on Mounting Screws
Item Torque Limit on Mounting Screw(s)
Bulk power supply 2.84 Nm (25 in- 2.84 Nm (25 in-lb)
lb)
DIN rail latching 1.32 Nm (12 in-lb)
DIN rail stop 0.9 Nm (8 in-lb)
I/O terminal block field terminations 0.45 Nm (4 in-lb)
I/O terminal block protection cover 0.11 Nm (1 in-lb)
I/O card 0.11 Nm (1 in-lb)
Controller 0.11 Nm (1 in-lb)
Media Converter 0.11 Nm (1 in-lb)
System Power Supply 0.11 Nm (1 in-lb)

2.4.6 Getting Started with DeltaV Hardware

This section provides a brief description of the steps required for system installation.
Specific information on installation steps 1–7 is included in this chapter. Specific
information on step 8 is included in the topic "Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your
DeltaV System". The appendices in this manual include product specifications and detailed
information.

26
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

The following steps for installation are listed in the most common order. You can elect to
perform these steps in another order that is more convenient for your project.

CAUTION
The DeltaV I/O Cards and Controller must be mounted vertically on the horizontal carrier
for cooling purposes.

1. Install the DIN rails and DeltaV Carriers.

a) Install the DIN rails.
b) Install the power/controller carrier and I/O interface carrier on the DIN rails.

2. Install the DeltaV I/O Interface.

a) Check the key settings on the I/O terminal blocks and install them on the I/O
interface carrier.
b) Connect field wiring.
c) Install the I/O cards on the I/O interface carrier.

3. Install the DeltaV Controller.

a) Install the controller on the power/controller carrier.

4. Install the DeltaV System Power Supply.

a) Install the system power supply on the power/controller carrier.
b) Connect the supply inputs.

5. Install the DeltaV Workstation and Servers.

a) Follow the instructions supplied with your workstation and Server.
b) Install the system identifier.
c) Follow the instructions supplied with your printer and UPS

6. Set up the DeltaV Control Network.

a) Install the hub or switch.
b) Install the network cables between nodes.

7. Connect power to the system and power up.

a) Install the bulk power supply and connect the supply inputs.
b) Power up the system.

8. Check out the installation.

a) Check cable connections.
b) Check power supply voltages.
c) Check indicators on the devices and cards.
d) Test field wiring connections.

27
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

9. Read the manual Getting Started with your DeltaV Digital Automation System for
information on the software applications for the DeltaV system.

Related information
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
System Power Guidelines
Installing Your DeltaV System

2.5 Installing the System

The DeltaV system is designed for installation in an enclosure suitable for the location in
which the equipment is installed.
The following sections describe how to:
• Install the DIN rails and carriers
• Connect bussed field power
• Install the DeltaV I/O interface, Controller, System Power Supply, and Workstations
• Setup the DeltaV Control Network
• Connect power to the system
• Setup the DeltaV Remote Network
• Setup a Network Time Server

2.5.1 Installing the DIN Rails and Carriers

The power/controller carriers and 8-wide I/O interface carriers install on standard 35 mm
(1.38 in.) T- or G-type DIN rails. If you use T-type rails, use the heavier (15mm-deep) rails
because they better accommodate the weight distribution of DeltaV equipment. The
optional carrier shield bar provides a connection point for field shield wires for the I/O
interface carrier. You cannot connect a vertical carrier to a horizontal carrier or a horizontal
carrier to a vertical carrier. You must choose one carrier configuration. Refer to Appendix
M DeltaV Vertical Carriers for information on installing vertical DIN rails and carriers.

CAUTION
The DeltaV I/O Cards and Controller must be installed vertically on the horizontal carrier
for cooling purposes.

Related information
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

2.5.2 DIN Rail Recommendations

Figure 2-1 shows suggested spacing for DIN rail installation on your mounting surface. To
avoid clearance problems with the heads of mounting screws, avoid using screws at the
following locations, as shown in Figure 2-2

28
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

• An area 1.3 cm (0.5 in.) wide, centered 4.5 cm (1.75 in.) from the left side of a 2-wide
power/controller carrier.
• An area 1.3 cm (0.5 in.) wide, centered 8.3 cm (3.25 in.) from either side of an 8-wide
I/O interface carrier.
If more than one carrier is needed, connect carriers end-to-end on one rail or stack them
on separate rails by using a DeltaV LocalBus Cable.

Figure 2-1: DIN Rail Installation

Figure 2-2: Screw Clearance Guidelines for DIN Rail Mounting

29
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Related information
Carrier Specifications

2.5.3 Installing the 2-Wide Power Controller Carrier

To install the 2-wide power/controller carrier
Refer to Figure 2-3.
1. Install the DIN rail at the appropriate location.
2. Connect each power/controller carrier to any adjacent carriers by sliding the 48-pin
connectors on the sides of the carriers together.
3. Turn the screws counter-clockwise on the power/controller carrier to disengage the
latch. Place the carrier on the rail and tighten the screws clockwise to latch.
Note
The middle two screws are for G-rail mounting and the upper and lower screws are
for T-rail mounting.

Figure 2-3: 2-Wide Power/Controller Carrier Installation

Note
2-wide carriers should be installed to the left of any 8-wide carriers.

30
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

2.5.4 Installing the I/O Interface Carrier

Figure 2-4: I/O Interface Carrier Installation

1. Install the DIN rail at the appropriate location.

2. Connect each I/O interface carrier to any adjacent carriers by sliding together the
48-pin connectors on the sides of the carriers.
3. Turn the screws counter-clockwise on the I/O interface carrier to disengage the
latch. Place the carrier on the rail and tighten the screws clockwise to latch. The
middle two screws are for G-rail mounting and the upper and lower screws are for T-
rail mounting.
4. If you are installing I/O interface carriers on separate rails, connect them with the
LocalBus cable from the 48-pin connector on the right side of one carrier to the 48-
pin connector on the left side of the next carrier.
5. Install the carrier ground wiring as shown in Figure J-20.

2.5.5 Connecting Bussed Field Power

The carrier type determines how bussed field power is provided. The bussed field power
connectors on the horizontal and Legacy Vertical carriers differ from those on the
VerticalPLUS carriers. The following section explains how to connect bussed field power to
the three carrier types. Refer to Appendix M for additional information on vertical carriers.

Horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers

Each pair of slots on the Legacy Vertical and horizontal I/O carriers have four screw
terminals for bussed field power. Two of the terminals are for the supply connection and
two of the terminals are for the supply return connection.

31
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Each bussed field power connection routes power to two adjacent I/O cards. You can use a
different bulk power supply for each bussed field power connection or you can extend
power to another pair of I/O cards.
The bussed field power connection provides power to two adjacent I/O cards to power
field devices. Cards 1 and 2 are paired together and must use the same field voltage level.
Similarly, cards 3 and 4 must use the same field voltage level, although this level can be
different from cards 1 and 2.

VerticalPLUS Carriers
Each slot on the VerticalPLUS carrier has four screw terminals for bussed field power. Two
of the terminals are for the + field power connection and two of the terminals are for the -
field power connection. Refer to "Extending Bussed Field Power to VerticalPLUS Carriers"
for the bussed field power terminal assignments.
Each bussed field power connection routes power to one slot. You can use a different
power source for each bussed field power connection or you can extend power to another
slot. Jumpers are pre installed at the factory to extend field power to slots 1-4. With these
jumpers installed, the I/O cards installed in slots 1-4 must use the same field voltage level.
Similarly, slots 5-8 have jumpers pre installed at the factory to extend field power to slots
5-8 and the I/O cards installed in slots 5-8 must use the same field voltage level. It is
recommended that you use a separate power feed to each field power connector. A field
power connector is the connector that connects to a bank of four I/O cards.

CAUTION
Ensure that the bussed field power connection to each carrier slot is correct for the card
being installed in the slot. Card damage can result if there is a mismatch between the field
power voltage at the carrier slot and the card installed in the slot.

Related information
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Extending Bussed Field Power to VerticalPLUS Carriers

2.5.6 Extending Bussed Field Power

Note
The decision to extend bussed field power depends on plant standards and procedures.
However, if separate power supplies, breakers, or shutdown switches are required, it is not
recommended that bussed field power be extended.

For all carrier types, supply the same voltage at bussed field power to all cards on a carrier
whenever possible. Supply clean bussed field power to the I/O carriers and use inductive
noise reduction techniques on I/O signals. Refer to Appendix K for bussed field power
guidelines.
Warning
If more than one bussed power source is used, place a label near the bussed field power
connectors containing the following English and French statements: “WARNING: MORE
THAN ONE LIVE CIRCUIT. SEE INSTALLATION DIAGRAM.” “AVERTISSEMENT: CÉT
EQUIPMENT RENFERME PLUSIEURS CICUITS SOUS TENSION. VOIR LE SCHÉMA
D’INSTALLATION”.

32
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Extending Bussed Field Power to Horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers

This section explains how to extend bussed field power to the horizontal and Legacy
Vertical carriers. For VerticalPLUS carriers, refer to the “Extending Bussed Field Power to
VerticalPLUS Carriers” topic.
Bussed field power can be extended to horizontal carriers and Legacy Vertical carriers if the
addition of the next two I/O cards does not exceed the 6.5 A rating of the connection to
the source. Figure 2-5 shows the screw terminal assignments on the bussed field power
connector on horizontal and Legacy Vertical carriers.
Warning
For Legacy Vertical and horizontal carriers, field power for one I/O card can be extended to
additional pairs of I/O cards only if they have the same field voltage requirements.

Warning
If extending bussed field power to Legacy Vertical and horizontal carriers, removing the
connector will remove power from all extended connectors.

Figure 2-5: Bussed Field Power Connector on Horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers

Keys supplied with the two-part connector on the horizontal and Legacy Vertical carriers
prevent damage to the cards if an incorrect power source is connected after the cards are
installed. Install the keys in each field power connector based on the power source you
connect to that connector. Because bussed field power can be supplied separately to each
half of a connector, make sure you install keys in each side. As an example, Figure 2-6
shows bussed field power keying connections for horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers
for 120 VAC only.

33
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure 2-6: Bussed Field Power Keying Connections for 120 VAC Only

You can set up any standard that meets your needs for the keying scheme. Figure 2-7
shows an example keying scheme.

Figure 2-7: Bussed Field Power Keying Scheme Example for Horizontal and Legacy
Vertical Carriers

Note
This connector can be used for both DC and AC power.

34
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Wire the bulk power supply for bussed field power

The following information pertains to horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers. For
VerticalPLUS carriers refer to Appendix M.
• If the bussed field power supplies one pair of I/O cards only and is not extended to
additional I/O cards, connect wiring to the assigned screw terminal connection on the
top of the I/O interface carrier as shown in Figure 2-8.
Note
You might prefer to remove the screw terminal connector to install wiring and replace
it on the I/O interface carrier after wiring is installed.

Figure 2-8: Bussed Field Power Wiring Diagram

• If the bussed field power is extended to additional I/O cards, connect wiring to the
assigned screw terminal connection on the top of the I/O interface carrier as shown in
Figure 2-9.
Warning
When power is extended, removing the connector will break the connection between the
power supply and downstream devices.

Figure 2-9: Bussed Field Power Wiring Diagram (Extended Power)

Refer to Appendix J for power supply overviews.

Related information
Extending Bussed Field Power to VerticalPLUS Carriers
Bussed Field Power Guidelines

35
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

2.5.7 Installing Extender Cables

This section applies to horizontal and Legacy Vertical carriers. For VerticalPLUS carriers,
refer to “Extending LocalBus Power to Other Carriers.”
When carriers are installed on separate DIN rails, extender cables are used to extend
LocalBus power. Extender cables connect to one-wide carriers on the left and right sides of
the 2-wide, 4-wide, and 8-wide carriers.
Note
The 4-wide and 8-wide carriers must be left-aligned when using extender cables.

A standard installation uses one extender cable; however, dual extender cables can also be
used. The following procedure is for a standard installation that uses one carrier extender
cable.
To install carrier extender cables
1. Install the right and left-side one-wide extender cable carriers by sliding together
the 48-pin connectors on the sides of the carriers.
2. Connect the 44-pin D-shell (male) connector on the extender cable to the top D-
shell connector labeled A on the right-side carrier and fasten the retainer screws.
3. Connect the 44-pin D-shell connector on the other end of the cable to the top D-
shell connector labeled A on the left-side carrier and fasten the retainer screws.

Related information
Extending LocalBus Power to Other Carriers

2.5.8 Installing the DeltaV I/O Interface

To install the I/O interface, install the I/O terminal blocks on the I/O interface carrier and
connect field wiring to the I/O terminal blocks. Next, install the I/O cards on the I/O
interface carrier. The steps for installing both simplex and redundant terminal blocks are
discussed in the following procedures.

Related information
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Interface Specifications

Installing an I/O Terminal Block

1. Check the key settings on the corresponding I/O card, and set the keys on the I/O
terminal block to match.
2. Locate the assigned slot location on the I/O interface carrier. Place the tabs on the
back of the I/O terminal block through the slots on the carrier and push the I/O
terminal block up to lock it into place as shown in the following figure.

36
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure 2-10: I/O Terminal Block Installation

3. Connect field wiring for the I/O terminal block as shown in Figure 2-11 or in the I/O
card wiring diagrams in the "Interface Specifications" section.
Note
Field wiring connections are specific to the I/O card type associated with the I/O
terminal block.

Figure 2-11: I/O Terminal Block Channel Assignments

37
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Note
The channel assignments in the preceding image pertain to the I/O terminal block,
the fused I/O terminal block, and the 4-wire terminal block.

Related information
I/O Interface Keying
Interface Specifications

Installing an I/O Card

Warning
Before installing a card in a carrier slot, ensure that the bussed field power voltage at the
slot matches the field power requirements for the card. Card damage can result during
installation if there is a mismatch between the field power voltage at a carrier slot and the
card installed in the slot.

Refer to Figure 2-12.

1. Locate the assigned slot on the I/O interface carrier.
Warning
I/O cards are designed to be installed on terminal blocks. If you temporarily install a
card on the carrier without a terminal block, be sure to carefully align the pins on
the card with the connector on the carrier to prevent damage to the pins.

2. Align the connectors on the I/O card with the connectors on the I/O carrier and the
I/O terminal block and push to attach
3. Tighten the mounting screw.

Figure 2-12: I/O Card Installation

Installing a Redundant Terminal Block

Read the information in “DeltaV Series 2 I/O” before installing a redundant terminal block.

38
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

1. Check the key settings on the corresponding Series 2 cards and set the keys on the
terminal block to match. Refer to “I/O Interface Keying” for information on key
settings.
2. Locate the assigned slot location on the I/O interface carrier. Remember that the
lower slot number must be odd and the upper slot number must be the next higher
even number. Place the tabs on the back of the I/O terminal block through the slots
on the carrier and push the I/O terminal block up to lock it into place.
3. Connect the field wiring for the redundant I/O terminal blocks as shown in the
Series 2 card wiring diagrams and redundant terminal block figures in the "Interface
Specifications" section.

Related information
I/O Interface Keying
Interface Specifications
DeltaV Series 2 I/O

Installing a Redundant I/O Card

A redundant I/O card consists of two Series 2 cards installed in a redundant terminal block.
Read “DeltaV Series 2 I/O” before installing a redundant I/O card.
1. Locate the assigned slots on the I/O interface carrier.
2. Align the connectors on the I/O card with the connectors on the I/O carrier and the
redundant I/O terminal block and push to attach.
3. Tighten the mounting screws.

Related information
DeltaV Series 2 I/O

2.5.9 Installing the DeltaV Controller

For simplex controller systems, the controller mounts on the right slot of the 2-wide
power/controller carrier.
Note
Refer to the DeltaV Power and Grounding manual for information on proper configuration
of an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to back up the controller power during short-
term power outages. The UPS allows the controller to continue operating and to maintain
current process data even when AC main power is down. Refer to the UPS manufacturer’s
specifications for all other UPS information.

1. Align the connectors on the back of the controller with the connectors on the right
slot of the 2-wide power/controller carrier and push to attach.
2. Tighten the mounting screw.

39
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure 2-13: Controller Installation

Related information
Controller Specifications
Controller Redundancy

2.5.10 Installing the DeltaV System Power Supply

The system power supply takes line power or power from a bulk power supply and
converts it to 12 VDC power to drive the controller and I/O cards. The system power
supply mounts on either slot of the 2-wide power/controller carrier. For mounting on a 4-
wide power/controller carrier refer to Appendix M DeltaV Vertical Carriers.
This section describes the connections for a simplex system power supply. Refer to
Appendix E System Power Supply Specifications for system power supply specifications
and for details on redundancy.
Refer to the figures following the steps for more information.
1. Connect the input supply wires to the input power connection on the top of the
system power supply. Figure 2-15 shows input supply wiring for the system power
supply (AC/DC). Figure 2-14 shows the input supply wiring for the system power
supply (Dual DC/DC). If you have secondary system power supplies, connect the
input supply drops to each system power supply as shown in Appendix E System
Power Supply Specifications.

40
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Warning
Always remove input power to the supply before connecting or disconnecting the
input power connection. The connector should not interrupt current flow and could
be damaged if actuated under a load condition. Refer to Appendix J Power
Guidelines for more information.

Figure 2-14: Simplex Wiring Diagram for System Power Supply (AC/DC)
Terminal
Strip
Top View

Carrier
Terminal
Block
Protective Earth
From AC
Power Neutral
Distribution Line

AC-to-DC
System
Power
Supply

To DC Ground Bus
in Enclosure

41
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure 2-15: Redundant Wiring Diagram for System Power Supply (AC/DC)
Terminal Strip
Top View

Carrier

Protective Earth

Neutral

Line
Terminal
Block

G N L G N L
DC
From AC From AC Return
Power Power Reference
Distribution Distribution Ground
1 1

Secondary AC Primary AC to
to DC System DC System To DC Gnd Bus
Power Supply Power Supply in enclosure

Notes:
1 Use separate terminal blocks as shown. Then, for optimum power redundancy, connect each system
power supply to separate power disconnect panels, powered by separate isolation transformers.
2 Use the left-hand terminal screw only. Only one ground wire is necessary because the return side of
both DC power supplies is internally connected to the ground terminal of either terminal strip.

Note
If you are using a Two-Wide Power Carrier and redundant AC-to-DC power supplies,
connect only one of the power supplies to protective earth.

Refer to Appendix J Power Guidelines for power supply and grounding overviews.

42
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure 2-16: Simplex Wiring Diagram for System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
Terminal Strip
Top View
Carrier
DIN rail mounted
DC Power Bus (+) Fuse
Block

12 VDC 12 VDC
From DC/DC 12 VDC Return
Power Supply 2 1 (Ground)
or AC/DC Bulk
Power Supply 12 VDC
Return

DIN rail mounted

DC Return Bus (−)

Dual DC/DC
System Power
Supply

Notes:
1 A fuse block and fuse are optional. If you are providing DC power to several DC/DC
passthrough system power supplies by the same bulk power supply, fuse the line to
each supply. .
2 Always use pre-formed metal shorting bars to ensure a good connection. Do not use individual
jumper wires.

Note
Do not connect the ground terminal on the power carrier when powering the dual
DC/DC system power supply from a 12 VDC supply.

2. Install alarm contact wiring as shown in the following figure.

Figure 2-17: System Power Supply Alarm Contact Wiring (Unpowered

Condition)
Example: Optional
Alarm relay contact First system additional
normally open power supply system
(shelf condition) power supplies

+
DI 24 VDC
isolated card

24 VDC external +
power supply

43
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Note
The alarm relay contact is closed during normal operation. The alarm relay is shown
open (unpowered condition) in the following figure.

3. Align the system power supply with the connector on the 2-wide power/controller
carrier and push to attach, as shown in the following figure. Tighten the mounting
screw.

Figure 2-18: System Power Supply Installation

Related information
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
System Power Supply Specifications
Power Guidelines

2.5.11 DeltaV hardware ready for transportation

If you have performed the installation as described in this document, including mounting
the hardware in an enclosure as described, the hardware is ready for transportation.
Additional preparation measures are not recommended and may damage the hardware.

2.5.12 Installing the DeltaV Workstation

To install the DeltaV Workstation, connect the workstation components, install the DeltaV
System Identifier (one per system), install the printer (if used), and install the UPS (if used).
Connect the workstation and its associated peripherals to one power distribution and
system ground.
After hardware installation, refer to the DeltaV media pack installation pamphlet for
information on installing DeltaV software on the workstation.

44
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

To install the workstation

1. Follow the instructions supplied with your workstation to connect the monitor,
keyboard, and mouse to the central processing unit (CPU). Refer to the
documentation supplied with your workstation for details on the I/O ports
2. If the DeltaV label is not installed on your workstation monitor, apply it to the lower
right corner of the monitor faceplate.
3. Install the system identifier on the Universal Serial Bus (USB).

Figure 2-19: Workstation Installation

4. Refer to the documentation supplied with your printer for hardware installation
information.

2.5.13 Setting up the DeltaV Control Network

The standard Control Network is an isolated Ethernet local area network (LAN) that
provides communication between the controllers and workstations. It uses one or more
Ethernet hubs or switches for communications connections. The Control Network is
dedicated to the DeltaV system; no other devices can be attached. A separate Ethernet
interface is provided through the DeltaV Application Station or ProfessionalPLUS to
connect the DeltaV system to a plant-wide LAN. To minimize the traffic on the plant-wide
LAN, configure a router to filter the IP addresses. Refer to the DeltaV Books Online for
more information on configuring a router.
This section provides basic hub installation examples and includes cable-specific
information and requirements for installing the Control Network. The "Control Network
Specifications" section provides details on cable shield orientations and contains diagrams
that show switches connected in cascade and star topologies, fiber-optic and twisted pair
cable connections, and switch configuration.
To set up the Control Network, install the hub and connect network communication
cables between nodes (controllers and workstations). The hubs can stand alone or can be
linked (cascaded) to other hubs. Each hub is equivalent to a single IEEE 802.3 repeater (1
hop). The number of hops that are allowed and the maximum distance between each hop
varies with the type of hub and whether the link is 10Mbit or 100Mbit. 10Mbit links allow
four hops and 100Mbit links allow two hops.

45
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

If your DeltaV system consists of one workstation and one controller only, you can connect
the DeltaV network without using a hub. The cable must be routed directly from the
workstation to the controller. Figure 2-20 shows an example of a no hub system.

Figure 2-20: No Hub System Example

Note
No-hub cable, also called crossover cable, is for systems with no Control Network Hub. Its
wiring is different from that of the straight-through Ethernet cables used with DeltaV
Control Network Hubs.

Related information
Control Network Specifications

Control Network Installation Requirements

The Control Network installer must ensure that the following requirements are met:
• All Cat5-Twisted Pair (TP) and fiber-optic cables should be made, installed, and tested
by an experienced LAN installer.
• A DeltaV system can have a maximum of four repeater hops on the Control Network (a
maximum of four hubs can be linked together in series). 10Mbit networks allow four
repeater hops and 100Mbit networks allow two repeater hops.
• For Cat5 TP cables be sure that:
— All cables are made from screened Category 5 cable with a maximum length of 100
m (328 ft) and an insulated conductor diameter of 0.89 to 0.99 mm (0.035 to 0.040
in).
— Straight-through cables are terminated with RJ45 connectors to EIA/TIA 568B pin-
outs at both ends.
— Crossover cables are terminated with RJ45 connectors to 568B pinouts on one end
and 568A pinouts on the opposite end.
— Cables used to cascade hubs and switches have an unshielded connector on one
end and a shielded connector on the opposite end.
— Unshielded RJ45 connectors are used at all workstation connections.
— Shielded RJ45 connectors are used at all controller connections and all hub and
switch connections to nodes.
— All cables are tested with the Microtest PentaScannerTM testing tool.
— Ethernet wall outlets, punchdown blocks, and patch panels are not supported.

46
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Fiber-Optic Cables
For fiber-optic cables, use the cable and connector type specified by the equipment
manufacturer for the fiber-optic ports on their equipment. The type of fiber-optic cable
required could be multimode or single-mode and depends on the equipment's port
specifications, the site's physical layout, and the distance between fiber-optic ports from
device to device. The equipment manufacturer also specifies a fiber-optic loss budget. The
acceptable loss per kilometer for the fiber-optic cable can be determined from the loss
budget so that the overall cable loss does not exceed the equipment’s loss budget. The
loss budget must include all fiber-optic splices and fiber-optic connector losses from end
to end. The following list provides some guidelines for using fiber-optic cable:
• A multimode fiber-optic cable is generally used for 100MB/S 100BASE-FX fiber-optic
communications for up to 2 Kilometers and either 50/125 micron or 62.5/125 micron
multimode fiber can be used depending upon the equipment manufacturer’s
specification for the fiber-optic ports. Refer to the manufacturer's specifications for
cable type and loss budget.
• A single-mode fiber-optic cable is generally used for 1000MB/S 1000BASE-LX/LH
(gigabit) fiber-optic communications for distances beyond 2 Kilometers and 9/125
micron single-mode fiber can be used depending upon the equipment manufacturer’s
specification for the fiber-optic ports. Refer to the manufacturer's specifications for
cable type and loss budget.
• A multimode fiber-optic cable is generally used for 1000MB/S 1000BASE-SX (gigabit)
fiber-optic communications for distances up to approximately 500 meters and 50/125
micron or 62.5/125 micron multimode fiber can be used depending upon the
equipment manufacturer’s specification for the fiber-optic ports. Refer to the
manufacturer's specifications for cable type and loss budget.
• Multimode fiber-optic cable has a Modal Bandwidth specification (MHz/km) which is a
distance limiting factor for gigabit communications on multimode fiber. Refer to the
manufacturer's specifications for distances supported for gigabit communications over
multimode fiber.
• Fiber-optic cables are terminated with ST, SC, MTRJ, or LC connectors depending upon
the physical port that is used on the fiber-optic device. Refer to the manufacturer's
specifications for the fiber-optic port type used on their equipment.
• All fiber-optic links should be tested for attenuation (light loss) with an optical power
meter. The entire link, including all assembled cables, connectors and splices from end
to end should be measured. This measurement should not exceed the equipment
manufacturer's loss budget specification and at least a 3dB margin should be left.

CAUTION
Substandard cables can create serious communication problems. Make sure all cables
meet the specifications listed in the "Control Network Specifications" section.

Related information
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies

47
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Install the Control Network Cables

1. Make and test the required Control Network cables. See the section, "Control
Network Specifications" for cable guidelines and specifications. Select the
appropriate cable type on the cable test tool and follow the detailed instructions in
the test tool’s manual.
You must connect the test equipment to both ends of the cable to test it properly.
The testing tool checks each cable based on its type and issues a Pass or Fail
reading. Make sure the cable passes each test. The tests supported by the Microtest
PentaScanner testing tool include the following:
• Cable mapping
• Length
• Crosstalk
• Attenuation
• Attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio
• Impedance
• Loop resistance
• Capacitance

CAUTION
Substandard cables can create serious communication problems. Make sure all
cables meet the specifications listed in the "Control Network Specifications" section.

2. If you have a simplex Control Network, connect the unshielded end of a network
cable to the twisted pair port on the primary Network Interface Card (NIC) and
connect the shielded end of the cable to the primary hub as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 2-21: Simplex Control Network Cable Connections

Shielded
connector

Unshielded
connector

48
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Note
For hub-to-hub connections, one end of the cable must have unshielded
connectors.

For redundant Control Networks, be sure to verify the NIC binding order to
differentiate between the primary and secondary NICs.

3. If you have a redundant Control Network, connect the unshielded end of a network
cable to the twisted pair port on the workstation’s primary NIC and connect the
shielded end of the cable to the primary hub as shown in Figure 2-22. Connect
another cable from the twisted pair port on the workstation’s secondary NIC to the
secondary hub. It is helpful to identify the Control Network cables with color-coded
boots. Emerson recommends the following conventions: a yellow color-coded boot
for the primary Control Network cable and a black color-coded boot for the
secondary Control Network cable.
Note
Make sure you are consistent in your primary and secondary network connections
so they are not crosswired.

Figure 2-22: Redundant Control Network Cable Connections

Primary switch

Shielded
connector

Primary NIC
unshielded
Secondary switch connector

Secondary NIC
unshielded connector
Shielded connector

Note
For hub-to-hub connections, one end of the cable must have unshielded connectors

4. Connect network cables from the hub(s) to the RJ45 connectors on the bottom of
each controller. The front connector is for the primary Control Network and the rear
connector is for the secondary Control Network. Refer to the following figure to
locate the connectors.

49
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure 2-23: Control Network Cable Connections for a Simplex Controller

Shielded connectors

Secondary Primary

Connecting the Control Network to a Plant LAN

A plant LAN can be connected to the DeltaV system through the third Network Interface
Card (NIC) on the Application Station to provide a gateway between the DeltaV Control
Network and other networks. It is highly recommended that you use a firewall such as the
Emerson Smart Firewall to protect the DeltaV network from potential security issues and
to help ensure reliable operations.
To improve the security of the DeltaV system, Emerson recommends that you do not
connect the DeltaV Professional, Operator, and Base workstations to a plant LAN or
gateway. Because the engineering database is on the ProfessionalPLUS station and should
be protected from possible unauthorized external access, Emerson also recommends that
you do not connect the ProfessionalPLUS station to the plant LAN.
The following image shows the recommended network architecture.

50
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure 2-24: Connecting DeltaV to other networks

DeltaV
Remote Remote
Workstations

Switch Switch

Remote Remote Network

DeltaV Remote
Workstations
Thin Clients
DeltaV
DeltaV Smart Switch
Smart Switch optional
optional Switch Switch

Switch
Level 3 Remote Network

Firewall Firewall Firewall

Emerson
Smart Firewall
recommended
DeltaV Smart Switch DeltaV Smart Switch
DeltaV Smart Switch
Thin Client
Network Level 2.5
Gigabit
recommended

DeltaV Virtual
Workstations
DeltaV
Workstations

Host

Level 2
DeltaV Smart Switch DeltaV Smart Switch
DeltaV ACN
Optional, but must
design systems using
DeltaV DeltaV CIOCs to add this later.
Controller Controller
Firewall Firewall

DeltaV Smart Switch DeltaV Smart Switch

M-Series S-Series S-Series P-Series

DeltaV DeltaV DeltaV DeltaV
Controller Controller CIOC Controller
Controller

Level 1

Field Devices
Field Devices Field Devices

Field Devices

2.5.14 Connecting Power to the System

A bulk power supply converts AC or DC power to the power required for the system power
supply and, optionally, for field devices. The method of connecting power to the DeltaV
system depends on your existing power supply, power distribution scheme, and
grounding techniques. Refer to the DeltaV Power and Grounding manual for recommended
power and grounding techniques for a DeltaV system.
The following images show the connections for a Legacy simplex bulk power supply. Refer
to Appendix H for Legacy bulk power supply specifications and dimensions.

51
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure 2-25: Simplex Power and Ground Wiring Diagram for Legacy Bulk AC to 12 or
24 VDC Power Supply
Optional Isolation Transformer
L

N Wired to plant power source

G N L
Bulk AC Power
Distribution/UPS

Bulk AC to 12 VDC
or Bulk AC to 24 VDC
Power Supply

G N L
AC Connector

Dedicated
Plant Ground
Grid Point

Isolated
Common
Ground
Reference

Wire and Connector Legend

A G Ground (AC)
B N Neutral (AC)
C L Line (AC) DC Return (Ground) 12 VDC or 24 VDC

52
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure 2-26: Simplex Power and Ground Wiring Diagram for Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12
VDC Power Supply

DC Power
Distribution
Hard Wired to

Plant Power Supply

(+) (-)

Isolated
Common
Ground 24 VDC DC Return Ground
Reference

(+)

(+)

Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC

Dedicated Plant (-)

Power Supply

Ground Grid Point

(-)

12 VDC (+)

Power Return (-)

Related information
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
System Power Guidelines
Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC

2.5.15 Setting Up the DeltaV Remote Network

Refer to “DeltaV Remote Network” for overview information and to "Control Network
Specifications" for detailed installation information. To set up the Remote Network, install
the switches for the remote network connections and connect the network
communications cables between the remote workstations and the DeltaV RAS
Applications Stations and ProfessionalPLUS workstation.
Users must assign their own PC names and IP addresses to the remote workstations before
installing DeltaV software. If the remote workstation is already on the plant-wide LAN, it
has been assigned a name and IP address that can be used for communications with the
DeltaV system. If you are building a dedicated DeltaV Remote Network, then workstation
node names and IP addresses must be assigned before the workstations are set up in the
DeltaV Explorer. These assigned node names must be used as the workstation names in

53
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

the DeltaV Explorer. Refer to the online help for the DeltaV Workstation Configuration
application for information.
Note
If the IP address of either the Remote Network or the DeltaV ACN should change, you
must run Workstation Configuration on all workstations involved in this order:
1. ProfessionalPLUS (only if a download is indicated)
2. The RAS node
3. The Remote Workstations

The cable installation requirements for the DeltaV Remote Network are the same as the
installation requirements for the DeltaV Control Network. Refer to “Control Network
Installation Requirements” for cable requirements and to "Control Network Specifications"
for detailed installation information.

Related information
Control Network Specifications
Control Network Installation Requirements
DeltaV Remote Network

2.5.16 Setting Up a Network Time Server

DeltaV supports GPS Network Time Server equipment. Consult with your Emerson
representative or sales office for current GPS specifications and requirements for use with
DeltaV systems. Refer to the documentation for the GPS network time server for
installation and configuration information. Refer to the next section for the specific
network settings that are required for configuring a GPS network time server for use with a
DeltaV system.
After establishing a serial connection between the setup computer and the GPS network
time server, configure the network and timing parameters. Use the IP addresses and
subnet mask described in the following sections.

IP Addresses
The DeltaV system supports both a primary and an optional backup Network Time Server
on the control network. The Network Time Servers can be attached to either the primary
or the secondary control network. It is recommended that the primary Network Time
Server be attached to the primary control network and the backup Network Time Server
be attached to the secondary control network in a redundant control network system. If
the system is simplex (has only a primary control network) attach both Network Time
Servers to the primary control network.
For the primary Network Time Server use the following IP addresses:
• 10.4.128.1 (for attaching to the primary control network)
• 10.8.128.1 (for attaching to the secondary control network)
For the backup Network Time Server use the following IP addresses:
• 10.4.128.2 (for attaching to the primary control network)

54
 Installing Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

• 10.8.128.2 (for attaching to the secondary control network)

The DeltaV system also supports both a primary and backup Network Time Server on the
DeltaV Remote Network. If you are attaching a Network Time Server to a DeltaV Remote
Network, the IP address is not predefined in the DeltaV system. Your network
administrator must assign the Network Time Server a valid IP address for the remote
network segment and this address must be used in the Remote Network properties dialog
box in the DeltaV Explorer.

Subnet Mask
The subnet mask for the Network Time Servers attached to the control network is:
• 255.254.0.0
The subnet mask for the Network Time Servers attached to the remote network(s) must
be assigned by your network administrator.
The route (default gateway for the devices on a different subnet) is not required.

55
Installing Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

56
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

3 Checking Out and Troubleshooting

Your DeltaV System
This chapter provides guidelines to help ensure that your system is installed properly and
to help you troubleshoot hardware problems. The System Administration and
Maintenance manual in Books Online and the Release Notes KBA provide updated
maintenance and troubleshooting information.
After installing, it is recommended that you check out the hardware to ensure a smooth
startup.
After checkout, start up the DeltaV software following the instructions in the manual
Getting Started with Your DeltaV Software. You can then verify and troubleshoot your
hardware installation by using:
• DeltaV Explorer to view the overall structure and layout of your system
• Diagnostics utilities to check workstation hardware
• DeltaV Diagnostics to view diagnostics data for DeltaV hardware

3.1 Checking Out Your System

Follow these steps to check out your system after installing the hardware:
• Check the cable connections for all cables.
• Check the power supply voltages.
• Check the LED indicators on devices and I/O cards.
• Test the field wiring connections.

3.1.1 Step 1. Checking the Cable Connections

Verify that all power, ground, and carrier connections are correctly installed and that all
network cables are correctly installed. For network cables, use the Microtest PentaScanner
cable testing tool to test all cables to the specifications in the "Control Network
Specifications" section. The test equipment must be connected to both ends of the cable.
Make sure all cable passes each test.

Related information
Control Network Specifications

3.1.2 Step 2. Checking the Power Supply Voltages

Check power supplies and connections and check power supply voltages. Verify that the
voltages are in the proper range at all associated screw terminal connections.
For 12 VDC systems verify that:
• The voltage at the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) is 12.1-12.3 volts.

57
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

• The voltage at the last carrier is greater than 11 volts.

• Bussed field power is 24 VDC or 115/230 VAC as applicable.
For 12 VDC systems with redundant System Power Supplies, remove one power supply
before verifying the voltage.
For 24 VDC systems verify that:
• The voltage at the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) is 24.2-24.6 volts.
• The voltage at the last carrier is greater than 11 volts.
• Bussed field power is 24 VDC or 115/230 VAC as applicable.
For 24 VDC systems with redundant System Power Supplies, remove one power supply
before verifying the voltage.
Check output loading and verify that the voltages (where present) are in the proper range
at all associated screw terminal connections. Also, verify that the expected load is within
the capacity of the unit.

Related information
Installation Worksheets

3.1.3 Step 3. Checking the LED Indicators on Each Device

The LED indicators on the system devices show important basic operating data. Following
are tables that describe the LEDs for each hardware component and provide corrective
action for faults.

System Power Supply LEDs

This table describes the LED indicators for the System Power Supply (AC/DC) and the
System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC).
Table 3-1: System Power Supply LEDs
LED Correct Fault Indications Probable Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Conditions
Green – Power On Off 1. Power is not 1. Check supply
supplied to unit. power and
Possible line connections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault 2. Contact
technical support.
Red – Error Off On 1. Outputs are Verify loading
outside of calculations.
tolerance.
2. Input over 2. Check input
voltage. Unit supply voltages.
shuts down.

58
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Controller LEDs
The following table describes the LEDs for the MD Plus, MX, and MQ controllers.
Table 3-2: Controller LEDs
LED Correct Fault Indication Probable Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green – Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. Possible line connections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault 2. Contact
technical support.
Red – Error Off On (continuous) Internal fault Contact technical
support.
On for one second Unit went Contact customer
followed by all through RESET support.
LEDs on for five due to an
seconds. unrecoverable
software error.
Flashing The controller is Commission the
decommissioned. controller.
Green – Active On Off 1. Controller is a 1. None - Green
Standby. Standby is on.
2. Controller not 2. Commission
commissioned. controller.
3. Internal fault. 3. Contact
technical support.
Flashing Controller is not Download
configured. controller
configuration.
Green – Standby Off On Controller is a None
Standby.
Flashing Controller is not Download
configured. controller
configuration.
Yellow - Pri. CN Communications Off – Controller lacks Check primary
attempted and Communications active Ethernet network cable
indicator flashing attempted and communications connections and
indicator not on primary switch
flashing. Control Network connections.
connection.

59
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Table 3-2: Controller LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Fault Indication Probable Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Yellow - Sec. CN Communications Off – Controller lacks Check secondary
attempted and Communications active Ethernet network cable
indicator flashing attempted and communications connections and
indicator not on secondary switch
flashing. Control Network connections.
connection.

Remote Interface Unit LEDs

The following table describes the LED indicators for the Remote Interface Unit.
Table 3-3: Remote Interface Unit LEDs
LED Correct Fault Indication Probable Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green – Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. Possible line connections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support
Red – Error Off On (continuous) Internal fault. Contact technical
support
On for one second Unit went Contact customer
followed by all through RESET support.
LEDs on for five due to an
seconds. unrecoverable
software error.
Flashing The Remote Commission the
Interface Unit is Remote Interface
decommissioned. Unit.
Green – Active On Off 1. Remote 1. Commission
Interface Unit is the Remote
not Interface Unit.
commissioned.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Flashing Remote Interface Download
Unit is not configuration.
configured.
Green – Standby Off (Redundancy
not supported)

60
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Table 3-3: Remote Interface Unit LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Fault Indication Probable Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Yellow - Pri. CN Communications Off – Remote Interface Check primary
attempted and Communications Unit lacks active network cable
indicator flashing attempted and Ethernet connections and
indicator not communications hub connections.
flashing. on primary
Control Network
connection.
Yellow - Sec. CN Communications Off – Remote Interface Check secondary
attempted and Communications Unit lacks active network cable
indicator flashing attempted and Ethernet connections and
indicator not communications hub connections.
flashing. on secondary
Control Network
connection.

Media Converter LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the Media Converter.
Table 3-4: Media Converter LEDs
LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green – Power On Off Power is not Check power
supplied to unit. supply and
Possible line connections.
power problem.
Red – Error Off On Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Green – Pri. F Lnk On Off Fiber-optic cable Check fiber-optic
is incorrectly cable connection.
connected. (Connects
transmit to
receive.)
Green – Pri. C Lnk On Off Twisted pair cable Check cable
is incorrectly pinouts.
connected.
Green – Sec. F Lnk On Off Fiber-optic cable Check fiber-optic
is incorrectly cable connection.
connected. (Connects
transmit to
receive.)
Green – Sec. C Lnk On Off Twisted pair cable Check cable
is incorrectly pinouts.
connected.

61
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

DeltaV Fiber Switches LEDs

The following tables describe the LEDs on the Fiber Switches.
Table 3-5: Fiber Switches' Power LEDs
LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green – Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. connections.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Red – Error Off On (continuous) Internal fault. Contact technical
support.

Table 3-6: Fiber Switches' Twisted Pair Port LEDs

LED Status
Link Act • On - Link
• Blinking - Activity
• Off - No link. Check the cable connection.

FD COL • On - Full Duplex

• Blinking - Collision
• Off - Half Duplex

100 10 • On - 100 MHz

• Off - 10 MHz

LED Status
Link Act • On - Link
• Blinking - Activity
• Off - No link.

DeltaV Controller Firewall LEDs

The following tables describe the LEDs on the DeltaV Controller Firewall

62
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Table 3-7: DeltaV Controller Firewall Power LEDs

LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green – Power On Off System power is Check supply
Supply 1 (P1), not supplied to power and
Power Supply 2 unit or voltage is connections.
(P2) less than 9.6 VDC
Red – Fault Off On Internal fault. Contact technical
support.

Table 3-8: DeltaV Controller Firewall Device Status LEDs

LED Status
STATUS - Device • Flashing green - device is initializing
status
• Solid green - Device is operational

LED Status
LS/DA 1, 2, V.24 - • Solid green - valid link
Link status
• Blinking green - port is disabled
• Running light - initialization phase after a reset
• Off - no link. Check the cable connection.

AI 8-Channel Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the pre-Series 2 and Series 2 AI, 8-channel, 4–20
mA card; the AI, 8-channel, 4–20 mA, HART card; and the AI, 8-channel, 1-5 VDC card.
Table 3-9: AI Card LEDs
LED Correct Operating Fault Possible Cause Corrective Action
Condition Indication
Green – Power • pre-Series 2 - On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Green Power/ is not supplied to power and
• Series 2 Simplex -
Active unit. Possible line connections.
On
power problem.
• Series 2
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
Redundant:
technical support.
— Active - On
— Standby -
Flashing

Red-Error Off pre-Series 2 1. No bussed field 1. Check bussed

and Series 2 On power. field power and
(continuous) connections.
2. Controller is 2. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.

63
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Table 3-9: AI Card LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Operating Fault Possible Cause Corrective Action
Condition Indication
3. Unit failed self- 3. Contact
test. technical support.
pre- Series 2 1. Controller is 1. Check
Flashing not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Address 2. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same type;
contact technical
support.
Redundant 1. No bussed field 1. Check bussed
Series 2 power. field power and
Flashing connections. Use
the DeltaV
Diagnostics Clear
Saved Fault
Information
command when
problem fixed.
2.Controller is not 2. Check
scanning card. controller
operation.
3. Hardware error. 3. Replace card
with known good
card of same type;
contact technical
support.
Simplex Series Controller is not Check controller
2 Flashing scanning card. operation.
Yellow - Ch.1 to On Off 1. Input is out of 1. Check input
Ch. 8 range and source and
channel is connections.
disabled. (See
specifications in
the "Interface
Specifications"
section.)
2. No bussed field 2. Check bussed
power. field power and
connections.
3.Internal fault. 3. Contact
technical support.

64
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Table 3-9: AI Card LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Operating Fault Possible Cause Corrective Action
Condition Indication
Flashing 1. Input is out of 1. Check input
range and source and
channel is connections.
disabled. (See
specifications in
the "Interface
Specifications"
section.)
2. No bussed field 2. Check bussed
power. field power and
connections.
3. Channel is 3. Check HART
configured for input source and
HART, but there is connections.
no HART
communication.
4. Channel is 4. Check input
configured for levels compared
NAMUR limits and to NAMUR limits
they have been
exceeded.

Refer to the Configuration manual in Books Online or more information on

troubleshooting HART devices.

Related information
Interface Specifications

AI 16-Channel Card LEDs

The following table describes the LED indicators for the Series 2 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA,
HART card in Simplex mode.
Table 3-10: AI 16-Channel Card LEDS
LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green-Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. Possible line connections.
power problem
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Red - Error Off On 1. No bussed field 1. Check bussed
power. field power and
connections.

65
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Table 3-10: AI 16-Channel Card LEDS (continued)

LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
2. Controller is 2. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
3. Unit failed self- 3. Contact
test. technical support.
Flashing 1. No bussed field 1. Check bussed
power. field power and
connections.
2. Controller is 2. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
3. Hardware error. 3. Replace card
with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.

AO 8-Channel Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the pre-Series 2 and Series 2 AO, 8-channel 4–
20 mA card and the AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART card.
Table 3-11: AO 8-Channel Card LEDs
LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Condition Action
Green – Power • pre-Series 2 - Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Green Power/ On is not supplied to power and
Active unit. Possible line connections
• Series 2
power problems.
Redundant:
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
• Active - On
technical support.
• Standby -
Flashing

Red-Error Off pre-Series 2 and 1. Unit failed self- 1. Contact

Series 2 On test. technical support.
(continuous)
2. Controller is 2. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation
pre-Series 2 1. Controller is 1. Check
Flashing not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.

66
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Table 3-11: AO 8-Channel Card LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Condition Action
3. Address 3. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Redundant Series 1. No bussed field 1. Check bussed
2 Flashing power. field power and
connections. Use
the DeltaV
Diagnostics Clear
Saved Fault
Information
command when
the problem is
fixed.
2. Controller is 2. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
3. Hardware error. 3. Replace with
known good card
of same type;
contact technical
support.
Simplex Series 2 Controller is not Check controller
Flashing scanning card. operation.
Yellow - Ch1. to On Off 1. No output 1. Check output
Ch. 8 device (load) and connections.
channel is
disabled.
2. Bussed field 2. Check bussed
power not field power and
supplied to unit. communications.
3. Internal fault. 3. Contact
technical support.
Flashing 1. No output 1. Check output
device (load) and connections.
channel is
enabled.
2. Bussed field 2. Check bussed
power not field power and
supplied to unit. connections.
3. Channel is 3. Check HART
configured for input source and
HART, but there is connections.
no HART
communication.

67
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Table 3-11: AO 8-Channel Card LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Condition Action
4. Internal fault. 4. Contact
technical support.

Refer to the Configuration manual in Books Online for more information on

troubleshooting HART devices.

AS-Interface Card LEDs

Table 3-12:
LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green – Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. Possible line connections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Red – Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Address 2. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow – Port 1 On Off No Check
and Port 2 communications. connections,
cable, and
external device.
Flashing Communications Check
error on this port. connections,
cable, and
external device.

DeviceNet Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the DeviceNet and Series 2 DeviceNet cards.

68
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Table 3-13: DeviceNet Card LEDs

LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green - Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. Possible line connections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Red - Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Address 2. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - Port 1 On Off 1. No 1. Check
Port 2 (reserved) communications. connections,
cable, and
external device.
2. Port not 2. Enable port.
enabled
3. No 3. Configure port.
configuration for
this port.
Flashing Communication Check
error on this port. connections,
cable, and
external device.

DI 8-Channel Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the pre-Series 2 and Series 2 8-channel DI cards
(24 VDC isolated and dry contact, and 120/230 VAC isolated and dry contract).

69
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Table 3-14: DI 8-Channel Card LEDs

LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Condition Action
Green - Power • pre-Series 2 - Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Green Power/ On is not supplied to power and
Active unit. Possible line connections.
• Series 2 Simplex
power problem.
-On
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
• Series 2
technical support.
Redundant:
— Active - On
— Standby -
Flashing

Red - Error Off pre-Series 2 and 1. Controller is 1. Check

Series 2 On not scanning controller
(continuous) card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.
pre-Series 2 - 1. Controller is 1. Check
Flashing not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Address 2. Replace with
conflict. known good card
of same type;
contact technical
support.
Series 2 - Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Hardware error. 2. Replace card
with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - Ch.1 to • On = input >
Ch. 8 detection level.
• Off = input <
detection level.
Refer to the
"Interface
Specifications"
section for
detection levels for
each DI card type.

Related information
Interface Specifications

70
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

DI Mass Connection Board LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs on the Series 2 DI Mass Connection Board and the
Series 2 Plus DI Mass Connection Board.
Table 3-15: DI Mass Connection Board LEDs
Type of LED Status Meaning
Power (green) On (green) The mass connection board is
receiving power.
Off The mass connection board is
not receiving power.
Channel (yellow for Series 2; On (yellow for Series 2; orange/ The channel signal is available.
orange/brown for Series 2 Plus) brown for Series 2 Plus)
Off The channel signal is not
available.

DO 8-Channel Card LEDs

Table 3-16: DO 8-Channel Card LEDs
LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action
Condition
Green-Power • pre-Series 2 - On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Green Power/ is not supplied to power and
• Series 2 Simplex -
Active unit. Possible line connections.
On
power problem.
• Series 2
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
Redundant:
technical support.
— Active - On
— Standby -
Flashing

Red Off pre-Series 2 and 1. Controller is 1. Check

Series 2 On not scanning controller
(continuous) card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.
pre-Series 2 1. Controller is 1. Check
Flashing not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Address 2. Replace with
conflict. known good card
of same type;
contact technical
support.
Series 2 Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.

71
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Table 3-16: DO 8-Channel Card LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action
Condition
2. Hardware error. 2. Replace with
known good card
of same type;
contact technical
support.
Yellow - Ch. 1 Depends on setpoint
to Ch. 8 and configuration.

DO 32-Channel Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the DO, 32-channel, 24 VDC, high-side and
Series 2 DO, 32-channel, 24 VDC, high-side cards.
Table 3-17: DO 32-Channel Card LEDs
LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green-Power On Off 1. Power is not 1. Check supply
supplied to unit. power and
connections.
2. Internal fault 2. Contact
technical support.
Red - Error Off On (continuous) Communications Check
error. connections,
cable, and
external device.
Flashing Address conflict. Replace card with
known good card
of same type;
contact technical
support.

DO Mass Connection Board LEDs

Table 3-18: DO Mass Connection Board LEDs
Type of LED Status Meaning
Power (green) On (green) The mass connection board is
receiving power.
Off The mass connection board is
not receiving power.
Channel (yellow) On (yellow) The channel is turned on.
Off The channel is turned off.

72
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Fieldbus H1 Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the Fieldbus H1 and Series 2 Fieldbus H1 cards.
Table 3-19: Fieldbus H1 Card LEDs
LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Condition Action
Green-Power • pre-Series 2 - Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Green Power/ On is not supplied to power and
Active unit. Possible line connections.
• Series 2
power problem.
Simplex - On
2. Internal fault 2. Contact
• Series 2
technical support.
Redundant:
— Active - On pre-Series 2 and Incorrect terminal Install redundant
Series 2 Flashing block for terminal blocks
— Standby - configured card for Series 2
Flashing Series 2 Red:
type redundant cards
• Active- and simplex
Flashing terminal blocks
• Stby-Flashing for simplex and/or
pre-Series 2 cards.
Red - Error Off pre-Series 2 and 1. Controller is 1. Check
Series 2: On not scanning controller
(continuous) card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2.Contact
test. technical support.
pre-Series 2 1. Controller is 1.Check
Flashing not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Address 2. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same type;
contact technical
support.
Series 2 Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Hardware error. 2. Replace card
with known good
card of same type;
contact technical
support.
Yellow - Port 1 On Off 1. No 1. Check
and Port 2 communications. connections,
cable and external
devices.
2. Port not 2. Enable port.
enabled.

73
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Table 3-19: Fieldbus H1 Card LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Condition Action
3. Configuration 3. Fix
mismatch. (Such configuration
as redundant card errors.
configured in
database and
simplex card
installed.)
Flashing 1. 1. Check
Communication connections,
error on this port. cable, and
external device.
2. No 2. Configure port.
configuration for
this port.

Isolated Input Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the Series 2 Isolated Input card.
Table 3-20: Series 2 Isolated Input Card LEDs
LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green – Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. Possible line connections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Red – Error Off On (Continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Address 2. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.

Multifunction Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the Multifunction card.

74
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Table 3-21: Multifunction Card LEDs

LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green - Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. Possible line connections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Red - Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning card controller
operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation
2. Address 2. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.

Profibus DP Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the Profibus DP, Series 2 Profibus DP (Simplex)
and Series 2 Plus Profibus DP (Simplex and Redundant) cards.
Table 3-22: Profibus DP Card LEDs
LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Condition Action
Green - • Profibus DP and Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Power Simplex Series 2 is not supplied to power and
Profibus DP- On unit. Possible line connections.
power problem.
• Series 2 Plus Profibus
DP Redundant: 2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
— Active - On technical support.
— Standby -
Flashing

Red - Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check

not scanning card controller
operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.

75
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Table 3-22: Profibus DP Card LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Condition Action
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Address 2. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - On Off 1. No 1. Check
Port 1 communications. connections,
Port 2 cable, and
(reserved) external device.
2. Port not 2. Enable port.
enabled.
3. No 3. Configure port.
configuration for
this port.
Flashing Communication Check
error on this port. connections,
cable, and
external device.

RTD, ohms and Thermocouple, mV Cards LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the RTD, ohms and Thermocouple, mV cards.
Table 3-23: RTD, ohms and Thermocouple, mV Cards LEDs
LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green – Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. Possible line connections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Red – Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.

76
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Table 3-23: RTD, ohms and Thermocouple, mV Cards LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
2. Address 2. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow – Ch. 1 to On Off 1. Channel not 1. Enable channel
Ch. 8 configured. and download
card.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Flashing 1. Invalid 1. Check
configuration. configuration.
2. Input is out of 2. Check input
range. source and
connections.
3. Internal fault. 3. Contact
technical support.

Related information
Interface Specifications

Sequence of Events Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the Sequence of Events card.
Table 3-24: Sequence of Events Card LEDs
LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green - Power On Off 1. Power is not 1. Check supply
supplied to unit. power and
connections.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Red - Error Off On (continuous) Communications Check
error. connections,
cable, and
external device.
Flashing Address conflict. Replace card with
known good card
of same type;
contact technical
support.

77
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 LEDs

Table 3-25: Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 LEDs
LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Condition Action
Green - Power • pre-Series 2 - Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Green Power/ On is not supplied to power and
Active unit. Possible line connections.
• Series 2
power problem.
Simplex - On
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
• Series 2
technical support.
Redundant
— Active - On
— Standby -
Flashing

Red - Error Off pre-Series 2 and 1. Controller is 1. Check

Series 2 - On not scanning controller
(continuous) card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.
pre-Series 2 1. Controller is 1. Check
Flashing not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Address 2. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Series 2 Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Hardware error. 2. Replace card
with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - Port 1 On Off No Check
and Port 2 communications. connections,
(configured as cable, and
Master) external device.
Flashing Communications Check
error on this port. connections,
cable, and
external device.

78
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Table 3-25: Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Condition Action
Yellow - Port 1 • On -
and Port 2 Communicatin
(configured as g
Slave)
• Off - No
communication
• Flashing -
Intermittent
communication

VIM 2 card LEDs

The VIM 2 card has 6 LEDs. The LEDs can have 3 states: On, Off, or Blink (only used for the
VIMNet network communications LED). From top to bottom the LEDs are:
• Power: should always be On (green). If the power LED is off, provide power to the card.
• Error: Whenever the Fault LED is on (red), the VIM 2 is in error; all other LED states are
not significant.
• Active: When lit (green) indicates that the card is commissioned and operating as the
active card in a redundant pair.
• Standby: When lit (green) indicates that the card is commissioned and operating as the
standby card in a redundant pair. The Standby LED is always off in simplex mode.
• Network: When lit (amber) indicates valid VIMNet network communications.
• Ctlr Comm: When lit (amber) indicates valid LocalBus communications.

LED pattern when the VIM 2 is decommissioned

The following table shows the LED pattern when the VIM 2 is decommissioned.

LED State Corrective action

Active Off A decommissioned VIM 2 does
not have an IP address. Use the
Standby Off VIMNet Explorer to configure a
Network Blinking placeholder that contains the IP
address for your network, then
Ctlr Comm Off commission the VIM 2.
Power On

Example LED patterns when the VIM 2 is commissioned

The following table shows the LED pattern when the VIM 2 is commissioned and
communicating with both the DeltaV controller and with external devices. Note that if the
Active LED is on and the Standby LED is off, the redundancy role is Active. If the Active LED
is off and the Standby LED is on the redundancy role is Standby.

79
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Table 3-26: VIM 2 is commissioned and communicating on both networks

LED State
Active On
Standby Off
Network On
Ctlr Comm On
Power On

The following table shows the LED pattern when the VIM 2 is commissioned but not
communicating on the LocalBus and there is a VIMNet network error. The redundancy role
is Active. If the Standby LED is On and the Active is Off with all other LED states the same,
the redundancy role is Standby.
Table 3-27: VIM 2 is commissioned but not communicating on the LocalBus; VIMNet
network error
LED State Corrective action
Active On Verify that the DeltaV
controller is downloaded. Also
Standby Off verify that the external device
Network Blink configuration has been
uploaded to the VIM 2 from the
Ctlr Comm Off VIMNet Explorer
Power On

The following table shows the LED pattern when the VIM 2 is commissioned and
communicating on the LocalBus but there are errors on the VIMNet network. The
redundancy role is Active. If the Standby LED is On and the Active is Off with all other LED
states the same, the redundancy role is Standby.
Table 3-28: VIM 2 is commissioned, communicating on the LocalBus, VIMNet network
errors
LED State
Active On
Standby Off
Network Blink
Ctlr Comm On
Power On

I.S. AI 8-Channel HART Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA HART card.

80
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Table 3-29: I.S. AI 8-Channel HART Card LEDs

LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green – Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. Possible line connections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Red – Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Address 2. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - Ch.1 - Ch. On Off 1. Input is out of 1. Check input
8 range. (See source and
specifications in connections.
Appendix C for
correct range.)
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Flashing 1. Input is out of 1. Check input
range. See source and
specifications in connections.
Appendix C for
correct range.)
2. Channel is 2. Check HART
configured for input source and
HART, but there is connections.
no HART
communication.
3. Channel is 3. Check input
configured for levels compared
NAMUR limits and to NAMUR limits.
they have been
exceeded.

Related information
Interface Specifications

81
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

I.S. AO 8-Channel HART Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the I.S. AO 8-Channel HART card.
Table 3-30: I.S. AO 8-Channel HART Card LEDs
LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green – Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. Possible line connections.
power problems.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Red – Error Off On (continuous) Unit failed self- Contact technical
test. support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.
3. Address 3. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow – Ch.1 to On Off 1. No output 1. Check output
Ch. 8 device (load). connections.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Flashing 1. No output 1. Check output
device (load). connections.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
3. Card is 3. Check HART
configured for input source and
HART but there is connections.
no HART
communication.

I.S. DI 16-Channel Card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs for the I.S. DI 16-channel card.

82
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Table 3-31: I.S. DI 16-Channel Card LEDs

LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Condition Action
Green - Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. Possible line connections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.
Red - Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Address 2. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - Ch.1- • On = input > Flashing Line fault Check field
Ch.16 detection level. detected. wiring.
• Off = input < Running light No terminal block Make sure that
detection level. from Channel 1 - installed or the correct
Channel 16 with incorrect terminal terminal block is
See specifications in
Red Error On. block used. installed.
Appendix C for
detection levels for
each card type.

Related information
Interface Specifications

I.S. DO 4-Channel Card LEDs

Table 3-32: I.S. DO 4-Channel Card LEDs
LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Green - Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and
unit. Possible line connections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact
technical support.

83
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Table 3-32: I.S. DO 4-Channel Card LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Fault Indication Possible Cause Corrective
Operating Action
Condition
Red Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact
test. technical support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check
not scanning controller
card. operation.
2. Address 2. Replace card
conflict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - Ch. 1 - Depends on Flashing Line fault Check field
Ch. 4 setpoint and detected. wiring.
configuration.

MD20 and MD30 Smart Switch LEDs

There are two types of LEDs on the DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches: device status
LEDs that describe the status of the MD20 and MD30 base switches and display status
LEDs that describe the status of the ports on the media modules that plug into the base
switches.
Table 3-33: MD20 and MD30 Device Status LEDs
LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause
Condition
Green P (Power) On Off Internal supply voltage
is too low.
Green P1 (Power 1) On Off Supply voltage 1 is less
than 18 V.
Green P2 (Power 2) On Off Supply voltage 2 is less
than 18 V.

84
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Table 3-33: MD20 and MD30 Device Status LEDs (continued)

LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause
Condition
Green/yellow LOCK • On (green Off Device is in an
continuous) - The unlocked state.
device is locked.
• On (yellow
continuous) - The
device is
temporarily
unlocked but will
be locked down
after the lockdown
timer has expired.
• Flashing (green) -
Device passes into
the lockdown
state.

Red/yellow RL1 (Relay Off - Signal contact is Red On (continuous) Signal contact is open;
1) closed; not reporting reporting an error.
an error.
Yellow On Signal contact is open;
(continuous) the Manual Setting is
active.
Red/yellow RL2 (Relay Off - Signal contact is Red On (continuous) Signal contact is open;
2) closed; not reporting reporting an error.
an error
Yellow On Signal contact is open;
(continuous) the Manual Setting is
active.
Green RUN • On (continuous) - Off Device is in reset
The device is ready mode.
for operation.
• On (flashing) - The
device is booting.

Green TEST On - LED test activated. Off LED test not activated.
Green ACA/Flash
Access - displays the
ACA flash access with
the Run LED.

Every DeltaV media module has one LED per port. The meaning of the media modules’
port status LED depends upon the item selected on the MD20 or MD30 base Smart
Switches. Press the Select button to cycle through the items on the base switch. The
following table describes the display status LEDs on the DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart
Switches and the meaning of the port LEDs on the media modules

85
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Table 3-34: Display Status LEDs on MD Base Smart Switches and Meaning on Media
Modules
Display Status LED on MD Base Meaning on Media Module
Smart Switches
Green L/D (Data/link status) • Ports glowing green - valid connection.
The port LEDs on the media • Ports not glowing green- no valid connection.
modules display the connection
status. • Ports flashing green once a period - port is switched to
standby.
• Ports flashing green three times a period - port is locked by
the One-Click Lockdown application (DeltaV version 10.3);
the Smart Switch Command Center (DeltaV version 11.3 and
12.3); or, the Network Device Command Center (NDCC) in
DeltaV version 13.3 and higher.
• Ports flashing yellow - port is receiving data.

Green FDX (full duplex) • Ports glowing green - Full-duplex is active.

The port LEDs on the media • Ports not glowing green - Half duplex is active.
modules display the half duplex
or full duplex connection status.
Green 1000 (10/100/1000Mbit/ • Ports glowing green - 100Mbit/sec is active.
sec)
• Ports not glowing green - 10/Mbit/sec is active.
The port LEDs on the media
modules display the • Ports glowing yellow - 1000Mbit/sec is active.
transmission speed.
Green AN (autonegotiation) • Ports glowing green - autonegotiation is active.
The port LEDs on the media • Ports not glowing green - autonegotiation is inactive.
modules display the
autonegotiation setting.
Green TP (twisted pair/fiber- • Ports glowing green - twisted pair ports.
optic)
• Ports glowing yellow - fiber-optic ports.
The port LEDs on the media
modules display the media type.
Green PoE status • Ports not glowing - No PoE port or PoE disabled.
The port LEDs on the media • Ports glowing yellow - PoE port searching for terminal device
modules display the Power over (PD); PoE status is searching.
Ethernet status.
• Ports glowing green - PoE port supplying terminal device
(PD); PoE status is delivering power.

RM100 and FP20 Smart Switch LEDs

The following table describes the device status LEDs on the DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart
Switches.

86
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Table 3-35: Device Status LEDs on DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches
LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause
Condition
Green/yellow P • On (green Off Supply voltage is off or
(Power) continuous) - too low.
Supply voltages are
on.
• On (yellow
continuous) - Only
one supply voltage
is on.

Green RUN • On (green Off Device is in reset

continuous) - mode.
Device is ready for
operation.
• Flashing (green) -
Device is booting.

Green/yellow LOCK • On (green Off Device is in an

continuous) - unlocked state.
Device is locked.
• On (yellow
continuous) -
Device is
temporarily
unlocked but will
enter the locked
state after the
lockdown timer
expires.
• Flashing (green) -
Device passes into
the locked state.

Red FAULT Off - not reporting an On (red continuous) Reporting an error.

error.

The following table describes the port status LEDs on the DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart
Switches

87
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Table 3-36: Port Status LEDs on DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches
LED Correct Operating Fault Indication Possible Cause
Condition
Green/LS (Link Status) • On (green Off No valid link or
continuous) - Valid connection.
link or connection.
• Flashing green
once per second -
Port is in standby.
• Flashing green
three times per
second. - Port is
locked by the One-
Click Lockdown
application (DeltaV
version 10.3); the
Smart Switch
Command Center
(DeltaV version
11.3 and 12.3)
higher); or, the
Network Device
Command Center
(DeltaV version
13.3 and higher).

Yellow/DA (Data) Flashing yellow - Off Not receiving data.

Receiving data.

3.1.4 Step 4. Testing the Field Wiring Connections

To troubleshoot field wiring connection problems, test access points are located on the
I/O terminal blocks. The access point for each wire connection is located in the square hole
above the corresponding field screw terminal. To contact the field signals, use a test probe
at least 25 mm (1 in.) long and 2 mm (0.08 in.) or less in diameter.
To determine the expected voltage levels for your application, refer to the:
• Wiring diagrams for the specific I/O card type in the "Interface Specifications" section
• Connection information supplied with your field device

CAUTION
The test probe is not retained within the access hole. It can fall out and short across field
wiring if it is not held in place.

3.2 Troubleshooting Your System

After checkout, start up the DeltaV software and verify and troubleshoot your hardware
installation with the DeltaV Explorer, workstation diagnostics utilities, and DeltaV
Diagnostics. To start the DeltaV Explorer, click Start → All Programs → DeltaV →

88
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Engineering → DeltaV Explorer. To start DeltaV Diagnostics, click Start → All Programs
→ DeltaV → Operator → Diagnostics.

3.2.1 Using the DeltaV Explorer

The DeltaV Explorer presents a view of the overall structure and layout of your system. The
tree view shows your control strategies and the hierarchy of the nodes on your Control
Network. These nodes can be physically connected to the system, or they can be
placeholders configured prior to the installation of the actual hardware.
When you check out your system, remember that the DeltaV Explorer gives you a view of
your database, but this may not necessarily match what is actually installed on the
network. For example, before connecting controllers, you can define them as controller
placeholders in the Control Network. The icons for the placeholders appear in the DeltaV
Explorer but are not bound to any device. Then, when the controllers are available and
connected, you drag and drop them from the Decommissioned Controllers section to the
controller placeholder icons in the Control Network.
Resolving system problems is often a matter of making sure the database and the network
match and making sure all the nodes on the network have information about all other
nodes. The Download commands in the DeltaV Explorer provide the nodes with all the
information they need to operate and interact with other nodes.
See the manual Getting Started with Your DeltaV Software for information on:
• Downloading Setup Data
• Downloading Controllers and Installing Workstations
• Dragging decommissioned controllers to the Control Network

Status Indicators
After you have completed the above steps and the controllers are listed in the Control
Network, look for these indicators next to the nodes:

Indicates the downloading node (the workstation) does not have all the
information about this node.
Indicates the node is not communicating. This indicator occurs if there is a bad
connection, if the controller is not powered up, or if the controller is
decommissioned. It also occurs for a few seconds after a controller is
commissioned.
Indicates the node is communicating but has an integrity problem. Integrity
problems can occur if there is a mismatch between the I/O configuration and
the installed I/O or if the node is configured for network redundancy but does
not have the necessary connections to support it.
Indicates that the node does not have a configuration. This can occur if the
node has never been downloaded. For controllers, this can occur if there is a
power failure and cold restart was not enabled for the node.

Note
If a node shows a status indicator, check for hardware faults shown in the Troubleshooting
Guide before changing your configuration.

89
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

You can automate the comparison between the physical I/O and the configured I/O with
the Auto-sense I/O cards command. To use the command, click on the I/O for the node,
click the right mouse button, and then select Auto-sense I/O Cards. The Auto-sense Cards
dialog lists the card sensed in the controller and the card listed in the database for each
slot.
For example, if you add a card to the controller, the dialog displays:
• The type of card sensed in the Auto-sensed Type
• <empty> in the database column
Click OK to add the configuration to the database. (Clicking OK does not affect existing
cards.) Click Cancel to decommission the controller and close the dialog.

3.2.2 Using the Workstation Diagnostics

The documentation supplied with your workstation describes the diagnostics programs
available for the workstation hardware and operating system software. If you need to test
the workstation subsystems (memory, processors, video, keyboard, mouse, disk
controller, ports), use the diagnostics disk and follow the instructions in the manual
supplied with your workstation.

3.2.3 Using DeltaV Diagnostics

The DeltaV Explorer allows you to launch the DeltaV Diagnostics application and view
diagnostics data for any selected DeltaV Explorer object. This provides useful diagnostic

information for nodes that have good status or show the indicator. To investigate
integrity problems for a node or subsystem, select its icon, click the right mouse button,
and then click Diagnose. Information about DeltaV Diagnostics is located in online help.

3.2.4 Troubleshooting Guide

The following information can be used to help you detect system hardware problems with
the DeltaV Explorer and correct them.
Problem: Controller not listed in the Decommissioned Controllers tree.

Possible Cause Corrective Action

Node is not connected to the switch. Check the LEDs on the controller (see the LED
Checklists).
Control network cable is not working correctly. Test the cable between the controller and the
switch. If the cable is not working correctly,
repair or replace it.
Node is not connected correctly to the network. Make sure cables are connected to the correct
ports on the switch and the controller.
Connection on the carrier is not secure. Remove the controller from its power/controller
carrier for at least 15 seconds and replace it onto
the carrier.

90
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Possible Cause Corrective Action

DeltaV Explorer is not connected to the active Exit the DeltaV Explorer and restart the
database, or the DeltaV Database Server connection to the active database.
(DvDbServer) is not running.

Problem: The controller has an indicator.

appears for nodes that are not communicating. Typically, this indicator occurs if there
is a bad connection or the controller is not powered up. To clear this indicator, go to the
node and make sure it is connected, the wiring is correct and sound, and the node is
powered up. This indicator also occurs for a few seconds after a controller is commissioned

Possible Cause Corrective Action

Node is not connected to the switch. 1. Check the LEDs on the controller.
2. Check the Control Network cables to make
sure they are connected to the correct ports on
the switch and controller.
Control network cable is not working correctly. Test the cable between the controller and the
switch. If the cable is not working correctly,
repair or replace it.
You are looking at the wrong controller. Make sure you are looking at the correct
controller by selecting DeltaV Explorer
Controller Properties → Controller → Flash
Lights.

Primary and secondary Control Network 1. Use DeltaV Explorer Node Properties →
connections are crossed. Identify Controller to flash the controller LEDs.
If the LEDs flash, use the Check Node Integrity
function in DeltaV Diagnostics and verify that a
Not Connected status is returned.
2. Verify that the primary Control Network
cables are connected to the correct primary
ports on the controller, workstation, and switch.
3. Verify that the secondary Control Network
cables are connected to the correct secondary
ports on the controller, workstation, and switch.

Problem: The workstation has an indicator.

appears for nodes that are not communicating. Typically, this indicator occurs if there
is a bad connection or if the workstation is not powered up. To clear this indicator, go to
the node and make sure it is connected, the wiring is correct and sound, and the node is
powered up.

91
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

Possible Cause Corrective Action

Workstation is not set up properly. Make sure the workstation is powered up. Look
in Control Panel → Administrative Tools →
Services and verify that DeltaV Services are
running.
Node is not connected to the switch. Check the Control Network cables to make sure
they are connected to the correct ports on the
switch and workstation.
Control network cable is not working correctly. Test the cable between the workstation and the
switch. If the cable is not working correctly,
repair or replace it.
Workstation address is set to a default value or 1. Look at the Internet Protocol (IP) address and
an incorrect address. verify that the address matches the DeltaV
Explorer address for the node. If the address is
not correct, run Workstation Configuration.
2. Use the Utilities from the 3Com Install disk to
verify that the Plug N Play feature is turned off
for the workstation Control Network card.

Problem: A node has an indicator.

Possible Cause Corrective Action

Installing node (the workstation) does not have Click the node with the indicator, click the right
all the information on the node. mouse button, and then click Install Setup Data.
This transfers setup data from the database to
the physical node. It also updates the installing
workstation node so that the workstation has all
the information it needs to manage the new
node.

This indicator can appear on controllers that are physically connected to the network or on
controller placeholders. Note that you cannot install setup data for a controller
placeholder; the physical node must be connected first.

Problem: A node has a indicator.

Possible Cause Corrective Action

Node is communicating but has an integrity Most integrity problems are due to hardware
problem. problems. Check the LEDs on the nodes (refer to
the LED tables in this chapter) and correct the
hardware problem.

Occasionally, integrity problems occur if there is a mismatch between the I/O

configuration and the installed I/O. In this case, compare the controller I/O configuration
in the DeltaV Explorer with the actual I/O cards connected to the controller. This
comparison can be accomplished by viewing either the I/O Auto-Sense dialog in DeltaV
Explorer, or by examining the I/O hierarchy in Diagnostics.

92
 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
D800001X312 April 2021

Integrity problems can occur if the controller is configured for network redundancy but
does not have the necessary connections to support it. Verify that the controller is
configured to support network redundancy. If it is, make sure the controller is connected
to the network correctly.
This indicator also occurs if workstations have Event Chronicle problems (configured for a
directory that does not exist, for example), or if workstations are not communicating with
the controller.
If the indicator persists, use DeltaV Diagnostics to pinpoint the problem.

Problem: The node has a indicator.

Possible Cause Corrective Action

The node has never been downloaded or has Download the node.
lost its configuration.

3.3 Getting Help

DeltaV Books Online provides information on the DeltaV system and the Online Help for
the DeltaV applications provides procedural help on using the applications and popup help
for dialog boxes.

Online Help
All DeltaV applications have online help that provides instructions on using the
application. To access help for any application, open the application, and select the help
topics command under the Help menu on the application’s menu bar. For example to start
DeltaV Diagnostics and then access the help, click Start → DeltaV Operator →
Diagnostics, and then click Help → Help in DeltaV Diagnostics. To search the help for
information on specific topics, click the left mouse button on the Index tab or the Search
tab on the Help Topics dialog box, and follow the directions. For help on dialogs, click the
question mark in the upper right hand corner of the dialog, drag it to the field for which
you want help, and click the left mouse button.

Books Online
Books Online provides reference information and detailed information on installing,
configuring, operating, and troubleshooting your DeltaV system. Click Start → DeltaV
Help → Books Onlineand then click on the title of the book that you want to read. The
System Administration and Maintenance manual in Books Online contains helpful technical
information related to hardware troubleshooting.

DeltaV Installation and Instruction Manuals

Most DeltaV product information is in Books Online. You can print any of that information
or you can order a paper copy from Emerson. The Getting Started with Your DeltaV Software
manual and the Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV Distributed Control System manual are also
available in printed form. The Getting Started with Your DeltaV Software contains general
information about the software and helps you get started with configuration and the
Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV Distributed Control System provides important information
about installing a fieldbus system.

93
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
April 2021 D800001X312

3.4 Hazardous Area Installation Manuals, NAMUR

Installation Manuals, and ATEX Instruction
Sheets
The following files related to Hazardous Area installations and NAMUR compliant
installations are on the DeltaV Documentation Library DVD. The files are in Portable
Document Format (.PDF). A letter (A-Z) is appended to the filenames that begin with 12P
and is incremented for each release of the document.
• 12P1293 — DeltaV™ Scalable Process System, Class I Division 2 Installation Instructions
(Part Number - 12P1293)
• 12P1892 — DeltaV™ Scalable Process System, Class I Div. 2 with Class I, II, III Div. 1 Field
Circuits Installation Instructions (Part Number - 12P1892)
• 12P1990 — DeltaV™ Scalable Process System with Zone 0 Field Circuits Installation
Instructions (Part Number - 12P1990)
• 12P2046 — DeltaV™ Scalable Process System, Zone 2 Installation Instructions (Part
Number - 12P2046)
• 12P2524 — DeltaV™ IS I/O Code of Practice for Installation and Maintenance in Zone 2
Hazardous Areas (Part Number - 12P2524)
• 12P2822 — DeltaV™ Digital Automation System Namur NE 21 Installation Instructions (Part
Number - 12P2822)
• 12P3292 — DeltaV™ Type KJ7000 Series Zone 1 I/O System Installation Instructions
• 12P3517 — DeltaV™ KJ1710 Single Port Fiber Switch Installation Instructions
• ATEX Instruction Sheets — The DeltaV ATEX Instruction Sheets (in PDF format) can also
be found on the DeltaV web site.

3.5 Technical Service

There are several options available for technical service, including help desk support,
remote diagnosis, 24-hour emergency support, and software update service. Please
complete the SureService registration process.
If the information presented in this manual does not solve your problem, refere to the
contact information on the Emerson Automation Solutions website and follow the
directions for your world area.
Make sure you have the following information ready:
• System Identification Number
• Software Version Number
• Description of the problem
If you are calling, be at your DeltaV system if possible. This enables the Technical Support
Representative to step you through the proper problem solving procedures.

94
 Environmental Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

A Environmental Specifications
All DeltaV system products meet the appropriate European standards for Electromagnetic
Compatibility and carry the CE mark. All products meet CSA requirements. Contact the
factory for details.

A.1 Environmental Specifications for the DeltaV

System
The following tables list the environmental specifications for normal operation of DeltaV
system devices: The first table lists temperature and relative humidity specifications and
the second lists airborne contaminants, vibration, and shock specifications
Table A-1: Temperature and Relative Humidity Specifications for DeltaV Devices
Device Operating Storage Temperature Relative Humidity
Temperature
Workstation 10°C to 35°C (50°F to -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 20% to 80%, non-
95°F) maximum 10°C 140°F) condensing
(18°F) change per hour
3Com 3C16700A 8- 0°C to 40°C (32°F to -30°C to 60°C (-22°F to 0% to 90%, non-
Port (TP) Unmanaged 104°F) 140°F) condensing
Hub
Allied Telesyn 0°C to 40°C (32°F to -25°C to 70°C (-13°F to 5% to 95%, non-
switches: 104°F) 158°F) condensing
• AT-FS708 8-Port
(TP) Unmanaged
• AT-FS709FC 8-Port
(TP) Unmanaged
with 1 100BASE-FX
Fiber Port

95
Environmental Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table A-1: Temperature and Relative Humidity Specifications for DeltaV Devices
(continued)

Device Operating Storage Temperature Relative Humidity

Temperature
Cisco switches: 0°C to 45°C (32°F to -25°C to 70°C (-13°F to 10% to 85% non-
• 2940 8-Port (TP) 113°F) 158°F) condensing
Managed with 1
100BASE-FX Fiber
Port
• 2950 24-Port (TP)
Managed
• 2950C 24-Port (TP)
Managed with 2
100BASE-FX Fiber
Ports
• 2960 8-Port (TP)
with 1 gigabit
multi-function port
• 2960 24-Port (TP)
with 2 RJ45 ports
• 2960 24-Port (TP)
with 2 gigabit
multi-function
ports
• 2960 48-Port (TP)
with 2 RJ45 ports
• 2960 48-Port (TP)
with 2 gigabit
multi-function
ports
• 3550FX 24-Port
(FO) Managed with
24 100BASE-FX
Fiber Ports and 2
GBIC gigabit slots
• 3750-24FS 24-Port
(FO) Managed with
24 100BASE-FX
Fiber Ports and 2
SFP Gigabit slots
• 3750-24TS-S 24-
Port (TP) Managed
with 2 SFP Gigabit
slots
• 3750G-12S-S 12
Slot (SFP) Managed

96
 Environmental Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table A-1: Temperature and Relative Humidity Specifications for DeltaV Devices
(continued)

Device Operating Storage Temperature Relative Humidity

Temperature
DeltaV MD20 and 0°C to 60°C (32°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 10% to 95%, non-
MD30 base Smart 140°F) 185°F) condensing
Switches and media
modules, and DeltaV
FP20 Smart Switches
(non ES versions)
DeltaV MD20 and -40°C to 70°C -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 10% to 95%, non-
MD30 base Smart (conformal coating) 185°F) condensing
Switches and media (-40°F to 158°F)
modules, and FP20
Smart Switches (ES
versions)
DeltaV RM100 Smart 0°C to 50°C (32°F to -20°C to 85°C (-4°F to 10% to 95%, non-
Switches 122°F) 185°F) condensing
DeltaV RM104 base 0°C to 50°C (32°F to -20°C to 85°C (-4°F to 10% to 95%,
Smart Switches and 122°F) 185°F) noncondensing
media modules
MD Plus Controllers -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, non-
158°F) 185°F) condensing
MX Controllers -40°C to 60°C (-40°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, non-
140°F) 185°F) condensing
Single Port Fiber -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, non-
Switch 158°F) 185°F) condensing
Four Port Fiber Switch
Remote Interface Unit
Pre-Series 2 Profibus, 0 to 55°C (32°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, non-
Pre-Series 2 DeviceNet 131°F) 185°F) condensing
Series 2 I/O (except -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, non-
Series 2 As-Interface) 158°F) 185°F) condensing
Series 2 As-Interface -25°C to 70°C (-13°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, non-
158°F) 185°F) condensing
System power supplies 0 to 60°C (32°F to -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, non-
140°F) 158°F) condensing
System Power Supply -40 to 70°C (-40°F to -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, non-
(Dual DC/DC) 158°F) 158°F) condensing
Legacy DIN rail- -40 to 70°C (-40°F to -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, non-
mounted bulk power 158°F) 158°F) condensing
supply
Legacy Panel-mounted 0 to 60°C (32°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, non-
bulk power supply 140°F) at 300 W and 185°F) condensing
altitude < 914 m (3000
ft)

97
Environmental Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table A-1: Temperature and Relative Humidity Specifications for DeltaV Devices
(continued)

Device Operating Storage Temperature Relative Humidity

Temperature
DeltaV Controller 0 to 55°C (32°F to -40°C to 80°C (-40°F to 10% to 95%, non-
Firewall 131°F) 176°F) condensing
Fiber-Optic Media 0 to 60°C (32°F to -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%
Converter 140°F) 158°F)
Fieldbus H1 Carrier -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, non-
158°F) 185°F) condensing
Round ribbon cable 0°C to 60°C (0°F to -20°C to 70°C (-4°F to 5% to 95%, non-
140°F) 158°F) condensing

Table A-2: Airborne Contaminants, Vibration, and Shock Specifications for DeltaV
Devices
Device Airborne Vibration Shock
Contaminants
Workstation Refer to Refer to Refer to
manufacturer’s manufacturer’s manufacturer’s
specifications specifications specifications
8-port hub Refer to Refer to Refer to
manufacturer’s manufacturer’s manufacturer’s
specifications specifications specifications
All switches in the Refer to Refer to Refer to
preceding table. manufacturer’s manufacturer’s manufacturer’s
specifications specifications specifications
Fieldbus H1 carrier, ISA-S71.04-1985 1 mm peak-to-peak 10 g ½-sinehalf-sine
system power supplies, Airborne from 5 Hz to 16 Hz, 0.5 wave for 11 ms
controllers, Single Port Contaminants Class G3 g from 16 Hz to 150 Hz
Fiber Switch, Remote
Interface Unit,
pre-Series 2 I/O, and
Series 2 I/O
DeltaV Controller Refer to Refer to Refer to
Firewall manufacturer’s manufacturer’s manufacturer’s
specifications specifications specifications
Legacy Bulk power ISA-S71.04-1985 MIL-STD-810D Method MIL-STD-810D Method
supplies Airborne 514.3, Category 1, 516.3, Procedure III
Contaminants Class G2 Procedure I

98
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

B Carrier Specifications
The DeltaV system supports horizontal carriers, vertical carriers, Intrinsically Safe carriers
and the Fieldbus H1 Carrier. There are two types of vertical carriers: Legacy and
VerticalPLUS. VerticalPLUS carriers can be used for both DeltaV basic process control
systems and DeltaV Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS). DeltaV SIS is not supported on
Legacy Vertical carriers. Refer to Appendix M for more information on vertical carriers.
Refer to the Installing Your DeltaV Safety Instrumented System Hardware manual for
instructions on installing an SIS system.

Horizontal Carriers
• 2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier
• 2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier
• 4-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier
• 8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier
• 1-Wide Horizontal Carrier Extenders and Cables (left and right)

VerticalPLUS Carriers
• 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier
• 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier
• 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier
• 8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carriers
• 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders

Legacy Vertical Carriers

• 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier
• 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier (left and right)

Intrinsically Safe Carriers

• Intrinsically Safe Power Supply Carrier
• Intrinsically Safe 8-Wide Horizontal Carrier
• Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator Carrier

B.1 2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier

Table B-1: 2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier Specifications
Item Specification
Capacity One system power supply and one controller or
two system power supplies

99
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure B-1: 2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier Dimensions

B.2 2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier

Table B-2: 2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier Specifications
Item Specification
Capacity One or two redundant system power supplies
Maximum current 13 A total output

100
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure B-2: 2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier Dimensions

Side
View Front View 7.0 cm
(2.8 in.)

+ 12 VDC output
-
9.1 cm +
(3.6 in.) -
DC reference
ground for 24 VDC power
only
16.5 cm
(6.5 in.)
1
12 VDC
Output
Connector

3.1 cm 8.4 cm 10.0 cm

(1.2 in.) (3.3 in.) (3.9 in.)
10.0 cm
(3.9 in.)

B.3 4-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier

Table B-3: 4-Wide I/O Carrier specifications
Item Specification
Capacity Four I/O cards with terminal blocks.
Maximum current LocalBus (powers I/O cards): 8 A. For large
systems, use the LocalBus extenders to add
more power.
Bussed field power bus (per I/O card): 3.2 A at 30
VDC or 250 VAC for each connection.
LocalBus cable lengths 0.87 m (2.8 ft)
1.2 m (3.9 ft) (standard)
1.53 m (5.0 ft)

101
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure B-3: 4-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier Dimensions

Front View

18.14 cm.
(7.14 in.)

102
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Top View

3.44 cm.
(1.35 in.)

Side View

17.71 cm.
(6.97 in.)

The following figure shows the terminal connections for connecting bussed field power to
the 4-Wide I/O Carrier. Note that the positions of the supply and supply return terminals
differ from those of the DeltaV I/O carriers.

103
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure B-4: I/O Carrier parts locator diagram

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Callout Description

1 Supply return connection for I/O Slot 1.

2 Supply connection for I/O Slot 1.

3 Supply return connection for I/O Slot 2.

4 Supply connection for I/O Slot 2.

5 Supply return connection for I/O Slot 3.

6 Supply connection for I/O Slot 3.

7 Supply return connection for I/O Slot 4.

8 Supply connection for I/O Slot 4.

Note
When a 4-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier is used with an M-series controller or
Remote Interface Unit, DeltaV software displays four additional blank I/O slots that do not
exist. For example, if a 4-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier is installed to the right of the
first 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier in the I/O subsystem, DeltaV software displays I/O Slots
9-12 and blank I/O Slots 13-16. If another carrier is installed to the right of the 4-Wide

104
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier, the first slot of that carrier is I/O Slot 17. This behavior
does not occur when the carrier is used with a PK Controller.

B.4 8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier

Item Specification
Capacity Eight I/O cards with terminal blocks.
Maximum current LocalBus (powers I/O cards): 8 A. For large
systems, use the LocalBus extenders to add
more power.
Bussed field power bus
• Carrier with field power for each pair of I/O
cards: 6.5 A at 30 VDC or 250 VAC for each
connection
• Carrier with individual power for each I/O
card: 3.2 A at 30 VDC or 250 VAC for each
connection

LocalBus cable lengths • .87 m (2.8 ft)

• 1.2 m (3.9 ft) (standard)
• 1.53 m (5.0 ft)

Figure B-5: Dimensions of 8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier with field power for
each pair of I/O cards

105
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Note
The 8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier with individual field power for each I/O card is
16.9 cm (6.7 in.) tall. The dimensions of the two types of carrier are identical otherwise.

Related information
System Power Supply (AC/DC)

B.5 1-Wide Horizontal Carrier Extenders and

Cables
The DeltaV system supports left and right 1-wide horizontal carrier extenders. Install the
carrier extenders onto the I/O carriers by sliding together the 48 pin connectors on the
sides of the carriers. The carrier extenders (right side is KJ4001X1-NA1 and left side is
KJ4001X1-NB1) ship with one or two D-shell cables. Typically, one D-shell cable is used;
however, two D-shell cables can also be used. Remember that the length of the LocalBus,
including all cabling cannot exceed 6.5 meters (21.3 feet). Three cable lengths are
available:
• Standard cable (KJ4002X1-BF2), including the left and right carrier extenders, is 1.20
meters (3.9 feet). This cable is typically used for a double door cabinet installation.
Refer to "Cabling Examples" for an installation that uses standard cable.
• Short cable (KJ4002X1-BF3), including the left and right carrier extenders, is .87 meters
(2.8 feet). This cable is typically used for a single door cabinet installation. The
maximum carrier limit is six for this configuration. Figure B-6 on page B-8 shows an
installation that uses short cable.
• Extended cable (KJ4002X1-BF4), including the left and right carrier extenders, is 1.53
meters (5 feet). This cable is typically used for custom installations. Be sure that this
configuration does not exceed the maximum LocalBus length of 6.5 meters (21.3 feet).
Refer to "Cabling Examples" for a custom installation that uses extended cable.
Note
If two D-shell cables are used, they must be routed together from the same source to the
same destination.

The following image shows the carrier extenders.

106
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure B-6: 1-Wide Horizontal Carrier Extenders

Left carrier extender Side view Right carrier extender

White BNC
connector
(for SIS only) Black BNC
Top D-Shell
connector
connector
Top D-Shell (for SIS only)
(44 pin)
connector C D
(44 pins)
A
A
10.2 cm White
(4.0 in.) BNC
connector
16.5 cm (for SIS only)
(6.5 in.) C

LOCK
D-Shell LOCK

connector
(for dual D-Shell
cables only) 48 48 connector
Pin Pin (for dual
B connector connector B cables only)
Black
BNC
connector
+ + (for SIS only)

Jumper D

4.2 cm 3.1 cm
(1.7 in.) (1.2 in.)
4.6 cm
(1.8 in.)

Related information
Cabling Examples

B.5.1 Add External Power at the Left Carrier Extender

Refer to Figure B-7.
1. Remove the jumper on the left carrier extender.
Warning
Removing the jumper removes all 12 VDC power to all cards on all downstream
carriers. When 12 VDC power is removed, cards are unable to hold the last value.

107
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure B-7: Adding External Power at the Left Horizontal Carrier Extender

2. Connect a 12 VDC power supply to the terminal block:

a) + to the center terminal
b) - to the - terminal

B.5.2 Cabling Examples

Figure B-8 shows a single door cabinet installation with short cable (.87 meters/2.8 feet).
Be sure to not exceed the six carrier limit with this type of installation.

108
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure B-8: Single Door Cabinet Installation with Short Cable

Figure B-9 shows a double door cabinet installation with standard cable (1.20 meters/3.9
feet).

109
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure B-9: Double Door Cabinet Installation with Standard Cable

Figure B-10 shows a custom installation with extended length cable (1.53 meters/5 feet).
Be sure that this configuration does not exceed the maximum LocalBus length of 6.5
meters (21.3 feet).

110
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure B-10: Custom Installation with Extended Length Cable

B.6 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier

Table B-4: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier Specifications
Item Specification
Capacity Two system power supplies and two controllers

111
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure B-11: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier Dimensions

Controller

Controller

B.7 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier

Item Specifications
Capacity Two redundant system power supplies
Maximum current 13 A (per output connector)

112
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure B-12: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier Dimensions

Controller

Controller

B.8 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier

Table B-5: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier Specifications
Item Specification
Capacity Two (primary and secondary) SISNet Repeaters

113
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure B-13: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier Dimensions

B.9 8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carrier

Item Specification
Capacity Eight I/O cards with terminal blocks or four Logic
Solvers with terminal blocks
Maximum current LocalBus (powers I/O cards): 15.0 A
Bussed field power (shared by multiple I/O
cards): 3.25 A (for each card); 13.0 A (for a set
of 4 cards) @ 30 VDC or 250 VAC
Carrier extender cable (includes 2 carrier 1.1 m (3.6 ft) standard
extenders and cable) .43 m (1.4 ft)

114
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure B-14: 8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carrier Dimensions

B.10 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders

The 1-wide left and right VerticalPLUS carrier extenders are used to extend power and local
peer bus signals from a left to right 8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface carrier and from a
right to left 8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface carrier. Refer to the Installing Your DeltaV
Safety Instrumented System Hardware manual for information on the local peer bus.

115
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure B-15: 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender Dimensions

B.11 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller

Carrier
Table B-6: 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier (Top/Bottom)
Specifications
Item Specification
Capacity Two system power supplies and two controllers
or three system power supplies and one
controller

116
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure B-16: 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier Dimensions

The dimensions for the bottom Legacy Vertical 4-wide power/controller carrier are the
same as those for the top Legacy Vertical 4-wide power/controller carrier (shown above).
The carrier connector on the bottom Legacy Vertical 4-wide power/controller carrier is
located on the top of the carrier.

B.12 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier

Item Specification
Capacity Eight I/O cards with terminal blocks.
Maximum current LocalBus (powers I/O cards): 15.0 A
Bussed field power bus (shared by multiple
I/O card pairs): 6.5 A @ 30 VDC or 250 VAC (for
each connection)
LocalBus cable Bottom cable extender: 1.0 m (3.3 ft) nominal
length
Top cable extender: 2.0 m (6.6 ft) nominal
length

117
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure B-17: 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier Dimensions

Top View Top View
18.3 cm 18.3 cm
(7.2 in.) (7.2 in.)
9.9 cm 9.9 cm
1 1
(3.9 in.) (3.9 in.)

2.7 cm 2.7 cm
(1.05 in.) (1.05 in.)

Front View Front View

Bussed Field
Power Connector

55.9 cm 55.9 cm
(22.0 in.) (22.0 in.)

3.8 cm 2 3.8 cm
(1.5 in.) (1.5 in.)

Left Side Right Side

Notes:
1 Centerline of mounting screws for DIN rail
2 Clearance recommended on shield bar side of carrier for field wiring

B.13 Fieldbus H1 Carrier

The fieldbus H1 carrier provides an H1 interface to an 8-channel discrete input card, an 8-
channel discrete output card, and terminal blocks. To function correctly, the two cards
must use the same voltage. The H1 carrier mounts on a DIN rail (T-rail only), wall, or panel
and can be enclosed in the H1 carrier enclosure.

118
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table B-7: H1 Carrier Power Specifications

Item Specification
Input power rating +24 VDC ±20% @ 500 mA (maximum)
Output power rating +12 VDC ±5% @ 600 mA (maximum)
Bussed field power (shared by both I/O cards) 6.5 A (maximum)
Fieldbus Port Foundation Fieldbus H1 - 31.25Kbit/second
Fieldbus Power 9 to 32 VDC, 12 mA (maximum)

Figure B-18: H1 Carrier Dimensions

The following figure shows the dimensions for the H1 Carrier enclosure (optional).

119
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure B-19: H1 Carrier Enclosure Dimensions

30.0 cm
(11.81 in.)

23.50 cm 20.0 cm
(9.25 in.) (7.87 in.)

Plate

Carrier

35.0 cm
(13.78 in.)

33.2 cm I/O
(13.07 in.) Card

See Note Door

Enclosure
Mounting Holes (4)
Front View Left Side View
(Looking through Door)

Note
The H1 Carrier Enclosure must be grounded. The Enclosure Ground Kit and instructions for
grounding are included with the enclosure.

B.14 Intrinsically Safe Power Supply Carrier

Table B-8: I.S. Power Supply Carrier Dimensions
Item Specification
Capacity One I.S. Power Supply

120
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure B-20: I.S. Power Supply Carrier Dimensions

B.15 Intrinsically Safe 8-Wide Horizontal Carrier

Table B-9: I.S. 8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier Specifications
Item Specification
Capacity Eight I.S. I/O cards with terminal blocks.
LocalBus cable • 1.20 m (3.94 ft) nominal length
• 2.00 m (6.56 ft) nominal length

121
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure B-21: I.S. 8-Wide Horizontal Carrier Dimensions

B.16 Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator Carrier

Item Specification
Capacity One LocalBus Isolator card

122
 Carrier Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure B-22: I.S. LocalBus Isolator Carrier Dimensions

123
Carrier Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

124
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

C Interface Specifications
This section provides specifications and wiring diagrams for all of the I/O cards and
terminal blocks.

C.1 I/O Cards

The DeltaV I/O subsystem supports multiple types of I/O cards including analog and
discrete input and output cards, HART input and output cards, serial cards, Thermocouple
mV, RTD, ohms and intrinsically safe analog and discrete input and output cards. Bus cards
such as the Fieldbus H1, Profibus DP, AS-Interface, and DeviceNet are also supported. In
addition, some of the Series 2 versions of the cards are available in Redundant mode for
high-availability applications. The I/O subsystem consists of terminal blocks that snap onto
the carrier to provide screw termination for field wiring and the I/O cards which snap over
the terminal blocks and onto the carrier. The I/O cards convert field signals to the
appropriate format for control and communications.

Figure C-1: Standard I/O Card

Up to 64 I/O cards are supported by a single I/O subsystem.

To simplify installation and ensure that the I/O interface is suitable for the plant
environment, I/O terminal blocks have field wiring protection keys that correspond to keys
on the I/O cards. The keys ensure that the I/O card and the I/O terminal block match; an
I/O card plugs into an I/O terminal block only if the keys agree.
Warning
Be sure that your I/O cards and terminal blocks are compatible before plugging in I/O
cards. Card damage can result if an I/O card and terminal block are incompatible.

Related information
I/O Interface Keying
Intrinsically Safe I/O Interface Keying

125
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

C.1.1 DeltaV Series 2 I/O

DeltaV Series 2 I/O cards have a wider operating temperature range than pre-Series 2
cards and some Series 2 cards support redundancy.
The following DeltaV I/O cards are available as Series 2:
• AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (Series 2 simplex)
• AI, 4-20 mA, HART (Series 2 simplex and redundant; 2 and 4 wire)
• AI, 16, Channel, 4-20 mA, HART (Series 2 simplex)
• AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART (Series 2 simplex and redundant)
• AS-Interface (Series 2 simplex)
• DeviceNet (Series 2 simplex)
• DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact (Series 2 simplex and redundant)
• DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated (Series 2 simplex)
• DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact (Series 2 simplex)
• DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated (Series 2 simplex)
• DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact (Series 2 simplex)
• DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side (Series 2 simplex and redundant)
• DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated (Series 2 simplex)
• DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side (Series 2 simplex)
• DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated (Series 2 simplex)
• DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side (Series 2 simplex)
• Series 2 H1 (Series 2 simplex and redundant)
• Isolated Input (Series 2 simplex)
• Multifunction (Series 2 simplex)
• RTD, ohms (Series 2 simplex)
• Thermocouple (Series 2 simplex)
• Series 2 Profibus DP (Series 2 simplex)
• Series 2 Plus Profibus DP (Series 2 simplex and redundant)
• Sequence of Events (Series 2 simplex)
• Series 2 Serial (Series 2 simplex and redundant)
Series 2 redundant capable cards are configured, autosensed, upgraded, and operated
just like pre-Series 2 cards. Series 2 cards in Simplex mode can function as drop-in
replacements for pre-Series 2 cards of the same type. With the exception of the Simplex
mode Series 2 H1 card, which requires the Series 2 H1 terminal block, no wiring change is
required to replace a pre-Series 2 card. Series 2 cards report their operating mode (simplex
or redundant) to the DeltaV controller based on the type of terminal block on which they
are installed. Redundant terminal blocks provide wiring terminations for the redundant

126
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

cards. If a card is installed on a redundant terminal block, it reports itself as operating in

Redundant mode; otherwise, it reports itself as operating in Simplex mode.
Other than redundant terminal blocks, no additional software or hardware is required to
support redundancy. A redundant terminal block spans two adjacent slots on the carrier. A
redundant I/O card consists of two Series 2 cards installed in a redundant terminal block.
Note
For redundant I/O, the lower slot number (in the carrier) in a redundant pair must be odd
and the upper slot number must be the next higher even number. For example, redundant
pairs can be installed in slots 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 9 and 10. Redundant pairs cannot be
installed in slots 6 and 7, 24 and 25. Configuration tools such as the DeltaV Explorer
enforce this requirement.

The double-wide redundant terminal blocks require only a single set of wires for each
redundant channel or fieldbus segment. (The exception is the Redundant Interface
terminal block which uses two sets of wires for the Series 2 Serial card. One set of wires is
used for each interface such as a computer.) The redundant terminal blocks contain screw
terminals appropriate for the card type and signals from the screw terminals are
connected to both cards in a redundant pair.
If all cards are redundant, the controller can support up to 32 redundant pairs. Refer to
DeltaV Books Online for more information on using Series 2 cards in a DeltaV system.

Related information
Environmental Specifications

C.1.2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA

The DeltaV system supports the following types of AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA cards:
• AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA
• AI, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, HART (2 and 4-wire)
• Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, Simplex mode (2-wire)
• Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, HART, Simplex mode and Redundant mode (2 and 4-
wire)

Installation Notes
• The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field wiring
for the AI, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, AI, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, HART and the Series 2 AI, 8-
Channel, 4–20 mA, HART cards. Optional terminal blocks are the fused and 4-wire I/O
blocks, the 16 pin mass termination block for 2-wire applications, and the 24-pin mass
termination block for 4-wire applications.
• The Redundant Analog Input terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for Series 2 Redundant AI, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, HART
cards for either 2-wire or 4-wire applications.
• To function correctly, the AI cards require that 24 VDC be supplied through the bussed
field power connection. The 4-wire termination block is designed for use with 4-wire
field-powered transmitters. Power for these transmitters must be provided from an
appropriate external power source. See the transmitter specifications for power source

127
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

information. For example, if you are using the DeltaV AI, 4–20 mA I/O card with a
DeltaV 4-wire Termination Block, an external power source must be connected to the
4-wire transmitter.
• The open HART protocol layers digital information on the standard analog 4-20 mA
process signal.

Specifications
Table C-1: AI, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, Specifications (HART and Series 2)
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full signal range 1 to 22.5 mA, with overrange checking
Valid range for LED indication 0.75 to 23 mA
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 120 mA typical, 150 mA maximum
Series 2 (for each card in Redundant mode
only1):
• 175 mA typical
• 250 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card 300 mA maximum at 24 VDC (±10%)

Field circuit per channel 32 mA maximum
Series 2:
• 30 mA maximum

Accuracy over temperature range 0.1% of span

Resolution 16 bits
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Rolloff frequency -3 dB at 2.7 Hz, -20.5 dB at one-half the
sampling frequency
Calibration None required
Communications Support (only for version with • HART pass-through request/response
HART)
• HART variable report
• Field device status report

HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel

Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

1 Double for a redundant pair.

128
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-2: Wiring Diagram for 2-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA and AI, 8-Channel, 4–
20 mA, HART
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O Card

Optional fuse Common

connection
(Odd no.) for 8 channels

+ Current
2-Wire analog limiter
and/or HART
field transmitter A/D
T System
Converter

Low
pass
-
(Even no.)
filter
250 Ω

I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

129
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-3: Wiring Diagram for Series 2, 2-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, HART in
Simplex Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

Optional fuse + -
Termination I/O Card
Common
connection
for 8 channels
(Odd no.)
+ Current
limiter

2-wire analog
A/D
and/or HART
Converter
field transmitter
T
System

Low
pass
-
(Even no.)
filter

250 Ω

I/O
Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

130
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-4: Wiring Diagram for Series 2, 2-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, HART in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ - + -
2-Wire Primary I/O card
redundant
termination Common
Current connections
limiter for 8 channels
A/D
System
Converter
Low pass
(Odd no.) filter
+
250 Ω
2-Wire analog
and/or HART
field transmitter
T
Secondary I/O card

Current
limiter
-
(Even no.) A/D System
Relay Converter
Low pass
filter

Mode
250 Ω

Redundant
analog input
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-

Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

131
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-5: Wiring Diagram for Series 2, 4-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, HART in
Simplex Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
4-Wire I/O Card Common
termination connection
(Odd no.) for 8 channels
4-Wire analog and/or
HART field transmitter + Low
pass
A/D System
(with user supplied power Converter
and isolated current output) filter

T 250 Ω

-
(Even no.)
4-Wire I/O terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

132
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-6: Wiring Diagram for Series 2, 4-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, HART in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ - + -
4-wire Primary I/O card
Relay redundant
termination Common
connections
for 8 channels
Mode
Low pass A/D
filter Converter System
(Odd no.)
4-Wire analog
and/or HART field + 250 Ω
transmitter (with user
supplied power and
isolated current output)
T
Secondary I/O card

-
(Even no.) Low pass A/D
filter Converter System

250 Ω

Redundant analog
input terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-

Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

Related information
16-Pin Mass Termination Block
24-Pin Mass Termination Block
Redundant Analog Input Terminal Block
I/O Terminal Blocks

C.1.3 AI, 8-Channel, 1-5 VDC

Installation Notes
• The 4-wire I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the AI, 8-Channel, 1–5 VDC card. The 24-pin mass termination block can also
be used.
• The AI, 1–5 VDC card does not provide power to the field transmitter. To function
correctly, the AI cards require that 24 VDC power be connected for field power.

133
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Specifications
Table C-2: AI, 8-Channel, 1–5 VDC Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Nominal signal range (span) 1 to 5 VDC
Full signal range 0.25 to 5.64 VDC, with overrange checking
Valid range for LED indication 0.18 to 5.77 VDC
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 100 mA typical
• 150 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card 100 mA (used on card) at 24 VDC (±10%)
Input impedance 2 MΩ
Accuracy over temperature range 0.1% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Rolloff frequency • -3 dB at 1.3 Hz
• -25 dB at one-half the sampling frequency

Calibration None required

Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

134
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-7: Wiring Diagram for AI, 8-Channel, 1–5 VDC

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
4-Wire I/O Card Common
termination connection
4-Wire analog and/or (Odd no.) for 8 channels
HART field transmitter
(with user-supplied power
+ Low
pass A/D
Converter
System
filter
and isolated voltage output)
T

-
(Even no.)
4-Wire I/O terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
24-Pin Mass Termination Block
I/O Terminal Blocks

C.1.4 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART

The DeltaV system supports the Series 2 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card in Simplex
mode and the AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART, Series 2 Plus card in redundant mode.

Installation Notes
• The 16-channel Analog Input terminal block provides screw terminations for field
wiring for the simplex Series 2 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card used with 2-wire
field devices.
• The 4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block provides screw terminations for
field wiring for the simplex, Series 2 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card used with 4-
wire field devices.
• The Redundant 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block provides screw terminations
for a redundant pair of AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART, Series 2 Plus cards used with 2-
or 4-wire field devices.
• The Redundant Analog Input 48-Pin Mass Termination Block can also be used to
provide terminations for a redundant pair of AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART, Series 2
Plus cards.The AI/AO Mass Connection Board can be used to provide an interface to the
AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART, Series 2 Plus card used with the Redundant Analog
Input 48-Pin Mass Termination Block.

135
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

• To function correctly, the card requires that 24 VDC be supplied through the bussed
field power connection.

Specifications
Table C-3: AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART (Series 2 and Series 2 Plus)
Item Specifications
Number of channels 16
Isolation Field to system isolation is factory tested to
1000 VDC. No channel to channel isolation.
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full signal range 2 to 22 mA
2-wire transmitter power 13.5 V min. at 20 mA (current limited to 29 mA
maximum)
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal) 85 mA typical, 150 mA maximum
Field circuit power (per card) 600 mA maximum at 24 VDC (±10%)
Field circuit per channel 30 mA maximum
Accuracy over temperature range 0.2% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Filtering • -3 db at 2.7 Hz
• -6 db at 4.6 Hz
• -20.5 db at 20 Hz
• -34 db at 50 Hz
• -90 db at 1200 Hz

Rolloff frequency -3 dB at 2.7 Hz, -20.5 dB at one-half the

sampling frequency
Calibration None required
Communications support • HART pass-through request/response
• HART variable report
• Field device status report

HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel

Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

136
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-8: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 AI, 16-channel, 4-20 mA, HART connected to a
two-wire device
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O Card
(Odd no.) Common
connection
+ Current
limiter
for 16 channels

2-Wire analog and/or

HART field transmitter A/D
T Converter System
Low
pass
(Even no.)
- filter

250 Ω

AI 16-channel Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
terminal block 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

137
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-9: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 AI, 16-channel, 4-20 mA, HART connected to a
4-wire device
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
4-wire I/O Card
Termination Common
connection
for 16 channels

A/D
(Odd no.) Converter System
+ Low
pass
filter
4-Wire analog and/or
HART field transmitter
T
250 Ω

(Even no.) -
4-wire 16-channel
Analog Input Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
terminal block 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

138
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-10: Wiring Diagram for Redundant AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART, Series 2
Plus
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ - + -
Redundant Primary I/O card
termination
Common
Current connections
limiter for 16 channels
A/D
System
Converter
Low pass
filter

+ 250 Ω

2-Wire analog
and/or HART
field transmitter T
Secondary I/O card

- Current
limiter
4-Wire analog
and/or HART
+ Relay
A/D
Converter
System
field transmitter Low pass
filter
T
Mode
250 Ω

Redundant 16-channel
Analog Input terminal
block 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 31 34 37 40 43 46

2-wire 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 44 47

+
–
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 4-wire

–
CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Related information
16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

C.1.5 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA

The DeltaV system supports the following types of AO, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA cards:
• AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA
• AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART
• Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART (Simplex and Redundant modes)

139
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Installation Notes
• The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field wiring for the
AO, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, AO, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, HART and the Series 2 AO, 8-
Channel, 4–20 mA, HART cards in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the
fused I/O block and the 16-pin mass termination block.
• The Redundant Analog Output terminal block is recommended to provide
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, HART card in
Redundant mode.
• The open HART protocol layers digital information on the standard analog 4-20 mA
process signal.

Specifications
Table C-4: AO, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA Specifications (HART and Series 2)
Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full signal range 1 mA to 23 mA
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 120 mA typical, 150 mA maximum
Series 2 (for each card in Redundant mode
only 1 :)
• 175 mA typical
• 250 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card 300 mA maximum at 24 VDC (±10%)

Accuracy over temperature range 0.25% of span (0 - 60°C)
Series 2:
• 0.25% (0 to 60°C)
• 0.4% (-40 to 70°C)

Resolution • 12 bits for AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA

• 14 bits for AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART
• 14 bits for Series 2 AO, 8-channel, 4-20
mA, HART

Output compliance 20 mA at 21.6 VDC supply into 700 Ω load

Calibration Information stored on card
Communications Support (only for version with • HART pass-through request/response
HART)
• HART variable report
• Field device status report

HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel

140
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-4: AO, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA Specifications (HART and Series 2) (continued)
Item Specifications
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

1 Double for a redundant pair.

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-11: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, HART in Simplex
Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
4-20 mA current source
- +
I/O Card Common Termination
connection
for 8 channels

Optional fuse

D/A
System Converter
(Odd no.)
+
4-20 mA device and/or HART
Load

-
(Even no.) I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

141
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-12: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA, HART in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

- + - +
Primary I/O card Redundant
Common termination
connections
for 8 channels
Mode Relay
System D/A
Converter

(Odd no.)
+
4-20 mA device
Load and/or HART
Secondary I/O card

-
(Even no.)
System D/A
Converter

Redundant analog
output terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-

Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

Related information
I/O Terminal Blocks
16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block
Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block

C.1.6 AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus

Installation notes
• The Redundant 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block is recommended to provide
screw terminations for a redundant pair of AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2
Plus cards.
• The Simplex 16-Channel Analog Output terminal Block provides screw terminations for
the AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus card in Simplex mode.

142
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Specifications
Table C-5: AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels 16
Isolation Each channel is galvanically isolated from the
system and factory tested to 1000 VDC. (No
channel to channel isolation.)
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full signal range 1 to 23 mA
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 260 mA maximum in redundant configurations
Field power (per card) 400 mA maximum at 24 VDC
Accuracy over temperature range 0.25% of span
Resolution 14 bits
Output compliance • Voltage to load: 14 V minimum @ 20 mA
• Load Resistance: 700 Ω maximum

Open loop detection Detection threshold: 0.70 mA

HART communications support • HART pass-through request/response
• HART variable report
• Field device status report

HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel

Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

143
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Wiring diagram

Figure C-13: Wiring diagram for AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

- + - +
Primary I/O card Redundant
termination
Common
connections
for 16 channels
Mode Relay
System D/A
Converter

(Odd no.)
+
4-20 mA device
Load and/or HART
Secondary I/O card

-
(Even no.)
System D/A
Converter

Redundant 16 Channel Analog

Output Terminal Block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
–

CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

144
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-14: Wiring diagram for AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus
(Simplex)
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

- +
Primary I/O card
Common
connections
for 16 channels

System D/A
Converter
(Odd no.)
+
4-20 mA device
Load and/or HART

-
(Even no.)

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
Simplex 16-Channel Analog
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 Output Terminal Block
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

C.1.7 AS-Interface
The DeltaV system supports the Actuator Sensor-Interface card (AS-Interface) and the
Series 2 AS-Interface card in Simplex mode.
The AS-Interface is a digital, serial, bi-directional communications protocol and bus system
that interconnects simple binary on/off devices such as actuators, sensors, and discrete
devices in the field. The AS-Interface standard is defined by CENELEC standard EN 50295.
The two-conductor AS-Interface cable supplies both power and data for field devices. An
AS-Interface network can include branches. The total cable length, (main line and all
branches), cannot exceed 100 meters. Refer to the following table for AS-Interface cable
distance limits and to the AS-Interface standard (EN 50295) for design and engineering
details on AS-Interface cable.

145
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-6: AS-Interface Cable Distance Limits

Item Specification
Recommended cable Unshielded AS-Interface yellow cable1
Distance limits • 100 meters total length (main line and
branches) without repeater or extender
• 300 meters total length (main line and
branches) with two repeaters2
• 300 meters total length (main line and
branches) with one extender and one
repeater

1 Any other cable, shielded or unshielded, can be used if the installation meets all the impedance
requirements specified in the AS-Interface standard (EN 50295).
2 Repeaters require an additional AS-Interface power supply on the far side of the repeater.

For more information on the AS-Interface and for information on installing AS-Interface
devices, refer to the AS-Interface web site at www.as-interface.com.

Installation Notes
• The Interface terminal block provides terminations for field wiring for the AS-Interface
card and the Series 2 AS-Interface card in Simplex mode.
• It is recommended that you do not connect the AS-Interface devices directly to the AS-
Interface card terminals. Use one AS-Interface cable to connect the AS-Interface card to
the power supply and use another AS-Interface cable to connect the devices to the
power supply.
• If you are using extenders and repeaters, refer to the device data sheet for additional
cabling recommendations.
• The AS-Interface bus requires a special AS-Interface power supply (purchased
separately) that provides electrical isolation from the data signals. A standard power
supply can be used but it must have a conditioning module added to its output. Refer
to the AS-Interface standard (EN 50295) for design and engineering details on the AS-
Interface power supply.
• The "System Power Guidelines" section provides information on extending power to an
AS-Interface bus.
Table C-7: AS-Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Number of ports Two
Port Type Actuator Sensor-Interface – 167 kb/second
Isolation Each port is optically isolated from the system
and from each other and factory tested to 1500
VDC.
LocalBus Current 300 mA (max)
24 VDC Field circuit power, per card None
30 VDC AS-Interface field power per port 70 mA (max)

146
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-7: AS-Interface Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-15: Wiring Diagram for AS-Interface

Carrier

I/O Card Termination

AS-i 1 AS-i ( ) +
Encoder/
decoder 2 AS-i ( ) - Port
1
3, 5, 7 AS-i ( ) +
System
4, 6, 8 AS-i ( ) -

AS-i 9 AS-i ( ) +
Encoder/
decoder 10 AS-i ( ) -
Port
2
11, 13, 15 AS-i ( ) +
12, 14, 16 AS-i ( ) -
Interface terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
AS-i +
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
AS-i -
Port Port
1 2

Related information
Interface Terminal Block
System Power Guidelines

C.1.8 DeviceNet
The DeltaV system supports the DeviceNet card and Series 2 DeviceNet card in Simplex
mode.
DeviceNet is an all digital, serial, bi-directional communication protocol that interconnects
devices in the field. For information on installing DeviceNet devices, refer to the DeviceNet
web site at www.odva.org.

147
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Installation Notes
• The Fieldbus H1 terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field
wiring for the DeviceNet card and Series 2 DeviceNet card in Simplex mode. The key on
the H1 terminal block is set to D6 at the factory. Change the key position to D5 to
match the key on the Series 2 DeviceNet card.
• The shield on the terminal block can be grounded at pin 8 if required by the
application. Refer to Figure C-16.
• The section "System Power Guidelines" provides information on extending power to a
DeviceNet network.

Specifications
Table C-8: DeviceNet Interface Specifications (includes Series 2)
Item Specification
Number of Ports One
Port Type DeviceNet
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 400 mA typical, 600 mA maximum
Field circuit power (24 VDC nominal), per card 40 mA maximum at 24 VDC (±10%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

148
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-16: Wiring Diagram for DeviceNet

Carrier

I/O Card Termination

5 +24 VDC
Regulator

1 24 VDC return

3 Shield
System

8 Shield

4 CAN HI

2 CAN LO

Fieldbus H1 terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 block (change key
position to D5)

-
V CL S CH V
+ S

Related information
System Power Guidelines
Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block

C.1.9 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact

The DeltaV system supports the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card and the Series 2
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card (Simplex and Redundant modes).

Installation Notes
• The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card and the Series 2 DI, 8-Channel,
24 VDC, Dry Contact card in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the I/O
terminal block and the 16-pin mass termination block.
• The Redundant Discrete terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations
for field wiring for the Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card in Redundant
mode.
• Compatibility with NAMUR Sensors — The Series 2 DI, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Dry
Contact card is compatible with many NAMUR sensors that operate within an
excitation voltage range of 5 to 18 V. Emerson recommends testing your application if

149
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

it includes NAMUR sensors. You may need to adjust the field circuit power by altering
the supply voltage in order to ensure proper operation. NAMUR sensors not designed
to operate in the 5 to 18 V range may not work with Series 2 DI, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Dry
Contact cards.
• Line Fault Detection — The Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC Dry Contact card has line
fault detection for detecting open or short circuits in field wiring. To use this capability
you must:
— Enable line fault detection in your configuration. Enable line fault detection on a
channel-by-channel basis when you configure the channels.
— Connect the dry contact to external resistors. Connect the dry contact to a 6.8 KΩ
resistor in parallel (allows the open circuit detection) and a 2.4 KW resistor in series
(allows short circuit detection).

Figure C-17: External Line Fault Detection Resistors

(Odd no.)
+ 2.4KΩ

6.8KΩ

-
(Even no.)

Line Fault Detection Value Detected

Short Circuit <100 Ω for guaranteed short circuit
detection
Open Circuit >100 kΩ for guaranteed open loop detection

— Line Fault Detection in NAMUR Sensors — Line fault detection is built into NAMUR
sensors. Do not use external resistors with NAMUR sensors; however, you must
enable line fault detection in your configuration when using NAMUR sensors.

Specifications
Table C-9: DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact Specifications (includes Series 2)
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Detection level for On > 2.2 mA
Detection level for Off < 1 mA
Impedance 5 kΩ

150
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-9: DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact Specifications (includes Series 2)
(continued)

Item Specification
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 75 mA typical
• 100 mA maximum
Series 2:
• 90 mA typical
• 150 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card 100 mA at 24 VDC (±10%)

Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-18: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
Optional fuse field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O Card
Common
connection
for 8 channels
System

(Odd no.)
+

I/O Terminal block -

(Even no.)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

151
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-19: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact in
Simplex Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
Optional fuse
+ -
Termination I/O Card
Common
connection
for 8 channels
(Odd no.)
System
+ 5K Ω

Logic

-
(Even no.)

I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

152
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-20: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ - + -
Redundant Primary I/O card
termination Common
connections
for 8 channels
Mode
Relay System
5K Ω

(Odd no.) Logic

+

Secondary I/O card

5K Ω System

Logic
-
(Even no.)

Redundant
discrete
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-

Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

Related information
I/O Terminal Blocks
16-Pin Mass Termination Block
Redundant Discrete Terminal Block

C.1.10 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated

The DeltaV system supports the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DI,
8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes
• The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field wiring
for the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC,
Isolated card in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the fused I/O terminal
block and the 16-pin mass termination block.
• If you use a mass termination block with the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card, refer
to the termination block specifications for the input rating for each block. Those

153
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed in the following
table.

Specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system and from each other and factory tested
to 1500 VDC.
Detection level for On > 10 VDC
Detection level for Off < 5 VDC
Input impedance 5 kΩ
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 75 mA typical
• 100 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card None

Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-21: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated

Optional fuse Carrier

Termination I/O Card

(Odd no.) System

+ + 5K Ω
24
VDC
Source
- -
(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
I/O Terminal Blocks
16-Pin Mass Termination Block

154
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

C.1.11 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact

The DeltaV system supports the DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC Dry Contact card and the Series 2
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC Dry Contact card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes
The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact card and the Series 2 DI, 8-channel, 120
VAC, Dry Contact card in Simplex mode. An optional terminal block is the I/O block.

Specifications

Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system at 250 VAC.
Detection level for On > 1.4 mA
Detection level for Off < 0.56 mA
Impedance 60 kΩ
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 75 mA
• 100 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card 15 mA at 120 VAC

Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

155
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-22: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact
Carrier
120 VAC Bussed
field power connection
Optional fuse
L N
Termination I/O Card

Common
(Odd no.) connection
+ for 8 channels

System

-
(Even no.)

I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
I/O Terminal Blocks

C.1.12 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated

The DeltaV system supports the DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DI,
8-channel, 120 VAC, Isolated card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes
The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field wiring for
the DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, Isolated
card in Simplex mode. An optional terminal block is the Fused I/O block.

Specifications
Table C-10: DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated Specifications
Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system at 250 VAC and from other channels at
250 VAC.
Detection level for On 84 VAC to 130 VAC1

156
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-10: DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated Specifications (continued)

Item Specifications
Detection level for Off 0 VAC to 34 VAC
Input load (contact cleaning) 2 mA at 120 VAC
Input impedance 60 kΩ
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 75 mA typical
• 100 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card None

Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

1 Phase should be considered when applying AC voltage to multiple input channels.

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-23: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated
Carrier
Optional fuse

Termination I/O Card

(Odd no.)
L + 60K Ω System
120
VAC
Source
N -
(Even no.)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
I/O Terminal block
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
I/O Terminal Blocks

C.1.13 DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact

Installation Notes
The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DI, 8-channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact card. An optional terminal block is the
I/O block.

157
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Specifications
Table C-11: DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact Specifications
Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system at 250 VAC.
Detection level for On > 0.71 mA
Detection level for Off < 0.28 mA
Impedance 238 kΩ
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 75 mA
• 100 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card 7 mA at 230 VAC

Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-24: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact
Carrier
230 VAC Bussed
field power connection
Optional fuse
L N
Termination I/O Card
Common
(Odd no.) connection
+ for 8 channels

System

-
(Even no.)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
I/O Terminal block
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
I/O Terminal Blocks

158
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

C.1.14 DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated

Installation Notes
The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field wiring for
the DI, 8-channel, 230 VAC, Isolated card. An optional terminal block is the Fused I/O
block.

Specifications
Table C-12: DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system at 250 VAC and from other channels at
250 VAC.
Detection level for On 168 VAC to 250 VAC
Detection level for Off 0 VAC to 68 VAC
Input load (contact cleaning) 1 mA at 230 VAC
Input impedance 238 kΩ
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 75 mA
• 100 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card None

Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

159
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-25: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated
Carrier
Optional fuse

Termination I/O Card

(Odd no.)
L + 238K Ω System
230
VAC
Source
N -
(Even no.)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
I/O Terminal block
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
I/O Terminal Blocks

C.1.15 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact

The DeltaV system supports the DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card and the Series 2
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card in simplex mode and the DI, 32-Channel, 24
VDC, Dry Contact Series 2 Plus card in redundant mode.

Installation Notes
• The 32-Channel terminal block can provide screw terminations for field wiring for the
simplex DI, 32-channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact and Series 2 DI, 32-channel, 24 VDC, Dry
Contact cards in simplex mode.
• The 40-pin mass termination block can provide terminations for field wiring for the
simplex DI, 32-channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact and Series 2 DI, 32-channel, 24 VDC, Dry
Contact cards.
• The DI Mass Connection Board (single) or the DI Mass Connection Solution (two) can be
used to provide an interface to the Series 2 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card
used with the 40-pin mass termination block in simplex mode.
• The Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Input Terminal Block is recommended to provide
screw terminations for field wiring for the redundant DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry
Contact Series 2 Plus card.

160
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

• The Redundant Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination Block can be used to provide
terminations for a redundant pair of DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact Series 2 Plus
cards
• The Series 2 Plus DI Mass Connection Board (single) or the Series 2 Plus DI Mass
Connection Solution (two) can be used to provide an interface to the DI, 32-Channel,
24 VDC Dry Contact Series 2 Plus card used with the Redundant Discrete Input 40-Pin
Mass Termination Block.
• For the Series 2 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card, the return connection for all
32 channels is the 24 VDC field power ground. You must supply an external wire to
make this connection. However the connection is internally made if the 40-pin mass
termination block is used and no external wire is required.
• For the DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact Series 2 Plus card, the common
connection for all 32 channels is the 24 VDC field power. You must supply an external
wire to make this connection. However the connection is internally made if the 40-pin
mass termination block is used and no external wire is required.
• When the redundant DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact, Series 2 Plus card is used
with the Redundant Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination Block and the DI Mass
Connection Solution, the card can be configured to detect faults in the termination.
Two parameters, T1_FAULT_DETECT (for the ribbon cable connection for channels
1-16), and T2_FAULT_DETECT (for the ribbon cable connection for channels 17-32),
can be enabled in DeltaV Explorer for the card. When these parameters are set to True,
detection of the ribbon cable connection between the Redundant Discrete Input 40 Pin
Mass Termination Block and the DI Mass Connection Board is enabled and the system
detects faults such as a missing cable or missing Mass Connection Board.
Note
The termination fault detection feature is available only when the redundant DI, 32-
Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact Series 2 Plus card is used with the Redundant Discrete Input
40-Pin Mass Termination Block connected to the DI Mass Connection Solution.

Specifications
Table C-13: DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact (includes Series 2 and Series 2 Plus)
Item Specification
Number of channels 32
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Detection level for ON > 2 mA
Detection level for OFF < 0.25 mA
Impedance 5 KΩ
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card • 50 mA typical
• 75 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card 150 mA at 24 VDC (±10%)

Series 2: 150 mA at 24 VDC (-15%/+20%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

161
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-26: Wiring Diagram for DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC Dry Contact and Series 2
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O Card Common
connection
System for 32
channels
32-Channel terminal
block (the numbers
indicate the channel
assigments)
+

1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29

2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30

3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

162
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-27: Wiring Diagram for DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC Dry Contact, Series 2 Plus
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

- +
Redundant Primary I/O card
termination Common
connections
for 32 channels

System

Secondary I/O card

Common
connections
for 32 channels

System

Redundant 32-channel
terminal block (numbers 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
indicate channel
assignments)

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

Related information
32-Channel Terminal Block
40-Pin Mass Termination Block

C.1.16 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side

The DeltaV system supports the DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card and the Series 2
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card (Simplex and Redundant modes).

Installation Notes
• The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, High-Side and the Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 24
VDC, High-Side card in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the I/O terminal
block, and the 10 and 16-pin mass termination blocks.
• If you use a mass termination block with the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, High-Side I/O
card, refer to the termination block specifications for the output rating for each block.

163
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Those specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed in Table
C-14.
• The Redundant Discrete terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations
for field wiring for the Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card.
• Line Fault Detection — The Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC High-Side card has line
fault detection that can be enabled on a channel-by-channel basis as a configuration
item. When line fault detection is enabled, the card detects open and short line fault
conditions by performing an internal readback of the output to verify its value in both
on and off states. The card tests the opposite state of its current value by temporarily
changing the output to that value, performing the internal readback, then returning
the output to its configured output value. The pulses to the opposite state are never
greater than 200 µSec. High speed inputs that connect to a DO channel with line fault
enabled must consider these pulses in the input software scheme. When line fault
detection is not enabled, a more limited detection of open and short line fault
conditions is available on the active redundant card only. This is accomplished by the
internal readback mechanism without pulsing the output to the opposite state.
Therefore, shorts can be detected only when the DO channel is on, and opens can be
detected only when the DO channel is off. When line fault detection is not enabled, and
the card is simplex, line fault tests do not run and line fault conditions are not reported.

Line Fault Detection Value Detected

Short Circuit < 5 Ω for > 3 seconds
Open Circuit — >25 KΩ for guaranteed open loop
detection
— < 8 KΩ for guaranteed no open loop
detection

• When pulse testing is enabled, the LED on the output device may be slightly
illuminated.
Note
Line fault detection is not compatible with significant capacitive loading (cable + load > 30
nF) and must be disabled under these conditions.

Specifications
Table C-14: DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side Specifications (includes Series 2)
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Output range 2 VDC to 60 VDC
Series 2: 24 VDC ±10%
Output rating 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 4.0 A for
<100 ms; 6.0 A for <20 ms); 3.0 A maximum per
card
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A (inrush 5.0 A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty
cycle)

164
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-14: DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side Specifications (includes Series 2)

(continued)

Item Specification
Off-state leakage 1.2 mA maximum
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 100 mA typical
• 150 mA maximum
Series 2:
• 90 mA typical
• 150 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card 3.0 A at 24 VDC (±10%)

Configurable channel types:
Discrete Output • If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value
(default): Output stays in last state
submitted by the controller.
• If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value.

Momentary Output • If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value

(default): Output finishes current pulse.
• If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.

Continuous Pulse Output • If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value

(default): Output continues pulsing.
• If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.

Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

165
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-28: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side in Simplex
Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
I/O Card Termination Optional fuse
Common
connection
for 8
channels
(Odd no.)
System
+
Load

-
(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
- 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

166
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-29: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ - + -
Primary Redundant
I/O card termination
Common
connections
for 8 channels
System Relay
Mode

(Odd no.)
+
Secondary
I/O card
Load

System
-
(Even no.)

Redundant discrete
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-

Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

Related information
I/O Terminal Blocks
Redundant Discrete Terminal Block

C.1.17 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated

The DeltaV system supports the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DO,
8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes
• The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field wiring
for the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC,
Isolated card in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the Fused I/O terminal
block and 16-pin mass termination block.
• If you use a mass termination block with the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card,
refer to the termination block specifications for the output rating for each block. Those

167
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed in the following
table.
• This card requires snubbers for inductive loads. Refer to the Related information
section of this topic for links to additional information.

Specifications
Table C-15: DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system and from each other and factory tested
to 1500 VDC.
Output range 2 VDC to 60 VDC
Output rating 1.0 A (inrush 4.0 A for <100 ms; 6.0 A for <20
ms)
Off-state leakage 1.2 mA maximum
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 100 mA typical
• 150 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card None

Configurable channel types:
Discrete Output • If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value
(default): Output stays in last state
submitted by the controller.
• If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value.

Momentary Output • If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value

(default): Output finishes current pulse.
• If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.

Continuous Pulse Output • If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value

(default): Output continues pulsing.
• If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.

Optional fuse 2.0 A (inrush 5.0 A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty

cycle)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

168
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-30: Wiring Diagram for DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated

Carrier Optional fuse

I/O Card Termination

(Odd no.)
System + +
DC
Power
supply
S
-
(Even no.) Solenoid
-

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
- I/O Terminal block

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
I/O Terminal Blocks
16-Pin Mass Termination Block
10-Pin Mass Termination Block
Implementing Bussed Field Power for Applications using DI and DO Cards
Sizing R-C Snubbers

C.1.18 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side

The DeltaV system supports the DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, High-Side card and the
Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, High-Side card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes
The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, High-Side card and the Series 2 DO, 8-
channel, 120/230 VAC, High-Side card in Simplex mode. An optional terminal block is the
I/O terminal block.

Specifications
Table C-16: DO, 8-Channel, 120/230 VAC, High-Side Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system at 250 VAC.

169
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-16: DO, 8-Channel, 120/230 VAC, High-Side Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Output range 20 VAC to 250 VAC
Output rating • 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A for
< 100 ms; 20 A for < 20 ms)
• 3.0 A maximum per card up to 5°C
• 2.0 A maximum per card up to 60°C
Series 2:
• 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A
for < 100 ms; 20 A for < 20 ms)
• 3.0 A maximum per card

Optional fuse 2.0 A (inrush 5A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cycle)

Off state leakage 2 mA maximum at 120 VAC, 4 mA maximum at
230 VAC
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 100 mA typical
• 150 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card 3.0 A at 120 VAC or 230 VAC per I/O Interface
Configurable channel types:
Discrete Output • If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value
(default): Output stays in last state
submitted by the controller.
• If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value.

Momentary Output • If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value

(default): Output finishes current pulse.
• If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.

Continuous Pulse Output • If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value

(default): Output continues pulsing.
• If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.

Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

170
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-31: Wiring Diagram for DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side
Carrier
120/230 VAC Bussed AC
field power connection
L N
I/O Card Termination
Optional fuse
Common
connection
for 8 channels (Odd no.)
System +
Load

-(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
I/O Terminal Blocks

C.1.19 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated

The DeltaV system supports the DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, Isolated card and the Series
2 DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, Isolated card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes
The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field wiring for
the DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 120/230
VAC, Isolated card in Simplex mode. An optional terminal block is the Fused I/O block.
Table C-17: DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated Specifications
Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system at 250 VAC and from other channels at
250 VAC.
Output range 20 VAC to 250 VAC

171
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-17: DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated Specifications (continued)
Item Specifications
Output rating • 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A for
<100 ms; 20 A for <20 ms)
• 3.0 A maximum per card up to 50°C (122°F)
• 2.0 A maximum per card up to 60°C (140°F)
Series 2:
• 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A
for <100 ms; 20 A for <20 ms)
• 3.0 A maximum per card

Optional fuse 2.0 A (inrush 5A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cycle)

Off state leakage • 2 mA maximum at 120 VAC
• 4 mA maximum at 230 VAC

LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 100 mA typical

• 150 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card None

Configurable channel types:
Discrete Output • If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value
(default): Output stays in last state
submitted by the controller.
• If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value.

Momentary Output • If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value

(default): Output finishes current pulse.
• If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.

Continuous Pulse Output • If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value

(default): Output continues pulsing.
• If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.

Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

172
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-32: Wiring Diagram for DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated
Carrier
Optional fuse

I/O Card Termination

120/230 VAC Power

(Odd no.)
System + L N

Load
-
(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
I/O Terminal Blocks

C.1.20 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side

The DeltaV system supports the DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High Side card and the Series 2
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High Side card in simplex mode and the DO, 32-Channel, 24
VDC High-Side, Series 2 Plus card in redundant mode.

Installation Notes
• The DO Mass Connection Board (single) or the DO Mass Connection Solution (two) can
be used to provide an interface to the simplex DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card
used with the 40-pin mass termination block.
• The Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Output Terminal Block and the Redundant
Discrete Output 40 Pin Mass Termination Block can be used with the redundant DO,
32-Channel, 24 VDC High-Side Series 2 Plus card.
• The DO Mass Connection Board (single) or the DO Mass Connection Solution (two) can
be used to provide an interface to the redundant DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side
Series 2 Plus card used with the Redundant Discrete Output 40 Pin Mass Termination
Block.
• The return connection for all 32 channels is the 24 VDC Field Power Ground. You must
supply an external wire to make this connection. However the connection is internally
made if the 40-pin mass termination block is used with the Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24
VDC, High Side card and no external wire is required. A resettable 1A fuse protects each

173
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

group of four channels (1-4, 5-8,...29-32) from a short circuit. Excessive current on any
single channel can trip the fuse and disable all four channels in the group. If the fuse
trips, turn off or disconnect the group of four channels and allow the fuse to cool and
reset.

Specifications
Table C-18: DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side (includes Series 2 and Series 2 Plus)
Item Specification
Number of channels 32
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system and factory tested to 1500 VDC
Output range 24 VDC (±10%)
Series 2: 24 VDC (-15%/+20%)
Output rating 100 mA per channel
Off-state leakage 0.1 mA maximum
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card • 100 mA typical
• 150 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card 3.2 A at 24 VDC (±10%)

Series 2: 3.2 A at 24 VDC (-15%/+20%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

174
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-33: Wiring Diagram for DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
I/O Card Termination

Common
connection for
32 channels Load
System

32-Channel terminal
block (the numbers
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 indicate the channel
assigments)
2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30

3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

175
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-34: Wiring diagram for redundant DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC High-Side Series
2 Plus card
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ – + –
Primary I/O card Redundant
DO 40 pin
Common Mass Term
connections Block
for 32 channels

System

Secondary I/O card

Common
connections
for 32 channels
Load
System

Related information
32-Channel Terminal Block
40-Pin Mass Termination Block

C.1.21 Fieldbus H1 and Series 2 H1

The DeltaV system supports the following types of H1 cards:
• Fieldbus H1
• Series 2 H1 (Simplex and Redundant modes)
Fieldbus is an all digital, serial, bi-directional communication protocol that interconnects
devices such as actuators, sensors, discrete devices, and controllers in the field. It is a Local
Area Network (LAN) for instruments that enables basic control and I/O to be moved to the
field device. Refer to the manual Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV TMDistributed Control
System for more information.

Installation Notes
• The Fieldbus H1 terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the H1 card.
• The Series 2 H1 terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the Series 2 H1 card in Simplex mode.

176
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

• The Redundant H1 terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for

field wiring for the Series 2 H1 card in Redundant mode.
• The "System Power Guidelines" section provides information on extending power to a
fieldbus segment.

Specifications

Item Specification
Number of Ports Two
Port Type Foundation Fieldbus H1 - 31.25 Kbit/second
Isolation Each port is isolated from the system and from
each other and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card 400 mA typical, 600 mA maximum
Series 2:
• 200 mA typical
• 300 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card None

Fieldbus power (for Series 2 card) 9 to 32 VDC, 12 mA per port
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-35: Wiring Diagram for Fieldbus H1

Carrier

I/O Card Termination

1+
System 2+
Port 1
3-

4-

5+

System 6+
Port 2
7-

8-

Fieldbus H1
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ + - - + + - -
Port Port
1 2

177
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-36: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 H1 in Simplex Mode

Carrier

I/O Card Termination

1, 7 (no connection)

2, 8 (no connection)
Port 1
H1
encoder/
decoder
+
3 Port 1 ( )

Port 1

System
-
4 Port 1 ( )

Port 2
+
5 Port 2 ( )
H1 Port 2
encoder/
decoder -
6 Port 2 ( )

Series 2 H1
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ - + -
Port Port
1 2

178
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-37: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 H1 in Redundant Mode

Carrier 24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

Primary Redundant
I/O card termination

Port 1
+ 1, 7 (no connection)
H1 encoder/decoder - 2,8 (no connection)

9, 15 (no connection)
System
10, 16 (no connection)

Port 2 + +
H1 encoder/decoder - 3, 11 +
Port 1
Secondary 4, 12 -
I/O card -

Port 1
+
H1 encoder/decoder -
+
System
5, 13 +
Port 2
6, 14 -
Port 2 + -
H1 encoder/decoder -
Redundant H1
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+- +-
Port 1 Port 2
+- +-
Port 1 Port 2

Related information
Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block
Series 2 H1 Terminal Block
Redundant H1 Terminal Block
System Power Guidelines

C.1.22 Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus

The DeltaV system supports a simplex and redundant Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus
card, the Fieldbus H1 card, and the simplex and redundant Series 2 H1 card.

Installation notes
• The Simplex H1 4-Port Terminal Block is recommended to provide screw terminations
for field wiring for the Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus card in simplex mode.
• The Redundant H1 4-Port Terminal Block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 H1 4 Port card in redundant mode.

179
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

• The "System Power Guidelines" section provides information on extending power to a

fieldbus segment.

Specifications
Table C-19: Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus card specifications
Item Specification
Number of ports Four
Port type Foundation Fieldbus H1 (9-32 VDC) - 31.25 Kbit/
second
Isolation Each port is isolated from the system and from
each other and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card 300 mA typical
Fieldbus power 9 to 32 VDC, 12 mA per port
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-38: Wiring diagram for Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus in Simplex Mode
Carrier
24V bussed
field power connection

IO card Termination
+
+ 1+
Port 1
H1 encoder/decoder – Port 1
2–
–
+
+ 3+
Port 2
H1 encoder/decoder – Port 2
4–
–

System
+
+ 5+
Port 3
H1 encoder/decoder – Port 3
6–
–
+
+ 7+
Port 4
H1 encoder/decoder – Port 4
8–
–

Simplex H1 4-port
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ – + – + – + –
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

180
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-39: Wiring diagram for Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus in Redundant Mode
Carrier
24V bussed
field power connection

Primary IO card Redundant termination

+
+ 1, 9 +
Port 1
H1 encoder/decoder – Port 1
2, 10 –
–
+
+ 3, 11 +
Port 2
H1 encoder/decoder – Port 2
4, 12 –
–

System
+
Port 3
H1 encoder/decoder –

+
Port 4
H1 encoder/decoder –

Secondary IO card

+
Port 1
H1 encoder/decoder –

+
Port 2
H1 encoder/decoder –

System
+
+ 5, 13 +
Port 3
H1 encoder/decoder – Port 3
6, 14 +
–
+
+ 7, 15 +
Port 4
H1 encoder/decoder – Port 4
8, 16 +
–

Redundant H1 4 port
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+ – + – + – + – + – + – + – + –
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

C.1.23 Isolated Input

The DeltaV system supports the Series 2 Isolated Input card in Simplex mode.

181
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

The Isolated Input card supports thermocouple, millivolt, RTD, ohm, and voltage input
ranges.
The Isolated Input card does not support overrange and underrange values.

Installation Notes
The Isolated Input card uses the Isolated Input Terminal Block to provide terminations for
wiring.

Specifications
Table C-20: Isolated Input Card Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Four
Isolation CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.1010.1 or CAN/ • Installation Cat II, Pollution degree 2
CSA-C22.2 No.61010.1
• Channel to system - 600 VAC double
insulation. Each channel is optically isolated
from the system and factory tested to 5000
VDC.
• Channel to channel - 600 VAC basic
insulation. Each channel is optically isolated
from each other and factory tested to 3100
VDC.1

ADC resolution 16 bit

-3dB filter frequency 2.7 Hz
DC/50/60 Hz common-mode rejection 120 dB
Input impedance 10 MΩ
Thermocouple sensor types B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, uncharacterized
RTD Sensor Types PT100, PT200, Ni120, Cu10, resistance, user-
defined
mV and V ranges Refer to Table C-24 and Table C-27.
Input type mix Independently configurable
Ambient temperature -40 to 70 °C
Calibration None required
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
LocalBus power rating 12 VDC, 350 mA, no field power required

1 Warning: When hazardous live voltages are present on a channel, adjacent channel wiring must
be inaccessible.

Table C-21: Isolated Input Card, Thermocouple and Millivolt Input Specifications
Item Specification
Linearization error ±0.003% full scale
Cold-junction compensation accuracy ±1.0 °C

182
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-21: Isolated Input Card, Thermocouple and Millivolt Input Specifications
(continued)

Item Specification
Cold-junction compensation types Off, local, remote
Cold-junction compensation range -40 to 85 °C
Temperature scale ITS90
Open-circuit detection (thermocouple only) 0.4 µA DC
Detection time 1 second

In the 25°C Reference Accuracy column in the following table, total error is made up of
reading accuracy, CJC accuracy, and sensor accuracy.
Table C-22: Isolated Input Card Thermocouple Input Range Specifications
Sensor Types 25 °C Temperature Nominal Full Scale Operating
Reference Drift Resolution Range
Accuracy
B ±1.2 °C ±0.116 °C/°C 0.09 °C 250 to 1810 °C 500 to 1810 °C
E ±0.5 °C ±0.004 °C/°C 0.05 °C -200 to -200 to
1000 °C 1000 °C
J ±0.6 °C ±0.005 °C/°C 0.06 °C -210 to -190 to
1200 °C 1200 °C
K ±0.5 °C ±0.013 °C/°C 0.05 °C -270 to -140 to
1372 °C 1372 °C
N ±1.0 °C ±0.015 °C/°C 0.05 °C -270 to -190 to
1300 °C 1300 °C
R ±1.7 °C ±0.083 °C/°C 0.06 °C -50 to 1768 °C 0 to 1768 °C
S ±1.8 °C ±0.095 °C/°C 0.08 °C -50 to 1768 °C 0 to 1768 °C
T ±0.7 °C ±0.025 °C/°C 0.04 °C -270 to 400 °C -200 to 400 °C
Uncharacteriz ±0.05 mV ±0.0003 0.0031 mV -100 to 100 -100 to 100
ed; no mV/°C mV mV
linearization or
CJC

Table C-23: Isolated Input Card Millivolt Input Range Specifications

Sensor Type Input Ranges 25 °C Reference Temperature Maximum
Accuracy Drift Resolution
20 mV ±20 mV ±0.02 mV ±0.001 mV/°C 0.0008 mV
50 mV ±50 mV ±0.03 mV ±0.0005 mV/°C 0.0017 mV
100 mV ±100 mV ±0.05 mV ±0.0003 mV/°C 0.0031 mV

183
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-24: Isolated Input Card, RTD, ohms Input Specifications

Item Specification
Measurement configurations 2, 3, and 4 wire
Excitation current 100 µA DC
Temperature scale ITS90
Open sensor detection time 1 second
Short circuit detection time 1 second
Pt 100 and Pt 200 alpha 0.00385

Table C-25: Isolated Input Card, RTD, ohms Input Range Specifications
Sensor Type 25 °C Reference Temperature Resolution Sensor Input
Accuracy Drift Range
Pt100 ±0.5 °C ±0.018 °C/°C 0.05 °C -200 to 850 °C
Pt200 ±0.5 °C ±0.012 °C/°C 0.05 °C -200 to 850 °C
Ni120 ±0.2 °C ±0.006 °C/°C 0.02 °C -70 to 300 °C
Cu10 ±2.0 °C ±0.076 °C/°C 0.23 °C -30 to 140 °C
Resistance ±0.5 Ω ±0.018 Ω/°C 0.02 Ω 1 to 1000 Ω
User defined ±0.4 Ω ±0.009 Ω/°C ∼0.05 Ω 0 to 1000 Ω

Table C-26: Isolated Input Card, Voltage Input Range Specifications

Sensor Type Sensor Range 25 °C Reference Temperature Maximum
Accuracy Drift Resolution
0-5V 0-5V ±0.005 V ±0.0002 V/°C 0.00009 V
0 - 10 V 0 - 10 V ±0.010 V ±0.0004 V/°C 0.00016 V
1-5V 1-5V ±0.005 V ±0.0002 V/°C 0.00009 V
1V ±1 V ±0.0025 V ±0.0002 V/°C 0.00015 V
5V ±5 V ±0.005 V ±0.0002 V/°C 0.00017 V
10 V ±10 V ±0.010 V ±0.0004 V/°C 0.0003 V

184
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-40: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 Isolated Input

Carrier

Termination I/O Card

Excitation
1, 5, 9, 13 current

+
2, 6, 10, 14
4 3 2 TC
wire wire wire
mV
V A/D
To
- Conv.
system
3, 7, 11, 15

4, 8, 12, 16

1 5 9 13 4-wire sensor excitation

Isolated input
terminal block
2 6 10 14
+ Sensor +
3 7 11 15
- Sensor -
4 8 12 16
Wire compensation

Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4

Related information
Isolated Input Terminal Block

C.1.24 Multifunction
The DeltaV system supports the Multifunction card and the Series 2 Multifunction card in
Simplex mode.
The Multifunction card uses the 32-channel terminal block to provide terminations for
wiring. The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the Multifunction card.
Table C-27: 32-Channel Terminal Block used with Multifunction Card
Terminal on Channel Terminal on Channel
Termination Block Nomenclature Termination Block Nomenclature
Terminal 1 Reserved for future use Terminal 17 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch1+

185
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-27: 32-Channel Terminal Block used with Multifunction Card (continued)
Terminal on Channel Terminal on Channel
Termination Block Nomenclature Termination Block Nomenclature
Terminal 2 Reserved for future use Terminal 18 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch1-
Terminal 3 Reserved for future use Terminal 19 Reserved for future use
Terminal 4 Reserved for future use Terminal 20 Reserved for future use
Terminal 5 Reserved for future use Terminal 21 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch2+
Terminal 6 Reserved for future use Terminal 22 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch2-
Terminal 7 Reserved for future use Terminal 23 Reserved for future use
Terminal 8 Reserved for future use Terminal 24 Reserved for future use
Terminal 9 Reserved for future use Terminal 25 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch3+
Terminal 10 Reserved for future use Terminal 26 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch3-
Terminal 11 +24 VDC Terminal 27 Reserved for future use
Terminal 12 - 24 VDC (return) Terminal 28 Reserved for future use
Terminal 13 Reserved for future use Terminal 29 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch4+
Terminal 14 Reserved for future use Terminal 30 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch4-
Terminal 15 +24 VDC Terminal 31 Reserved for future use
Terminal 16 - 24 VDC (return) Terminal 32 Reserved for future use

The Multifunction I/O Card discrete input channel has a switching hysteresis of 80 mV.
Noise signals above this amplitude are detected by the input channel.

Specifications
Table C-28: Multifunction Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Four
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system and from each other and factory tested
to 1500 VDC.
Detection level for ON 4.8 VDC (minimum)
Detection level for OFF 1.0 VDC (maximum)
Input impedance 3 to 25 mA at 5 to 24 VDC
Input accuracy 0.1% reading (over 10 Hz - 50 kHz signals)1

186
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-28: Multifunction Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Input frequency • Sine wave - 10 Hz to 50 kHz
• Square wave - 0.1 Hz to 50kHz

Resolution 1 pulse
Minimum pulse width 10 µS
Maximum input voltage 26.4 VDC
Resolution counter 32 bits
LocalBus current 250 mA maximum
Series 2: 150 mA maximum
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

1 For a pulse input channel, filtering may be required to meet the accuracy specification.

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-41: Wiring Diagram for Multifunction 24 VDC

Carrier

Termination I/O Card

System
+ + 750 Ω
24
VDC
Source
- -

Ch Ch Ch Ch
Use 32-channel 1 2 3 4
terminal block (refer
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
to table for pin out
connections and
+
channel nomenclature) 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
-
3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

Related information
32-Channel Terminal Block

C.1.25 Profibus DP
The DeltaV system supports the Profibus DP card, the Series 2 Profibus DP card in Simplex
mode, and the Series 2 Plus Profibus DP card in Simplex and Redundant modes.

187
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Profibus is an all digital, serial, bi-directional communication protocol that interconnects

devices in the field. For information on installing Profibus devices, refer to the Profibus
web site at www.profibus.com.

Installation Notes
• The Profibus terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the Profibus DP card and Series 2 Profibus DP card in Simplex mode.
• The Redundant Profibus DP terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 Plus Profibus DP card in Redundant mode.
Do not plug a simplex Profibus DP or Series 2 Profibus DP card into a Redundant
Profibus DP terminal block. For simplex or redundant applications, when the
termination is in the OUT position, pins 1 and 3 and 4 and 6 can be used. When the
termination is in the IN position only pins 1 and 3 can be used.

Item Specification
Number of Ports One
Port Type Profibus DP
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 400 mA typical, 600 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier.

Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows a wiring diagram for the Series 2 Plus Profibus DP card. For a
redundant card, the wiring shown in the I/O Card portion of the image is replicated.

188
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-42: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 Plus Profibus DP Card in Simplex or
Redundant Mode
Carrier

I/O Card Termination

1 A1

T in Terminator
System

3 B1

4 A2
T out
6 B2

7 CTS

2, 5, 8 S

Wiring in the area labeled

I/O Card is duplicated Profibus DP or redundant Profibus DP
for redundancy terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (refer to terminal
block specifications for
terminator positions)
A1 S B1 A2 S B2 CTS S

Related information
Profibus DP Terminal Block
Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block

C.1.26 RTD, ohms

The DeltaV system supports the RTD, ohms card and the Series 2 RTD, ohms card in
Simplex mode.

Installation Notes
The RTD, ohms terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the RTD, ohms card.
Table C-29: RTD, ohms Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Sensor Types 2-wire, 3-wire, or 4-wire: Resistance, Pt100,
Pt200, Pt500, Ni120, Cu10, user defined
Full scale signal range Selectable based on sensor. Refer to Table C-30.
LocalBus Power Rating 12 VDC, 160 mA

189
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-29: RTD, ohms Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Ambient Temperature 0 to 60°C
Series 2: -40 to 70°C
Accuracy over temperature range Refer to Table C-30.
Resolution (Varies with sensor type. Refer to 16 bits conversion
Table C-32).
Repeatability 0.05% of span
DC/50/60/Hz Common Mode Rejection 120 dB
Calibration None required
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

The following table shows the full scale, operating range, reference accuracy, temperature
drift, and resolution for the RTD, ohms sensor types
Table C-30: RTD, ohms Sensor Type Specifications
Sensor Type Full Scale Operating 25° Reference Temperature Resolution
Range Accuracy Drift
Resistance 0 to 2,000 Ω 0 to 2,000 Ω ±6.2 Ω ±0.112 Ω/°C ∼0.02 Ω
Pt100 -200 to 850°C -200 to 850°C ±0.5°C ±0.018°C/°C ∼0.05°C
Pt200 -200 to 850°C -200 to 850°C ±0.5°C ±0.012°C/°C ∼0.05°C
Pt500 -200 to 850°C -200 to 850°C ±3.5°C ±0.063°C/°C ∼0.18°C
Ni120 -70 to 300°C -70 to 300°C ±0.2°C ±0.006°C/°C ∼0.02°C
Cu10 -30 to 140°C -30 to 140°C ±2.0°C ±0.157°C/°C ∼0.23°C
Resistance/ 0 to 1000 Ω 0 to 1000 Ω ±0.4 Ω ±0.009 Ω/°C ∼0.05 Ω
user defined1

1 The Callendar-Van Dusen linearization equation can be used with user defined Pt RTDs. Refer to
Recommended I/O Practices in DeltaV Books online for usage information.

190
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-43: Wiring Diagram for Series 1 RTD, ohms

Carrier

Termination I/O Card

Sensor
excitation Excitation
current

Sensor +
4 3 2 A/D
wire Conv. System
wire wire
Sensor -
Circuit
common
RTD, ohms
Terminal block

17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 Sensor
excitation
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
+ Sensor

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
- Sensor

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Circuit
common

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

191
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-44: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 RTD, ohms

Carrier

Termination I/O Card

Sensor
excitation Excitation
current

Sensor +
4 3 2 A/D
wire Conv. System
wire wire
Sensor -
Circuit
common Excitation
current
RTD, ohms
Terminal block

17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 Sensor
excitation
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
+ Sensor

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
- Sensor

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Circuit
common

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
RTD, ohms Terminal Block

C.1.27 Sequence of Events

The DeltaV system supports the Sequence of Events card and the Series 2 Sequence of
Events card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes
The 32-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the Sequence of Events card and the Series 2 Sequence of Events card in Simplex
mode. The 40-pin mass termination block also can be used. The following table lists the
cable pin out connections for the Sequence of Events card
Table C-31: 32-Channel Terminal Block used with Sequence of Events
Terminal Channel Terminal Channel
Nomenclature Nomenclature
Terminal 1 Channel 1+ Terminal 17 Channel 9+

192
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-31: 32-Channel Terminal Block used with Sequence of Events (continued)
Terminal Channel Terminal Channel
Nomenclature Nomenclature
Terminal 2 Channel 1- Terminal 18 Channel 9-
Terminal 3 Channel 2+ Terminal 19 Channel 10+
Terminal 4 Channel 2- Terminal 20 Channel 10-
Terminal 5 Channel 3+ Terminal 21 Channel 11+
Terminal 6 Channel 3- Terminal 22 Channel 11-
Terminal 7 Channel 4+ Terminal 23 Channel 12+
Terminal 8 Channel 4- Terminal 24 Channel 12-
Terminal 9 Channel 5+ Terminal 25 Channel 13+
Terminal 10 Channel 5- Terminal 26 Channel 13-
Terminal 11 Channel 6+ Terminal 27 Channel 14+
Terminal 12 Channel 6- Terminal 28 Channel 14-
Terminal 13 Channel 7+ Terminal 29 Channel 15+
Terminal 14 Channel 7- Terminal 30 Channel 15-
Terminal 15 Channel 8+ Terminal 31 Channel 16+
Terminal 16 Channel 8- Terminal 32 Channel 16-

A Network Time Server is required for a Sequence of Events card.

Specifications
Table C-32: Sequence of Events Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels 16; each channel can be configured for SOE or DI
operation.
Scan rate 0.25 msec for all 16 channels
Time stamp accuracy (for SOE channels only) 0.25 msec on a card; 1 msec in a controller.
Accuracy with reference to system clock time
after a 4 msec debounce filter has been applied.
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Detection level for ON > 2 mA
Detection level for OFF < 0.25 mA
Impedance 5K Ω

193
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-32: Sequence of Events Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card • 50 mA typical
• 75 mA maximum
Series 2
• 75 mA typical
• 100 mA maximum

Field circuit power, per card 75 mA at 24 VDC (±10%)

Series 2: 75 mA at 24 VDC (±20%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-45: Wiring Diagram for Sequence of Events

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O card Common
(Odd no.) connection
for 16 channels
+

System

-
(Even no.)

32-Channel
terminal block Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
+
2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
-
3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31
+
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Related information
32-Channel Terminal Block
40-Pin Mass Termination Block
Setting Up a Network Time Server

194
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

C.1.28 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485

The DeltaV system supports the Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 and the Series 2 Serial
Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485.
The DeltaV Serial Card provides an interface to a variety of serial devices, such as PLCs
(Programmable Logic Controllers) that use the Modbus RTU or ASCII protocol. With the
DeltaV Explorer, you can configure each of the two ports provided on the serial card to
support RS232, RS422/485 half duplex, or RS422/485 full duplex signals and you can
configure the baud rate of each port.

Installation Notes
• For CE compliance, use shielded cables to connect the serial card to external devices.
Ground the cable shield at one end only. If the external device does not provide a
mechanism to ground the cable shield, connect the shield to the DeltaV Carrier Shield
Bar. If you use the RS422/485 ports, the shield must also provide the ground reference
for the port. Connect the cable shield to the corresponding ground (GND) terminal on
the interface terminal block.
• The Interface terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the Serial card and the Series 2 Serial card in Simplex mode.
• The Redundant Interface terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 Serial card in Redundant mode.
• Refer to ANSI TIA/EIA-485-A for RS485 full duplex termination requirements.
The following tables define the terminal assignments for RS232, RS422/485 half duplex,
and RS422/485 full duplex port types.
Table C-33: RS232 Terminal Assignments
Terminal Assignment
Terminal 1 Port 1 GND
Terminal 3 Port 1 TXD
Terminal 5 Port 1 RXD
Terminal 7 Port 1 DTR
Terminal 8 Port 1 DSR
Terminal 9 Port 2 GND
Terminal 11 Port 2 TXD
Terminal 13 Port 2 RXD
Terminal 15 Port 2 DTR
Terminal 16 Port 2 DSR

Table C-34: RS422/485 Half Duplex Terminal Assignments

Terminal Assignment
Terminal 1 Port 1 GND
Terminal 2 Port 1 DATA+

195
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-34: RS422/485 Half Duplex Terminal Assignments (continued)

Terminal Assignment
Terminal 4 Port 1 DATA-
Terminal 9 Port 2 GND
Terminal 10 Port 2 DATA+
Terminal 12 Port 2 DATA-

Note
RS-485 Full Duplex is not supported when the card is configured as a Modbus slave in a
multidrop environment.

Table C-35: RS422/485 Full Duplex Terminal Assignments

Terminal Assignment
Terminal 1 Port 1 GND
Terminal 2 Port 1 TXD+
Terminal 4 Port 1 TXD-
Terminal 6 Port 1 RXD+
Terminal 8 Port 1 RXD-
Terminal 9 Port 2 GND
Terminal 10 Port 2 TXD+
Terminal 12 Port 2 TXD-
Terminal 14 Port 2 RXD+
Terminal 16 Port 2 RXD-

Table C-36: Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 Specifications

Item Specification
Number of serial ports Two
Port types RS232, RS422/485 half duplex, RS422/485 full
duplex (configurable with the DeltaV Explorer)
Isolation Each port is optically isolated from the system
and from each other and factory tested to 1500
VDC. The ports must be grounded via the
external device.
Baud rate Configurable with the DeltaV Explorer
Maximum cable lengths • RS232: 15 m (50 ft)
• RS422/485: 610 m (2000 ft)

LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 200 mA typical, 300 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

196
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-46shows a wiring scheme from Port 1 on the Interface terminal block for a Serial
card and a Series 2 Serial card in Simplex mode to a Modicon Model 984 controller.

Figure C-46: Wiring Example, Interface Terminal Block, Serial Card

The following figure shows an example for connecting a primary and secondary computer
to a Redundant Interface terminal block for a Series 2 Serial card in Redundant mode. For
each computer, use the same wiring scheme as shown in Figure C-46.

Figure C-47: Wiring Example for Redundant Interface Terminal Block

Related information
Interface Terminal Block
Redundant Interface Terminal Block

197
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

C.1.29 Thermocouple, mV
The DeltaV system supports the Thermocouple, mV card and the Series 2 Thermocouple,
mV card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes
• The Thermocouple terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for
field wiring for the Thermocouple, mV card. An optional terminal block is the I/O
terminal block.
• If this card is used with a Thermocouple terminal block, it functions as a Thermocouple
card; if it is used with an 8-channel terminal block, it functions as a mV card.
• If this card is used with a Thermocouple terminal block, it passes a small current
through the thermocouple wire continuously to detect an open loop. The longer the
thermocouple wire, the greater the offset voltage. Refer to Emerson Knowledge Base
Article NK-1900-1146 for information about calculating the offset voltage for your
application.

Specifications
Table C-37: Thermocouple, mV Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Sensor Types: mV Thermocouple Low level voltage source
B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, uncharacterized
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the
system and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are isolated from
channels 5, 6, 7, and 8 (verified by 1500 VDC
factory test). Thermocouples attached to
channels 1, 2, 3,and 4 are not electrically isolated
and should be within ±0.7 VDC of each other.
Thermocouples attached to channels 5, 6, 7,and
8 are not electrically isolated and should be
within ±0.7 VDC of each other.
Full scale signal range Selectable based on sensor type. Refer to Table
C-38 .
LocalBus Power Rating 12 VDC, 350 mA
Series 2 12 VDC, 210 mA
Ambient Temperature 0 to 60°C
Series 2 -40 to 70°C
Accuracy over temperature range (linearized) Thermocouple: Refer to Table C-38 .
mV: Refer to Table C-39 .
Cold Junction Compensation ±1°C
Resolution (Varies with sensor type. Refer to 16 bits
Table C-40 ).
Repeatability 0.05% of span

198
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-37: Thermocouple, mV Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
DC/50/60Hz Common Mode Rejection 120 dB
Calibration None required
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

The following table shows specifications for the Thermocouple sensor types.
Note
In the 25° C Reference Accuracy column in the following table, total error is made up of
reading accuracy, CJC accuracy, and sensor accuracy.

Table C-38: Thermocouple Sensor Type Specifications

Sensor Type Full Scale Operating 25° C Temperature Resolution
Range Reference Drift
Accuracy
Uncharacteriz -100 to 100 -100 to 100 0.1 mV ±0.002 mV/°C ∼ 0.003mV
ed (No mV mV
linearization,
no cold
junction
compensation
.)
B 250 to 1810°C 500 to 1810°C ±2.4°C ±0.056°C/°C ∼ 0.18°C
E -200 to -200 to ±0.6°C ±0.008°C/°C ∼ 0.07°C
1000°C 1000°C
J -210 to -190 to ±0.8°C ±0.011°C/°C ∼ 0.05°C
1200°C 1200°C
K -270 to -200 to ±0.5°C ±0.016°C/°C ∼ 0.18°C
1372°C 1372°C
N -270 to -190 to ±1.0°C ±0.007°C/°C ∼ 0.10°C
1300°C 1300°C
R -50 to 1768°C -50 to 1768°C ±2.1°C ±0.013°C/°C ∼ 0.14°C
S -50 to 1768°C -40 to 1768°C ±2.2°C ±0.067°C/°C ∼ 0.24°C
T -270 to 400°C -200 to 400°C ±0.7°C ±0.001°C/°C ∼ 0.04°C

The following table shows specifications for the mV sensor types

Table C-39: mV Sensor Type Specifications
Sensor Type Full Scale Operating 25 ° Reference Temperature Resolution
Range Accuracy Drift
Low Level -100 to 100 -100 to 100 0.1 mV 0.002 mV/°C ∼ 0.003 mV
Voltage mV mV
Source

199
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-48: Wiring Diagram for Thermocouple, mV

Carrier

Termination I/O Card

(Odd no.)
+
A/D
System
Converter

-
(Even no.)
Thermocouple,
mV terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
I/O Terminal Blocks
Thermocouple Terminal Block

C.1.30 VIM 2 card specifications

Installation notes
• The VIM 2 card mounts in the right slot of a Power / Controller Carrier.
• The VIM 2 card requires a controller and a dedicated system power supply (24 VDC).
• The Power / Controller Carrier holding a VIM 2 card and power supply must be installed
to the left of the first 8-Wide I/O Carrier on the DIN rail. It can be installed either to the
left or right of the Power / Controller Carrier holding the controller and its power
supply.
• This card supports redundancy.

Specifications
Table C-40: VIM 2 card specifications
Item Specifications
Input power requirement (supplied through the +5 VDC @ 1.4 A maximum
System Power Supply (24 VDC)
Fuse protection 3.0 A , nonreplaceable internal fuses

200
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-40: VIM 2 card specifications (continued)

Item Specifications
External connectors • VIMNet network: One, 10/100BASE-TX with
RJ45 connector
• Redundancy link: One, 10/100BASE-TX with
RJ45 connector

Mounting Right slot of Power / Controller Carrier

Image

Figure C-49: VIM 2 card and power supply on the Power / Controller Carrier

C.2 Intrinsically Safe I/O Cards

The I/O subsystem supports the following types of Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) I/O cards:
• I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART
• I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA and I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART
• I.S. DI, 16-Channel
• I.S. DO, 4-Channel

201
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

C.2.1 I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART

Installation Notes
The I.S. 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the I.S. AI, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART card. An optional block is the I.S. loop
disconnect 8-channel terminal block.

Specifications
Table C-41: I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (includes HART)
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation LocalBus to any channel: 60 VAC
Between channels: None
I.S. channel to non-I.S. rail: 250 VAC
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full scale signal range 2 to 22 mA
Valid range for LED indication 0.78 to 21.9 mA
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 600 mA
Line fault detection Short circuit: >21.5 mA
Open circuit: <0.5 mA
Accuracy over temperature range ±0.006% of span per °C
Accuracy over EMC conditions 1% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Calibration Not required
Communications Support HART pass-through request/response HART
variable report Field device status report
Optional loop disconnect Yes
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Warning
Hand-held, two-way radios should not be keyed within 0.5 M (1.64 ft., 19.7 in.) of
Intrinsically Safe Analog Input cards as the level of radiated emissions from these units can
interfere with the operation of the system.

202
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-50: Wiring Diagram for I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART
I/S Carrier 12 VDC IS
Power

IS Termination I/O Card

Loop
(Odd no.) disconnect
(optional)
+ IS Power
Common
T connection
for 8 channels
A/D System
-
(Even no.)
Converter

I.S. 8-channel
terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block

C.2.2 I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA

The DeltaV system supports the I.S. AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA card and the I.S. AO, 8-
channel, 4-20 mA, HART card.

Installation Notes
The I.S. 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the HART and non-HART versions of the I.S. AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA card. An
optional block is the I.S. loop disconnect 8-channel terminal block.

Specifications
Table C-42: I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (includes HART)
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation LocalBus to any channel: 60 VAC
Between channels: None
I.S. channel to non-I.S. rail: 250 VAC
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA

203
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-42: I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (includes HART) (continued)

Item Specification
Full scale signal range 1 to 22 mA
Voltage to load 13 V minimum @ 20 mA
Load resistance 450 Ω maximum 650 Ω maximum with HART
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 630 mA
Open circuit detection threshold 0.7 mA ±0.2 mA
Accuracy (@ 25 °C) ±20 µA
Accuracy over temperature range ±0.006% of span per °C
Accuracy over EMC conditions 0.5% of span
Resolution 12 bits
Output compliance 20 mA stored into 450 Ω load; independent of
supply (non-HART) 20 mA stored into 650 Ω
load; independent of supply (HART)
Optional loop disconnect Yes
Calibration Stored on card
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Warning
Before substituting an I.S. AO, 4-20 mA card with an I.S. AO, 4-20 mA, HART card, you
must perform a loop analysis or reassess the field parameters. Refer to the following
documents for valid field parameters:
• 12P1892, DeltaVTM Scalable Process System Class I Div.2 with Class I, II, III, Div. 1 Field
Circuit Installation Instructions
• 12P2524, DeltaVTM I.S. I/O Code of Practice for Installation and Maintenance in Zone 2
Hazardous Areas
• 12P1990, DeltaVTM Scalable Process System with Zone 0 Field Circuits, Installation
Instructions

204
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-51: Wiring Diagram for I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA

Carrier 12 VDC IS
Power
I/O Card IS Termination
Loop
disconnect (Odd no.)
(optional)
Common IS Power
+
connection
for 8 channels
Load

System A/D
Converter -
(Even no.)

I.S. 8-channel
terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure C-52: Wiring Diagram for I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART

I/S Carrier 12 VDC IS

power

I/O Card IS Termination

Loop
disconnect (Odd no.)
(optional)
Common IS Power
+
connection
for 8 channels
Load

System A/D
Converter
-
(Even no.)

I.S. 8-channel
terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

205
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Related information
I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block

C.2.3 I.S. DI, 16-Channel

Installation Notes
The I.S. 16-channel terminal block must be used to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the I.S. DI, 16-channel card. If this terminal block is not used, the card will not
communicate with the DeltaV controller.

Specifications
Table C-43: I.S. DI, 16-Channel
Item Specification
Number of channels Sixteen
Isolation LocalBus to any channel: 60 VAC
Between channels: None
I.S. channel to non-I.S. rail: 250 VAC
Detection level for On >2.1 mA
Detection level for Off <1.2 mA
Voltage applied to sensor 7.0 to 9.0 V from 1 kΩ ±10%
Line fault detection Short circuit: <100 Ω
Open circuit: > 50 kΩ
Maximum input frequency 20 Hz
Minimum pulse width detected 45 ms
Output impedance 100 Ω @ > 6 mA (wetting current)
LocalBus current 350 mA
Switching hysteresis 200 µA (nominal)
Optional loop disconnect Not offered
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

206
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-53: Wiring Diagram for I.S. DI, 16-Channel

Common
connection
for 16 channels

IS IS Carrier
12 VDC IS
Termination
Power

Resistors I/O Card

optional

(Odd no.) System

680 Ω
+ Sense
circuit
22k Ω
-
(Even no.)

I.S.16-channel
terminal block
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information
I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block

C.2.4 I.S. DO, 4-Channel

Installation Notes
The I.S. 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the I.S. DO, 4-channel card. An optional block is the I.S. loop disconnect 8-
channel terminal block.

Specifications
Table C-44: I.S. DO, 4-Channel
Item Specification
Number of channels Four
Isolation LocalBus to any channel: 60 VAC
Between channels: None
I.S. channel to non-I.S. rail: 250 VAC

207
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-44: I.S. DO, 4-Channel (continued)

Item Specification
Output range 22 V (open circuit) 11 V at 45 mA 25 VDC
(maximum)
Output rating 45 mA (min.)
Off state leakage N/A
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 560 mA
Current limit per channel 45 mA
Configurable channel types Discrete output : Output stays in the last state
submitted by the controller.
Momentary output : Output is active for a pre-
configured time period (100 ms to 100 s).
Continuous pulse output : Output is active as a
percentage of a pre-configured base time period
(100 ms to 100 s). Resolution is 2 ms.
Optional loop disconnect Yes
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-54: Wiring Diagram for I.S. DO, 4-Channel

Carrier 12 VDC IS
Power connection

I/O Card IS Termination

Loop
disconnect (Odd no.)
IS Power (optional)
System +
Load

Common
connection for
4 channels
-
(Odd no.)

I.S. 8-channel
terminal block
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 (refer to terminal block
specifications for
pin out connections
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
and channel
nomenclature)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

208
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Related information
I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block

C.3 Terminal Blocks

The DeltaV system supports Terminal Blocks, Redundant Terminal Blocks, Mass
Termination Blocks, and Intrinsically Safe Termination Blocks.
The I/O subsystem supports the following types of terminal blocks:
• I/O, Fused I/O, and 4-wire I/O
• Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block
• Series 2 H1 Terminal Block
• Interface Terminal Block
• Isolated Input Terminal Block
• Profibus DP Terminal Block
• RTD, ohms Terminal Block
• Thermocouple Terminal Block
• 32-Channel Terminal Block
• 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block
Note
The terminal blocks contain a latch for quick release. To remove the terminal block,
depress the latch with a screw driver or finger and pull the terminal block down and off.

C.3.1 I/O Terminal Blocks

Specifications
The following table show specifications for the I/O, Fused I/O, and 4-wire I/O terminal
blocks.
Table C-45: I/O, Fused I/O, and 4-Wire I/O Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating I/O and fused I/O: 250 VAC and 60 VDC
between non-connected signals for I/O and
fused I/O
4-wire I/O: 30 VDC
Maximum current 1 A per I/O channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

209
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-55: I/O, Fused I/O, and 4-Wire I/O Terminal Block
Keying depends upon
the card type. Refer to
"I/O Interface Keying"
for key position.

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

C.3.2 Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block

The DeviceNet and Fieldbus H1 cards use the Fieldbus H1 terminal block to provide
terminations for wiring.

Specifications
Table C-46: Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage Rating 32 VDC
Max Current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal Block Connections

The wiring shown in the following figure is for the Fieldbus H1 card.

210
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-56: Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block

Keying (D6)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ + - - + + - -
Port Port
1 2

Front View Bottom View

Note
Change the key position to D5 for the DeviceNet card.

Related information
DeviceNet

C.3.3 Series 2 H1 Terminal Block

The Series 2 H1 card uses the Series 2 H1 terminal block to provide terminations for wiring.

Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage Rating 35 VDC
Max Current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

211
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-57: Series 2 H1 Terminal Block

Keying (D6)

Cover with
H1 I/O labels

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+Port- +Port-
1 2

Front View Bottom View

C.3.4 Simplex H1 4-Port Terminal Block

Installation notes
• The Simplex H1 4-Port Terminal Block provides wiring terminations for the simplex
Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus card.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to D2 to match the simplex Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series
2 Plus card.

Specifications
Table C-47: Simplex H1 4-Port Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum current 500 mA
Isolation Each channel is isolated from each other and
factory tested to 1000 VDC.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

212
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-58: Simplex H1 4-Port Terminal Block

Keying (D2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ – + – + – + –
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

Front view Bottom view

C.3.5 Simplex 2-Wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

Installation Notes
• The simplex 2-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block provides 2-wire
terminations for the AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus card in simplex mode.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to A2 to match the AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART,
Series 2 Plus card.

Specifications
Table C-48: Simplex 2-Wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 500 mA per channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier.

213
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-59: Simplex 2-Wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

Keying (A6)

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

C.3.6 Simplex 4-Wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

Installation Notes
• The simplex 4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block provides 4-wire
terminations for the AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus card in simplex mode.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to A6 to match the AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART,
Series 2 Plus card.

Specifications
Table C-49: Simplex 4-Wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 500 mA per channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier.

214
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-60: Simplex 4-Wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

Keying (A6)

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

C.3.7 Simplex 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block

Installation Notes
• The simplex 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block provides wiring terminations
for the AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus card in simplex mode.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to A5 to match the AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART,
Series 2 Plus card.

Specifications
Table C-50: Simplex 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 200 mA per channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier.

215
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-61: Simplex 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block

Keying (A5)

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

C.3.8 Simplex 32-Channel Discrete Input Terminal Block

Installation Notes
• The Simplex 32-Channel Discrete Input Terminal Block provides wiring terminations for
a DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact, Series 2 Plus card.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to E3 to match the DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry
Contact Series 2 Plus card.

Specifications
Table C-51: Simplex 32-Channel Discrete Input Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 5 mA per I/O channel; 160 mA per card
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

216
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-62: Simplex 32-Channel Discrete Input Terminal Block

Keying (E3)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

Front view Bottom view

C.3.9 Simplex 32-Channel Discrete Output Terminal Block

Installation Notes
• The Simplex 32-Channel Discrete Output Terminal Block provides wiring terminations
for a DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact, Series 2 Plus card.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to E3 to match the DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry
Contact Series 2 Plus card.

Specifications
Table C-52: Simplex 32-Channel Discrete Output Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 5 mA per I/O channel; 160 mA per card
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

217
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-63: Simplex 32-Channel Discrete Output Terminal Block

Keying (E3)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

Front view Bottom view

C.3.10 Interface Terminal Block

The AS-Interface and Serial cards use the Interface terminal block to provide terminations
for wiring.

Specifications
Table C-53: Interface Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage Rating 35 VDC
Max Current 1.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

218
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-64: Interface Terminal Block

Keying depends upon

the card type.
Refer to "I/O Interface
Keying" for key position.

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Port Port
1 2

Front View Bottom View

C.3.11 Isolated Input Terminal Block

The Isolated Input card uses the Isolated Input terminal block to provide terminations for
wiring.

Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage Rating 10 VAC/DC
Max Current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

219
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-65: Isolated Input Terminal Block

Keying (C2)

1 5 9 13 4-wire sensor excitation

2 6 10 14
+ Sensor +
3 7 11 15
- Sensor -
4 8 12 16
Wire compensation

Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4
Front View Bottom View

C.3.12 Profibus DP Terminal Block

The Profibus DP card uses the Profibus DP terminal block to provide terminations for
wiring.

Specifications
Table C-54: Profibus DP Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage Rating 5 VDC
Max Current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal Block Connections

The Profibus terminal block has two terminator positions on the front of the unit.
Terminator OUT is the bottom position; terminator IN is the top position. The terminal
block is shipped in the IN position.

220
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-66: Profibus DP Terminal Block

Keying (D3)

Terminator in
IN

OUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 S B1 A2 S B2 C S
T
S
Front View Bottom View

Gently tug on the jumper to remove it and then push the jumper onto a terminator
position. The location of the terminal block on the segment determines the terminator
position.

Terminal Block Position Terminator Position

End of segment IN
A terminator in the IN position provides
termination for the end of a segment. This type
of termination is usually made with a single
cable.
Middle of segment OUT
A terminator in the OUT position provides a
connection to other devices on the segment
through the terminal block. These connections
are typically made with two cables that run in
two different directions (for example to two
cabinets). The OUT position can also be used to
connect two cables to a redundant DP/PA
segment coupler for line redundancy.

• When terminal blocks are located either at the middle of a segment or at the end of a
long, single cable run, fiber-optic converters could be required in the line to provide
isolation between the different locations. For example, a fiber-optic converter could be
used to ensure that two cabinets installed in different buildings do not affect each
other in terms of potential differences, surges, or hazardous area classification.
• When redundant DP/PA segment couplers are used for line redundancy or full duplex
fiber-optic converters are used to isolate sections of the Profibus segment, be sure to
properly configure status handling for the Profibus slaves in the control strategy. For
example, be sure to configure the application software to determine the integrity and

221
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

status of the slave device and the status of the communication to and from the slave
device and the master.

C.3.13 RTD, ohms Terminal Block

The Series 1 and Series 2 RTD, ohms card uses the RTD, ohms terminal block to provide
terminations for wiring.
Table C-55: RTD, ohms Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage Rating 5 VDC
Max Current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-67: RTD, ohms Terminal Block

Keying (C3)

Sensor
excitation

Sensor +
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
Sensor -
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
+
Circuit common
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
-
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

C.3.14 Thermocouple Terminal Block

The Series 1 and Series 2 Thermocouple, mV card uses either the Thermocouple or I/O
terminal block to provide terminations for wiring.

Specifications
Table C-56: Thermocouple, mV Terminal Block
Item Specification
Voltage rating 5 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA

222
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-56: Thermocouple, mV Terminal Block (continued)

Item Specification
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-68: Thermocouple, mV Terminal Block

Keying (C1)

Thermocouple
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

C.3.15 32-Channel Terminal Block

Specifications
Table C-57: 32-Channel Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specifications
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 1A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

223
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-69: 32-Channel Terminal Block

Keying depends upon
the card type. Refer to
"I/O Interface Keying"
for key position.

1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29

2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 The numbers on the

terminal block indicate
3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 the channel assigments.

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

Front View Bottom View

C.3.16 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

Specifications
Table C-58: 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

224
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-70: 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

Keying (A2)

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the 16-channel analog input
terminal block.
Table C-59: 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block
Terminal on Channel Terminal on Channel
Termination Block Nomenclature Termination Block Nomenclature
Terminal 1 Channel 1+ Terminal 17 Channel 9+
Terminal 2 Channel 1- Terminal 18 Channel 9-
Terminal 3 Channel 2+ Terminal 19 Channel 10+
Terminal 4 Channel 2- Terminal 20 Channel 10-
Terminal 5 Channel 3+ Terminal 21 Channel 11+
Terminal 6 Channel 3- Terminal 22 Channel 11-
Terminal 7 Channel 4+ Terminal 23 Channel 12+
Terminal 8 Channel 4- Terminal 24 Channel 12-
Terminal 9 Channel 5+ Terminal 25 Channel 13+
Terminal 10 Channel 5- Terminal 26 Channel 13-
Terminal 11 Channel 6+ Terminal 27 Channel 14+
Terminal 12 Channel 6- Terminal 28 Channel 14-
Terminal 13 Channel 7+ Terminal 29 Channel 15+
Terminal 14 Channel 7- Terminal 30 Channel 15-
Terminal 15 Channel 8+ Terminal 31 Channel 16+

225
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-59: 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block (continued)

Terminal on Channel Terminal on Channel
Termination Block Nomenclature Termination Block Nomenclature
Terminal 16 Channel 8- Terminal 32 Channel 16-

C.3.17 4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

Installation Notes
• The 4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block provides 4-wire terminations for
the AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 card.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to A2 to match the AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART,
Series 2 card.

Specifications
Table C-60: 4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA per channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier.

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-71: 4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Front view Bottom view

226
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

C.4 Redundant Terminal Blocks

The DeltaV system can use the following types of redundant terminal blocks:
• Redundant Analog Input Terminal Block
• Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block
• Redundant Discrete Terminal Block
• Redundant H1 Terminal Block
• Redundant Interface Terminal Block
• Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block
Note
The redundant terminal blocks contain a latch for quick release. To remove the terminal
block, depress the latch with a screw driver or finger and pull the terminal block down and
off. The Redundant Interface terminal block contains two latches. To remove the terminal
block, depress both latches and pull the terminal block down and off.

C.4.1 Redundant Analog Input Terminal Block

Specifications
Table C-61: Redundant Analog Input Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum Current 200 mA
Operating Temperature -40°C to 60°C (-40°F to 140°F)
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

Figure C-72 shows the Redundant Analog Input terminal block. You can change between
two and four wire connections in groups of four channels. The 2-wire and 4-wire jumpers
on the left are for channels 1-4 and the 2-wire and 4-wire jumpers on the right are for
channels 5-8.
For 4-wire transmitter applications, rotate the jumper module 180° until the Field Type
arrows on the terminal block point to the 4-wire transmitter on the jumper.

227
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-72: Redundant Analog Input Terminal Block (shown as shipped)

To set the jumpers
from 2-wire to 4-wire
transmitters:
(Keying A1)
1. Remove jumper module
from the terminal block.

2. Rotate jumper module

180 degrees to the
connected transmitter
field type.

3. Place it back into the

terminal block.
I/O labels
Jumper module

2-WIRE

4-WIRE
(shipped as 2-wire

4-WIRE

2-WIRE

2-WIRE

4-WIRE
transmitter field type)

Analog Input Field Type

Front View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-

Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8
Bottom View

C.4.2 Redundant 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

Installation Notes
• The Redundant 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block provides wiring terminations
for the 2 or 4-wire redundant AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA , HART, Series 2 Plus card.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to A6 to match the AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA , HART,
Series 2 Plus card.

Specifications
Table C-62: Redundant 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 500 mA per I/O channel
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

228
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-73: Redundant 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

Keying (A6)

CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 31 34 37 40 43 46

2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 44 47

+ 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48
2-wire
+
–
4-wire

Front view Bottom view

C.4.3 Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block

Specifications
Table C-63: Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum Current 200 mA
Operating Temperature -40°C to 60°C (-40°F to 140°F)
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

229
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-74: Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block

(Keying A4)

I/O labels
Redundant Analog Output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-

Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8
Front View Bottom View

C.4.4 Redundant 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block

Installation Notes
• The Redundant 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block provides wiring
terminations for the redundant AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART, Series 2 Plus card.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to A5 to match the AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART,
Series 2 Plus card.

Specifications
Table C-64: Redundant 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current per channel 200 mA
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

230
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-75: Redundant 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block

Keying (A5)

CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

Front view Bottom view

C.4.5 Redundant Discrete Terminal Block

Specifications
Table C-65: Redundant Discrete Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 1 A per I/O channel 3 A per card
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

Terminal Block Connections

Table C-65 shows the Redundant Discrete terminal block. The key on the Redundant
Discrete terminal block is set to B1 at the factory for use with the Series 2 DI, 8-channel, 24
VDC Dry Contact card. Change the key position to B6 to use this terminal block with the
Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC High-Side card.

231
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-76: Redundant Discrete Terminal Block

Keying B1 for
DI card (as
shown), B6
for DO card

I/O labels

Redundant Discrete
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-

Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8
Front View Bottom View

C.4.6 Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Input Plus Terminal

Block
Installation Notes
• The Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Input Terminal Block provides wiring terminations
for a redundant pair of DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact, Series 2 Plus cards.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to E3 to match the DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry
Contact Series 2 Plus cards.

Specifications
Table C-66: Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Input Plus Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 5 mA per I/O channel; 160 mA per card
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

232
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-77: Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Input Plus Terminal Block

Keying (E3)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

Front view Bottom view

C.4.7 Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Output Plus Terminal

Block
Installation Notes
• The Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Output Terminal Block provides wiring
terminations for a redundant pair of DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact, Series 2
Plus cards.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to E3 to match the DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry
Contact Series 2 Plus cards.

Specifications
Table C-67: Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Output Plus Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 5 mA per I/O channel; 160 mA per card

233
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-67: Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Output Plus Terminal Block

specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-78: Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Output Plus Terminal Block

Keying (E3)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

Front view Bottom view

C.4.8 Redundant H1 Terminal Block

Specifications
Table C-68: Redundant H1 Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum Current 500 mA

234
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-68: Redundant H1 Terminal Block Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-79: Redundant H1 Terminal Block

Keying (D6)

I/O labels

Redundant H1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+- +-
Port 1 Port 2
+- +-
Port 1 Port 2

Front View Bottom View

C.4.9 Redundant H1 4-Port Terminal Block

Installation notes
• The Redundant H1 4-Port Terminal Block provides wiring terminations for a redundant
pair of Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus cards.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to D2 to match the redundant Fieldbus H1 4-Port
Series 2 Plus card.

Specifications
Table C-69: Redundant H1 4-Port Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum current 500 mA

235
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-69: Redundant H1 4-Port Terminal Block specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Mounting Assigned slots on the I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-80: Redundant H1 4-Port Terminal Block

Keying (D2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+ – + – + – + – + – + – + – + –
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

Front view Bottom view

C.4.10 Redundant Interface Terminal Block

Specifications
Table C-70: Redundant Interface Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum Current 1A
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

236
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

The Series 2 Serial cards use the Redundant Interface terminal block.
Note
The Redundant Interface terminal block contains two latches for quick release. To remove
the terminal block, depress both latches with a screw driver or finger and pull the terminal
block down and off.

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-81: Redundant Interface Terminal Block

Keying (D4)

Redundant Interface Cover with

I/O labels

Front View

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
Refer to card
specifications for pin out
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 connections and channel
nomenclature.

Bottom View

Refer to the tables in the Serial Card topic for information on the terminal assignments.

Related information
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485

C.4.11 Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block

Specifications
Table C-71: Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 5 VDC
Maximum Current 100 mA

237
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-71: Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

The Series 2 Plus Profibus DP cards in Redundant mode use the Redundant Profibus DP
terminal block.
Notes
Do not plug a simplex Series 1 or Series 2 Profibus DP card into a Redundant Profibus DP
terminal block. Only redundant Series 2 Plus Profibus DP cards can be used with the
Redundant Profibus DP terminal block.
For simplex or redundant applications, when the termination is in the OUT position, pins 1
and 3 and 4 and 6 can be used. When the termination is in the IN position only pins 1 and 3
can be used.
The Redundant Profibus DP terminal block contains two latches for quick release. To
remove the terminal block, depress both latches with a screw driver or finger and pull the
terminal block down and off.

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-82: Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block

Keying (D3)

Terminator In

Terminator Out

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Front View

Gently tug on the jumper to remove it and then push the jumper onto a terminator
position. The location of the terminal block on the segment determines the terminator
position.

238
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Terminal Block Position Terminator Position

End of segment IN
A terminator in the IN position provides
termination for the end of a segment. This type
of termination is usually made with a single
cable.
Middle of segment OUT
A terminator in the OUT position provides a
connection to other devices on the segment
through the terminal block. These connections
are typically made with two cables that run in
two different directions (for example to two
cabinets). The OUT position can also be used to
connect two cables to a redundant DP/PA
segment coupler for line redundancy.

• When terminal blocks are located either at the middle of a segment or at the end of a
long, single cable run, fiber-optic converters could be required in the line to provide
isolation between the different locations. For example, a fiber-optic converter could be
used to ensure that two cabinets installed in different buildings do not affect each
other in terms of potential differences, surges, or hazardous area classification.
• When redundant DP/PA segment couplers are used for line redundancy or full duplex
fiber-optic converters are used to isolate sections of the Profibus segment, be sure to
properly configure status handling for the Profibus slaves in the control strategy. For
example, be sure to configure the application software to determine the integrity and
status of the slave device and the status of the communication to and from the slave
device and the master.

C.5 Mass Termination Blocks

The DeltaV mass termination blocks allow you to connect external marshalling panels and
termination assemblies to your DeltaV system, significantly reducing wiring costs. The
mass termination blocks provide a method to route the wiring within an enclosure and are
used with low-level signals that are conducted over either 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) off-the-
shelf, flat ribbon cable or round instrument cable. For distances over 3 m, standard 20-pin
round ribbon cable, 0.14 mm2 (26 AWG) is available. These mass termination blocks
interface to a feed-through IDC-to-discrete-wire module such as the Phoenix Contact
FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon connector module. For more information on these modules,
visit the Phoenix Contact website. The Phoenix Contact FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module is an Emerson Alliance Program product.
The 40-Pin Mass Termination Block interfaces to either the DI or DO Mass Connection
Solutions through the same ribbon cable or round ribbon cable with 20-pin connectors.
If connectivity to IS barriers is required, additional HiD Series Boards from Pepperl+Fuchs
are available. For more information on these Boards and Barriers, visit the Pepperl+Fuchs
website. The HiD Series Boards from Pepperl+Fuchs are Emerson Alliance Program
products.

239
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Specifications
Table C-72: Mass Termination Block Specifications
Item Specification
Models 10-pin mass termination block 16-pin mass
termination block 24-pin mass termination
block 40-pin mass termination block
Voltage rating 30 VDC between non-connected signals
Maximum current 1 A per I/O channel (16-pin, 40-pin) 1 A per
cable (10-pin, 24-pin)
Maximum flat ribbon cable length 3 m (9.8 ft)
Maximum round ribbon cable length 6 m (19.6 ft)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Key position Set key position based on I/O card type. Factory
settings:
• 10-pin: B 6
• 16-pin: A 1
• 24-pin: A 3
• 40-pin: B 3

Note
The above specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed for the DI,
8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card, the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card, and the DO, 8-
channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card.

Figure C-83: Mass Termination Block

C.5.1 10-Pin Mass Termination Block

The 10-pin mass termination block is used for relay panels or optically isolated panels. The
10-pin assembly provides an interface to many off-the-shelf, 8-channel PLC terminations
and to other termination panels that use a 10-pin cable.

240
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

The two-row header accepts a 10-pin 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x5 header
connectors (AMP part #1658622-1, Strain Relief #499252-5) that can interface with a
Phoenix Contact UMK-8 RM24/KSR-G24/21 VARIOFACE output module (part #29709772)
or other similar module.

Termination Block Connections

The following table provides a pinout for the 10-pin mass termination block.
Table C-73: 10-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Channel 1+
2 Channel 2+
3 Channel 3+
4 Channel 4+
5 Channel 5+
6 Channel 6+
7 Channel 7+
8 Channel 8+
9 No connection
10 Common return for all eight channels

C.5.2 16-Pin Mass Termination Block

The 16-pin mass termination block provides 1:1 signal transmission of eight signals to
external passive input/output modules. The two-row header accepts a 16-pin 1-for-1
passthrough, 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x8 header connectors (AMP part
#1658622-3, Strain Relief #499252-8). The assembly interfaces with an IDC-to-discrete-
wire module, such as the Phoenix Contact FLKM 16/DV VARIOFACE ribbon connector
module (part #2304432) or other similar module.
The following table provides a pinout for the 16-pin mass termination block.
Table C-74: 16-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Channel 1-
2 Channel 1+
3 Channel 2-
4 Channel 2+
5 Channel 3-
6 Channel 3+
7 Channel 4-
8 Channel 4+

241
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-74: 16-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pinout (continued)

Pin Signal
9 Channel 5-
10 Channel 5+
11 Channel 6-
12 Channel 6+
13 Channel 7-
14 Channel 7+
15 Channel 8-
16 Channel 8+

C.5.3 24-Pin Mass Termination Block

The 24-pin mass termination block can be used with 4-wire analog input 4-20 mA and 1-5
VDC applications that are conducted over 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x12
header connectors (AMP part # 1658622-3, Strain Relief # 1-499252-0) or round
instrument cable.
The Phoenix Contact FLK16/24DV-AI/EZ-DR/100 24-pin to 16-pin conversion cable (part #
2301134) can be used with 4-wire applications. The conversion cable uses the Phoenix
Contact FLKM 16/DV VARIOFACE ribbon connector module (part # 2304432) and is
available in 1 m and other lengths.

CAUTION
Be careful when closing the cover if you have a 24-pin ribbon cable connected. The cover
can damage the cable.

Termination Block Connections

The following table provides a pinout for the 24-pin mass termination block.
Table C-75: 24-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pinout
Pin Signal
1 Channel 1+
3 Common channel for Channels 1 and 2
5 Channel 2+
7 Channel 3+
9 Common channel for Channels 3 and 4
11 Channel 4+
13 Channel 5+
15 Common channel for Channels 5 and 6
17 Channel 6+

242
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-75: 24-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pinout (continued)

Pin Signal
19 Channel 7+
21 Common channel for Channels 7 and 8
23 Channel 8+

Note
The 24 VDC return for the Analog Devices 7 V power supply must be connected to the
DeltaV 24 VDC return.

C.5.4 40-Pin Mass Termination Block

The 40-pin mass termination block provides terminations for the 32-channel digital input
and output cards and the Sequence of Events card.

For Use with 32-Channel DO and DI Cards

The 40-pin mass termination block has two 20-pin IDC headers that split the 32 channels
into two 16-channel headers. Each of the two-row headers accepts a 20-pin 1-for-1
passthrough, 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x10 header connectors (AMP part #
1658622-4, Strain Relief # 499252-2). The assembly interfaces with a feed-through IDC-
to-discrete-wire module such as the Phoenix Contact FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module (part # 2281047) or other similar module. Phoenix Contact provides
two ways to connect to the 20-pin connection:
• A 20-pin to 2x14-pin configuration cable that connects to all 8-channel digital input
and output modules. These modules include the PLC-RELAY with V-8 adapter, fuse,
feed-through and relay (both solid-state (SSR) and electromechanical relays (EMR)).
• A 20-pin 1-for-1 cable that is connected to 16-channel modules. These modules
include feed-through, fuse, and SSR and EMR relay modules with fuses on the relay
contact commons.
The 40-pin mass termination block can also interface to the DO and DI Mass Connection
Solutions as well as to the Pepperl+Fuchs HiD Series Boards if IS Barriers are required. The
Pepperl+Fuchs HiD Series Boards are Emerson Alliance Program products.
The return connection is made internally when the 40-pin mass termination block is used
with Series 2 DI and DO 32-channel cards. No external wire is required. Refer to the cards’
installation notes for more information.

CAUTION
Be careful when closing the cover if you have a 24-pin ribbon cable connected. The cover
can damage the cable.

For Use with SOE Cards

The 40-pin mass termination block has two 20-pin IDC headers that split the 16 channels
into two 8-channel headers. Both of the two-row headers accept a 20-pin 1-for-1
passthrough, 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x10 header connectors (AMP part
#1658622-4, Strain Relief #499252-2). The assembly interfaces to a feed-through IDC-to-

243
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

discrete-wire module such as the Phoenix Contact 2281047 FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module. Phoenix Contact provides the following way to connect to the 20-pin
connection:
• A 20-pin to 14-pin configuration cable that connects to all 8-channel digital input
modules. These modules include the PLC-RELAY with V-8 adapter, fuse, feed-through
and relay (both solid-state (SSR) and electromechanical relays (EMR)).

Terminal Block Connections

The following table provides a pinout for the 40-pin mass termination block.
Table C-76: 40-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pinout
J3 (Left Signal J4 (Right Signal
Connector) Connector)
Pin 32-channel DI SOE Pin 32-channel DI SOE
and DO and DO
1 Channel 1+ 1+ 1 Channel 17+ 9+
2 Channel 2+ 1- 2 Channel 18+ 9-
3 Channel 3+ 2+ 3 Channel 19+ 10+
4 Channel 4+ 2- 4 Channel 20+ 10-
5 Channel 5+ 3+ 5 Channel 21+ 11+
6 Channel 6+ 3- 6 Channel 22+ 11-
7 Channel 7+ 4+ 7 Channel 23+ 12+
8 Channel 8+ 4- 8 Channel 24+ 12-
9 Channel 9+ 5+ 9 Channel 25+ 13+
10 Channel 10+ 5- 10 Channel 26+ 13-
11 Channel 11+ 6+ 11 Channel 27+ 14+
12 Channel 12+ 6- 12 Channel 28+ 14-
13 Channel 13+ 7+ 13 Channel 29+ 15+
14 Channel 14+ 7- 14 Channel 30+ 15-
15 Channel 15+ 8+ 15 Channel 31+ 16+
16 Channel 16+ 8- 16 Channel 32+ 16-
17 no connection no connection 17 no connection no connection
18 return N/A 18 return N/A
19 no connection no connection 19 no connection no connection
20 return N/A 20 return N/A

Related information
DI Mass Connection Board (single)
DO Mass Connection Board (single)

244
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

C.5.5 Redundant Analog Input 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal

Block specifications
Installation notes
• This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for a redundant pair of M-series AI 16-
channel 4-20 mA HART Plus cards. Set the terminal block key to A6 before installing the
card.
• The mass terminal block has two 24-pin IDC headers that split the 16 channels into two
8-channel headers. Each of the two-row headers accepts a 24-pin, 1-for-1 passthrough
cable with 2x12 header connectors. The assembly can interface with a feed-through
IDC to analog wire module.

Specifications
Table C-77: Redundant Analog Input 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 30 mA per channel; 480 mA total
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

Terminal block connections

Table C-78: Redundant Analog Input 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block cable pinout
J5 (Upper Connector) Signal J6 (Lower Connector) Signal
Pin Pin
1 Channel 1- 1 Channel 9-
2 Channel 1+ 2 Channel 9+
3 Channel 2- 3 Channel 10-
4 Channel 2+ 4 Channel 10+
5 Channel 3- 5 Channel 11-
6 Channel 3+ 6 Channel 11+
7 Channel 4- 7 Channel 12-
8 Channel 4+ 8 Channel 12+
9 Channel 5- 9 Channel 13-
10 Channel 5+ 10 Channel 13+
11 Channel 6- 11 Channel 14-
12 Channel 6+ 12 Channel 14+

245
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-78: Redundant Analog Input 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block cable pinout
(continued)

J5 (Upper Connector) Signal J6 (Lower Connector) Signal

Pin Pin
13 Channel 7- 13 Channel 15-
14 Channel 7+ 14 Channel 15+
15 Channel 8- 15 Channel 16-
16 Channel 8+ 16 Channel 16+
17 4-wire channel 1 17 4-wire channel 9
18 4-wire channel 2 18 4-wire channel 10
19 4-wire channel 3 19 4-wire channel 11
20 4-wire channel 4 20 4-wire channel 12
21 4-wire channel 5 21 4-wire channel 13
22 4-wire channel 6 22 4-wire channel 14
23 4-wire channel 7 23 4-wire channel 15
24 4-wire channel 8 24 4-wire channel 16

C.5.6 Redundant Analog Output 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal

Block specifications
Installation Notes
• This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for a redundant pair of M-series AO 16-
channel 4-20 mA HART Plus cards. Set the terminal block key to A5 before installing the
card.
• The mass terminal block has two 24-pin IDC headers that split the 16 channels into two
8-channel headers. Each of the two-row headers accepts a 24-pin 1-for-1 passthrough
cable with 2x12 header connectors. The assembly can interface to a feed-through IDC
to analog wire module such as the Phoenix Contact FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module. It can also interface to the Pepperl+Fuchs HiD Series Boards if IS
Barriers are required. The Phoenix Contact FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon connector
module and the Pepperl+Fuchs HiD Series Boards are Emerson Alliance Program
products.

Specifications
Table C-79: Redundant Analog Output 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 30 mA per I/O channel; 480 mA total

246
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-79: Redundant Analog Output 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block specifications
(continued)

Item Specification
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

Terminal Block Connections

Table C-80: Redundant Analog Output 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block cable pinouts
J5 (Upper Connector) Signal J6 (Lower Connector) Signal
Pin Pin
1 Channel 1- 1 Channel 9-
2 Channel 1+ 2 Channel 9+
3 Channel 2- 3 Channel 10-
4 Channel 2+ 4 Channel 10+
5 Channel 3- 5 Channel 11-
6 Channel 3+ 6 Channel 11+
7 Channel 4- 7 Channel 12-
8 Channel 4+ 8 Channel 12+
9 Channel 5- 9 Channel 13-
10 Channel 5+ 10 Channel 13+
11 Channel 6- 11 Channel 14-
12 Channel 6+ 12 Channel 14+
13 Channel 7- 13 Channel 15-
14 Channel 7+ 14 Channel 15+
15 Channel 8- 15 Channel 16-
16 Channel 8+ 16 Channel 16+
17 - 17 -
18 - 18 -
19 - 19 -
20 - 20 -
21 - 21 -
22 - 22 -
23 - 23 -
24 - 24 -

247
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

C.5.7 Redundant Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination

Block
Installation notes
• The Redundant Discrete Input 40 Pin Mass Termination Block provides wiring
terminations for a redundant pair of DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact, Series 2 Plus
cards.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to E3 to match the DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry
Contact, Series 2 Plus card.
• The mass termination block has two 20-pin IDC headers that split the 32 channels into
two 16-channel headers. Each of the two-row headers accepts a 20-pin 1-for-1
passthrough cable with 2x10 header connectors.
• When the redundant DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact, Series 2 Plus card is used
with the Redundant Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination Block and the DI Mass
Connection Solution, the card can be configured to detect faults in the termination.
Two parameters, T1_FAULT_DETECT (for the ribbon cable connection for channels
1-16), and T2_FAULT_DETECT (for the ribbon cable connection for channels 17-32),
can be enabled in DeltaV Explorer for the card. When these parameters are set to True,
detection of the ribbon cable connection between the Redundant Discrete Input 40 Pin
Mass Termination Block and the DI Mass Connection Board is enabled and the system
detects faults such as a missing cable or missing Mass Connection Board.
• The return connection is made internally between the mass termination block and the
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact, Series 2 Plus card. No external wire is required.
Note
The termination fault detection feature is available only when the redundant DI, 32-
Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact Series 2 Plus card is used with the Redundant Discrete Input
40-Pin Mass Termination Block connected to the DI Mass Connection Solution.

Specifications
Table C-81: Redundant Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 5 mA per channel; 160 mA total
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

248
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Termination block connections

Table C-82: Redundant Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination Block cable pinout
J5 (Left Connector) Signal J6 (Right Connector) Signal
Pin Pin
1 Channel 1 1 Channel 17
2 Channel 2 2 Channel 18
3 Channel 3 3 Channel 19
4 Channel 4 4 Channel 20
5 Channel 5 5 Channel 21
6 Channel 6 6 Channel 22
7 Channel 7 7 Channel 23
8 Channel 8 8 Channel 24
9 Channel 9 9 Channel 25
10 Channel 10 10 Channel 26
11 Channel 11 11 Channel 27
12 Channel 12 12 Channel 28
13 Channel 13 13 Channel 29
14 Channel 14 14 Channel 30
15 Channel 15 15 Channel 31
16 Channel 16 16 Channel 32
17 Left cable detection 17 Right cable detection
18 +24 V 18 +24 V
19 Left cable detection 19 Right cable detection
20 +24 V 20 +24 V

C.5.8 Redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Termination

Block
Installation notes
• The Redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Termination Block provides wiring
terminations for a redundant pair of DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side, Series 2 Plus
cards.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to B4 to match the DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-
Side, Series 2 Plus card.
• The mass termination block has two 20-pin IDC headers that split the 32 channels into
two 16-channel headers. Each of the two-row headers accepts a 20-pin 1-for-1
passthrough cable with 2x10 header connectors.

249
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

• The return connection is made internally between the mass termination block and the
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side, Series 2 Plus card. No external wire is required.

Specifications
Table C-83: Redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Termination Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 1 A per channel; 5 A total
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

Termination block connections

Table C-84: Redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Termination Block cable pinout
J5 (Left Connector) Signal J6 (Right Connector) Signal
Pin Pin
1 Channel 1+ 1 Channel 17+
2 Channel 2+ 2 Channel 18+
3 Channel 3+ 3 Channel 19+
4 Channel 4+ 4 Channel 20+
5 Channel 5+ 5 Channel 21+
6 Channel 6+ 6 Channel 22+
7 Channel 7+ 7 Channel 23+
8 Channel 8+ 8 Channel 24+
9 Channel 9+ 9 Channel 25+
10 Channel 10+ 10 Channel 26+
11 Channel 11+ 11 Channel 27+
12 Channel 12+ 12 Channel 28+
13 Channel 13+ 13 Channel 29+
14 Channel 14+ 14 Channel 30+
15 Channel 15+ 15 Channel 31+
16 Channel 16+ 16 Channel 32+
17 Left cable detection 17 Right cable detection
18 return 18 return
19 Left cable detection 19 Right cable detection
20 return 20 return

250
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

C.5.9 Simplex Analog Input 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block

specifications
Installation notes
• This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the M-series simplex AI 16-channel
4-20 mA HART Plus card. Set the terminal block key to A6 before installing the card.
• The mass terminal block has two 24-pin IDC headers that split the 16 channels into two
8-channel headers. Each of the two-row headers accepts a 24-pin 1-for-1 passthrough
cable with 2x12 header connectors. The assembly can interface to a feed-through IDC
to analog wire module such as the Phoenix Contact FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module. It can also interface to the Pepperl+Fuchs HiD Series Boards if IS
Barriers are required. The Phoenix Contact FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon connector
module and the Pepperl+Fuchs HiD Series Boards are Emerson Alliance Program
products.

Specifications
Table C-85: Simplex Analog Input 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 30 mA per channel; 480 mA total
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier.

Terminal block connections

Table C-86: Simplex Analog Input 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block cable pinout
J3 (Upper Connector) Signal J4 (Lower Connector) Signal
Pin Pin
1 Channel 1- 1 Channel 9-
2 Channel 1+ 2 Channel 9+
3 Channel 2- 3 Channel 10-
4 Channel 2+ 4 Channel 10+
5 Channel 3- 5 Channel 11-
6 Channel 3+ 6 Channel 11+
7 Channel 4- 7 Channel 12-
8 Channel 4+ 8 Channel 12+
9 Channel 5- 9 Channel 13-
10 Channel 5+ 10 Channel 13+
11 Channel 6- 11 Channel 14-
12 Channel 6+ 12 Channel 14+
13 Channel 7- 13 Channel 15-

251
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-86: Simplex Analog Input 48-Pin Plus Mass Terminal Block cable pinout
(continued)

J3 (Upper Connector) Signal J4 (Lower Connector) Signal

Pin Pin
14 Channel 7+ 14 Channel 15+
15 Channel 8- 15 Channel 16-
16 Channel 8+ 16 Channel 16+
17 4-wire channel 1 17 4-wire channel 9
18 4-wire channel 2 18 4-wire channel 10
19 4-wire channel 3 19 4-wire channel 11
20 4-wire channel 4 20 4-wire channel 12
21 4-wire channel 5 21 4-wire channel 13
22 4-wire channel 6 22 4-wire channel 14
23 4-wire channel 7 23 4-wire channel 15
24 4-wire channel 8 24 4-wire channel 16

C.5.10 Simplex Analog Output 48-Pin Mass Terminal Block

specifications
Installation Notes
• This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for an M-series simplex AO 16-channel
4-20 mA HART Plus card. Set the terminal block key to A5 before installing the card.
• The mass terminal block has two 24-pin IDC headers that split the 16 channels into two
8-channel headers. Each of the two-row headers accepts a 24-pin 1-for-1 passthrough
cable with 2x12 header connectors. The assembly can interface to a feed-through IDC
to analog wire module such as the Phoenix Contact FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module. It can also interface to the Pepperl+Fuchs HiD Series Boards if IS
Barriers are required. The Phoenix Contact FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon connector
module and the Pepperl+Fuchs HiD Series Boards are Emerson Alliance Program
products.

Specifications
Table C-87: Simplex Analog Output 48-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 30 mA per I/O channel; 480 mA total
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier

252
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Terminal Block Connections

Table C-88: Simplex Analog Output 48-Pin Mass Terminal Block cable pinout
J2 (Upper Connector) Signal J3 (Lower Connector) Signal
Pin Pin
1 Channel 1- 1 Channel 9-
2 Channel 1+ 2 Channel 9+
3 Channel 2- 3 Channel 10-
4 Channel 2+ 4 Channel 10+
5 Channel 3- 5 Channel 11-
6 Channel 3+ 6 Channel 11+
7 Channel 4- 7 Channel 12-
8 Channel 4+ 8 Channel 12+
9 Channel 5- 9 Channel 13-
10 Channel 5+ 10 Channel 13+
11 Channel 6- 11 Channel 14-
12 Channel 6+ 12 Channel 14+
13 Channel 7- 13 Channel 15-
14 Channel 7+ 14 Channel 15+
15 Channel 8- 15 Channel 16-
16 Channel 8+ 16 Channel 16+
17 - 17 -
18 - 18 -
19 - 19 -
20 - 20 -
21 - 21 -
22 - 22 -
23 - 23 -
24 - 24 -

C.5.11 Simplex Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination Block

Installation notes
• The Simplex Discrete Input 40 Pin Mass Termination Block provides wiring terminations
for a DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact, Series 2 Plus card.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to E3 to match the DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry
Contact, Series 2 Plus card.

253
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

• The mass termination block has two 20-pin IDC headers that split the 32 channels into
two 16-channel headers. Each of the two-row headers accepts a 20-pin 1-for-1
passthrough cable with 2x10 header connectors.
• When the DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact, Series 2 Plus card is used with the
Simplex Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination Block and the DI Mass Connection
Solution, the card can be configured to detect faults in the termination. Two
parameters, T1_FAULT_DETECT (for the ribbon cable connection for channels 1-16),
and T2_FAULT_DETECT (for the ribbon cable connection for channels 17-32), can be
enabled in DeltaV Explorer for the card. When these parameters are set to True,
detection of the ribbon cable connection between the Simplex Discrete Input 40 Pin
Mass Termination Block and the DI Mass Connection Board is enabled and the system
detects faults such as a missing cable or missing Mass Connection Board.
• The return connection is made internally between the mass termination block and the
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact, Series 2 Plus card. No external wire is required.
Note
The termination fault detection feature is available only when the DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC,
Dry Contact Series 2 Plus card is used with the Simplex Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass
Termination Block connected to the DI Mass Connection Solution.

Specifications
Table C-89: Simplex Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 5 mA per channel; 160 mA total
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

Terminal block connections

Table C-90: Simplex Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination Block cable pin outs
J3 (Upper Connector) Signal J4 (Lower Connector) Signal
Pin Pin
1 Channel 1 1 Channel 17
2 Channel 2 2 Channel 18
3 Channel 3 3 Channel 19
4 Channel 4 4 Channel 20
5 Channel 5 5 Channel 21
6 Channel 6 6 Channel 22
7 Channel 7 7 Channel 23
8 Channel 8 8 Channel 24

254
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-90: Simplex Discrete Input 40-Pin Mass Termination Block cable pin outs
(continued)

J3 (Upper Connector) Signal J4 (Lower Connector) Signal

Pin Pin
9 Channel 9 9 Channel 25
10 Channel 10 10 Channel 26
11 Channel 11 11 Channel 27
12 Channel 12 12 Channel 28
13 Channel 13 13 Channel 29
14 Channel 14 14 Channel 30
15 Channel 15 15 Channel 31
16 Channel 16 16 Channel 32
17 Left cable detection 17 Right cable detection
18 +24 V 18 +24 V
19 Left cable detection 19 Right cable detection
20 +24 V 20 +24 V

C.5.12 Simplex Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Termination Block

Installation notes
• The Simplex Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Termination Block provides wiring
terminations for a DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side, Series 2 Plus card.
• Set the keys on the terminal block to B4 to match the DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-
Side, Series 2 Plus card.
• The mass termination block has two 20-pin IDC headers that split the 32 channels into
two 16-channel headers. Each of the two-row headers accepts a 20-pin 1-for-1
passthrough cable with 2x10 header connectors.
• The return connection is made internally between the mass termination block and the
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side, Series 2 Plus card. No external wire is required.

Specifications
Table C-91: Simplex Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Termination Block specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 1 A per channel; 5 A total
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot
number must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For
example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

255
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Terminal block connections

Table C-92: Simplex Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Termination Block cable pin outs
J3 (Upper Connector) Channel J4 (Lower Connector) Channel
Pin Nomenclature Pin Nomenclature
1 Channel 1+ 1 Channel 17+
2 Channel 2+ 2 Channel 18+
3 Channel 3+ 3 Channel 19+
4 Channel 4+ 4 Channel 20+
5 Channel 5+ 5 Channel 21+
6 Channel 6+ 6 Channel 22+
7 Channel 7+ 7 Channel 23+
8 Channel 8+ 8 Channel 24+
9 Channel 9+ 9 Channel 25+
10 Channel 10+ 10 Channel 26+
11 Channel 11+ 11 Channel 27+
12 Channel 12+ 12 Channel 28+
13 Channel 13+ 13 Channel 29+
14 Channel 14+ 14 Channel 30+
15 Channel 15+ 15 Channel 31+
16 Channel 16+ 16 Channel 32+
17 Left cable detection 17 Right cable detection
18 return 18 return
19 Left cable detection 19 Right cable detection
20 return 20 return

C.6 Signal Conditioning Cards

C.6.1 16-Channel Analog Input 4-20 mA Signal Conditioning

Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
Installation notes
• The 16-Channel Analog Input 4-20 mA Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
replaces the 16-channel 1771-IFE single-ended AI card, providing an interface between
16 analog PLC signals and simplex or redundant Series 2 Plus 16-channel AI cards.
• The swing-arm attachment point on the front of the card provides secure mechanical
and electrical connections for a 1771-WG or 1771-WH swing arm.

256
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

• The two 24-pin ribbon-cable connectors on the bottom of the card provide
connections for a Simplex or Redundant Analog Input 48-Pin Plus Mass Termination
Block, which is required to connect to a simplex or redundant Series 2 Plus 16-channel
AI card.
• Use the consolidated ribbon cable with shield ground wire to connect the signal
conditioning card to the mass termination block. The J1 connector of the signal
conditioning card connects to the upper connector of the mass termination block, and
the J2 connector of the signal conditioning card connects to the lower connector of the
mass termination block. Be sure to install the strain reliefs included with the cable at
the end connected to the signal conditioning card, and connect the shield ground wire
to the shield ground bar of the DeltaV I/O carrier.
• Up to 16 analog 4-20 mA non-HART field devices can be connected to the swing-arm
screw terminals.
• You can connect single-ended, field-powered, non-isolated, channel-to-channel signals
to the swing-arm screw terminals. Field power from the DeltaV AI card is not
supported.
• This solution is not compatible with differential analog input signals.

Dimensional drawings

Figure C-84: Dimensions of Analog Input 4-20 mA Signal Conditioning Card for
PLC-5/1771 I/O

20.77 cm
(8.18 in.)

J1 connector J2 connector

16.84 cm 3.43 cm
(6.63 in.) (1.35 in.)

Wiring diagrams
The following diagrams show wiring methods for the Analog Input 4-20 mA Signal
Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O.

257
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-85: 2-wire transmitter, field power supply, loop power

Control
Field
Room

CH1 Channel 1
Carrier Field Power
CH2 Channel 2
Channel 3
DeltaV Chassis
AI 16-Channel 4-20 mA HART Series 2 Plus
Channel 4
Ground (CG) Common 4-20mA
Power Module Common
Common Channel 5 Signal Low
Supply A/D
Channel 6
Pass

Isola!on
Field
Converter

24 Pin Ribbon
Channel 7
Channel 8 250Ω Filter

Cable
DeltaV Module Common
DC Ground
Channel 9
(DCG)

Termblock
Channel 10
Primary

48-Pin
Mass
Channel 11
Channel 12
AI 16-Channel 4-20 mA HART Series 2 Plus
Module Common
Channel 13 4-20mA
Channel 14 Signal Low
DeltaV Chassis A/D
Channel 15
Pass

Isola!on
Field
Ground (CG)
Power
Channel 16
250Ω Converter
Module Common Filter
Supply Module Common

AI 4-20 mA Signal
Secondary
DeltaV
Condi"oning Card for
DC Ground
1771 I/O
(DCG)

Isolated Bus

Chassis DC Ground
To DIG Ground (CG) To DIG (DCG)

258
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-86: 2-wire transmitter, control-room power supply, loop power

Field Control
Room

CH1 Channel 1
Carrier Field Power
DeltaV Chassis CH2 Channel 2
Channel 3
Ground (CG) AI 16-Channel 4-20 mA HART Series 2 Plus
Channel 4
Module Common 4-20mA
Channel 5 Signal Low
A/D
Pass

Isola!on
Channel 6

Field
Converter

24 Pin Ribbon
Channel 7
250Ω Filter
Channel 8

Cable
Module Common
Channel 9

Termblock
Channel 10 Primary

48-Pin
Mass
Channel 11
Channel 12 AI 16-Channel 4-20 mA HART Series 2 Plus
Module Common 4-20mA
Channel 13
Signal Low
DeltaV Chassis
Channel 14 A/D
Pass

Isola!on
Field
Ground (CG) Channel 15
250Ω Converter
Channel 16
Module Common
Filter
Module Common

AI 4-20 mA Signal
Secondary
Condi!oning Card for
1771 I/O

Isolated Bus

Chassis DC Ground
To DIG Ground (CG) To DIG (DCG)

259
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-87: 3-wire transmitter, field power supply

Control
Field
Room

CH1 Channel 1
Carrier Field Power
CH2 Channel 2
Channel 3
DeltaV Chassis
AI 16-Channel 4-20 mA HART Series 2 Plus
Channel 4
Ground (CG) Common 4-20mA
Power Module Common
Common Channel 5 Signal Low
Supply A/D
Pass

Isola!on
Channel 6

Field
Converter

24 Pin Ribbon
Channel 7
250Ω Filter
Channel 8

Cable
DeltaV
DC Ground Module Common
(DCG) Channel 9

Termblock
Channel 10 Primary

48-Pin
Mass
Channel 11
Channel 12 AI 16-Channel 4-20 mA HART Series 2 Plus
Module Common 4-20mA
Channel 13
Signal Low
DeltaV Chassis
Channel 14 A/D
Pass

Isola!on
Field
Ground (CG) Channel 15
Power 250Ω Converter
Channel 16
Filter
Supply Module Common
Module Common

AI 4-20 mA Signal
Secondary
DeltaV
Condi"oning Card for
DC Ground
1771 I/O
(DCG)

Isolated Bus

Chassis DC Ground
To DIG Ground (CG) To DIG (DCG)

260
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-88: 4-wire transmitter, field power supply

Control
Field
Room

CH1 Channel 1
CH2 Channel 2 Carrier Field Power
Channel 3
DeltaV Chassis
AI 16-Channel 4-20 mA HART Series 2 Plus
Channel 4
Ground (CG) Common 4-20mA
Power Module Common
Common Channel 5 Signal Low
Supply A/D
Pass

Isola!on
Channel 6

Field
Converter

24 Pin Ribbon
Channel 7
250Ω Filter
DeltaV Channel 8

Cable
DC Ground Module Common
(DCG)
Channel 9

Termblock
Channel 10 Primary

48-Pin
Mass
Channel 11
Channel 12 AI 16-Channel 4-20 mA HART Series 2 Plus
Module Common 4-20mA
Channel 13
Signal Low
DeltaV Chassis
Channel 14 A/D
Pass

Isola!on
Field
Ground (CG) Channel 15
Power 250Ω Converter
Channel 16
Filter
Supply Module Common
Module Common

DeltaV AI 4-20 mA Signal

Secondary
DC Ground Condi"oning Card for
(DCG) 1771 I/O

Isolated Bus

Chassis DC Ground
To DIG Ground (CG) To DIG (DCG)

Note
Emerson recommends using isolated four-wire transmitters. For DC-powered, isolated 4-
wire transmitters, connect the power supply return to DeltaV DC ground to prevent
ground bounce from localized transients.

Ribbon-cable connector pinout

The following table shows the pinouts for the two ribbon-cable connectors of the Analog
Input 4-20 mA Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O.

Rear Connector (J1) Front Connector (J2)

Pin 1 Channel 1 Signal Pin 1 Channel 9 Signal
Pin 2 No Connection Pin 2 No Connection
Pin 3 Channel 2 Signal Pin 3 Channel 10 Signal
Pin 4 No Connection Pin 4 No Connection
Pin 5 Channel 3 Signal Pin 5 Channel 11 Signal
Pin 6 No Connection Pin 6 No Connection
Pin 7 Channel 4 Signal Pin 7 Channel 12 Signal
Pin 8 No Connection Pin 8 No Connection
Pin 9 Channel 5 Signal Pin 9 Channel 13 Signal

261
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Rear Connector (J1) Front Connector (J2)

Pin 10 No Connection Pin 10 No Connection
Pin 11 Channel 6 Signal Pin 11 Channel 14 Signal
Pin 12 No Connection Pin 12 No Connection
Pin 13 Channel 7 Signal Pin 13 Channel 15 Signal
Pin 14 No Connection Pin 14 No Connection
Pin 15 Channel 8 Signal Pin 15 Channel 16 Signal
Pin 16 No Connection Pin 16 No Connection
Pin 17 Channel 1 DC GND Pin 17 Channel 9 DC GND
Pin 18 Channel 2 DC GND Pin 18 Channel 10 DC GND
Pin 19 Channel 3 DC GND Pin 19 Channel 11 DC GND
Pin 20 Channel 4 DC GND Pin 20 Channel 12 DC GND
Pin 21 Channel 5 DC GND Pin 21 Channel 13 DC GND
Pin 22 Channel 6 DC GND Pin 22 Channel 14 DC GND
Pin 23 Channel 7 DC GND Pin 23 Channel 15 DC GND
Pin 24 Channel 8 DC GND Pin 24 Channel 16 DC GND

Specifications
Table C-93: Analog Input 4-20 mA Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
specifications
Item Specification
Field device type 4-20 mA
Number of channels 16
Field signals 2- and 4-wire field-powered transmitters
Electrical connections • Front: one 1771-WG/WH swing arm
• Bottom: two 24-pin ribbon-cable connectors

Maximum input voltage per channel 24 VDC

Maximum input current per channel 30 mA
Dimensions • Height: 208 mm (8.2 in.)
• Width: 32 mm (1.3 in.)
• Depth: 168 mm (6.6 in.)

Operating temperature range -40 to 60 °C

Storage temperature range -40 to 85 °C
Relative humidity range 5 to 95% non-condensing
Protection from airborne contaminants ISA-S71.04-1985 Airborne Contaminants Class
G3 conformal coating

262
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-93: Analog Input 4-20 mA Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Shock 10 g, 1/2-sine wave for 11 ms
Vibration 1 mm peak-to-peak from 2 to 13.2 Hz, 0.7 g
from 13.2 to 150 Hz

C.6.2 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 24 VDC Signal Conditioning

Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
Installation notes
• The 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 24 VDC Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
replaces the 16-channel 1771-IBD 24 VDC DI card, providing an interface between 16
discrete input PLC signals and simplex or redundant Series 2 Plus DI, 32-Channel, 24
VDC, Dry Contact cards. Two 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 24 VDC Signal Conditioning
Cards for PLC-5/1771 I/O are required to connect to all 32 channels of one Series 2 Plus
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card.
• The swing-arm attachment point on the front of the card provides secure mechanical
and electrical connections for a 1771-WH swing arm.
• The 20-pin ribbon-cable connector on the bottom of the card provides connections for
a simplex or redundant Discrete Input 40-Pin Plus Mass Termination Block, which is
required to connect to a simplex or redundant Series 2 Plus DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC,
Dry Contact card.
• Use the consolidated ribbon cable to connect the signal conditioning card to the mass
termination block. Be sure to install the strain relief included with the cable at the end
connected to the signal conditioning card.
• Up to 16 discrete input, 24 VDC-based field devices can be connected to the swing-arm
screw terminals.

263
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Dimensional drawings

Figure C-89: Dimensions of 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 24 VDC Signal Conditioning

Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O

20.77 cm
(8.18 in.)

16.84 cm 3.43 cm
(6.63 in.) (1.35 in.)

Wiring diagrams
The following diagram shows how to connect discrete input signals to a DeltaV system.

Figure C-90: Wiring diagram for redundant DC discrete input

Carrier
Field Power
Chan nel 1 Channel 1
DI 32-Channel 24 VDC Dry
20-Pin Ribbon Cable

Chan nel 2
Chan nel 3 Contact Series 2 Plus
Chan nel 4
DeltaV
Termblock

Chan nel 5
Primary System
40-Pin
Mass

Chan nel 6
Chan nel 7
Chan nel 8
Chan nel 9
Channel 10
DI 32-Channel 24 VDC Dry
Channel 11
Contact Series 2 Plus
Channel 12 DeltaV
Channel 13
Secondary System
Channel 14
Channel 15
Channel 16 Channel 16
Module Common DI 24 VDC Signal
Condi!oning Card
for 1771 I/O
Isolated Bus

Chassis DC Ground
To DIG Ground (CG) To DIG (DCG)

264
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Specifications
Table C-94: 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 24 VDC Signal Conditioning Card for 1771 I/O
specifications
Item Specification
Field device type 24 VDC dry contact
Number of channels 16
Isolation Channels share a common ground return.
Electrical connections • Front: one 1771-WH swing arm
• Bottom: one 20-pin ribbon-cable connector

Nominal input current • 4.5 mA at 10 VDC

• 15 mA at 30 VDC

Minimum ON-state voltage 10 VDC

Minimum OFF-state voltage 5 VDC
Input voltage range 10-30 VDC
Maximum nominal input impedance 2.2 kΩ
Dimensions • Height: 208 mm (8.2 in.)
• Width: 32 mm (1.3 in.)
• Depth: 168 mm (6.6 in.)

Operating temperature range -40 to 60 °C

Storage temperature range -40 to 85 °C
Relative humidity range 5 to 95% non-condensing
Protection from airborne contaminants ISA-S71.04-1985 Airborne Contaminants Class
G3 conformal coating
Shock 10 g, 1/2-sine wave for 11 ms
Vibration 1 mm peak-to-peak from 2 to 13.2 Hz, 0.7 g
from 13.2 to 150 Hz

C.6.3 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC Signal

Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
Installation notes
• The 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC Signal Conditioning Card for
PLC-5/1771 I/O replaces the 16-channel 1771-IAD 120 VAC/VDC DI card, providing an
interface between 16 discrete input PLC signals and simplex or redundant Series 2 Plus
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact cards. Two 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120
VAC/VDC Signal Conditioning Cards for 1771 I/O are required to connect to all 32
channels of one Series 2 Plus DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card.

265
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

• The swing-arm attachment point on the front of the card provides secure mechanical
and electrical connections for a 1771-WH swing arm.
• The 20-pin ribbon-cable connector on the bottom of the card provides connections for
a simplex or redundant Discrete Input 40-Pin Plus Mass Termination Block, which is
required to connect to a simplex or redundant Series 2 Plus DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC,
Dry Contact card.
• Use the consolidated ribbon cable to connect the signal conditioning card to the mass
termination block. Be sure to install the strain relief included with the cable at the end
connected to the signal conditioning card.
• Up to 16 discrete input, 120 VAC/VDC-based field devices can be connected to the
swing-arm screw terminals.

Time-delay jumper
The jumper switch on the bottom of the card determines the time delay of input signals
from OFF to ON. The time delay can be set at 5 ms or 20 ms. The default setting is 5 ms.
The following figure shows the two jumper settings.

Figure C-91: Time-delay jumper settings

5 ms filter setting 20 ms filter setting

266
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Dimensional drawings

Figure C-92: Dimensions of 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC Signal

Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O

20.77 cm
(8.18 in.)

16.84 cm 3.43 cm
(6.63 in.) (1.35 in.)

Wiring diagrams

Figure C-93: Wiring diagram for 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC Signal
Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O

Carrier
Field Power
Channel 1 Channel 1
DI 32-Channel 24 VDC Dry
20-Pin Ribbon Cable

Chan nel 2
Chan nel 3 Contact Series 2 Plus
Chan nel 4
DeltaV
Chan nel 5 Primary
Termblock

System
40-Pin

Chan nel 6
Mass

Chan nel 7
Chan nel 8
Chan nel 9
Channel 10
DI 32-Channel 24 VDC Dry
Channel 11
Contact Series 2 Plus
Channel 12 DeltaV
Channel 13 Secondary
System
Channel 14
Channel 15
Channel 16 Channel 16
Module Common
DI 120 VAC Signal
Secondary
Condi!oning Card Isolated Bus
for 1771 I/O

Chassis DC Ground
To DIG Ground (CG) To DIG (DCG)

267
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Specifications
Table C-95: 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC Signal Conditioning Card for
PLC-5/1771 I/O specifications
Item Specification
Field device type 120 VAC/VDC dry contact
Number of channels 16
Isolation • Field to system tested to 2,000 VDC for 2 s.
• Channels must share a common return.

Electrical connections • Front: one 1771-WH swing arm

• Bottom: one 20-pin ribbon-cable connector

Nominal input voltage • 120 VAC at 50/60 Hz

• 125 VDC

Nominal input current • 9.9 mA at 120 VAC at 60 Hz

• 8.7 mA at 120 VAC at 50 Hz
• 2.56 mA at 125 VDC

ON-state voltage range 79-138 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF-state voltage 43 VAC/VDC
Input impedance 11.2 kΩ at 60 Hz
Input signal delay, OFF to ON Time-delay jumper for 5 ms (default setting) and
20 ms
Dimensions • Height: 208 mm (8.2 in.)
• Width: 32 mm (1.3 in.)
• Depth: 168 mm (6.6 in.)

Operating temperature range -40 to 60 °C

Storage temperature range -40 to 85 °C
Relative humidity range 5 to 95% non-condensing
Protection from airborne contaminants ISA-S71.04-1985 Airborne Contaminants Class
G3 conformal coating
Shock 10 g, 1/2-sine wave for 11 ms
Vibration 1 mm peak-to-peak from 2 to 13.2 Hz, 0.7 g
from 13.2 to 150 Hz

268
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

C.6.4 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC, Isolated

Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
Installation notes
• The 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC, Isolated Signal Conditioning Card for
PLC-5/1771 I/O replaces the 16-channel 1771-ID16 120 VAC/VDC DI card, providing an
interface for 16 discrete input PLC signals and simplex or redundant Series 2 Plus DI,
32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact cards.
• The swing-arm attachment point on the front of the card provides secure mechanical
and electrical connections for a 40-position card-edge 1771-WN swing-arm.
• The 20-pin ribbon-cable connector on the bottom of the card provides connections for
a simplex or redundant Discrete Input 40-Pin Plus Mass Termination Block, which is
required to connect to a simplex or redundant Series 2 Plus DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC,
Dry Contact card.
• Use the consolidated ribbon cable to connect the signal conditioning card to the mass
termination block. Be sure to install the strain relief included with the cable at the end
connected to the signal conditioning card.
• Up to 16 discrete input, 120 VAC/VDC-based field devices can be connected to the
swing-arm screw terminals.

Time-delay jumpers
Jumpers J1 and J4, on the bottom of the card, determine the time delay of input signals
from OFF to ON. J1 determines the time delay for channels 1-8 and J4 determines the time
delay for channels 9-16. The time delay can be set at 5 ms or 20 ms. The default setting is
20 ms. The following figure shows the two jumpers and their settings. Note that the figure
shows both jumpers in the same position in each example, but the jumpers are
independent of each other.

269
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-94: Time-delay jumper settings

J4 J1

5 ms filter setting 20 ms filter setting

Dimensional drawings

Figure C-95: Dimensions of 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC, Isolated Signal
Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O

Field wiring
For each pair of screw terminals, connect the lower-numbered screw terminal to the load
and the higher-numbered screw terminal to the positive output of the power supply. The
following figure shows how to connect screw terminals 1 and 2 to discrete input 1.

270
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-96: Wiring diagram for 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC, Isolated
Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
DI1-

DI1+
1
2
L
3 120 VAC Source
N

4
5
6

Specifications
Table C-96: 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC, Isolated Signal Conditioning
Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O specifications
Item Specification
Field device type 120 VAC/VDC dry contact
Number of channels 16
Isolation Field to system tested to 2,000 VDC for 2 s
Electrical connections • Front: one 1771-WN swing arm
• Bottom: one 20-pin ribbon-cable connector

Nominal input voltage • 120 VAC at 50/60 Hz

• 125 VDC

Nominal input current • 9.9 mA at 120 VAC at 60 Hz

• 8.7 mA at 120 VAC at 50 Hz
• 2.56 mA at 125 VDC

ON-state voltage range 79-138 VAC/VDC

Maximum OFF-state voltage 43 VAC/VDC
Input impedance 11.2 kΩ at 60 Hz
Input signal delay, OFF to ON Two time-delay jumpers for 5 ms and 20 ms
• J1: channels 1-8
• J4: channels 9-16

271
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-96: 16-Channel, Discrete Input, 120 VAC/VDC, Isolated Signal Conditioning
Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Dimensions • Height: 208 mm (8.2 in.)
• Width: 32 mm (1.3 in.)
• Depth: 168 mm (6.6 in.)

Operating temperature range -40 to 60 °C

Storage temperature range -40 to 85 °C
Relative humidity range 5 to 95% non-condensing
Protection from airborne contaminants ISA-S71.04-1985 Airborne Contaminants Class
G3 conformal coating
Shock 10 g, 1/2-sine wave for 11 ms
Vibration 1 mm peak-to-peak from 2 to 13.2 Hz, 0.7 g
from 13.2 to 150 Hz

C.6.5 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 24 VDC Signal

Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
Installation notes
• The 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 24 VDC Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
replaces the 16-channel 1771-OBD 24 VDC DO card, providing an interface between16
discrete output PLC signals and simplex or redundant DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-
Side, Series 2 Plus cards. Each 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 24 VDC Signal
Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O can drive 16 channels.
• The swing-arm attachment point on the front of the card provides secure mechanical
and electrical connections for a 1771-WH swing arm.
• The 20-pin ribbon-cable connector on the bottom of the card provides connections for
a simplex or redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Plus Mass Termination Block, which is
required to connect to a simplex or redundant Series 2 Plus DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC,
High-Side card.
• Use the consolidated ribbon cable to connect the signal conditioning card to the mass
termination block. Be sure to install the strain relief included with the cable at the end
connected to the signal conditioning card.
• Up to 16 discrete output, 24 VDC-based field devices can be connected to the swing-
arm screw terminals.

272
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Dimensional drawings

Figure C-97: Dimensions of 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 24 VDC Signal Conditioning

Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O

20.77 cm
(8.18 in.)

16.84 cm 3.43 cm
(6.63 in.) (1.35 in.)

Wiring diagrams

Figure C-98: Wiring diagram for discrete output

Carrier
10 A
Field Power

DO 32-Channel 24VDC Chan nel 1

High-Side, Series 2 Plus Channel 2
Channel 3
DeltaV Channel 4
System Primary Channel 5
Channel 6 CH 1
DO 24VDC Channel 7 Load
20 Pin Ribbon
40-Pin Mass

Signal
Termblock

Channel 8
DO 32-Channel 24VDC Conditioning Card
Cable

Channel 9
High-Side, Series 2 Plus for 1771 I/O Channel 10
Channel 11
DeltaV Secondary Channel 12
Channel 13
System
Channel 14
Channel 15
Channel 16
DC Return
Isolated Bus

Chassis DC Ground
To DIG Ground (CG) To DIG (DCG)

273
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Specifications
Table C-97: 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 24 VDC Signal Conditioning Card for
PLC-5/1771 I/O specifications
Item Specification
Field device type 24 VDC high-side
Number of channels 16
Isolation • 1,000 VDC channel to system
• Channels share a common ground return.

Electrical connections • Front: one 1771-WH swing arm

• Bottom: one 20-pin ribbon-cable connector

User supply voltage 10-60 VDC

Output current rating 2 A per channel, not to exceed 8 A per card
Maximum surge current • 4 A per channel for 10 ms, repeatable every
2s
• 25 A per card for 10 ms, repeatable every 2 s

Maximum ON-state voltage drop 1.5 VDC at rated current

Minimum load current 2.5 mA per channel
Maximum OFF-state leakage current 0.5 mA per channel
Dimensions • Height: 208 mm (8.2 in.)
• Width: 32 mm (1.3 in.)
• Depth: 168 mm (6.6 in.)

Operating temperature range -40 to 60 °C

Storage temperature range -40 to 85 °C
Relative humidity range 5 to 95% non-condensing
Protection from airborne contaminants ISA-S71.04-1985 Airborne Contaminants Class
G3 conformal coating
Shock 10 g, 1/2-sine wave for 11 ms
Vibration 1 mm peak-to-peak from 2 to 13.2 Hz, 0.7 g
from 13.2 to 150 Hz

C.6.6 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC Signal

Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
Installation notes
• The 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771
I/O replaces the 16-channel 1771-OAD 120 VAC DO card, providing an interface
between 16 discrete output PLC signals and simplex or redundant DO, 32-Channel, 24

274
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

VDC, High-Side, Series 2 Plus cards. Each Discrete Output 120 VAC Signal Conditioning
Card for 1771 I/O can drive 16 discrete output channels.
• The swing-arm attachment point on the front of the card provides secure mechanical
and electrical connections for a 1771-WH swing arm.
• The 20-pin ribbon-cable connector on the bottom of the card provides connections for
a simplex or redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Plus Mass Termination Block, which is
required to connect to a simplex or redundant DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side,
Series 2 Plus card.
• Use the consolidated ribbon cable to connect the signal conditioning card to the mass
termination block. Be sure to install the strain relief included with the cable at the end
connected to the signal conditioning card.
• Up to 16 discrete output, 120 VAC-based field devices can be connected to the swing-
arm screw terminals.

Dimensional drawings

Figure C-99: Dimensions of 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC Signal

Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O

20.77 cm
(8.18 in.)

16.84 cm 3.43 cm
(6.63 in.) (1.35 in.)

275
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Wiring diagrams

Figure C-100: Wiring diagram for 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC Signal
Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O

Carrier
10 A
Field Power

DO 32-Channel 24VDC Chan nel 1

High-Side, Series 2 Plus Channel 2
Channel 3
DeltaV Zero-Crossing Channel 4
System Primary
Opto-isola!on Channel 5
Channel 6 CH 1
Channel 7 Load
20 Pin Ribbon
40-Pin Mass
Termblock

Channel 8
DO 32-Channel 24VDC
Cable

Channel 9
High-Side, Series 2 Plus Channel 10
Channel 11
DeltaV Secondary Channel 12

System DO 120VAC Channel 13

Signal Conditioning Card Channel 14
for 1771 I/O Channel 15
Channel 16
Op!onal landing loca!on
for AC return
Isolated Bus

Chassis DC Ground
To DIG Ground (CG) To DIG (DCG)

Specifications
Table C-98: 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC Signal Conditioning Card for
PLC-5/1771 I/O specifications
Item Specification
Field device type 120 VAC high-side
Number of channels 16
Isolation • Field to system tested to 2,000 VDC for 2 s.
• Channels must share a common return.

Electrical connections • Front: one 1771-WH swing arm

• Bottom: one 20-pin ribbon-cable connector

Output voltage range 10-138 VAC at 47-63 Hz

Output current rating 2 A per channel, not to exceed 8 A per card
Maximum surge current • 25 A per channel for 10 ms, repeatable every
2s
• 25 A per card for 10 ms, repeatable every 2 s

276
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-98: 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC Signal Conditioning Card for
PLC-5/1771 I/O specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Maximum ON-state voltage drop 1.5 V at load current, 50 mA to 2 A
Minimum ON-state load current 50 mA per channel
Maximum OFF-state leakage current 3.0 mA at 138 VAC
Fusing • One fuse (10 A / 250 VAC, fast-acting,
cartridge, ceramic, 3AB, 3AG, 1/4” x 1-1/4”)
• Littlelfuse P/N 0332010.HXP

Dimensions • Height: 208 mm (8.2 in.)

• Width: 32 mm (1.3 in.)
• Depth: 168 mm (6.6 in.)

Operating temperature range -40 to 60 °C

Storage temperature range -40 to 85 °C
Relative humidity range 5 to 95% non-condensing
Protection from airborne contaminants ISA-S71.04-1985 Airborne Contaminants Class
G3 conformal coating
Shock 10 g, 1/2-sine wave for 11 ms
Vibration 1 mm peak-to-peak from 2 to 13.2 Hz, 0.7 g
from 13.2 to 150 Hz

C.6.7 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC, Isolated Signal

Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
Installation notes
• The 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC, Isolated Signal Conditioning Card for
PLC-5/1771 I/O replaces the 16-channel 1771-OD16 and -ODD 120 VAC DO cards,
providing an interface between 16 discrete output PLC signals and simplex or
redundant DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side, Series 2 Plus cards. Each Discrete
Output 120 VAC Signal Conditioning Card for 1771 I/O can drive 16 discrete output
channels.
• The swing-arm attachment point on the front of the card provides secure mechanical
and electrical connections for a 40-position card-edge 1771-WN swing-arm.
• The 20-pin ribbon-cable connector on the bottom of the card provides connections for
a simplex or redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Plus Mass Termination Block, which is
required to connect to a simplex or redundant DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side,
Series 2 Plus card.
• Use the consolidated ribbon cable to connect the signal conditioning card to the mass
termination block. Be sure to install the strain relief included with the cable at the end
connected to the signal conditioning card.

277
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

• Up to 16 discrete output, 120 VAC-based field devices can be connected to the swing-
arm screw terminals.

Dimensional drawings

Figure C-101: Dimensions of 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC, Isolated Signal
Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O

Field wiring
Each discrete output 1-16 corresponds to one pair of screw terminals on the 16-Channel,
Discrete Output, 120 VAC, Isolated Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O. For each
discrete-output, 120 VAC-based field device, connect the lower-numbered screw terminal
to the top of the load and the higher-numbered screw terminal to the bottom of the
power supply. The following figure shows how to use screw terminals 1 and 2 to connect
discrete output 1 to a field device.

Figure C-102: Wiring diagram for 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC, Isolated
Signal Conditioning Card for PLC-5/1771 I/O
DO1-

DO1+
1
2
L
3 Load 120 VAC Source
N

4
5
6

278
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Specifications
Table C-99: 16-Channel, Discrete Output, 120 VAC, Isolated Signal Conditioning Card
for PLC-5/1771 I/O specifications
Item Specification
Field device type 120 VAC
Number of channels 16
Isolation Field to system tested to 2,000 VDC for 2 s
Electrical connections • Front: one 1771-WN swing arm
• Bottom: one 20-pin ribbon-cable connector

Output voltage range 74-138 VAC at 47-63 Hz

Output current rating 2 A per channel, not to exceed 8 A per card
Maximum surge current 20 A per channel for 100 ms, repeatable every 2
s
Maximum ON-state voltage drop • 5.8 V at load current less than 50 mA
• 1.5 V at load current 50 mA to 2 A

Minimum ON-state load current 5 mA per channel

Maximum OFF-state leakage current 3.0 mA at 138 VAC
Fusing • One fuse per channel (3.5 A, 250 VAC, fast-
acting, 2AG)
• Littlelfuse P/N 022903 5MXP

Dimensions • Height: 208 mm (8.2 in.)

• Width: 32 mm (1.3 in.)
• Depth: 168 mm (6.6 in.)

Operating temperature range -40 to 60 °C

Storage temperature range -40 to 85 °C
Relative humidity range 5 to 95% non-condensing
Protection from airborne contaminants ISA-S71.04-1985 Airborne Contaminants Class
G3 conformal coating
Shock 10 g, 1/2-sine wave for 11 ms
Vibration 1 mm peak-to-peak from 2 to 13.2 Hz, 0.7 g
from 13.2 to 150 Hz

C.6.8 16-Channel PLC-5 250 VAC/150 VDC DO Relay Signal

Conditioning Card
Installation notes
• The 16-Channel PLC-5 250 VAC/150 VDC DO Relay Signal Conditioning Card replaces
the 16-channel 1771-OW16 discrete output relay card, providing an interface between

279
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

16 discrete output PLC signals and simplex or redundant DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC,
High-Side, Series 2 Plus cards. Each 16-Channel PLC-5 250 VAC/150 VDC DO Relay
Signal Conditioning Card can drive 16 discrete output channels.
• Use discrete outputs 1-8 for applications with normally open (NO) contacts. Use
discrete outputs 9-16 for applications with selectable normally closed (NC) and NO
contacts.
• The swing-arm attachment point on the front of the card provides secure mechanical
and electrical connections for a 40-position card-edge 1771-WN swing-arm.
• The 20-pin ribbon-cable connector on the bottom of the card provides connections for
a simplex or redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Plus Mass Termination Block, which is
required to connect to a simplex or redundant DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side,
Series 2 Plus card.
• Use the consolidated ribbon cable to connect the signal conditioning card to the mass
termination block. Be sure to install the strain relief included with the cable at the end
connected to the signal conditioning card.
• Up to 16 discrete-output, 250 VAC/150 VDC field devices can be connected to the
swing-arm screw terminals.

Dimensional drawings

Figure C-103: Dimensions of 16-Channel PLC-5 250 VAC/150 VDC DO Relay Signal
Conditioning Card

Field wiring for applications with NO contacts only (discrete outputs 1-8)
Each discrete output 1-8 corresponds to one pair of screw terminals on the 16-Channel
PLC-5 250 VAC/150 VDC DO Relay Signal Conditioning Card. For each field device, connect
the lower-numbered screw terminal to the top of the load and the higher-numbered screw
terminal to the bottom of the power supply. The following table shows the discrete
outputs and their corresponding screw terminals.
Table C-100: Discrete outputs 1-8 and corresponding screw terminals
Discrete output Screw terminal to top of load Screw terminal to bottom of power
supply
1 1 2

280
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-100: Discrete outputs 1-8 and corresponding screw terminals (continued)
Discrete output Screw terminal to top of load Screw terminal to bottom of power
supply
2 3 4
3 5 6
4 7 8
5 9 10
6 11 12
7 13 14
8 15 16

The following figure shows how to use screw terminals 1 and 2 to connect discrete output
1 to a field device.

Figure C-104: Example wiring for discrete output 1

Common of DO1
Coil
Output of DO1
1
2
L
3 Load 120 VAC Source
N

4
5
6

Field wiring for applications with selectable NO and NC contacts (discrete outputs
9-16)
Each discrete output 9-16 corresponds to one set of three screw terminals on the 16-
Channel PLC-5 250 VAC/150 VDC DO Relay Signal Conditioning Card. The following table
shows the outputs and their corresponding screw terminals.
Table C-101:
Discrete output Screw terminal to NC Screw terminal to NO Screw terminal to
common
9 17 18 19
10 20 21 22
11 23 24 25
12 26 27 28

281
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-101: (continued)

Discrete output Screw terminal to NC Screw terminal to NO Screw terminal to
common
13 29 30 31
14 32 33 34
15 35 36 37
16 38 39 40

The following figure shows how to use screw terminals 17, 18, and 19 to connect discrete
output 9 to a relay and load.

Figure C-105: Example wiring for relay output 9

Output 9 NO
OR

Output 9 NC
17
18
Output 9 Common L
19 Load 120 VAC Source
N

20
21
22

Specifications
Table C-102: 16-Channel PLC-5 250 VAC/150 VDC DO Relay Signal Conditioning Card
Item Specification
Field device type 250 VAC/150VDC
Number of channels • 16
— 1-8 NO
— 9-16 selectable NO/NC

Isolation • Channel to system: 250 VAC

• Channel to channel: 250 VAC

Electrical connections • Front: one 1771-WN swing arm

• Bottom: one 20-pin ribbon-cable connector

Output voltage range • 24-250 VAC at 47-63 Hz

• 24-150 VDC

282
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-102: 16-Channel PLC-5 250 VAC/150 VDC DO Relay Signal Conditioning Card
(continued)

Item Specification
Output current rating • 2 A per channel up to 260 VAC
• 2 A per channel at up to 40 VDC
• 1 A per channel at 100 VDC
• 0.5 A per channel at 100 VDC
• 0.25 A per channel at 150 VDC

Maximum surge current at 120 VAC • Make: 30 A

• Break: 3 A
• Continuous carrying current: 2 A

Maximum surge current at 240 VAC • Make: 15 A

• Break: 1.5 A
• Continuous carrying current: 2 A

Minimum contact load 10 mA

Operate time 8 ms
Release time 6 ms
Maximum switching frequency at maximum 1/3 Hz
load
Dimensions • Height: 208 mm (8.2 in.)
• Width: 32 mm (1.3 in.)
• Depth: 168 mm (6.6 in.)

Operating temperature range -40 to 60 °C

Storage temperature range -40 to 85 °C
Relative humidity range 5 to 95% non-condensing
Protection from airborne contaminants ISA-S71.04-1985 Airborne Contaminants Class
G3 conformal coating
Shock 10 g, 1/2-sine wave for 11 ms
Vibration 1 mm peak-to-peak from 2 to 13.2 Hz, 0.7 g
from 13.2 to 150 Hz

C.6.9 Mounting brackets for signal conditioning cards

Five mounting kits are available to replace the 4-, 8-, 12-, and 16-wide OEM I/O chassis.
The two versions of the 12-wide mounting kit have ground studs in different locations to
match two versions of the 12-wide OEM I/O chassis. The mounting plate contained in the
replacement I/O chassis mounting kit fits into the same space and uses the same
mounting bolts as the OEM I/O chassis. There is a DIN rail installed on the mounting plate
that is used for the DeltaV I/O carrier, carrier extenders, and possibly a DeltaV controller.

283
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

There are 4-wide Signal Conditioning Card mounting hangers pre-installed on the
mounting plate.
The ground studs are in the same location on the OEM I/O chassis and on the DeltaV
mounting plates, so the grounding mechanisms can be re-used. The thread size of the
ground studs is M5 x 0.8 mm. Refer to the illustrations in this topic for the locations of
ground studs.
If your application requires a DeltaV controller to be mounted in the cabinet alongside the
PLC-5 I/O chassis, you can replace the DIN rail in the mounting kit with a longer DIN rail.
Each mounting kit includes a plastic spacer for use between the longer DIN rail and the
cabinet mounting plate.
For installations that do not require the entire mounting kit, the 4-wide Signal
Conditioning Card mounting hanger assembly is available as a spare part. Four screws are
required to mount this assembly to the cabinet mounting sub-panel.
Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver with a minimum 8-in. shank to attach a signal conditioning
card to the mounting-kit hanger assembly. Tighten until hand-tight.
Route the ribbon cables from the bottom of the signal conditioning card through the
plastic clips on each side of the mounting kit up to the mass termination block. Do not run
the ribbon cables through the space between the backplane of the mounting kit and the
4-wide mounting hanger assembly. The maximum length for ribbon cables is 10 m. Be
sure to install the strain relief included with the consolidated ribbon cable at the end
connected to the signal conditioning card.

Figure C-106: 4-Wide Mounting Kit for Signal Conditioning Cards

3.05 cm
1.20 in.

22.9 cm
9.02 in.

34.1 cm
13.43 in.

Ground stud

284
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-107: 8-Wide Mounting Kit for Signal Conditioning Cards

3.05 cm
(1.20 in.)

35.6 cm
(14.02 in.)

34.1 cm
(13.43 in.)

Ground stud

Figure C-108: 12-Wide R0 Mounting Kit for Signal Conditioning Cards

3.05 cm
(1.20 in.)

48.3 cm
(19.02 in.)

Ground studs

34.1 cm
(13.43 in.)

285
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-109: 12-Wide R1 Mounting Kit for Signal Conditioning Cards

3.05 cm
(1.20 in.)

48.3 cm
(19.02 in.)

34.1 cm
(13.43 in.)

Ground stud

Figure C-110: 16-Wide Mounting Kit for Signal Conditioning Cards

3.05 cm
(1.20 in.)

61 cm
(24.02 in.)

34.1 cm
(13.43 in.)

Ground stud

286
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-111: 4-Card Hanger Assembly for Signal Conditioning Cards

2.4 cm
(0.94 in.)

20.59 cm
(8.11 in.)

12.8 cm
(5.04 in.)

C.7 Mass Connection Boards

The Mass Connection Boards eliminate the need for costly and complicated cabinet wiring
and simplify the process of connecting field devices to I/O cards.

C.7.1 AI/AO Mass Connection Board

Installation notes
• The AI/AO Mass Connection Board provides an interface to the simplex or redundant AI
16-channel 4-20 mA HART Plus card used with the simplex or redundant Analog Input
48-Pin Mass Terminal Block; the simplex or redundant AO 16-channel 4-20 mA HART
Plus card used with the simplex or redundant Analog Output 48-Pin Mass Terminal
Block; two AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART cards used with the 16-Pin Mass Terminal Block;
or two AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART cards used with the 16-Pin Mass Terminal Block; or
one AI and one AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card used with the 16-Pin Mass Terminal
Block.
• One AI/AO Mass Connection Board provides the interface to all 16 channels on the
simplex or redundant AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART Plus card, on the simplex or
redundant AO 16-channel 4-20 mA HART Plus card, on two AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART
cards, or on two AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART cards, or on one AI and one AO 8-channel
4-20 mA HART card used with the 16-Pin Mass Terminal Block.
• Two 24-pin ribbon cables connect between the AI/AO Mass Connection Board and the
simplex or redundant Analog Input 48-Pin Mass Terminal Block or the simplex or
redundant Analog Output 48-Pin Mass Terminal Block. Two 16-pin ribbon cables

287
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

connect between the AI/AO Mass Connection Board and two 16-Pin Mass Terminal
Blocks.
• Three rows of screw terminals provide two- and four-wire connections for the AI
channels as well as two-wire connections for the AO channels. The rows of screw
terminals are numbered, top to bottom, n+, n, and n-, where n = 1-16 for each row.
• When using the AI/AO Mass Connection Board with a supported AI Plus card and a Mass
Terminal Block, connect 2-wire devices between n+ and n and 4-wire devices between
n and n-. When using any other supported AI or AO card and a Mass Terminal Block,
connect devices between n+ and n.
• Each channel has a Loop Disconnect pull switch. You can connect an ammeter to the 2
mm test points of a channel, then pull the pull switch to measure the current across the
channel without interrupting operation.

Specifications
Table C-103: AI/AO Mass Connection Board specifications
Item Specification
Channel type Same as attached card: AI or AO, 4-20 mA HART
Number of channels 16
Channel options and ratings Same as attached card:
• AI, 2-wire or 4-wire, 30 mA
• AO, 30 mA

Isolation None
Dimensions • Height: 102.7 mm (4.04 in.)
• Width: 118.1 mm (4.65 in.)
• Depth: 60.7 mm (2.38 in.)

Power input terminal wiring 0.05-2.08 mm2; 30-14 AWG

I/O terminal wiring 0.05-2.05 mm2; 30-12 AWG

288
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-112: AI/AO Mass Connection Board dimensions

Front view Side view

102.7 mm
(4.04 in.)

118.1 mm 60.7 mm
(4.65 in.) (2.38 in.)

Bottom view

289
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-113: AI/AO Mass Connection Board parts locator diagram

24-pin connector Screw terminals for Mass 24-pin connector
for 16 channels Connection Board shield connection for 16 channels

16-pin connector for 16-pin connector for

8-channel card 8-channel card

Loop disconnect
pull switches Channel
(x16) test points
(x16)

Screw
terminals

Front View

C.7.2 DI Mass Connection Board

Installation notes
• The DI Mass Connection Board provides an interface to the simplex DI 32-channel 24
VDC dry contact card used with the 40-Pin Mass Terminal Block.
• Two DI Mass Connection Boards (the DI Mass Connection Solution) are required to
provide the interface to all 32 channels on the DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card.
• Two 20-pin ribbon cables (one per board) connect between the DI Mass Connection
Solution and the 40-pin Mass Terminal Blocks.
• Four screw terminals provide the connections for +24 VDC power and ground.
• The DI Mass Connection Board provides a relay output to detect termination faults that
indicate loss of input power to the board.
• For dry contact mode, connect your device between + and n, where n = 1-16. Refer to
the dry contact wiring diagram.
• For external power mode, connect the positive voltage output of your device to one
numbered screw terminal n, where n = 1-16, connect the return of the device to the
ground bar, and connect the ground bar to the GND terminals. Refer to the external
power mode wiring diagram below.
• Power-input and channel fuses can be replaced in the field.

290
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Specifications
Table C-104: DI Mass Connection Board specifications
Item Specification
Field circuit power per board +24 VDC ± 10% @ 75 mA typical, 100 mA
maximum
Channel type Discrete input, +24 VDC dry contact; detection
on the - signal
Number of channels 16
Isolation The field wiring connections are galvanically
isolated from the DI card circuits and factory
tested to 1000 VDC. No channel-to-channel
isolation.
Detection level for ON > 2 mA @ 24 VDC
Source impedance 5 KΩ
Source voltage +24 VDC input power, current limited with
replaceable fuse
Power input fuse 1 A, replaceable
Channel fuses 160 mA, replaceable
Dimensions • Height: 102.7 mm (4.04 in.)
• Width: 102.8 mm (4.05 in.)
• Depth: 60.7 mm (2.39 in.)

Power input terminal wiring 0.05-2.08 mm2; 30-14 AWG

I/O terminal wiring 0.05-2.05 mm2; 30-12 AWG

291
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-114: DI Mass Connection Board dimensions

Front view Side view

102.7 mm
(4.04 in.)

102.8 mm 60.7 mm
(4.05 in.) (2.39 in.)

Bottom view

292
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-115: DI Mass Connection Board parts locator diagram

20-pin ribbon connector Power Power-input Power-input
for 16 channels LED fuse screw terminals

Channel
LEDs

Channel
fuses

Screw
terminals

Front View

293
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-116: Wiring for dry contact mode

24 VDC FIELD POWER CONNECTION
+24 VDC +

+24 VDC
+
1A
Green
GND
–

GND
–

TERMINATION DI BOARD

Yellow

+
0.16 A

System

5K

1 ... 16

GND

Figure C-117: Wiring for external power mode

24 VDC FIELD POWER CONNECTION
+24 VDC +

+24 VDC
+
1A
Green
GND
–

GND
–

TERMINATION DI BOARD

Yellow

+
0.16 A

System

5K
+
1 ... 16
24
VDC
Source

– GND

294
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

C.7.3 DI Plus Mass Connection Board

Installation notes
• The DI Plus Mass Connection Board provides an interface to the redundant DI 32-
channel 24 VDC dry contact Plus card in redundant mode only.
• Two DI Plus Mass Connection Boards (the DI Plus Mass Connection Solution) are
required to provide the interface to all 32 channels on the redundant DI 32-channel 24
VDC dry contact Plus card.
• Two 20-pin ribbon cables (one per board) connect between the DI Plus Mass
Connection Solution and the Redundant Discrete Input 40-pin Mass Terminal Block.
• When the redundant DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact Plus card is used with the
Redundant Discrete Input 40-pin Mass Terminal Block and the DI Plus Mass Connection
Solution, the card can be configured to detect termination faults. Two parameters,
T1_FAULT_DETECT (for the ribbon cable connection for channels 1-16), and
T2_FAULT_DETECT (for the ribbon cable connection for channels 17-32), can be
enabled in DeltaV Explorer for the card. Setting these parameters to True enables the
system to detect faults such as loss of power, a missing cable, or a missing Mass
Connection Board.
• Four screw terminals provide the connections for +24 VDC power and ground.
• The DI Plus Mass Connection Board provides a relay output to detect termination faults
that indicate loss of input power to the board.
• For dry contact mode, connect your device between + and n, where n = 1-16. Refer to
the dry contact wiring diagram below.
• For external power mode, connect the positive voltage output of your device to one
numbered screw terminal n, where n = 1-16, connect the return of the device to the
ground bar, and connect the ground bar to the GND terminals. Refer to the external
power mode wiring diagram below.
• Power-input and channel fuses can be replaced in the field.
Note
The termination fault detection feature is available only when the redundant DI 32-
channel 24 VDC dry contact Plus card is used with the Redundant Discrete Input 40-Pin
Mass Terminal Block connected to the DI Plus Mass Connection Solution.

Specifications
Table C-105: DI Plus Mass Connection Board specifications
Item Specification
Field circuit power per board +24 VDC ± 10% @ 75 mA typical,100 mA
maximum
Channel type Discrete input, +24 VDC dry contact; detection
on the - signal
Number of channels 16

295
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-105: DI Plus Mass Connection Board specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Isolation The field wiring connections are galvanically
isolated from the DI card circuits and factory
tested to 1000 VDC. No channel-to-channel
isolation.
Detection level for ON > 2 mA @ 24 VDC
Source impedance 5 KΩ
Source voltage +24 VDC input power, current limited with
replaceable fuse
Power input fuse 1 A, replaceable
Channel fuses 160 mA, replaceable
Dimensions • Height: 102.7 mm (4.04 in.)
• Width: 102.8 mm (4.05 in.)
• Depth: 60.7 mm (2.39 in.)

Power input terminal wiring 0.05-2.08 mm2; 30-14 AWG

I/O terminal wiring 0.05-2.05 mm2; 30-12 AWG

Figure C-118: DI Plus Mass Connection Board dimensions

Front view Side view

102.7 mm
(4.04 in.)

102.8 mm 60.7 mm
(4.05 in.) (2.39 in.)

Bottom view

296
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-119: DI Plus Mass Connection Board parts locator diagram

20-pin ribbon connector Power Power-input Power-input
for 16 channels LED fuse screw terminals

Termination-fault
relay bypass
jumper (affects
signal to I/O
card only)

Channel
LEDs

Channel
fuses

Screw
terminals

Front View

297
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-120: Wiring for dry contact mode

24 VDC FIELD POWER CONNECTION
+24 VDC +

+24 VDC
+
1A
Green
GND
–

GND
–

TERMINATION DI BOARD

Yellow

+
0.16 A

System

5K

1 ... 16

GND

Figure C-121: Wiring for external power mode

24 VDC FIELD POWER CONNECTION
+24 VDC +

+24 VDC
+
1A
Green
GND
–

GND
–

TERMINATION DI BOARD

Yellow

+
0.16 A

System

5K
+
1 ... 16
24
VDC
Source

– GND

298
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

C.7.4 DO Mass Connection Board

Installation notes
• The DO Mass Connection Board provides an interface to the DO 32-channel 24 VDC
high-side or high-side Plus card used with the 40-Pin Mass Terminal Block in simplex
mode or with the Redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Terminal Block. The DO
Mass Connection Board also provides an interface to the DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-
side card used with the 16-Pin Mass Terminal Block.
• Four DO Mass Connection Boards (the DO Mass Connection Solution) are required to
provide the interface to all 32 channels on the DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card.
• Two 20-pin ribbon cables (one per board pair) connect the DO Mass Connection
Solution to the 40-pin Mass Terminal Blocks. Two additional 20-pin ribbon cables
connect each pair of DO Mass Connection Boards together, as shown in Figure C-127.
• The DO Mass Connection Board provides a relay output to detect termination faults
that indicate loss of input power to the board.
• When the redundant DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side Plus card is used with the
Redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Terminal Block and the DO Mass Connection
Solution, the card can be configured to detect faults in the termination. Two
parameters, T1_FAULT_DETECT (for the ribbon cable connection for channels 1-16),
and T2_FAULT_DETECT (for the ribbon cable connection for channels 17-32), can be
enabled in DeltaV Explorer for the card. Setting these parameters to True enables
detection of the ribbon cable connection between the Redundant Discrete Output 40-
Pin Mass Terminal Block and the DO Mass Connection Board, and detection of faults
such as loss of power, a missing cable, or a missing Mass Connection Board. You can
disable termination-fault detection using a jumper on the board if you need to rewire
while a process is running.
• Four screw terminals provide the connections for +24 VDC power and ground.
• If you are using an external +24 VDC source for a channel, move the fuse for that
channel to the FIELD PWR position. Otherwise, leave the fuse in the MODULE PWR
position. Refer to the parts locator and wiring diagrams for more information.
• The power-input fuse, channel fuses, and relays can be replaced in the field.
Note
Termination fault detection is available only when the redundant DO 32-channel 24 VDC
high-side Plus card is used with the Redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Terminal
Block connected to the DO Mass Connection Solution.

Specifications
Table C-106: DO Mass Connection Board specifications
Item Specification
Power for +24 VDC high-side outputs (optional) +24 VDC ±10% at 10 A maximum
Control signal current per channel (derived from 14 mA maximum
the DO 32-channel 24 VDC, high-side plus card.)
Channel type Relay output

299
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-106: DO Mass Connection Board specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Number of channels 8
Output channel options and ratings • Isolated relay contacts: 250 VAC/24 VDC
maximum at 5 A maximum per channel.1
• +24 VDC high side: 5 A maximum per
channel,2 10 A maximum per board.

Channel relays Phoenix Contact no. 2961105

Termination fault relay 2 A at 30 VDC maximum
Relay contact ratings • 28.8 VDC at 5 A switching current
• 48 VDC at 0.4 A switching current
• 250 VAC at 5 A switching current

Isolation • Isolated relay contacts: Isolated at 250 VAC

and factory tested to 3000 VDC (channel to
system and channel to channel).
• +24 VDC high side: Isolated at 250 VAC and
factory tested to 3000 VDC (channel to
system). No channel-to-channel isolation.

Dimensions • Height: 102.7 m (4.04 in.)

• Width: 133.3 mm (5.25 in.)
• Depth: 60.7 mm (2.39 in.)

Power input terminal wiring 0.05-2.08 mm2; 30-14 AWG

I/O terminal wiring 0.05-2.05 mm2; 30-12 AWG

1 De-rate to 3 A per channel when operating above 60 °C ambient temperature.

2 De-rate to 3 A per channel when operating above 60 °C ambient temperature.

300
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-122: DO Mass Connection Board dimensions

Front view Side view

102.7 mm
(4.04 in.)

133.3 mm 60.7 mm
(5.25 in.) (2.39 in.)

Bottom view

301
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-123: DO Mass Connection Board parts locator diagram

20-pin connector 20-pin connector Termination-fault relay
for 16 channels of for 16 channels of Expansion bypass jumper (affects Power-input
32-channel card 32-channel card jumper signal to I/O card only) screw terminals

16-pin connector Power-input

for 8-channel card fuse

Power LED
Channel relay
(x8)

Fuse position
for module
Channel LED power
(x8)

Fuse position
for external
power

Screw
terminals

Front View

Figure C-124: Wiring for external power mode

24 VDC FIELD POWER CONNECTION

+24 VDC +
Green
+24 VDC
+
10 A Fuse

GND
–

GND
–

DO BOARD TERMINATION

COM
+
5 A Fuse
VDC
or VAC
Yellow Source
NO
System
Load –

NC

–
GND

302
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure C-125: Wiring for 24 VDC high side output mode

24 VDC FIELD POWER CONNECTION

+24 VDC +
Green
+24 VDC
+
10 A Fuse

GND
–

GND
–

DO BOARD TERMINATION

COM

5 A Fuse

Yellow
+
NO
System

+ Load
NC

–
GND

C.7.5 Connecting DI and DO Mass Connection Boards

The following images show how to connect the DI Mass Connection Boards together and
how to connect the DO Mass Connection Boards together.

Figure C-126: Connected DI Mass Connection Boards

Ribbon cable connector for Ribbon cable connector for
channels 1-16 channels 17-32

+24VDC+24VDC GND GND +24VDC+24VDC GND GND

303
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure C-127: Connected DO Mass Connection Boards

Return
Ribbon cable to
top connector of
+24 VDC
DO terminal block
Ribbon
Jumper in cable Jumper in
BASE position EXPANSION position

Channels 1–8 Channels 9–16

Return
Ribbon cable to
bottom connector of
DO terminal block +24 VDC
Ribbon
Jumper in cable Jumper in
BASE position EXPANSION position

Channels 17–24 Channels 25–32

C.8 Intrinsically Safe Terminal Blocks

The DeltaV system can use the following types of Intrinsically Safe terminal blocks:
• I.S. 8-channel and I.S. loop disconnect 8-channel
• I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block

C.8.1 I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block

The 8-channel I.S. terminal block uses standard and loop disconnects. Loop disconnects
are located in odd numbered terminals.

304
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Specifications
Table C-107: I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 250 VAC between I.S. and non-I.S. circuits.
Maximum current Refer to the specifications table for the I.S. card
in use.
Mounting Assigned slot of I.S. I/O carrier.

Terminal Block Connections

The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block
and shows the channel nomenclature for the I.S. analog input and output cards (AI, 2-20
mA, 8-Channel with HART, AO, 2-20 mA, 8-Channel) and the discrete output card (DO, 4-
Channel).
Table C-108: I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block Cable Pin Outs and Channel Nomenclature
Pin on Termination Block Channel Nomenclature for Channel Nomenclature for
Analog Cards DO card
Terminal 1 Channel 1+ Channel 1+
Terminal 2 Channel 1-
Terminal 3 Channel 2+ Channel 1-
Terminal 4 Channel 2-
Terminal 5 Channel 3+ Channel 2+
Terminal 6 Channel 3-
Terminal 7 Channel 4+ Channel 2-
Terminal 8 Channel 4-
Terminal 9 Channel 5+ Channel 3+
Terminal 10 Channel 5-
Terminal 11 Channel 6+ Channel 3-
Terminal 12 Channel 6-
Terminal 13 Channel 7+ Channel 4+
Terminal 14 Channel 7-
Terminal 15 Channel 8+ Channel 4-
Terminal 16 Channel 8-

305
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

C.8.2 I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block

Specifications
Table C-109: I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 250 VAC between I.S. and non-I.S. circuits.
Maximum current Refer to the specifications table for the I.S. card
in use.
Mounting Assigned slot of I.S. I/O carrier.

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-128: I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block

Keying (B1)

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the I.S.16-channel terminal
block.
Table C-110: I.S.16-Channel Terminal Block
Terminal on Channel Terminal on Channel
Termination Block Nomenclature Termination Block Nomenclature
Terminal 1 Channel 1+ Terminal 17 Channel 9+
Terminal 2 Channel 1- Terminal 18 Channel 9-
Terminal 3 Channel 2+ Terminal 19 Channel 10+
Terminal 4 Channel 2- Terminal 20 Channel 10-
Terminal 5 Channel 3+ Terminal 21 Channel 11+

306
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-110: I.S.16-Channel Terminal Block (continued)

Terminal on Channel Terminal on Channel
Termination Block Nomenclature Termination Block Nomenclature
Terminal 6 Channel 3- Terminal 22 Channel 11-
Terminal 7 Channel 4+ Terminal 23 Channel 12+
Terminal 8 Channel 4- Terminal 24 Channel 12-
Terminal 9 Channel 5+ Terminal 25 Channel 13+
Terminal 10 Channel 5- Terminal 26 Channel 13-
Terminal 11 Channel 6+ Terminal 27 Channel 14+
Terminal 12 Channel 6- Terminal 28 Channel 14-
Terminal 13 Channel 7+ Terminal 29 Channel 15+
Terminal 14 Channel 7- Terminal 30 Channel 15-
Terminal 15 Channel 8+ Terminal 31 Channel 16+
Terminal 16 Channel 8- Terminal 32 Channel 16-

C.9 I/O Interface Keying

There are two keys on the I/O terminal block and two keys on the I/O card. The keys on the
I/O card are set at the factory; you can change the keys on the I/O terminal block to match
the corresponding I/O card.
Table C-111: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks
I/O Card I/O Card Keying Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal
Terminal Block Block
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA A 1 I/O terminal block • Fused I/O terminal
block
• 4-wire I/O terminal
block
• 16-pin mass
termination block
(2-wire
connection)
• 24-pin mass
termination block
(4-wire
connection)

307
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-111: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)
I/O Card I/O Card Keying Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal
Terminal Block Block
• AI, 8-Channel,4-20 A1 I/O terminal block • Fused I/O terminal
mA, HART block
• Series 2 AI, 8- • 4-wire I/O terminal
Channel,4-20 mA, block
HART (Simplex
• 16-pin mass
mode)
termination block
(2-wire
connection)
• 24-pin mass
termination block
(4-wire
connection)

Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, A1 Redundant Analog

4-20 mA HART Input terminal block
(Redundant mode)
Series 2 AI, 16- A2 16-Channel Analog 4-wire 16-Channel
Channel, 4-20 mA Input terminal block Analog Input Terminal
HART (Simplex mode) Block
Series 2 Plus, AI, 16- A6 Simplex 2-Wire 16- • Simplex 4-Wire 16-
Channel, 4-20 mA, Channel Analog Input Channel Analog
HART (Simplex mode) terminal block Input terminal
block
• 48-pin AI Plus mass
termination block

Series 2 Plus, AI, 16- A6 Redundant 16-Channel Redundant Analog

Channel, 4-20 mA, Analog Input terminal Input 48-Pin Mass
HART (Redundant block Termination block
mode)
AI, 8-Channel, 1-5 VDC A3 4-wire I/O terminal 24-pin mass
block termination block
AO, 8-Channel,4-20 A4 I/O terminal block • Fused I/O terminal
mA block
• 16-pin mass
termination block

• AO, 8-channel,4-20 A4 I/O terminal block • Fused I/O terminal

mA, HART block
• Series 2 AO, 8- • 16-pin mass
channel, 4-20 mA, termination block
HART (Simplex
mode)

Series 2 AO, 8-channel, A4 Redundant Analog

4-20 mA, HART Output terminal block
(Redundant mode)

308
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-111: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)
I/O Card I/O Card Keying Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal
Terminal Block Block
Series 2 Plus AO, 16- A5 Simplex 16-Channel Analog Output 48-pin
Channel, 4-20 mA, Analog Output mass termination
HART (Simplex mode) terminal block block
Series 2 Plus AO, 16- A5 Redundant 16-Channel Redundant 48-pin AO
Channel, 4-20 mA, Analog Output Plus mass termination
HART (Redundant terminal block block
mode)
AS-Interface Series 2 D1 Interface terminal
AS-Interface (Simplex block
mode)
DeviceNet D5 Fieldbus H1 terminal
block
• DI, 8-Channel, 24 B2 I/O terminal block • Fused I/O terminal
VDC, Isolated block
• Series 2 DI, 8- • 16-pin mass
Channel, 24 VDC, termination block
Isolated (Simplex
mode)

• DI, 8-Channel, 24 B1 Fused I/O terminal • I/O terminal block

VDC, Dry Contact block
• 16-pin mass
• Series 2 DI, 8- termination block
Channel, 24 VDC,
Dry Contact
(Simplex mode)

Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, B1 Redundant Discrete

24 VDC, Dry Contact terminal block
(Redundant mode)
• DI, 8-Channel, 120 E4 I/O terminal block Fused I/O terminal
VAC, Isolated block
• Series 2 DI, 8-
Channel, 120 VAC,
Isolated

• DI, 8-Channel, 120 E1 Fused I/O terminal I/O terminal block

VAC, Dry Contact block
• Series 2 DI, 8-
Channel, 120 VAC,
Dry Contact
(Simplex mode)

DI, 8-Channel, 230 E5 I/O terminal block Fused I/O terminal

VAC, Isolated block
DI, 8-Channel, 230 E2 Fused I/O terminal I/O terminal block
VAC, Dry Contact block

309
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-111: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)
I/O Card I/O Card Keying Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal
Terminal Block Block
• DI, 32-channel, 24 B3 32-channel terminal 40-pin mass
VDC Dry Contact block termination block
• Series 2 DI, 32-
channel, 24 VDC
Dry (Simplex
mode)

Series 2 Plus DI, 32- E3 Simplex 32-Channel DI Simplex 40-pin DI Plus

Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Plus terminal block mass termination
Contact (Simplex block
mode)
Series 2 Plus DI, 32- E3 Redundant 32-Channel Redundant Discrete
Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Discrete Input terminal Input 40-Pin mass
Contact (Redundant block termination block
mode)
• DO, 8-Channel, F4 I/O terminal block Fused I/O terminal
120 VAC/230 VAC, block
Isolated
• Series 2 DO, 8-
Channel, 120
VAC/230 VAC,
Isolated (Simplex
mode)

• DO, 8-Channel, F1 Fused I/O terminal I/O terminal block

120 VAC/230 VAC, block
High-Side
• Series 2 DO, 8-
Channel, 120
VAC/230 VAC,
High-Side (Simplex
mode)

• DO, 8-Channel, 24 B5 I/O terminal block • Fused I/O terminal

VDC, Isolated block
• Series 2 DO, 8- • 16-pin mass
Channel, 24 VDC, termination block
Isolated

• DO, 8-Channel, 24 B6 Fused I/O terminal • I/O terminal block

VDC, High-Side block
• 10-pin mass
• Series 2 DO, 8- termination block
Channel, 24 VDC,
• 16-pin mass
High-Side (Simplex
termination block
mode)

310
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table C-111: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)
I/O Card I/O Card Keying Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal
Terminal Block Block
Series 2 DO, 8- B6 Redundant Discrete
Channel, 24 VDC, terminal block
High-Side (Redundant
mode)
• DO, 32-Channel, B4 32-channel terminal 40-pin mass
24 VDC High-Side block termination block
• Series 2 DO, 32-
Channel, 24 VDC
High Side (Simplex
mode)

Series 2 Plus DO, 32- B4 Simplex 32-channel 40-pin Discrete Output

Channel, 24 VDC High DO Plus terminal block mass termination
Side (Simplex mode) block
Series 2 Plus DO, 32- B4 Redundant 32-Channel Redundant Discrete
Channel, 24 VDC High Discrete Output Output 40-Pin Mass
Side (Redundant terminal block termination block
mode)
Fieldbus H1 D6 Fieldbus H1 terminal
block
Fieldbus H1 4-Port D2 Simplex H1 4-Port
Series 2 Plus (Simplex Terminal Block
mode)
Fieldbus H1 4-Port D2 Redundant H1 4-Port
Series 2 Plus Terminal Block
(Redundant mode)
Series 2 H1 (Simplex D6 Series 2 H1 terminal
mode) block
Series 2 H1 D6 Redundant H1
(Redundant mode) terminal block
Series 2 Isolated Input C2 Isolated Input terminal
(Simplex mode) block
Multifunction C6 32-channel terminal
block
Profibus DP D3 Profibus DP terminal
block
Series 2 Plus Profibus D3 Redundant Profibus DP
terminal block
RTD, ohms C3 RTD, ohms terminal
block
Sequence of Events C5 32-channel terminal 40-pin mass
block termination block

311
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table C-111: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)
I/O Card I/O Card Keying Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal
Terminal Block Block
• Serial Card, 2 Ports, D4 Interface terminal
RS232/RS485 block
• Series 2 Serial Card,
2 Ports, RS232/
RS485 (Simplex
mode)

Series 2 Serial Card, 2 D4 Redundant Interface

Ports, RS232/RS485 terminal block
(Redundant mode)
Thermocouple, mV C1 Thermocouple, mV I/O terminal block
terminal block.
Note
Note When the
When the Thermocouple, mV
Thermocouple, mV card is plugged into an
card is plugged into a I/O terminal block, it
Thermocouple functions as an mV
terminal block, it card.
functions as a
Thermocouple card.

Figure C-129: I/O Key Setting Example

C.9.1 Intrinsically Safe I/O Interface Keying

The following table lists I.S. I/O card keying and the recommended I.S. terminal blocks.

I/O Card I/O Card Keying Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal
Terminal Block Block
I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 A1 I.S. 8-channel terminal I.S. loop disconnect 8-
mA, HART block channel terminal block
I.S. AO, 8-Channel, A4 I.S. 8-channel terminal I.S. loop disconnect 8-
4-20 mA (HART) block channel terminal block

312
 Interface Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

I/O Card I/O Card Keying Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal
Terminal Block Block
I.S. DO, 4-Channel B5 I.S. 8-channel terminal I.S. loop disconnect 8-
block channel terminal block
I.S. DI, 16-Channel1 B1 I.S. 16-channel
terminal block

1 The I.S. DI, 16-channel card will not communicate with the DeltaV controller unless the I.S. 16-
channel terminal block is used.

Figure C-130: I.S. I/O Example Key Setting

313
Interface Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

314
 DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
D800001X312 April 2021

D DeltaV Controllers and the Remote

Interface Unit
This appendix provides specifications for the controller and specifications and installation
information for the Remote Interface Unit and the Fiber-Optic Media Converter.

D.1 Controller Specifications

Specifications
The following table shows specifications for the MD Plus, MX, and MQ controllers.

Item MD Plus, MX, MQ

Power requirement (supplied by system power +5 VDC at 1.4 A maximum
supply through 2-wide power/controller carrier)
Fuse protection 3.0 A, non-replaceable fuses
Power dissipation 5.0 W typical 7.0 W maximum
Mounting On right slot of power/controller carrier

Figure D-1: Controller Dimensions

315
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
April 2021 D800001X312

D.2 Remote Interface Unit

The Remote Interface Unit allows standard DeltaV I/O cards to be installed remotely from
the controller. The remote subsystem, consisting of the Remote Interface Unit, system
power supply, carriers, and I/O cards, can be located in Zone 2. The Remote Interface Unit
communicates with the controller over redundant, Control Network (ethernet)
connections.

Specifications
The following table shows specifications for the Remote Interface Unit.

Item Specification
Power requirement (supplied by system power +3.3 VDC at 500 mA maximum +5 VDC at 200
supply through 2-wide power/controller carrier) mA maximum
Fuse protection 3.0 A, non-replaceable fuses
Power dissipation 3.0 W maximum
Mounting On right slot of power/controller carrier

Connections and Dimensions

The Remote Interface Unit mounts in the controller slot of a 2-wide carrier and has
redundant ethernet connections to the DeltaV Control Network switch or hub. Connect
the primary port to the primary switch or hub and the secondary port to the secondary
switch or hub. The primary Control Network connection is capable of 10/100Mbit ethernet
while the secondary connection is limited to 10Mbit ethernet.

316
 DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure D-2: Remote Interface Unit Dimensions

D.3 Fiber-Optic Media Converter

This section describes controller connections with a fiber-optic media converter. The
media converter converts 10BaseT TP to 10Base-FL ST fiber cable without repeating the
signals and is used in conjunction with the controller to allow an Ethernet link to a range of
2000 meters. The following table shows the media converter specifications.
Table D-1: Fiber-Optic Media Converter Specifications
Item Specification
LAN interface Ethernet IEEE802.3 compatible
Port interface 10BaseT RJ45 compatible
Data rate 10 MBPS
Fiber interface 10Base-FL compatible
Fiber type Multimode 62.5/125 microns
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 250 mA typical
• 300 mA maximum

The media converter mounts on a 2-wide carrier next to (or close to) the controller and
connects to the controller with two standard 12 to 16 inch twisted pair cables with
shielded connectors on both ends of the cable. The four fiber-optic cables connect

317
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
April 2021 D800001X312

transmit to receive between the Workstation’s media converter and the controller’s media
converter as shown in the following figure. The dimensions for the fiber-optic media
converter case are the same as the controller case. The connectors on the media converter
extend one half inch above the case.

Figure D-3: Fiber-Optic Media Converter

Top View
Fiber optic
media converter Controller
Pri Pri Sec Sec
Rx Tx Rx Tx

To 10Base-FL
2 fiber optic hub or
media converter
1 1 2 3

Twisted pair cable

with shielded
connectors
on both ends

Power
Error
Pri F Link
Pri C Link
Sec F Link Pri Sec
Sec C Link

Front Side View To

View Controller
Twisted pair cable
with shielded
connectors
on both ends

Bottom View
Notes:
1. Fiber Optic Media Converter may go in position 1, 2, or 3; but is shown mounted in position 2.
2. Fiber Optic cables connect transmit to receive and receive to transmit.

Related information
Control Network Specifications
Straight-Through Cable Pin Outs
Environmental Specifications for the DeltaV System

318
 System Power Supply Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

E System Power Supply Specifications

This appendix provides specifications for the system power supplies:
• System Power Supply (AC/DC)
• System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
• Intrinsically Safe System Power Supply

E.1 System Power Supply (AC/DC)

Specifications
Table E-1: System Power Supply (AC/DC) Specifications
Item Specification
Input 100 VAC to 264 VAC, 47 Hz to 63 Hz, single-
phase
Inrush (soft start) 230 VAC input at 35 A peak maximum for one
cycle or less
Output power 25 W total at 60°C
Output voltages (25 W maximum) • +12 VDC at 2.1 A maximum
• +5 VDC at 2.0 A maximum
• +3.3 VDC at 0.5 A maximum
Combined 5 VDC and 3.3 VDC output = 10 W
maximum
Input protection Internally fused, non-replaceable fuses
Overvoltage protection Output protected at 110% to 120%
Hold-up time Output remains within 5% of nominal at full load
and 115 VAC input for 20 ms.
Mounting On either slot of 2-wide power/controller carrier
External connectors:
Primary power AC input, 3-wire
Alarm contacts 2-wire normally open relays; relays are closed
when outputs are within ±4% of nominal; 30
VDC at 2.0 A, 250 VAC at 2.0 A

319
System Power Supply Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Dimensions

Figure E-1: System Power Supply (AC/DC) Dimensions

Note
Ground connection is not required for the secondary 2-wide power/controller carrier.

320
 System Power Supply Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Redundant Connections

Figure E-2: Redundant AC Input Power for System Power Supply (AC/DC)
AC

Enclosure PE Ground Lug

Enclosure Door
Adjacent Enclosure

Chassis
To DIG Ground

Series 2 Series 2 Series 2 Plus Series 2 Series 2 Series 2

Power Power Power Power Power Power Power Power Power/Active Power/Active Power Power
Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error
Active Active Active Active Ch. 1 Ch. 1 Port 1 Port 1 Ch. 1 Ch. 1
Standby Standby Standby Standby Ch. 2 Ch. 2 Ch. 2 Ch. 2
Ch. 3 Ch. 3 Ch. 3 Ch. 3
Ch. 4 Ch. 4 Ch. 4 Ch. 4
Ch. 5 Ch. 5 Ch. 5 Ch. 5
Ch. 6 Ch. 6 Ch. 6 Ch. 6
Ch. 7 Ch. 7 Ch. 7 Ch. 7
Ch. 8 Ch. 8 Ch. 8 Ch. 8

AC/DC Controller AC/DC Controller Fieldbus H1 Fieldbus H1 AI Card AO Card Profibus DeviceNet DI Card DO Card
Power Supply MD Plus Power Supply MD Plus Interface Interface 4-20mA 4-20mA DP 24 VDC 24 VDC
HART Isolated Isolated

Isolated
Bus
DC Ground
To DIG

E.2 System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)

Specifications
Table E-2: System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) Specifications
Item Specifications
Model Number Model Number Model Number
KJ1501X1-BC1 KJ1501X1-BC2 KJ1501X1-BC3
Input • 12 VDC (±5%) at 14.8 • 12 VDC (±5%) at 14.8 • 12 VDC (-4/+5%) at
A A 14.8 A
• 24 VDC (±5%) at 4.0 • 24 VDC (-15%-+20%) • 24 VDC ±20% at 6.1
A at 4.0 A A

321
System Power Supply Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table E-2: System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) Specifications (continued)

Item Specifications
Model Number Model Number Model Number
KJ1501X1-BC1 KJ1501X1-BC2 KJ1501X1-BC3
Output power • +12 VDC at 13.0 A N/A N/A
rating -20 to 60°C (12 VDC input)
• +12 VDC at 4.5 A (24
VDC input)
• +5.1 VDC at 2.0 A
• +3.4 VDC at 2.0 A
(10.2 W total from +5.1
VDC and +3.4 VDC)
Output power N/A • +12 VDC at 13.0 A • +12 VDC at 13.0 A
rating -40 to 60°C (12 VDC input) (12 VDC input)
• +12 VDC at 4.5 A (24 • +12 VDC at 8.0 A (24
VDC input) VDC input)
• +5.1 VDC at 2.0 A • +5.1 VDC at 2.0 A
• +3.4 VDC at 2.0 A • +3.4 VDC at 2.0 A
(10.2 W total from +5.1 (10.2 W total from +5.1
VDC and +3.4 VDC) VDC and +3.4 VDC)
Output power N/A • +12 VDC at 10. 0 A • +12 VDC at 10.0 A
rating 60 to 70°C (12 VDC input) (12 VDC input)
• +12 VDC at 3.0 A (24 • +12 VDC at 6.0 A (24
VDC input) VDC input)
• +5.1 VDC at 2.0 A • +5.1 VDC at 2.0 A
• +3.4 VDC at 2.0 A • +3.4 VDC at 2.0 A
(10.2 W total from +5.1 (10.2 W total from +5.1
VDC and +3.4 VDC) VDC and +3.4 VDC)
Inrush (soft start) • 12 A peak maximum for 5 ms over the 12 VDC input range (excluding 12
VDC output)
• 20 A peak maximum for 5 ms over the 24 VDC input range (including 12
VDC outputs)

Input protection Internally fused, non-replaceable fuses

Overvoltage Output protected at 110% to 120%
protection
Hold-up time Output remains within 5% of nominal at full load and minimum input voltage
for 5 ms (excluding 12 VDC current with 12 VDC input)
Mounting On either slot of the 2-wide power/controller carrier

322
 System Power Supply Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table E-2: System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) Specifications (continued)

Item Specifications
Model Number Model Number Model Number
KJ1501X1-BC1 KJ1501X1-BC2 KJ1501X1-BC3
External • Primary power: DC input, 2-wire
connectors
• Alarm contacts: 2-wire normally open relays; relays are closed when 3.3
and 5 VDC outputs are within ±4% of nominal
• Alarm relay contact rating: 30 VDC at 2.0 A; 250 VAC at 2.0 A

Dimensions

Figure E-3: System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) Dimensions

Warning
Always remove input power to the supply before connecting or disconnecting the input
power connection. The connector should not interrupt current flow and could be
damaged if actuated under a load condition.

323
System Power Supply Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

E.3 Intrinsically Safe System Power Supply

Specifications
Table E-3: I.S. System Power Supply Specifications
Item Specification
Input 18.5 to 36 VDC (24 VDC nominal)
Output 12 VDC ±5%
Output current 5A
Input to output isolation 250 VAC rms
Holdup time 1.8 ms
Input protection Internally fused, non-replaceable fuses
Over voltage protection 110% to 120%
Input power 80 Watts
Mounting I.S. Power Supply Carrier
External connectors DC input 2-part screw terminal

Dimensions

Figure E-4: I.S. System Power Supply Dimensions

324
 Workstation and Monitor Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

F Workstation and Monitor

Specifications
This section provides information on DeltaV workstations, Multiple Monitors, and Touch
Screens. Refer to the following sources for current DeltaV Workstation configuration
details and for current Ethernet card specifications:
• DeltaV Workstation Product Data Sheets
• The PC manufacturer’s (Dell Computer Corporation) specifications
• Your local Emerson Representative

F.1 Primary and Secondary Channel Ethernet Card

Specifications - Plant LAN Interface Card
The DeltaV system uses Ethernet to create the DeltaV Control Network, both primary and
secondary channels. All network cards used in DeltaV Workstations must be 10/100BaseT
Ethernet network cards.

F.2 Multiple Monitors

The DeltaV system can support up to four monitors that work together like one large
screen and are driven by the same workstation. Multiple monitors can be laid out in a
horizontal orientation (1x2, 1x3, 1x4) or a square orientation (2x2). Other monitor
arrangements are not supported. Refer to the video card manufacturer’s documentation
for information on how to install the video cards and remove any existing video cards. The
NEC MultiSync LCD 2080UX+ is approved for use in a multiple monitor system. Refer to
Books Online for information on installing the driver and video card and setting up the
video card for multiple monitors.

F.3 Touch Screens

Touch screens can be used on single monitors and on multiple monitors.Connect a cable
from any USB connector on the back of the workstation to a touch screen monitor in any
order or sequence. The NEC MultiSync LCD 2080UX with integrated capacitive
touchscreen is approved for use with the DeltaV system. After connecting the touch
screen monitors, refer to the 3M TouchWare™ Software for Windows User Guide for
complete information on calibrating and configuring the touch screens

325
Workstation and Monitor Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

326
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

G Control Network Specifications

This section provides information and specifications for the DeltaV Control Network. Refer
to the following sources for current DeltaV Network configuration details:
• DeltaV Product Data Sheets and the DeltaV Power and Grounding manual
• The network equipment manufacturers’ specifications
• Your local Emerson representative

G.1 Third Party Switches and Cable

The following sections provide specifications and usage information for third party
switches, and cable that can be used with a DeltaV system. Diagrams that show these
components in DeltaV Control Networks are provided as examples.
Important
DeltaV systems require a specific version of Cisco® switch software and a special switch
configuration. The use of other versions of the switch software or an improperly
configured switch could cause serious problems with the operation of the DeltaV system.
Switches ordered from Emerson Process Management are shipped with the supported
software version and are pre-configured to operate properly with the DeltaV system. To
ensure that you have the proper switch configuration and the correct switch software for
your DeltaV system, you should purchase the switch though normal Emerson channels.
The DeltaV supported software version of the switch may not be the version that is
currently shipping on off-the-shelf Cisco switches.
If you want to verify the configuration of a switch supplied by Emerson, refer to the System
Administration and Maintenance manual in the DeltaV Books Online. This documentation
provides written examples of correct, DeltaV specific switch configuration for the
supported revision level of the switch software. Emerson does not provide the Cisco
operating software separately for field configuration. If you purchase Cisco switches from
sources other than Emerson, the switch must be configured to DeltaV instructions and the
supplier is responsible for ensuring that the switch software is at the supported revision
level.

Cisco switches can be managed from a Management station. Refer to the Managing Cisco
Switches topic in DeltaV Books Online.

Related information
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station

327
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

G.1.1 8-Port 10/100Mbit Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-

Optic Port
Specifications
Table G-1: 8-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Port
Item Specification
Model Cisco 8-Port Twisted Pair with 1, MTRJ Fiber-
Optic Port1.
(WS 2940-8TF)
Type • 8, 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet
• 1, 100BASE- FX Fiber-Optic
• 1, Gigabit SFP-based port

Note
Either the 100BASE-FX port or the Gigabit SFP-
based port can be used. Both ports cannot be
used at the same time.

1 Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Switches and
Cable

Front and Rear Views

The following two figures show the front and rear views of the 8-port 10/100Mbit
managed switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-Optic port.

Figure G-1: Front View of the 8-Port 10/100Mbit Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-
Optic Port

100Base-FX Gigabit SFP-based

10/100 ports port port

Figure G-2: Rear View of the 8-Port 10/100Mbit Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-
Optic Port

RJ-45 Console port

328
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

G.1.2 24-Port 100Mbit Fiber Switch

Specifications
Table G-2: 100Mbit 24-Port Fiber Switch Specifications
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port MTRJ Fiber-Optic Switch1
(WS-C3550-24-FX-SMI)
Type 100Mbit Fiber Ethernet

1 Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Switches and
Cable

Front and Rear Views

The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port 100Mbit fiber switch.

Figure G-3: Front View of the 24-Port 100Mbit Fiber Switch

100Base-FX ports GBIC

Module slots

Figure G-4: Rear View of the 24-Port 100Mbit Fiber Switch

RJ-45
Console port

G.1.3 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic

Ports
Specifications
Table G-3: 10/100Mbit 24-Port Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Ports Specifications
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port Twisted Pair with 2, MTRJ Fiber-
Optic Ports1
(WS-C2950C-24)

329
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table G-3: 10/100Mbit 24-Port Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Ports Specifications
(continued)

Item Specification
Type • 24, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet
• 2, 100BASE-FX Fiber-Optic

1 Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Switches and
Cable.

Front and Rear Views

The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port 10/100Mbit switch with
2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Ports.

Figure G-5: Front View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic
Ports

10/100 Ports 100BASE-FX

ports

Figure G-6: Rear View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Ports

RJ-45
Console port

G.1.4 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch

Specifications

Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port Twisted Pair1
(WS-C2950-24)
Type 10/100BASE-T Ethernet

1 Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Switches and
Cable.

Front and Rear Views

The following figure shows the front view of the 24-port switch. The rear view is the same
as the 24-port 10/100Mbit switch with 2 MTRJ fiber-optic ports.

330
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-7: Front View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch

10/100 Ports

Note
Refer to the Cisco documentation for more detailed specifications

G.1.5 12-Port SFP Managed Switch

Specifications
Table G-4: 12 Port SFP Managed Switch
Item Specification
Model Cisco 12-port SFP managed1
®
(Catalyst 3750G-12S)
Type 12-port Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP)
Managed switch

1 Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration on Third Party Switches
and Cable.

Front and Rear Views

The following figures show the front and rear views of the 12-port SFP managed switch.

Figure G-8: Front View of the 12-Port SFP Managed Switch

Catalyst 3750

SFP slots

Figure G-9: Rear View of the 12-Port SFP Managed Switch

DC INPUTS FOR REMOTE
RATING POWER SUPPLY
100-240V ~ SPECIFIED IN MANUAL
CONSOLE 3A-1.5A, 50-60 HZ
STACK 1 STACK 2
WARNING

Stacking cable RJ-45

connection Console port

331
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

G.1.6 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots

Specifications
Table G-5: 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-port fiber-optic managed switch with
100BASE-FX fiber ports and 2 Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP) Gigabit slots1
(Catalyst 3750-24FS)
Type • 24, 100BASE-FX fiber-optic
• 2, SFP gigabit

1 Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Switches and
Cable.

Front and Rear Views

The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port fiber managed switch
with 2 SFP gigabit slots.

Figure G-10: Front View of the 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots
Catalyst 3750

100 Base-FX ports SFP slots

Figure G-11: Rear View of the 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots
DC INPUTS FOR REMOTE
POWER SUPPLY RATING
SPECIFIED IN MANUAL 100-240V ~
CONSOLE 3A-1.5A, 50-60 HZ
STACK 1 STACK 2
WARNING

Stacking cable RJ-45

connection Console port

G.1.7 24-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit

Slots
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-port twisted pair managed switch with 2 SFP gigabit slots
(Catalyst 3750-24TS)1

332
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Item Specification
Type • 24, 10/100 twisted pair managed
• 2, SFP gigabit slots

1 Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Switches and
Cable.

The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port twisted pair managed
switch with 2 SFP gigabit slots.

Figure G-12: Front View of the 24-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 2 SFP
Gigabit Slots
Catalyst 3750

10/100 Ports SFP slots

Figure G-13: Rear View of the 24-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 2 SFP
Gigabit Slots
WARNING DC INPUTS FOR REMOTE
POWER SUPPLY
RATING SPECIFIED IN MANUAL
CONSOLE 100-240V ~
1.2A-0.0a, 50-60 HZ
STACK 1 STACK 2

Stacking cable RJ-45

connection Console port

G.1.8 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch

Specifications
Table G-6: 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch
Item Specification
Model Allied Telesyn 8-port unmanaged switch (AT-
FS708)
Type 8, 10/100 twisted pair unmanaged

Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the 8-port twisted pair unmanaged switch.

333
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-14: Front View of the 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch

Allied Telesyn
POWER
AT-FS708 LINK/ACT

100M AUTO
MD/MDIX
FDX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10/100 Ports

G.1.9 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch with One Fiber

Port
Specifications
Table G-7: 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch with One Fiber Port
Item Specification
Model Allied Telesyn 8-port unmanaged switch (AT-
FS709FC)
Type 8, 10/100 twisted pair unmanaged 1, 100BASE-
FX

Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the 8-port twisted pair unmanaged switch
with one fiber port.

Figure G-15: Front View of the 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch with One Fiber
Port
10/100 Ports (MDI/MDIX)
use one port only

Allied Telesyn FS709FC POWER

LINK/ACT

100 M

FDX

10/100 Ports 100BASE-FX Port

G.1.10 8-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 1 Gigabit Multi-Function

Port
Item Specification
Model Cisco 8-Port 10/100Mbit twisted pair (Catalyst
2960-8TC-L)1

334
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Item Specification
Type • 8, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
• 1, gigabit multi-function port that can be used as
either a 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair port or a SFP-
based port.

Note
Either the twisted pair port or the SFP-based port can be
used. Both ports cannot be used at the same time.

1 Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Switches and
Cable.

The following figure shows the front view of the 8-port 10/100Mbit switch with one
gigabit multi-function port.

Figure G-16: Front View of the 8-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with one Gigabit Multi-
function Port

Console port 10/100Mbit ports

G.1.11 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 RJ45 Ports

Specifications
Table G-8: 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two RJ45 Ports
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port 10/100Mbit twisted pair1
(Catalyst 2960-24TT-L)
Type • 24, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
• 2, 10/100/1000Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports

1 Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Switches and
Cable.

Front and Rear Views

The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port 10/100Mbit switch with
two RJ45 gigabit uplink ports.

335
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-17: Front View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two RJ45 Ports

10/100Mbit ports 10/100/1000Mbit

ports

Figure G-18: Rear View of the Cisco 2960 24 and 48 Port Models

RJ45
console port

G.1.12 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 Gigabit Multi-

Function Ports
Specifications
Table G-9: 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two Gigabit Multi-Function Ports
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port 10/100Mbit twisted pair1
(Catalyst 2960-24TC-L)
Type • 24, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
• 2, gigabit multi-function ports. Each multi-
function port can be used as either a
10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair port or a SFP-
based port.

Note
Each multi-function port can be used as either
twisted pair or SFP. Both port types cannot be
used at the same time.

1 Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Switches and
Cable.

Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the 24-port 10/100Mbit switch with two
gigabit multi-function ports.

336
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-19: Front View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two Gigabit Multi-
function Ports

10/100Mbit ports Gigabit

multi-function ports

G.1.13 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 RJ45 Ports

Specifications
Table G-10: 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two RJ45 Ports
Item Specification
Model Cisco 48-Port twisted pair1
(Catalyst 2960-48TT-L)
Type • 48, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
• 2, RJ45 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports

1 Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Switches and
Cable.

Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the 48-port 10/100Mbit switch with two RJ45
gigabit uplink ports.

Figure G-20: Front View of the 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two RJ45 Ports

10/100Mbit ports 10/100/1000Mbit

ports

337
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

G.1.14 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 Gigabit Multi-

Function Ports
Specifications
Table G-11: 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two Gigabit Multi-Function Ports
Item Specification
Model Cisco 48-Port 10/100Mbit twisted pair1
(Catalyst 2960-48TC-L)
Type • 48, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
• 2, gigabit multi-function ports that can be
used as either a 10/100/1000Mbit twisted
pair port or a SFP-based port.

Note
Each multi-function port can be used as either
twisted pair or SFP. Both port types cannot be
used at the same time.

1 Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Switches and
Cable.

Front view
The following figure shows the front view of the 48-port 10/100Mbit switch with two
gigabit multi-function ports.

Figure G-21: Front View of the 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two Gigabit Multi-
function Ports

10/100Mbit ports Gigabit

multi-function ports

G.1.15 Fiber-Optic Gigabit Transceivers

Specifications

Item Specification
Model Cisco Fiber-Optic Gigabit Transceivers (GLC-LH-
SM and GLC-SX-MM)
Type: GLC-LH-SM GLC-SX-MM Single-mode, long-haul, up to 10 km
Multimode, up to 550 m

338
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the fiber-optic single and multimode gigabit
transceivers.

Figure G-22: Front View of the Fiber-Optic Transceivers - Single and Multimode

G.1.16 Fiber-Optic Ethernet Transceivers

Specifications
The GLC-FE-100FX transceiver can be used with only the Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch. The
GLC-GE-100FX transceiver can be used with the Cisco 2960-24-TC-L and the 2960-48-TC-
L.
Table G-12: Fiber-Optic Ethernet Transceivers Specifications
Item Specification
Model Cisco Fiber-Optic Ethernet Transceivers (GLC-
FE-100FX and GLC-GE-100FX)
Type Multimode, up to 2 km

Front View
The following figure shows the fiber-optic ethernet transceivers.

339
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-23: Fiber-Optic Ethernet Transceiver

G.1.17 Twisted Pair Gigabit Transceiver

Specifications
Table G-13: Twisted Pair Gigabit Transceiver
Item Specification
Model Cisco Twisted Pair Copper Gigabit Transceiver
(GLC-T)
Type 1 twisted pair port, up to 100 m

Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the twisted pair gigabit transceiver.

340
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-24: Front View of the Twisted Pair Gigabit Transceiver

G.2 DeltaV Fiber Switches

Specifications
The DeltaV system supports the Single Port Fiber Switch and the Four Port Fiber Switch.
The Single Port Fiber Switch is an Ethernet switch with one 100BASE-FX port and four
10/100BASE-TX ports. The Four Port Fiber Switch is an Ethernet switch with four 100BASE-
FX ports and one 10/100BASE-TX port. The switches can be mounted on a DIN rail and
provide comprehensive LED diagnostics. The switches can be installed in Zone 2 and
provide connection to Zone 1 components over the certified energy-limited fiber port.
Primarily the switches are the fiber port connection to the Zone 1 components; however,
they can be used for all Control Network applications. Refer to the Installing Your DeltaV
Zone 1 Intrinsically Safe Hardware manual in Books Online for information on connecting to
the DeltaV Intrinsically Safe system.
Table G-14: Single Port and Four Port Fiber Switch Specifications
Item Specification
Input voltage 24 VDC ±20%
Input current • 0.25 A for the Single Port Fiber Switch
• 0.35 A for the Four Port Fiber Switch

Link budget • Multimode 62.5/125 µm - max attenuation

11 dB
• Multimode 50/125 µm - max attenuation 8
dB
• Wavelength 1300 nm

341
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table G-14: Single Port and Four Port Fiber Switch Specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Fiber interface 100 BASE-FX with MT-RJ receptacle, full duplex
only
Fiber type Refer to the "Setting up the DeltaV Control
Network" topic.
Nominal fiber distance 2 km
Twisted pair ports 10/100 BASE-T, RJ45 compatible
Cable type Category 5e screened twisted pair (ScTP)
Mounting Vertically on a horizontal DIN rail

Top and Bottom Views

The following figures show the top and bottom views of the Single Port Fiber Switch.

Figure G-25: Top View of the Single Port Fiber Switch

+
Not used
-

+
Shield
ground
-

100 Management Power

BaseFx port inputs
port (not used)

Figure G-26: Bottom View of the Single Port Fiber Switch

10/100BaseTx ports

The following figures show the top and bottom views of the Four Port Fiber Switch.

342
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-27: Top View of the Four Port Fiber Switch

Management port
(not used)

+
Shield
ground
-

+
Shield
ground
-

100BaseFx Power
ports inputs

Figure G-28: Bottom View of the Four Port Fiber Switch

100BaseFx Ports

10/100BaseTx port

Related information
Setting up the DeltaV Control Network

G.3 DeltaV Smart Switches and Media Modules

The DeltaV Smart Switches are used to construct DeltaV Control Networks according to
the IEEE 802.3 Local and Metropolitan Area Networks standards.
The DeltaV Smart Switches are
• DeltaV MD base Smart Switches and media modules
• DeltaV RM100 base Smart Switches and media modules
• DeltaV RM104 Smart Switches
• DeltaV FP20 8-port Smart Switches
DeltaV Smart Switches are intended for plug and play use with a DeltaV system. No
configuration is necessary unless you want to access a switch with Telnet, monitor a switch
with a web-based switch interface from a Management station or use the DeltaV version

343
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

10.3 One-Click Lockdown application to lock the switches to prevent unauthorized devices
from being connected to unused ports on the switches. In DeltaV version 11.3 and 12.3,
Smart Switches are commissioned using the DeltaV Smart Switch Command Center
(SSCC). In DeltaV version 13.3 and higher, Smart Switches are commissioned using the
Network Device Command Center (NDCC). When you commission the switches using the
NDCC (or Smart Switch Command Center (SSCC) in earlier versions), the switch is given a
network address and associated with a control module so that switch hardware conditions
can be interpreted as DeltaV alarms.
Monitoring a switch with the web-based switch interface requires Java software that can
be downloaded from the Internet. A serial interface cable is required to connect the
switch’s serial port to the Management station in order to set up the switches. The serial
interface cable can be purchased separately from Emerson or you can build the cable
assembly. The following figure shows the pin outs for building the serial interface cable
assembly. Different pin outs are used for each end of the cable.

Figure G-29: Serial Interface Cable Pin Outs

RJ11 DB9
CTS 1
Pin 5 n.c. 2 2
Pin 6 TX 3 3
Pin 8
Pin 1 GND 4
RX 5 5
Pin 1 RTS 6

Media modules with fiber-optic network ports are fixed to 100Mbit full duplex
communication (except for ports that use SFP media modules that are fixed at either
100Mbit or 1 gigabit full duplex). When DeltaV Smart Switches are used in an existing
network, all existing fiber-optic connections must be set to 100Mbit full duplex for the
switches to communicate. For example, if DeltaV Smart Switches are installed in a network
with 3Com switches, you must change the 3Com switches from the default half duplex to
full duplex.
Refer to Books Online for DeltaV version 10.3 for information on the One-Click Lockdown
application, for information on configuring, monitoring, and accessing the switches with
Telnet, and for information on downloading Java software. Refer to Books Online for
DeltaV version 11.3 and 12.3 for information about the Smart Switch Command Center.
Refer to Books Online for DeltaV version 13.3 for information about the Network Device
Command Center (NDCC).
Before installing and using DeltaV Smart Switches and media modules, refer to the
important safety information in the System Administration and Maintenance manual in
Books Online.

G.3.1 DeltaV MD Base Smart Switches and Media Modules

Specifications
The DeltaV MD Smart Switches consist of the base switches, MD20 and MD30, and DeltaV
media modules that plug into the base switches. The MD20 base Smart Switches have 8,
16, or 24, 10/100Mbit ports and the MD30 have 8, 16, or 24, 10/100Mbit ports and a
gigabit slot. For both base Smart Switch types, a variety of pluggable DeltaV media
modules provide the interfaces to the DeltaV Control Network in a variety of media types.

344
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Note
The MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches consist of the base switch and the backplane. These
items are not available separately. The base switch functions as the power supply and the
backplane houses the switching circuits.

Table G-15: DeltaV MD Base Smart Switches

Model Type
MD20-8 MD20-8-ES Up to 8, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with
additional modules
MD20-16 MD20-16-ES Up to 16, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with
additional modules
MD20-24 MD20-24-ES Up to 24, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with
additional modules
MD30-8 MD30-8-ES Up to 8, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with
additional modules 2, gigabit ports
MD30-16 MD30-16-ES Up to 16, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with
additional modules 2, gigabit ports
MD30-24 MD30-24-ES Up to 24, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with
additional modules 2, gigabit ports

The ES versions of the MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches have an extended temperature
range and conformal coating.
Table G-16: DeltaV Media Modules for the MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches
Model Type
MD4-2TX/SFP • 2, gigabit multimode fiber SFP slots
MD4-2TX/SFP-ES • 2, gigabit, RJ45 twisted pair ports

Note
Either the twisted pair port or the fiber SFP slots
can be used. Both cannot be used at the same
time.

MD2-2FXM2 2, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet ports over

MD2-2FXM2-ES multimode fiber (SC connectors)

MD2-2FXS2 2, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet ports over single

MD2-2FXS2-ES mode fiber (SC connectors)

MD2-4TX1 4, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, fast ethernet twisted

MD2-4TX1-ES pair ports (RJ45 connectors)

MD2-4TX1-POE 4, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, fast ethernet twisted

MD2-4TX1-POE-ES pair ports (RJ45 connectors) with Power over
Ethernet (PoE)
MD3-2FXM2/2TX1 • 2, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over multimode
MD3-2FXM2/2TX1-ES fiber ports (SC connectors)
• 2, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair ports
(RJ45 connectors)

345
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table G-16: DeltaV Media Modules for the MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches
(continued)

Model Type
MD3-2FXS2/2TX1 • 2, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over single
MD3-2FXS2/2TX1-ES mode fiber ports (SC connectors)
• 2, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair ports
(RJ45 connectors)

MD3-4FXM2 4, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over multimode

MD3-4FXM2-ES fiber ports (SC connectors)

MD3-4FXM4 4, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over multimode

MD3-4FXM4-ES fiber ports (ST connectors)

MD3-4FXS2 4, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over single mode

MD3-4FXS2-ES fiber ports (SC connectors)

MD3-2FXM4/2TX1 • 2, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over multimode

MD3-2FXM4/2TX1-ES fiber ports (ST connectors)
• 2, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair ports
(RJ45 connectors)

MD3-1FXS2/3TX1 • 1, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over single

MD3-1FXS2/3TX1-ES mode fiber port (SC connectors)
• 3, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair ports
(RJ45 connectors)

Images
The following figure shows an MD20 8-port base Smart Switch. This switch has two
10/100Mbit slots for media modules. Various media modules are available with up to four
ports per module.

346
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-30: MD20 8-Port Smart Switch

Base switch Slots for media modules

P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD20-8

Ground screw

The following figure shows an MD20 16-port base Smart Switch. This switch has four
10/100Mbit slots for media modules. Various media modules are available with up to four
ports per module.

Figure G-31: MD20 16-Port Smart Switch

Base switch Slots for media modules

P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD20-16

Ground screw

The MD20 16-port Smart Switch can be expanded to 24 ports in the field with a two slot
expansion backplane or the MD20 24-port Smart Switch can be purchased as a single
product.

347
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-32: MD20 Smart Switch with 24 Ports

Base switch Slots for media modules Two-slot expansion backplane

P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD20-16

Ground screw

The following figure shows an MD20 16-port Smart Switch with four media modules
installed.

Figure G-33: MD20 16-Port Smart Switch with Four Media Modules

P P1 | P2 P P P P
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
FDX 6|3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 2 2 2
1000 5|2 3 3 3 3 3 3
RUN TEST | 1 4 4 4 4 4 4
SELECT

Network Switch Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface
Module Module Module Module

MD20-16 4TX1 4TX1 2FXM2/2TX1 4FXM4

The MD30 Smart Switches have 8 or 16, 10/100Mbit ports and a gigabit slot to the left of
the base switch. The following figure shows an MD30 8-port Smart Switch.

348
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-34: MD30 8-Port Smart Switch

Gigabit Base switch
Slots for media modules
slot

P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD30-8

Ground screw

The following figure shows an MD30 16-port Smart Switch.

Figure G-35: MD30 16-Port Smart Switch

Gigabit Base switch
Slots for media modules
slot

P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD30-16

Ground screw

The following figure shows an MD30 16-port Smart Switch with five media modules. The
media module to the left of the base switch has two gigabit ports.

349
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-36: MD30 16-Port Switch with Media Modules

P P P1 | P2 P P P P
LOCK RL1| RL2

1 1 L/D AN | TP 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
2 2 FDX 6|3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 2 2 2
1000 5|2 3 3 3 3 3 3
1 2
RUN TEST | 1 4 4 4 4 4 4
SELECT

Switch Interface Network Switch Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface
Module Module Module Module Module

2TX/SPF MD30-16 4TX1 4TX1 2FXM2/2TX1 4FXM4

The MD30 16-port Smart Switch, like the MD20 16-port Smart Switch, can be expanded in
the field to 24 ports with a two slot expansion backplane or the MD30 24-port Smart
Switch can be purchased as a single product.
As shown in the following figure, an image on the front of the media module shows the
media module’s port layout. This port layout is used by the MD3-4FXS2, MD3-4FXM4, and
MD3-4FXM2 media modules

Figure G-37: Port Layout for MD3-4FXS2, 4FXM4, and 4FXM2

Bottom view

1 1
2 2 Port 1
3 3
4 4 Port 2

Port 3

Switch Interface Port 4

Module

4FXS2

Connector end

The following figure shows the port layout for the MD2-2FXM2 and 2FXS2 media modules.

350
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-38: Port Layout for the MD2-2FXM2 and 2FXS2

Bottom view

Port 1

Port 2

Connector end

The following figure shows the port layout for the MD3-2FXM2/2TX1, 2FXM4/2TX1,
1FXS2/3TX1, and 2FXS2/2TX1 media modules.

Figure G-39: Port Layout for the MD3-2FXM2/2TX1, 2FXM4/2TX1, 1FXS2/3TX1, and
2FXS2/2TX1
Bottom view

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Connector end

The following figure shows the port layout for the MD4-2TX/SFP media module.

351
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-40: Port Layout for the MD4-2TX/SFP

Bottom view

Port 1

Port 2

Port 1
Port 2

Connector end

The following figure shows the port layout for the MD2-4TX1 media module.

Figure G-41: Port Layout for the MD2-4TX1

Bottom view

Port 1 Port 2

Port 3 Port 4

Connector end

The following figure shows the port layout for the 4TX1-PoE media module.

352
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-42: Port Layout for the 4TX1-PoE

Bottom view

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

D.C. 48v

Connector end

Related information
Environmental Specifications for the DeltaV System

G.3.2 Power Specifications for the MD20 and MD30 Smart

Switches
Specifications
The following table provides power specifications for the DeltaV MD20 and MD30 base
Smart Switches. The base switches provide power to the media modules.
Table G-17: Power Specifications for the DeltaV MD Base Smart Switches
Item Specification
Input voltage +18 to +32 VDC
Mounting Vertically on a horizontal DIN rail.

353
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Images

Figure G-43: Bottom View of the MD20 and MD30 Smart Base Switch

Serial port

USB port

Dip switch
(not used) Power 1
1 = +24 VDC
1 2 3 4
Power 1 2 = 0 VDC
connectors 3,4 = Relay 1

Power 2 Power 2
connectors
4 3 2 1
1 = +24 VDC
2 = 0 VDC
3,4 = Relay 2

• A detachable screw terminal block, shown in the preceding image, is used to supply the
required power to the MD base Smart Switches.
• A ground screw on the left side of the MD switch’s mounting chassis, shown in the
following figure, connects to an instrumentation ground to provide a shield ground for
the switch and device communication cables.

Figure G-44: Ground Connection for the DeltaV MD Smart Switches

10Mbit media modules
Base switch

P P1 | P2 P P P P
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
FDX 6|3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 2 2 2
1000 5|2 3 3 3 3 3 3
RUN TEST | 1 4 4 4 4 4 4
SELECT

Network Switch Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface
Module Module Module Module

MD20-8 4TX1 4TX1 2FXM2/2TX1 4FXM4

Ground screw

354
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

G.3.3 DeltaV RM100 Base Smart Switches and Media Modules

Specifications
The DeltaV RM Smart Switches consist of four types of base switches and, depending upon
the switch type, up to two pluggable media modules. The media modules provide a
variety of pluggable media options. Table G-20 describes the media modules. The RM-100
Base Smart Switch-RP supports redundant input power. The RM Smart Switches can be
mounted on a 19 inch rack or on a wall.
Table G-18: DeltaV RM Base Smart Switches
Model Type
RM100-Base Smart Switch • 2, gigabit Ethernet combo ports
• 8, fast Ethernet ports
• 2 sockets for media modules for an
additional 8 or 16 ports

RM100-Base Smart Switch-RP • 2, gigabit Ethernet combo ports

• 8, fast Ethernet ports
• 2 sockets for media modules for an
additional 8 or 16 ports
Redundant input power.
RM100-8TX • 8, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports with RJ45
connectors
• 2, 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports with
RJ45 connectors
• 2, 100/1000Mbit SFP-based ports
This is a fixed-configuration switch; no
additional media modules can be added to it.
Note
Either the 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports
or the SFP ports can be used. Both port types
cannot be used at the same time.

RM100-24TX • 24, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports with RJ45

connectors
• 2, 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports with
RJ45 connectors
• 2, 100/1000Mbit SFP-based ports
This is a fixed-configuration switch; no
additional media modules can be added to it.
Note
Either the 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports
or the SFP ports can be used. Both port types
cannot be used at the same time.

355
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table G-19: Number of Slots and Connectable Network Segments for the DeltaV
RM100 Smart Switches
Item RM100 Base Smart RM100-8TX RM100-24TX
Switch and Base
Smart Switch-RP
Number of slots for 2 0 2
10/100Mbit media
modules.1
Number of ports for 2 2 2
gigabit connections.2
Maximum number of 24 8 24
connectable
10/100Mbit network
segments.
Maximum number of 2 2 2
connectable gigabit
network segments.

1 Up to two modules can be installed in any combination of fiber and twisted pair for the RM100
Base Smart Switch and Base Smart Switch-RP.
2 Up to 24 ports when all slots are filled.

Images
The following figure shows the RM base Smart Switch. In this image, the slots for the
media modules are empty.

Figure G-45: RM100 Base Smart Switch with no Media Modules

LEDs
Signal contact 10/100Mbit Sockets for media modules
USB Port fast Ethernet ports
v.24
RM100 Base Module
Network Switch RM100 1.1
2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7

FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK
P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
1.2

100/1000Mbit
10/100/1000Mbit fiber SFP slots
twisted pair ports

In the following figure, two eight port media modules are installed in the RM100.

356
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-46: RM Base Smart Switch with two Media Modules

LEDs
Signal contact 10/100Mbit Media modules
USB Port fast Ethernet ports
v.24
RM100 Base Module
Network Switch RM100 1.1
2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7

FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK
P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
1.2

100/1000Mbit
10/100/1000Mbit fiber SFP slots
twisted pair ports

Media Modules for RM base Smart Switches

The following table provides information on the media modules for the RM base Smart
Switches.
Table G-20: RM Media Modules
Model Type
RM100-EM-8TX 8, fast Ethernet twisted pair ports with RJ45
connectors
RM100-EM-8MM-FX 8, fast Ethernet multimode fiber ports with DSC
connectors
RM100-EM-8SM-FX 8, fast Ethernet single mode fiber ports with DSC
connectors
RM100-EM-8SFP 8, fast Ethernet SFP slots

Figure G-47: RM100-EM-8TX Media Module

Fast Ethernet LEDs
twisted pair ports

357
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-48: RM100-EM-8MM-FX Media Module

LEDs

Fast Ethernet multimode fiber ports

with dual SC connectors

The RM100-EM-8SM-FX media module has the same physical layout as the RM100-EM-8-
MM-FX shown in the following figure.

Figure G-49: RM100-EM-8SFP Media Module

LEDs

Fast Ethernet
slots

G.3.4 Power Specifications for the DeltaV RM100 Smart

Switches
Specifications
The following table provides power and other specifications for the DeltaV RM100 Smart
Switches.
Table G-21: Specifications for DeltaV RM100 Smart Switches
Item Specification
Input voltage 100 - 240 VAC

358
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table G-21: Specifications for DeltaV RM100 Smart Switches (continued)

Item Specification
Input current 0.4 - 0.2 A
Mounting Horizontally on a 19 inch rack or vertically on the
wall

Rear View
The RM100 Base Smart Switch-RP supports redundant input power. The power supply
inputs are uncoupled. The following figure shows the redundant power connections on
the rear of the RM100 Base Smart Switch-RP.

Figure G-50: Redundant Power on the RM100 Base Smart Switch-RP

Redundant Standard
power supply power supply
100 - 240 VAC 100 - 240 VAC

The standard power supply alone supplies power to the device. The redundant power
supply automatically becomes active if the standard supply fails.

G.3.5 DeltaV RM104 Smart Switches

Installation notes
• The RM104 Smart Switches can be mounted on a 19-inch rack or on a wall. If the switch
is mounted on a 19-inch rack, be sure to install sliding mounting rails to properly hold
the switch.
• Ensure that there is at least one free rack space (approximately 5 cm) above and below
the switch because heat is discharged through the switch housing.
• The RM104 Smart Switches have a fixed number of ports (24).
• The RM104 Smart Switches support redundant input power.

359
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Port information
Table G-22: Port information for the DeltaV RM104 Smart Switches
Model Number and types of ports Image
RM104 Smart Switch • 24 10/100/1000 mb/s twisted pair Signal contact
USB Port Twisted pair ports
ports with RJ45 connectors v.24

• Eight fast Ethernet ports

• Four 100/1000mb/s SFP-based ports
SFP ports
Only one port in each TP/SFP port pair
can be used at a time. Either the TP or
the SFP port in each of the 4 pairs can be
used, so that up to 4 of the 8 ports can
be used simultaneously.

G.3.6 Power specifications for the DeltaV RM104 Smart

Switches
Table G-23: Power specifications for DeltaV RM104 Smart Switches
Item Specification
Input voltage 100 - 240 VAC
Alarm contacts Normally closed. Changes to Open if:
• Power supply fails
• Internal voltage supply fails
• Self-test failure occurs

Input current 0.5 - 0.3 A

Figure G-51: Alarm relays on the RM104 Smart Switches

Fault

To any alarm
input or DI

360
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

G.3.7 DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches

Specifications
The DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches are all 8-port switches. Each of the FP20 Smart Switches
has 6, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports, two of the eight ports on each switch are fiber uplink
ports, twisted pair uplink ports, or a combination of fiber and twisted pair uplink ports.

Model Type
FP20-6TX2TX 8, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX2TX-ES1
FP20-6TX1MM1TX • 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX1MM1TX-ES • 1, 100Mbit (DSC) multimode fiber uplink
port
• 1, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair uplink port

FP20-6TX1SM1TX • 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports

FP20-6TX1SM1TX-ES • 1, 100Mbit (DSC) single mode fiber uplink
port
• 1, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair uplink port

FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX • 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports

FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX-ES • 1, 100Mbit (DSC) single mode fiber, long
haul uplink port
• 1, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair uplink port

FP20-6TX2MM • 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports

FP20-6TX2MM-ES • 2, 100Mbit (DSC) multimode fiber uplink
ports

FP20-6TX2SM • 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports

FP20-6TX2SM-ES • 2, 100Mbit (DSC) single mode fiber uplink
ports

FP20-6TX2SMLH • 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports

FP20-6TX2SMLH-ES • 2, 100Mbit (DSC) single mode fiber, long
haul uplink ports

1 The ES version of the switches have an extended temperature range and conformal coating.

Front Views
The following figure shows the front view of the DeltaV FP20-6TX2TX Smart Switch. This
switch has eight twisted pair ports.

361
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-52: Front View of the DeltaV FP20-6TX2TX Smart Switch

Network Switch FAULT

FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

Power /relay
connectors
P FAULT
RUN LOCK
LEDs

USB USB port

V.24 interface
V.24

1 2

3 4

8 twisted
pair ports
5 6

7 8
Ground
screw

The following figure shows the front view of the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches with six
twisted pair ports, one twisted pair uplink port, and one fiber uplink port (model numbers
FP20-6TX1MM1TX, FP20-6TX1SM1TX, FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX)

Figure G-53: Front View of the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches with Fiber and Twisted
Pair Uplink Ports
Network Switch FAULT

FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

Power/relay
LS DA connectors
P FAULT
RUN LOCK
Fiber uplink LEDs
1
ports
USB USB port

V.24 interface
V.24

1 2

Twisted pair DA

uplink port 2

LS
Twisted pair
3 4
ports

Ground 5 6

screw

The following figure shows the front view of the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches with six
twisted pair ports and two fiber uplink ports (model numbers FP20-6TX2MM,
FP20-6TX2SM, and FP20-6TX2SMLH).

362
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-54: Front View of the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches with Two Fiber Uplink
Ports
Network Switch FAULT

FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

Power/relay
LS DA connectors
P FAULT
RUN LOCK
Fiber uplink LEDs
1
ports
USB USB port

V.24 interface
V.24

LS DA

1 2

Fiber uplink
ports 2
Twisted pair
3 4
ports

Ground 5 6

screw

Related information
Environmental Specifications

G.3.8 Power Specifications for the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches

Specifications
Table G-24: Specifications for DeltaV FP20 8-Port Smart Switches
Item Specification
Input voltage 9.6 - 60 VDC 18 - 30 VAC
Alarm contacts Normally closed. Changes to Open if: Power
supply fails At least one port has a defective link
status Internal voltage supply fails Self-test
failure occurs
Mounting Vertically on a horizontal DIN rail. A rack mount
kit is available.

G.4 Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation

Rules
CommScope cable that meets Category 5e specifications can be purchased from Emerson
or directly from the manufacturer (CommScope). CommScope type 5ES4 cable meets the
minimum requirements for Category 5e cable used in 100Mbit and 1000Mbit Ethernet
networks for DeltaV systems. Visit the CommScope web site for the most current
specifications for Category 5e Screened 4 Twisted Pair Cable (ScTP).

363
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

In addition to CommScope cable, several types of Belden cable can be used as long as it
meets or exceeds the CommScope 5ES4 category 5e performance and shielding
specifications. Belden cable can be purchased through Belden cable distributors. If Belden
cable is used, the basic cable installation and temperature specifications differ from the
specifications shown in the following list.
Follow these rules when installing CommScope cable to protect the electrical performance
of the cables:
• A cable is under loaded conditions when it is being pulled or it is under pressure. Under
loaded conditions do not exceed:
— 25 pounds pulling tension
— 16 times the Outside Diameter (OD) of the cable (3.2 inches) for the minimum
bend radius while pulling the cable
• A cable is under no load or unloaded conditions when the cable is being placed with no
tension. Under unloaded conditions do not exceed:
— 8 times the OD of the cable (1.6 inches) for the minimum bend radius
• Under both loaded and unloaded conditions, do not:
— Install the cable unless the temperature is between 0°C and 60°C
— Operate cable in environments outside the operating temperature range of -20°C
and 60°C

G.4.1 Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications

Specifications
Table G-25: Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications
Item Specification
Type Refer to "Control Network Installation
Requirements"
Minimum number of fibers Two per communications channel
Attenuation Refer to "Control Network Installation
Requirements"
Temperature rating Refer to "Control Network Installation
Requirements"
Connectors Refer to "Control Network Installation
Requirements"

Related information
Setting up the DeltaV Control Network
Control Network Installation Requirements

364
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

G.4.2 Cable Accessory Specifications

Specifications

Item Specification
Connectors Category 5, 8-position RJ45 plug connectors1
Terminating tool Hand or automatic machine tool for 8-position
connectors1
Boots, color-coded Yellow = primary control network cable1
Black = secondary control network cable1
Vinyl plastic tape Yellow Black
Note
Color marking tape also can be used.

Cable markers Vinyl film, self-laminating1

1 Available from Emerson

G.4.3 Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies

Straight-through and crossover twisted pair cable assemblies are used in DeltaV Control
Networks. Both shielded, metal-enclosed and isolated or unshielded, plastic-enclosed RJ45
connectors are used on both types of assemblies.
You will need to build four types of cable assembly combinations:
• Crossover cable with one end shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connector) and one end
isolated (plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector)
• Crossover cable with both ends shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connectors)
• Straight-through cable with one end shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connector) and
one end isolated (plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector)
• Straight-through cable with both ends shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connectors)
Before building any of these assemblies, you will need to determine the correct
combination of shielded and unshielded RJ45 connectors for your DeltaV Control Network.
Refer to 10/100Mbit network examples to make this determination. These figures contain
notes that indicate where metal-enclosed and plastic-enclosed RJ45 connectors are
required and where straight-through and crossover cable are needed.
When building cable assemblies with shielded and unshielded connectors, always refer to
the connector and tool manufacturer’s latest assembly instructions and application
specifications. These specifications show the correct jacket and shield preparation length
for the specific connectors being used.
Figure G-55 shows an unshielded, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector. First the boot is slid
onto the cable, next the load bar is loaded with the eight inner cable conductors, then the
load bar/cable assembly is inserted into the connector housing and crimped. Finally, the
boot is slid over the assembly for additional strain relief.

365
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-55: Unshielded Connector

Plastic-enclosed
RJ45 connector

Cable
conductors
Load bar/cable
assembly
Boot

Load bar

Figure G-56 shows a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector. First the boot is slid onto
the cable, then the cable shield and drain wire are folded back, next the load bar is loaded
with the eight inner cable conductors, then the load bar/cable assembly is inserted into
the connector housing and crimped. Finally, the boot is slid over the assembly for
additional strain relief.

Figure G-56: Shielded Connector

Metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector

Cable
conductors
Load bar/cable
assembly
Drain wire
Shielding
Boot
Load bar

Related information
10/100Mbit Network Examples

366
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

G.4.4 Straight-Through Cable Pin Outs

The following figure shows the pin outs for building a straight-through cable assembly.
The same pin outs are used for both ends of the cable.

Figure G-57: Straight-Through Cable Pin Outs for Both Ends

G.4.5 Crossover Cable Pin Outs

The following figure shows the pin outs for building a crossover cable assembly. Different
pin outs are used for each end of the cable.

Figure G-58: Crossover Cable Pin Outs for Both Ends

367
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

G.5 DeltaV Control Networks

The DeltaV Control Network examples in this chapter are designed according to the IEEE
802.3 Local and Metropolitan Area Networks standards. The topologies shown in the
examples are a small subset of the control network topologies that conform to the
Ethernet 802.3 standard. Network topologies vary depending upon the plant layout. One
plant layout may require a large number of hubs in one wiring closet rather than single
hubs in several wiring closets or rack rooms located throughout the plant. Another plant
layout may require a centralized hub or switch in a star topology that branches to several
remote locations. These and other network configurations are possible and fully
supported by Emerson. Consult your sales representative for assistance with network
configuration.
The examples begin with simple 10 megabit per second (abbreviated here as 10Mbit)
twisted pair network implementations, and end with more complex 10/100Mbit twisted
pair networks with a combination of fiber-optic and twisted pair segments. In all cases, the
examples show the maximum cable distances and the maximum number of intermediate
Ethernet hubs. These maximum limits assure you that any network design that exactly
matches the example, or is a subset of the example, is guaranteed to operate according to
Ethernet rules and will provide the necessary performance for your DeltaV system.
Note
Care must be taken when designing your network to not have large amounts of network
traffic running through the area control network across switches which are also used for
control (for example, controllers and CIOCs). Failing to do so can result in the control
integrity being compromised causing ACN switchovers and device dropouts.

Hop Rules
Advanced Ethernet models used for the calculation of maximum packet transmission
distances over copper cabling can be found in Ethernet 802.3 standards. For simplicity,
this section uses general Ethernet rules. For example, the number of repeater hops is
limited to four (four repeater hubs physically connected together in series) for 10Mbit
networks, and to two (two repeater hubs physically connected together in series) for
100Mbit networks. This limitation on the number of repeater hops allows for a minimum
amount of space (Inter Frame Gap) between each packet that is transmitted over the
network so that the physical medium’s receivers and transmitters located on each
repeater port have time to distinguish between the end of one packet and the beginning
of the next. As a packet travels between end nodes on a network, each repeater through
which the packet travels reduces the Inter Frame Gap by a small amount. If too many
repeater hubs are in the path between two end nodes, the overall net Inter Frame Gap
shrinkage will result in an Inter Frame Gap that is too small and packet information will be
corrupted by the time it reaches the receiving device. When all repeater hubs used in a
network, such as the repeater hubs that are qualified for use with the DeltaV system, are
designed in compliance with Ethernet standards, the generalized two hop/ four hop rules
can be used. Otherwise, a custom calculation would have to be performed on a case by
case basis for every network connection.

368
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

G.5.1 Extending a DeltaV Control Network with Media

Converters
Media converters are sometimes used to add a point-to-point fiber-optic link between
buildings for ground isolation and noise immunity. Media converters may be more cost
effective than an entire hub or switch fitted with a fiber-optic transceiver on both ends of
the link. Sometimes, small form factor Ethernet switches are used as media converters and
are often a better choice than a typical media converter.
Consider the following guidelines when choosing between a media converter and switches
with small form factors:
• With Ethernet media converters, the entire link must operate at the same speed and
duplex or severe communication problems can occur. This means that both fiber-optic
and twisted pair devices must operate at the same speed and duplex. For example, the
twisted pair link cannot operate at 100Mbit while the fiber-optic link operates at
10Mbit. The lower speed of the two attached devices determines the maximum speed
for the link. Likewise, the twisted pair port of the media converter cannot operate at
half duplex while its fiber-optic port operates at full duplex. For 100Mbit half duplex
operation between a half duplex controller and a half duplex fiber-optic media
converter attached to a switch’s fiber-optic port, fiber-optic distance is limited to less
than 300 meters because the entire link is half duplex. The actual fiber cable distance
must be calculated on a case-by-case basis depending upon the manufacturer’s
specifications for propagation delay through the media converter.
• With Ethernet switches with small form factors such as the DeltaV Single Port Fiber
Switch and DeltaV Four Port Fiber switch, the twisted pair port on the switch operates
with independent collision domain timing from all other ports including the fiber-optic
ports. This ensures that the fiber-optic distance can always be two kilometers and the
twisted pair distance can always be 100 meters. Due to advances in switch technology
and new components, the cost of a multi-port small form factor switch is about the
same as a two port media converter. In addition, more devices can be added to this
small switch as the system grows.

G.5.2 10Mbit Hub Example

Ethernet design rules apply for the maximum distance between workstation A and
workstation B (the furthest points) when four repeaters are in series that are connected by
twisted pair link segments for the 10Mbit networks shown in Figure G-58. Each port on
each hub can have a 100 meter (328 feet) maximum length twisted pair cable attached.
This allows a total network diameter of 500 meters (1640.5 feet) end to end. This
configuration can be implemented at installations having several wiring closets or rack
rooms configured within a single building with stable environmental conditions and a
common ground.
The 3Com mini-hubs in Figure G-59 have the following specifications:
• 8 port non-stackable
• table top or wall mount
• external wall plug power supply
• no upgrade options for Fiber-Optic Transceivers

369
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Note
Make a ground connection to the mini-hub chassis with a 12 AWG wire for the twisted pair
cable shield ground.

In the following figure any port on any hub can be used for DeltaV Workstation, Controller,
and Application Station connections. However, port 8 on each hub is a special port used
for the hub to hub connections. The hub to hub connection through these special ports
allows the use of a standard straight-through twisted pair cable. A push button next to
these ports is for the crossover function. When the crossover function is not used, the port
can be used for regular workstation and controller connections.

Figure G-59: 10Mbit Copper with 8 Port Hub

2 2 2 2
Workstation Workstation
A 3Com 8-port B
10 Mbit Office
connect hub

3 1 1 1 3

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on either hub.

2 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and hub but not on the
PC.

Related information
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies

G.5.3 10/100Mbit Network Examples

The following 15 network drawings provide examples of more complex networks that use
10/100Mbit twisted pair and fiber-optic segments. These examples go beyond the simple
10Mbit network and are intended to help you visualize some of the possibilities for control
network expansion and growth. Each example contains a network drawing with callouts
and a table that explains each callout.

370
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

G.5.4 Fiber-Optic and Twisted Pair Network Star

Figure G-60 applies to both primary and secondary networks

Figure G-60: Fiber-Optic and Twisted Pair Network Star with Cisco 3550 Switch

8 7 7
8
6 Cisco 2950C
twisted pair switch
with 2 MTRJ ports
4,6 6
1,3 2
4,6
1,3 Cisco 2950
6 twisted pair switch
7 2
8 6 7
8

Management ProPLUS
station station

7 7 7
6
2

1,3 4,6 Cisco 3550FX

fiber optic switch
Controllers
6
7 7

8 7
5,6
6 8 7
Operator stations
6
1,3 2
1,3 2

6 4,6
7 6 7 4,6
8 8

371
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-61: Fiber-Optic and Twisted Pair Network Using the Single Port Fiber Switch
10

Port 3
Power
Error

Port 1 Port 4

7
Port 2 Port 5 8

10

2 Power
Error
Port 3

Port 1 Port 4

7 Port 2 Port 5

8 7
Management ProPLUS
station station
10
2
9 Port 3
Power
Error

7 7 7 Port 1 Port 4

Port 2 Port 5

6
2
8
1,3 4,6 Cisco 3550FX
fiber optic switch

6
7 7 10

Port 3
Power
Error

5,6 Port 1 Port 4

7
Port 2 Port 5 8
Operator stations

10 10
2
Port 3
Power
Error
Port 3
Power
Port 1 Port 4 Error

7 Port 2 Port 5
Port 1 Port 4

7 Port 2 Port 5

8 7
8 7

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) crossover cable. Cat. 5e Screened Twisted Pair crossover cable
(transmit and receive) is required between switches.

2 2 km (max) full duplex Multimode Fiber with MTRJ Connectors.

3 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

4 The two MTRJ ports on this switch are set by Cisco to 100BASE-FX full duplex
operation. Neither the speed nor duplex can be changed. Ensure that any devices
attached to these ports are properly configured for 100BASE-FX full duplex
operation before making the connection.

372
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

5 All ports have been preconfigured by Emerson Process Management to 100BASE-FX

full duplex operation in order to meet the most typical network configuration
requirements. It is good practice to check each port's duplex setting before
connecting to them since it is possible to configure each of these ports to half
duplex operation. Half duplex operation is not recommended when using switch-to-
switch connections as shown in the preceding figure . A duplex mismatch can cause
serious communications problems.

6 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for both
fiber-optic and twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to Managing Cisco Switches
in Books Online for information. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web
management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management. Use an IP address from the address range allowed for switches for this
PC.

7 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

8 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

9 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the information on the management station in the related topics before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

10 The cable shields connected to the Single Port Fiber Switch must be grounded. To
ground the shields, connect the shield GND to ground or use a twisted pair cable
with both shield ends connected and installed in a grounded port.

Related information
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station
Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses

G.5.5 Twisted Pair Network Star Using Twisted Pair Switches

Figure G-62 applies to both primary and secondary networks.

373
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-62: Twisted Pair Network Star Using Cisco 2950 Twisted Pair Switches

4 4
3 3
5 5
1,2 All Cisco 2950 1,2
twisted pair switches
5 5
1,2

4 3 4 3
1,2

Management
station ProPLUS stations
6 4
1,2 3
3 5
4 3 3
1,2
5
5
1,2
5 5

4 3
4 3 3
1,2

Operator stations 1,2

4 3 4
3 5
5

1,2 1,2

5 5

4 3 4 3

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair crossover cable
(transmit and receive) is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

374
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books
Online for information. Refer to for the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed
for switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web
management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

Related information
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station

G.5.6 Twisted Pair Cascaded Network Using Twisted Pair

Switches
Figure G-63applies to both primary and secondary networks.

375
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-63: Twisted Pair Cascaded Network Using Cisco 2950 Twisted Pair Switches

4
3
All Cisco 2950 5
twisted pair switches

1,2

4
3 5

ProPLUS stations
1,2
4 3 3
5

3
Management 1,2
6
station
5

4 3 3 1,2

Operator stations
5

4 3
1,2

4 3

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair crossover cable
(transmit and receive) is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

376
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to Managing Cisco Switches in Books
Online for information. for the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web
management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

Related information
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station

G.5.7 Twisted Pair Cascaded Networks with Fiber Links

Figure G-64 applies to both primary and secondary networks.

377
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-64: Twisted Pair Cascaded Networks with Fiber Links Using the Cisco 2950C

4
5
All Cisco 2950C 1,2
twisted pair switches
with 2 MTRJ fiber optic ports 3

4
5
1,2

ProPLUS stations 3

4 5 5
1,2

6 3
Management
station
1,2

4 5 5
3

Operator stations 1,2

4 5
3

1,2

4 5

Callout Description

1 The two MTRJ ports on this switch are set by Cisco to 100BASE-FX full duplex
operation. Neither the speed nor duplex can be changed. Ensure that any devices
attached to these ports are properly configured for 100BASE-FX full duplex
operation before making the connection.

2 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for both
fiber-optic and twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco
Switches" in Books Online for information. Refer to the Cisco documentation for
web management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management. Use an IP address from the address range allowed for switches for this
PC .

378
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

3 2Km (max) full duplex Multimode Fiber with MTRJ Connectors.

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

Related information
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station
Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications

G.5.8 100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network

Figure G-65 shows a 100Mbit twisted pair cascaded network with Cisco 3750 switches.

379
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-65: 100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network with Cisco 3750 Switches
Operator stations Operator stations

4 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 4 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS

Catalyst 3750
Catalyst 3750

Switch 1 7 5 8 Switch 4 7 5 8
3 Controllers 3 Controllers

Operator ProPLUS Management

Operator stations
stations station station
6

4 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS

4 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS
Catalyst 3750

Catalyst 3750

Switch 5 7 5 8
Switch 2 7 5 8 3 Controllers
3
Controllers
1,2 1,2

Operator stations Operator stations

4 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 4 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS

Catalyst 3750 Catalyst 3750

Switch 3 7 5 8 Switch 6 7 5 8
3 Controllers 3 Controllers

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

380
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books
Online for information. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management
information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate
duplex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or
duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

8 The switch is equipped with two gigabit slots that require a fiber-optic or twisted
pair small form factor pluggable (SFP) module (not used in the preceding network
drawing ). These slots always operate at 1000Mbit (gigabit) full duplex when fitted
with the SFP module.

Related information
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station

G.5.9 Gigabit Twisted Pair Network Cascade

This network example shows a twisted pair cascaded network with Cisco 3750 switches.
Gigabit twisted pair small form factor pluggable (SFP) modules are used in this network.

381
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-66: Gigabit Twisted Pair Network Cascade with Cisco 3750 Switches

Operator stations Operator stations

4 Cisco Catalyst 4 Cisco Catalyst

Switch 1 3750-24TS Switch 4 3750-24TS 5

Catalyst 3750
Catalyst 3750

7 5 8
3 3 7
Cisco Cisco
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
8 Twisted Pair Twisted Pair
SFP Module SFP Modules

Operator ProPLUS Management

stations station station
6 1,2
1,2 Operator stations

Cisco Catalyst 4 Cisco Catalyst

Switch 2 4 3750-24TS 5 Switch 5 3750-24TS 5
Catalyst 3750

Catalyst 3750

3 7 Cisco Cisco 8
3 7
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
Twisted Pair Twisted Pair
SFP Modules SFP Modules
8

1,2
Operator stations Operator stations
1,2
4 Cisco Catalyst 4 Cisco Catalyst
Switch 3 Switch 6 5
3750-24TS 5 3750-24TS
Catalyst 3750 Catalyst 3750

8
3 7 Cisco 3 7 Cisco
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
Twisted Pair Twisted Pair
8 SFP Modules SFP Module

1,2

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

382
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books
Online for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web
management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate
duplex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or
duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

8 The switch is equipped with two gigabit slots that require a fiber-optic or twisted
pair small form factor pluggable (SFP) module. The twisted pair gigabit module is
shown in the preceding figure. These slots always operate at 1000Mbit (gigabit) full
duplex when fitted with the SFP module.

G.5.10 Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Cascade

Figure G-67 shows a fiber-optic cascaded network with Cisco 3750 switches. Gigabit fiber-
optic small form factor pluggable (SFP) modules are used in this network.

383
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-67: Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Cascade with Cisco 3750 Switches

Operator stations Operator stations

5 Cisco Catalyst 1,7 5 Cisco Catalyst 1.7

Switch 1 3750-24TS Switch 4 3750-24TS
Catalyst 3750
Catalyst 3750

6 Cisco
4 4 6
Gigabit Cisco
Controllers Controllers
Fiber Optic Gigabit
2 SFP Module Fiber Optic
2
Management SFP Modules
Operator ProPLUS station
stations station 8

5 Cisco Catalyst 1,7 5 Cisco Catalyst 1,7

Switch 2 5 3750-24TS Switch 5 3750-24TS
Catalyst 3750

Catalyst 3750

4 6 Cisco Cisco
4 6
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
Fiber Optic Fiber Optic
2 3 SFP Modules 2 3 SFP Modules

Operator stations Operator stations

5 Cisco Catalyst 1,7 5 Cisco Catalyst 1,7

Switch 3 3750-24TS Switch 6 3750-24TS
Catalyst 3750 Catalyst 3750

4 6 Cisco 4 6 Cisco
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
Fiber Optic Fiber Optic
3 SFP Modules 2 3
2 SFP Module

Callout Description

1 The SFP slots can be fitted with any combination of the SX or LH fiber-optic
transceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550 meters of Multimode Fiber
and the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic
splices, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these overall distances. The SFP
slots and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full duplex only.

2 Each SFP transceiver module has a transmit port and a receive port. An LC type
duplex fiber-optic connector is required on the end of the fiber-optic cable pair. The
fiber-optic switch-to-switch connection is a crossover where the transmit on one
end is connected to the receive on the other end.

3 For Multimode Fiber on the SX type module, a 62.5/125 micron or 50/125 micron
fiber can be used. For Single Mode fiber on the LH module, a 9 micron fiber can be
used.

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

384
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

6 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate
duplex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or
duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex

7 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books
Online for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web
management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management.

8 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

Related information
Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station

G.5.11 Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 3750

Switches
Figure G-68 shows a fiber-optic network star with Cisco 3750 switches. Gigabit fiber-optic
small form factor pluggable (SFP) modules are used in this network.

385
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-68: Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 3750 Switches
Central Area of Network Star
Operator ProPLUS Management Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7
stations station station 8 Catalyst 3750

Stacking
cable (rear)
1,7 Switch 5 4 6
5 5 5 Cisco
Catalyst 3750
2 Gigabit
Fiber Optic
Controllers SFP Module
Switch 2 6 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS
Operator
Cisco Catalyst 3750G-12S 9 3
stations
Catalyst 3750

Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7

Switch 1 1,7 Cisco Catalyst 3750

Gigabit
Fiber Optic
2 Switch 6 6 5 4
SFP Modules
Cisco
3 Gigabit
Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7 Fiber Optic
Controllers SFP Modules
2
Catalyst 3750
Operator stations
Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7
Switch 3 5 4 6
Cisco Catalyst 3750

Gigabit
Fiber Optic 3 Switch 7
Controllers 2 5 4 6
Operator stations SFP Module
Cisco
Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7 2 Gigabit
Fiber Optic
Catalyst 3750 Controllers SFP Module
Operator stations

Switch 4 5 4 6 Remote Leg of Star with Additional Switch 3

Daisy-chained
Cisco
Gigabit
2 Fiber Optic
Controllers SFP Module
Operator stations
Typical Remote Leg of Star

Callout Description

1 The SFP slots can be fitted with any combination of the SX or LH fiber-optic
transceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550 meters of Multimode Fiber
and the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic
splices, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these overall distances. The SFP
slots and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full duplex only.

2 Each SFP transceiver module has a transmit port and a receive port. An LC type
duplex fiber-optic connector is required on the end of the fiber-optic cable pair. The
fiber-optic switch-to-switch connection is a crossover where the transmit on one
end is connected to the receive on the other end.

3 For Multimode Fiber on the SX type module, a 62.5/125 micron or 50/125 micron
fiber can be used. For Single Mode fiber on the LH module, a 9 micron fiber can be
used.

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

386
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

6 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate
duplex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or
duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex

7 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books
Online for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web
management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management.

8 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

9 A Cisco stacking cable is included with the switch and can be used to connect two
3750-series switches together to form a single switch that can be managed with one
IP address.

Related information
Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station

G.5.12 100Mb Fiber-Optic Star

Figure G-69 shows a 100Mbit Fiber-Optic Star with Cisco 2950C and 3750 Switches.

387
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-69: 100Mb Fiber-Optic Star with Cisco 2950C and 3750 Switches
Central Area of Network Star
Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24 3 8
Operator ProPLUS Management
stations station station 9
Stacking
cable (rear)
10 Switch 5 5 7
6 6 6

Catalyst 3750
4
Controllers
Switch 2 7 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1 8 Operator
Cisco Catalyst 3750-24FS stations
Catalyst 3750

Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24 3 8

Switch 1 2 1 8

Switch 6 5 7
3 8 6
Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24

4
Controllers
Switch 3 6 5 7 Operator stations
Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24 3 8
4

Controllers
Operator stations
3 8 Switch 7 6 5 7
Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24

Switch 4 Controllers
6 5 7 Operator stations

4 Remote Leg of Star with Additional Switch

Daisy-chained
Controllers
Operator stations
Typical Remote Leg of Star

Callout Description

1 The SFP slots (not used in the preceding image ) can be fitted with any combination
of the SX or LH fiber-optic transceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550
meters of Multimode Fiber and the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of
Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic splices, patch panels, and connector losses reduce
these overall distances. The SFP slots and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit)
full duplex only.

2 All MTRJ fiber-optic ports on this switch have been preconfigured by Emerson to
100BASE-FX full duplex operation in order to meet the most typical network
configuration requirements. It is good practice to check each port's duplex setting
before connecting to them since it is also possible to configure each of these ports
to half duplex operation. Half duplex operation is not recommended for switch-to-
switch connections. Check both ends of the link and ensure that they are both
configured to full duplex operation or a duplex mismatch, which can cause serious
communications problems, could occur.

3 The two MTRJ ports on this switch are set by Cisco to 100BASE-FX full duplex
operation. Neither the speed nor duplex can be changed. Ensure that all devices
attached to these ports are properly configured for 100BASE-FX full duplex
operation before making the connection.

388
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

4 2 km (max) full duplex Mulimode Fiber with MTRJ connectors.

5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

6 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate
duplex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or
duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

8 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online for
information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for switches
on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management
information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

9 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

10 A Cisco stacking cable is included with the switch and can be used to connect two
3750-series switches together to form a single switch that can be managed with one
IP address.

Related information
Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses

G.5.13 100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network

Figure G-70 shows a 100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network with Cisco 2960 switches.

389
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-70: 100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network with Cisco 2960 Switches
Operator station Operator station Operator station

4 4
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TT-L Switch 2960-24TT-L Switch

7 7
3 3

Controllers Controllers
Switch
ProPlus station management station Operator station
5,6
4 4
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
2960-48TT-L Switch 2960-24TT-L Switch

7 7
3 3

1,2 1,2
Controllers Controllers
Operator station
Operator station

4
Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TT-L Switch 4 Cisco Catalyst
2960-8TC-L Switch

7 3
3 7 8

Controllers Controllers

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

390
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books
Online for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web
management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information before connecting the station to the DeltaV
Control Network.

7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate
duplex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or
duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always
allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

8 The Cisco 2960-8TC-L is equipped with one gigabit port either as a RJ45 or a SFP slot.
The SFP slot requires a fiber-optic or twisted pair small form factor pluggable (SFP)
module. This slot operates at 1000Mbit (gigabit) full duplex when fitted with the
gigabit SFP module. If fitted with a 100BASE-FX SFP module (GLC-FE-100FX) it
operates at 100Mbit. This port is not used in this example.

Related information
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station

G.5.14 Gigabit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network

Figure G-71 shows a gigabit twisted pair cascaded network with Cisco 2960 switches.

391
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-71: Gigabit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network with Cisco 2960 Switches
Operator station Operator station Operator station

4 4
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TT-L Switch 2960-24TT-L Switch

7 7
3 3

Controllers Controllers
Switch
ProPlus station management station Operator station

5,6
4 4
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
2960-48TT-L Switch 2960-24TT-L Switch

7 7
3 3

1,2 1,2
Controllers Controllers
Operator station
Operator station

4
Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TT-L Switch 4 Cisco Catalyst
2960-8TC-L Switch

7 3
3 7 8

Controllers Controllers

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

392
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books
Online for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web
management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the information in the related topics before connecting the station to the DeltaV
Control Network. before

7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate
duplex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or
duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always
allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

8 The Cisco 2960-8TC-L is equipped with one gigabit port either as a RJ45 or a SFP slot.
The SFP slot requires a fiber-optic or twisted pair small form factor pluggable (SFP)
module. This slot operates at 1000Mbit (gigabit) full duplex when fitted with the
gigabit SFP module. If fitted with a 100BASE-FX SFP module (GLC-FE-100FX) it
operates at 100Mbit. This port is not used in this example.

Related information
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses

G.5.15 Gigabit Fiber-Optic Cascaded Network

Figure G-72 shows a gigabit fiber-optic cascaded network with Cisco 2960 switches.

393
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-72: Gigabit Fiber-Optic Cascaded Network with Cisco 2960 Switches
Operator station Operator station Operator station

5 5
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
6 6
2960-24TC-L Switch 2960-24TC-L Switch

4 4

Controllers 1,2,9 Controllers 1,2,9

Switch
ProPlus station management station Operator station
7,8
5 5
Cisco Catalyst 6 Cisco Catalyst
6
2960-48TC-L Switch 2960-24TC-L Switch

4 4

1,2,9 1,2,9
Controllers Controllers
2,3 2,3
Operator station
Operator station

5
6 Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TC-L Switch 5 Cisco Catalyst
2960-8TC-L Switch

1,2,10
4 6
4 Cisco
GLC-FE-100FX
SFP Module
1,2,9
Controllers Controllers

Callout Description

1 The SFP slots can be fitted with any combination of the SX or LH fiber-optic
transceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550 meters of Multimode Fiber
and the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic
splices, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these overall distances. The SFP
slots and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full duplex only.

2 Each SFP transceiver has a transmit port and a receive port. An LC type duplex fiber-
optic connector is required on the end of the fiber-optic cable pair. The fiber-optic
switch-to-switch connector is a crossover cable where the transmit on one end is
connected to the receive on the other end.

3 For Multimode Fiber on the SX type module, 62.5/125 micron or 50/125 micron
fiber can be used. For Single Mode fiber on the LH module, a 9/125 micron fiber can
be used.

394
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

6 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate
duplex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or
duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always
allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

7 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books
Online for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web
management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management.

8 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information before connecting the station to the DeltaV
Control Network. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management
information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

9 Optionally, the fiber-optic link can be 100Mbit with a GLC-GE-100FX 100BASE-FX

SFP module in the Cisco 2960-24TC-L and the Cisco 2960-48TC-L switches.

10 Optionally, the fiber-optic link can be 100Mbit with a GLC-FE-100FX 100BASE-FX SFP
module in the Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch.

G.5.16 Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star

Figure G-73 shows a gigabit fiber-optic network star with Cisco 2960 and 3750 switches.

395
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-73: Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 2960 Switches
Operator station Operator station

Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst

5 5
2960-48TC-L Switch 2960-48TC-L Switch

1,2,9
Controllers 6 Controllers 6
4 4

1,2,9

ProPLUS Application Switch Mgt.

station station station
7,8
CENTER AREA
OF THE STAR
5
Cisco
Catalyst
3750-24TS
Switch
11 Cisco
Catalyst
3750G-12S
Switch

1,2,9,10 1,2,9,10

Operator station
Operator station
2,3
5 Cisco Catalyst
2960-48TC-L Switch Cisco Catalyst
5 2960-8TC-L Switch

4
1,2,9

Controllers Controllers Cisco

6 6
4 GLC-FE-100FX
SFP Module
1,2,10

Callout Description

1 The SFP slots can be fitted with any combination of the SX or LH fiber-optic
transceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550 meters of Multimode Fiber
and the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic
splices, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these overall distances. The SFP
slots and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full duplex only.

2 Each SFP transceiver has a transmit port and a receive port. An LC type duplex fiber-
optic connector is required on the end of the fiber-optic cable pair. The fiber-optic
switch-to-switch connector is a crossover cable where the transmit on one end is
connected to the receive on the other end.

3 For Multimode Fiber on the SX type module, 62.5/125 micron or 50/125 micron
fiber can be used. For Single Mode fiber on the LH module, a 9/125 micron fiber can
be used.

396
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

6 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate
duplex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or
duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always
allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

7 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books
Online for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web
management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management.

8 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information before connecting the station to the DeltaV
Control Network. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management
information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

9 Optionally, the fiber-optic link can be 100Mbit with a GLC-GE-100FX 100BASE-FX

SFP module in the Cisco 3750G-12S and the Cisco 2960-24TC-L switches.

10 Optionally, the fiber-optic link can be 100Mbit with a GLC-GE-100FX 100BASE-FX

SFP module in the Cisco 3750G-12S switch and a GLC-FE-100FX SFP module in the
Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch.

11 A Cisco stacking cable is included with the switch and can be used to connect two
3750-series switches together to form a single switch that can be managed with one
IP address.

Related information
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station

G.5.17 100Mbit Fiber-Optic Network Star

Figure G-74 shows a 100Mbit fiber-optic network star with Cisco 2960 and 2950 switches.

397
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-74: 100Mbit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 2950 and 2960 Switches

Operator station

Cisco Catalyst
2
2950C Switch

1
3

Switch
Controllers
ProPLUS Application Management
station station station
4,5

2 Cisco Catalyst
2960-48TC-L Switch 100BASE FX
Fiber

2 Cisco
Operator station GLC-GE-100FX
SFP Modules

2 Cisco Catalyst
2950C Switch
100BASE FX
Fiber
NOTE:
7 Only the GLC-GE-100 FX
1 100BASE FX SFP module can be
used in the Cisco 2960-48TC-L switch.

Controllers

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

2 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on either switch and not on the PC.

3 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate
duplex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or
duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

398
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

4 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books
Online for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web
management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management.

5 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for inforamtion before connecting the station to the DeltaV
Control Network. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management. A
dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

6 For a 100Mbit fiber-optic link, use only a GLC-GE-100FX 100BASE-FX SFP module in
the Cisco 2960-48TC-L switch.

7 The 100BASE-FX fiber-optic link has duplex LC connectors at the GLC-GE-100FX SFP
and RTMJ connectors at the Cisco 2950C switch.

Related information
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station

G.5.18 100Mbit Multimode Fiber-Optic Network

Figure G-75 shows a 100Mbit multimode fiber-optic network with Cisco 2950 and 2960
switches.

399
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-75: 100Mbit Multimode Fiber-Optic Network with Cisco 2950 and 2960
Switches
Operator station Operator station

2
2 Cisco Catalyst
3
Cisco Catalyst 3 2960-8TC-L Switch
2960-24TC-L Switch

1
Cisco
6 GLC-FE-100FX
Cisco SFP Module
GLC-GE-100FX
1 SFP Module 7
Controllers
Controllers
NOTE:
NOTE: Only the GLC-FE-100 FX
Only the GLC-GE-100 FX 8 100BASE FX SFP module can be
100BASE FX SFP module can be used in the Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch.
used in the Cisco 2960-24TC-L switch.

Switch
Operator ProPlus management
station station station
100BASE FX
4,5 Fiber

2
Cisco Catalyst
3 2950C Switch

Controllers

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

2 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on either switch and not on the PC.

3 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate
duplex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or
duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always
allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

400
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

4 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books
Online for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web
management information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch
management.

5 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information before connecting the station to the DeltaV
Control Network. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management. A
dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

6 For a 100Mbit fiber-optic link, use only a GLC-GE-100FX 100BASE-FX SFP module in
the Cisco 2960-24TC-L switch.

7 For a 100Mbit fiber-optic link, use only a GLC-FE-100FX 100BASE-FX SFP module in
the Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch.

8 The 100BASE-FX fiber-optic link has duplex LC connectors on all SFP modules and
MTRJ connectors on the Cisco 2950C switch.

Related information
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station

G.6 Example Networks with DeltaV Smart Switches

The following set of network drawings provide examples of more complex networks that
use DeltaV Smart Switches in 10/100Mbit twisted pair and fiber-optic segments. These
examples are intended to help you visualize some of the possibilities for control network
expansion and growth. Each example contains a network drawing with callouts and a table
that explains each callout.

G.6.1 DeltaV Smart Switches in a Twisted Pair Network with a

Twisted Pair Uplink
Figure G-76 shows DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches in a twisted pair network with
a twisted pair uplink.

401
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-76: DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Switches in Twisted Pair Network with Twisted
Pair Uplink
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers

4,12

To additional 3,12
To additional
RM100 switch RM100 switch

1,2,9
1,2,9

RM100 RM100
Primary Secondary

7 8 7 8

1,2,12 To additional 1,2,12 To additional

FP20 switch FP20 switch

3,12

11
FP20-6TX2TX
10 11 10
Primary Secondary

Shield To additional Shield

Ground 8,6 Ground 8,6
1,2,12 FP20 switch
5 5
To additional
FP20 switch
1,2,12

DeltaV
3,12 Redundant 3,12
Controllers
with Redundant
Network

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this
cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build

this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and
an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

402
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet
shielded connectors.

6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the switch part number. In
this example, all FP20 switches have 8 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair ports and any
number of them can be used for uplinks to other switches. Other uplink port types
are available in fixed hardware configurations. SFP ports are not available on this
switch and this switch has no gigabit capable ports.

7 This switch has two fixed 10/100/1000Mbit/sec uplink ports and two SFP uplink
ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for long
distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a time in any
combination of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information for the
available SFP transceivers.

8 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed, auto-negotiate duplex,
and auto-detect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) by a software
command from the DeltaV station after all initial connections are made to the
switch. If additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused
ports after the initial lock down, an additional software command from the DeltaV
station is required to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock
down command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining
unused ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can
communicate on its original port.

9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use any
of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide ample
performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100Mbit/sec links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.

10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for
occasional out-of-band switch setup and management.

11 This connector is used for a +24VDC power supply input and relay contacts.

12 This is a 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair link.

Related information
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules

G.6.2 DeltaV Smart Switches in Twisted Pair Network with SFP

and Fiber-Optic Uplinks
Figure G-77shows DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches in a twisted pair network with
SFP and fiber-optic uplinks.

403
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-77: DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Twisted Pair Network with SFP and Fiber-Optic
Uplinks
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers

4,13

To additional
RM100 switch 3,13

9,12 9,12 To additional

RM100 switch
RM100 Network Switch RM100 1.1
2.1
RM100 Base Module
2.3 2.5 2.7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5 7
RM100-EM-8TX Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7 RM100
Primary Secondary
FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK
P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
1.2

8 7 8
7

1,2,13 14 1,2,13 14
To additional To additional
FP20 switch FP20 switch

6 6 3,13

11
FP20 FP20
11
10 10
Primary Secondary
To additional To additional
FP20 switch FP20 switch

8 Shield 5 8
Shield 5
Ground Ground

DeltaV
3,13
Redundant 3,13
Controllers
with Redundant
Network

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this
cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build

this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and
an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet
shielded connectors.

404
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the switch part number. In
this example, all FP20 switches have two 100Mbit/sec full duplex multimode fiber-
optic uplink ports. Other uplink port types are available in fixed hardware
configurations. SFP ports are not available on this switch and this switch has no
gigabit capable ports.

7 This switch has two fixed 10/100/1000Mbit/sec uplink ports and two SFP uplink
ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for long
distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a time in any
combination of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information for the
available SFP transceivers.

8 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed, auto-negotiate duplex,
and auto-detect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) by a software
command from the DeltaV station after all initial connections are made to the
switch. If additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused
ports after the initial lock down, an additional software command from the DeltaV
station is required to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock
down command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining
unused ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can
communicate on its original port.

9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use any
of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide ample
performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100Mbit/sec links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.

10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for
occasional out-of-band switch setup and management.

11 This connector is used for a +24VDC power supply input and relay contacts.

12 In this example, an SFP transceiver is used for the connection to the next switch. The
SFP module type must be matched to the type of fiber-optic cable that is installed.
Single mode and multimode fiber-optic cable in various core/cladding diameters
which contribute to the overall distance limit, can be used with specific SFP
modules.

13 This is a 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair link.

14 This is a 100Mbit/sec full duplex multimode fiber-optic link. Distances up to 5 km

can be achieved depending upon the fiber-optic port option ordered and the
number of intermediate splices and patch panels used.

Related information
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules

405
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

G.6.3 DeltaV Smart Switches with Fiber and Twisted Pair

Uplinks
Figure G-78 shows DeltaV RM100 Smart Switches with single mode fiber-optic uplinks and
FP20 switches with single mode fiber-optic and twisted pair uplinks.

Figure G-78: RM100s with Fiber Uplinks and FP20s with Fiber and Twisted Pair
Uplinks
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus

4,12

Network Switch RM100 1.1

2.1
RM100 Base Module
2.3 2.5 2.7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
RM100 Network Switch RM100 1.1
2.1
RM100 Base Module
2.3 2.5 2.7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
RM100
FAULT
RUN
LOCK
P
USB
V.24

Primary FAULT
RUN
LOCK
P
USB
V.24

Secondary
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
1.2 1.2

7,9 8,12 Primary FP20 7,9 8

6 Secondary FP20 6
Network Switch FAULT

FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

8
LS DA FAULT
Network Switch
P FAULT
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
RUN LOCK

8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK

USB

To additional
V.24

13 13 To additional V.24

FP20 switch
1 2
DA

FP20 switch
2

LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2

5 6 LS 3 4

5 6

6
Primary Network Switch FAULT
6
Secondary
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

8
LS DA FAULT
Network Switch
P FAULT
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
RUN LOCK

8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK

To additional
USB
V.24

To additional V.24

FP20 switch
1 2
DA

FP20 switch
2

LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2

5 6 LS 3 4

1,2,12 5 6

6 1,2,12
Primary Network Switch FAULT
6
Secondary
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

8
LS DA FAULT
Network Switch
P FAULT
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
RUN LOCK

8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK

USB

To additional
V.24

To additional V.24

FP20 switch
1 2
DA

FP20 switch
2

LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2

5 6 LS 3 4

5 6

6
Primary Network Switch FAULT
6
Secondary
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

LS DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
8 Network Switch
FP20 +24V(P1)
FAULT

0V 0V +24V(P2)

8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK

USB
V.24

V.24

1 2
DA
2

LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2

5 6 LS 3 4

5 6

11 Ground
Shield
11 Ground
Shield
5
Network Switch FAULT Network Switch FAULT

FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2) FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

LS

1
DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
1,2,12 LS

1
DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK

5
USB USB

V.24
10 V.24 10
1 2 1 2
DA DA

8
2 2

LS 3 4 LS 3 4

5 6 5 6

8 3
1,2,12

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

406
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this
cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build

this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and
an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet
shielded connectors.

6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the switch part number. In
this example, all FP20 switches have one 100Mbit/sec full duplex single mode fiber-
optic uplink ports. Other uplink port types are available in fixed hardware
configurations. SFP ports are not available on this switch and this switch has no
gigabit capable ports.

7 This switch has two fixed 10/100/1000Mbit/sec uplink ports and two SFP uplink
ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for long
distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a time in any
combination of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information for the
available SFP transceivers.

8 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed, auto-negotiate duplex,
and auto-detect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) by a software
command from the DeltaV station after all initial connections are made to the
switch. If additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused
ports after the initial lock down, an additional software command from the DeltaV
station is required to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock
down command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining
unused ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can
communicate on its original port.

9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use any
of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide ample
performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100Mbit/sec links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.

10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for
occasional out-of-band switch setup and management.

11 This connector is used for a +24VDC power supply input and relay contacts.

12 This is a 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair link.

13 This is a 100Mbit/sec full duplex single mode fiber-optic link. Distances up to 40 km

can be achieved depending upon the fiber-optic port option ordered and the
number of intermediate splices and patch panels used.

407
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Related information
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules

G.6.4 RM104 Smart Switch network with fiber-optic and

twisted-pair uplinks
Figure G-79: DeltaV RM104s and RM100s with fiber-optic and twisted-pair uplinks
RM104 RM104

4 4
Pro+
1 3 3 1

4 OP/APP 4
RM100 Workstation RM100

OP/APP
3 Workstation 3
7 7

+24 VDC In
OP/APP +24 VDC In
Optional Workstation Optional
DeltaV DeltaV
Firewall Switch Switch Firewall
IPD IPD
6
1 1

5 5
6 7 6 7 6

5 5

CIOC

DeltaV Redundant Controller

Protected by optional DeltaV Firewall IPD
Up to 8 controllers per firewall.

5 5

DeltaV Redundant Controller

CIOC
Not protected by optional
DeltaV Firewall IPD

408
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Callout Description

1 Fiber-optic cable is supplied by the end user or the installer. The type of fiber-
optic cable that can be used depends on the type of optional fiber-optic
transceivers that are selected at time of sale. The transceivers that are available
are single mode and multimode, and they support various fiber diameters such as
62.5/125 micron, 50/125 micron in multimode, and 9 micron in single mode. Use
information in pre-sales literature to determine cabling distances supported by
the various types of fiber optic transceivers.

2 The ProfessionalPLUS is connected to any RM104 port in this case so that there is
a gigabit link between the ProfessionalPLUS and the switch. Alternately, the
ProfessionalPLUS could be connected to any 100 mb/s port on the RM100
switches, or to one of the two gigabit ports available on the RM100. Initially
selecting a gigabit port for the ProfessionalPLUS connection on any of the Smart
Switches provides the most available bandwidth.

3 This is a 100 meter (maximum) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent

ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45
connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly must be placed on the
switch and not on the PC. Refer to Building twisted pair cable assemblies in the
DeltaV Hardware Installation manual for more information.

4 The RM104 and RM100 Smart Switches contain these combination ports. When
there is a fiber-optic SFP slot next to a twisted-pair slot as highlighted for this
note, one or the other in that pair can be used simultaneously, but not both. For
the RM104, there are 4 combination ports, up to 4 ports in this grouping can be
used, but never two directly adjacent ports. For the RM100, there are 2
combination ports, up to 2 ports in this grouping can be used, but never two
directly adjacent ports.

5 This is a 100 m (maximum) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the

CIOC and Controller's RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the CIOC
or Controller; not to the CIOC or Controller's DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45
connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made at the switch to
which the CIOC or Controller is connected. Build this cable assembly with a
shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends. Refer to Building twisted
pair cable assemblies in the DeltaV Hardware Installation manual for more
information.

6 Ground screw must be attached to a suitable ground for the shielding.

7 This is a 100 meter (maximum) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent

ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45
connector on the end that goes to the Smart Switch, and the plastic-enclosed
RJ45 connector on the end that goes to the firewall IPD.

8 This example shows that when Controllers and CIOCs are directly connected to
the same switch as the workstations, they are not protected by a firewall IPD. The
firewall IPD is an option that allows additional security; however, it is not required
for normal DeltaV operation.

G.6.5 DeltaV Smart Switches in a Twisted Pair Network

The following two images show DeltaV RM100, FP20, and MD30 Smart Switches in a
twisted pair network. There can be no more than six switches in series between any two
devices in any path in this type of network.

409
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-80: DeltaV Smart Switches in a Twisted Pair Network, Example 1

DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers

4,12

To additional 3,12
To additional
RM100 switch RM100 switch

1,2,9
1,2,9

RM100 RM100
Primary Secondary

8 8
7 7
10,11 Primary 10,11 Secondary
MD30 Switch MD30 Switch
1,2,6,8 1,2,6,8

8 8
5 5
Shield Shield
Ground Ground

DeltaV
3,12 Redundant 3,12
Controllers
with Redundant
Network

The following figure shows a maximum of four switches in series between two devices

410
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-81: DeltaV Smart Switches in a Twisted Pair Network, Example 2

DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers

4,12

To additional 3,12
To additional
RM100 switch RM100 switch

1,2,9
1,2,9

RM100 RM100
Primary Secondary

7 8 7 8
FP20 FP20
Switch Switch

1,2 1,2,6,8 1,2

1,2,6,8

10,11 Primary 10,11 Secondary

MD30 Switch MD30 Switch

8 8
5 5
Shield Shield
Ground Ground

DeltaV
3,12 Redundant 3,12
1,2 Controllers 1,2
with Redundant
Network

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this
cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build

this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and
an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

411
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Callout Description

5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet
shielded connectors.

6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the optional modules
chosen. In this example, all MD30 switches have a gigabit module installed on the
left side of the switch that used for the uplink to the RM100 switch. This module
contains two, 10/100/1000 twisted pair ports and two gigabit SFP slots for various
types of optional SFP transceivers. Only two ports on this module can be used
simultaneously in any mix. The SFP transceivers are available in singlemode and
multimode fiber-optic versions. Each of the remaining six port modules on the right
side of the switch have four 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair ports for a total of 24 ports
and any combination of ports can be used for 10/100Mbit/sec uplinks to other
switches or for edge devices such as workstations and controllers.Other modules
are available in 100Mbit/sec only communications in single and multimode fiber-
optic versions.

7 The type of uplink ports on this switch consists of two fixed 10/100/1000Mbit/sec
ports and two SFP ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP
transceivers for long distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a
time in any combination of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information
for the available SFP transceivers.

8 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed, auto-negotiate duplex,
and auto-detect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) by a software
command from the DeltaV station after all initial connections are made to the
switch. If additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused
ports after the initial lock down, an additional software command from the DeltaV
station is required to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock
down command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining
unused ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can
communicate on its original port.

9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use any
of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide ample
performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100Mbit/sec links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.

10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for
occasional out-of-band switch setup and management.

11 The power connector (not shown) is used for a +24VDC power supply input and
relay contacts.

12 This is a 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair link.

Related information
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies

412
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

G.7 DeltaV Controller Firewall

The DeltaV Controller Firewall is designed to protect DeltaV controllers from Denial of
Service (DoS) attacks originating from DeltaV workstations or other computers on the
DeltaV Control Network.
Important
The DeltaV system requires a specific hardware and software version of the firewall IPD
and a special configuration that includes the packet inspection rules and packet rate limits
that have been tested with the DeltaV system. Firewall IPDs ordered from Emerson
Automation Solutions are shipped with the supported software and are pre-configured to
operate properly with the DeltaV system. To ensure that you have the proper firewall IPD
configuration and the correct hardware and software versions, you must purchase the
firewall IPD through normal Emerson channels.

A detachable screw terminal block is used to supply the required 24 VDC system power to
the firewall IPD. The firewall IPD is installed close to the controllers on the DIN rail and can
use the same system power supply as the controllers. To more tightly control physical
access to the firewall IPD, it can be installed on a DIN rail with a 24 VDC power supply in the
equipment room. A set of normally closed, potential-free relay contacts, also supplied on
the detachable terminal block, monitor proper device functioning.
The ground screw connects to an instrumentation ground to provide a shield ground for
the controller and firewall IPD communications cables.
The 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet port labeled Workstations is for DeltaV workstations only.
Typically, the workstations are connected to a managed switch such as the DeltaV RM100
Smart Switch, and the switch is connected to the workstation port of the firewall IPD. The
10/100 BASE-T Ethernet port labeled Controllers is for DeltaV controllers only. Typically,
the controllers are connected to a managed switch such as the DeltaV RM100 Smart
Switch, and the switch is connected to the controller port of the firewall IPD. For
controllers that are distributed over wider geographic areas, consider using one firewall
IPD for each controller. This is a more secure arrangement because it eliminates the
possibility of open switch ports on the controller side.
Table G-26: DeltaV Firewall IPD specifications
Item Specification
Input voltage 24 VDC nominal (12-48 VDC)
Input current TX/TX
• 410 mA at 12 VDC
• 110 mA at 48 VDC
TX/FX
• 450 mA at 12 VDC
• 120 mA at 48 VDC

Twisted-pair ports: controller (protected) and 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet; 100 meters maximum
workstation (unprotected) Category 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP)
Fiber-optic ports: controller (protected) and 100 BASE-FX
workstation unprotected

413
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table G-26: DeltaV Firewall IPD specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Link budget • Multimode 50/125 µm - max attenuation 8
dB
• Multimode 62.5/125 µm - max attenuation
11 dB
• Wavelength 1300 nM

• Single mode 9/125 µm - max attenuation

16dB
• Wavelength 1300 nM

Alarm contacts Normally closed. Configurable to opened if:

• Redundant power supply fails
• Cables on either or both ports are
disconnected

Controllers supported Eight (8)

If more than 8 controllers require protection,
add more firewall IPDs in parallel to share the
communications load.
Workstations supported All combinations of workstations up to normal
DeltaV limits for workstations. Refer to the
System Capacities table in DeltaV Books Online
for complete information on workstation limits
Dimensions Height: 13 cm (5.12 inches)
Width: 4.52 cm (1.78 inches)
Depth: 12.06 cm (4.75 inches)
Mounting DIN rail. The firewall IPD can be mounted on the
same DIN rail as the controller.

414
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-82: Firewall IPD with one twisted-pair port and one fiber-optic port
Power/relay
connectors

Bypass
pushbutton
Status LEDs

Twisted-pair
controller port
USB port

Fiber-optic
Bypass workstation port
contacts

Power/relay
connection
wiring diagram

Serial port

Ground screw
for RJ45 shield

Figure G-83: Firewall IPD with two twisted-pair ports

Power/relay
connectors

Bypass
pushbutton
Status LEDs

Twisted-pair
controller port
USB port

Twisted-pair
Bypass workstation port
contacts

Power/relay
connection
wiring diagram

Serial port

Ground screw
for RJ45 shield

The firewall IPD must be installed on the Primary and Secondary Control Networks to
provide protection on both access ports of the controllers. Among the things to consider
when determining the best location in which to install the firewall IPD are:

415
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

• Power and grounding requirements

• Cable shielding requirements
• Securing access to the firewall IPD
Note
Do not connect a workstation to the controller side of the firewall IPD and do not connect
a controller to the workstation side of the firewall IPD. Incorrect connections will
completely bypass firewall IPD protection for controllers.

Refer to DeltaV Firewall IPD Network Examples for examples of how to use the firewall IPD
in a Control Network.
The firewall IPD can be managed from a Management station. Refer to the Managing the
DeltaV Firewall IPD topic in DeltaV Books Online.

Related information
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station

G.7.1 DeltaV Firewall IPD Network Examples

The following four network drawings show examples of how the DeltaV Firewall IPD can be
used in Control Networks. In all figures, Firewall refers to the firewall IPD. The examples
begin with simple networks and end with more complex networks.

DeltaV Firewall IPD with Single Controllers and Switches

The following figure shows DeltaV Firewall IPDs in a network with single controllers and
three-port switches.

416
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-84: DeltaV Firewall IPDs with Single Controllers and Switches
Building A Building B

Protected side Protected side

1 Switch P
LSDA
1 2 V24
Default
Fault
Status
P
LSDA
1 2 V24
Default
Fault
Status P
LSDA
1 2 V24
Default
Fault
Status
P
LSDA
1 2 V24
Default
Fault
Status

Controllers Controllers
Controllers Controllers

Workstations Workstations
Workstations Workstations

IP Address IP Address
IP Address IP Address

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
OV

OV

OV

OV
V.24

Firewall Switch V.24

Firewall Switch V.24

Firewall Switch V.24

Firewall
5
6
2

3 Rack room
Primary switch Secondary switch

Operator stations ProPLUS station

3
P1
LSDA
1

Controllers
2

2 V24
Default
Fault
Status Switch Switch P1
LSDA
1

Controllers
2

2 V24
Fault

Default
Status

Workstations
Workstations
IP Address

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
IP Address

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
Firewall Firewall
Protected
side

Building C

The information in the following table applies to both the primary and secondary
connections between all components.

1 100 m (max) straight-through Category 5e Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable. The
shield on the controller's RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the
controller; not to the controller's DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are
floating and the single point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller
is connected. Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45
connector on both ends.

2 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the mini-switch and not on the
firewall IPD port.

3 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on
the firewall IPD port.

4 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on
the workstation.

417
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

5 On the mini-switch, attach a separate ground wire to the terminal block screw that
is labeled with the ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable
instrumentation ground.

6 On the firewall IPD, attach a separate ground wire to the front panel screw that is
labeled with the ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumentation
ground.

DeltaV Controller Firewall with Single Controllers and the

Single Port Fiber Switch
Figure G-85: DeltaV Controller Firewall with Single Controllers and the Single Port
Fiber Switch
Building A Building B

Protected side Protected side

1
Port 3 P Fault
Fault
LSDA Status P
Power LSDA Status
P Fault Error 1 2 V24 Port 3
Default 1 2 V24
Port 3 LSDA Status Power Default
1 2 V24 Fault Error
Power Default P
Error Port 1 Port 4 Controllers
LSDA Status
1 2 V24 Controllers
Port 3 Default
Controllers Port 1 Port 4
Port 1 Port 4 Power
Error
Controllers
Port 2 Port 5

Workstations
Port 1 Port 4 Port 2 Port 5
Port 2 Port 5 Workstations
Workstations IP Address
IP Address
+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
IP Address Workstations
Port 2 Port 5
+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

OV

OV
IP Address
OV

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
V.24
V.24

Switch Firewall Firewall

OV
V.24

V.24

Firewall Firewall

6
2
3
Primary switch Rack room 4 Secondary switch

3 Operator stations ProPLUS station

P1 2 Fault
2 Fault LSDA Status
P1 1 2 V24
LSDA Status Port 3 Default
1 2 V24 Power
Default Port 3 Error
Power Controllers
Error
Controllers
Port 1 Port 4
Port 1 Port 4

Port 2 Port 5 Workstations

Workstations
Port 2 Port 5 IP Address
+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
IP Address
+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

Firewall Firewall
Protected side

Building C

The information in the following table applies to both the primary and secondary
connections between all components.

1 100 m (max) straight-through Category 5e Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable. The
shield on the controller's RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the
controller; not to the controller's DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are
floating and the single point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller
is connected. Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45
connector on both ends.

418
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

2 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the mini-switch and not on the
firewall port.

3 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on
the firewall port.

4 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on
the workstation.

5 On the mini-switch, attach a separate ground wire to the terminal block screw that
is labeled with the ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable
instrumentation ground.

6 On the firewall, attach a separate ground wire to the front panel screw that is
labeled with the ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumentation
ground.

DeltaV Firewall IPD with Multiple Controllers

A firewall IPD supports a maximum of eight controllers.

419
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure G-86: Firewall IPD with Eight Controllers

1 01 05

02 06

03 07

04 08
2

Firewall P1
LSDA
1
2

2 V24
Default
Fault
Status
P1
LSDA
1
2

2 V24
Default
Fault
Status

Controllers Controllers

Workstations Workstations

3 IP Address IP Address

Firewall
+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
Pri MD Sec MD
OV

OV
V.24 V.24

Smart Switch Smart Switch

5
Primary switch Secondary switch
Rack room

Operator stations ProPLUS station

The following figure shows firewall IPDs in a network with more than eight controllers. Add
firewall IPDs to share the communications load if the number of controllers requiring
protection exceeds eight.

420
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure G-87: Firewall IPDs with more than Eight Controllers

01 05 09 13

02 06 10 14

03 07 11 15

04 08 12 16

P1 2 Fault P1 2 Fault P1 2 Fault P1 2 Fault

LSDA Status LSDA Status LSDA Status LSDA Status
1 2 V24 1 2 V24 1 2 V24 1 2 V24
Default Default Default Default

Controllers Controllers Controllers Controllers

Workstations Workstations Workstations Workstations

IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
Firewall Firewall
OV

OV

OV

OV
V.24

Firewall V.24 V.24 V.24

Firewall
Pri MD Sec MD Pri MD Sec MD
Smart Switch Smart Switch Smart Switch Smart Switch

Primary switch Secondary switch

Rack room

Operator stations ProPLUS station

The information in the following table applies to both the primary and secondary
connections between all components.

1 100 m (max) straight-through Category 5e Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable. The
shield on the controller's RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the
controller; not to the controller's DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are
floating and the single point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller
is connected. Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45
connector on both ends.

2 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the mini-switch and not on the
firewall IPD port.

421
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

3 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on
the firewall IPD port.

4 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on
the workstation.

5 Attach a separate ground wire to the front panel screw that is labeled with the
ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumentation ground.

G.8 The Management Station

A Management station is a qualified PC that can be user-installed with web-based
interfaces for DeltaV Smart Switches, management software for the DeltaV Firewall IPD,
and web-based switch management software for Cisco switches. A PC is qualified when it
has been certified for use with the DeltaV system. Any PC connected to the DeltaV Control
Network must follow the same hardware installation rules as DeltaV workstations even if
the PC is not installed with the DeltaV software. For example, the PC must use Category 5e
Screened 4 Twisted-Pair Cable (ScTP) and cable lengths cannot exceed 100 meters (328
feet).
Qualified PCs for use as Management stations can be ordered from Emerson; however,
Emerson does not install the management software. Users must install the management
software on the Management station. Switch management software and firewall IPD
management software are supported only on Management stations, not on DeltaV
workstations.
If a Management station connected to the DeltaV Control Network is also connected to
another network for plant area access outside of the DeltaV system, it is imperative that
the Management station is properly maintained with the latest Microsoft security patches
and virus software. This ensures that the Management station does not become infected
with viruses that could affect the operation of the DeltaV control system equipment. Like
other DeltaV stations, the Management station’s outside network connection, which is
usually a third NIC card in the PC, must be isolated via a router to other local area networks
and a firewall to the wide area network or internet. If you do not have the resources or
expertise to connect to the outside world using a properly configured router and firewall,
then do not attach the Management station to both the DeltaV Control Network and other
networks outside the DeltaV control system. This way, the Management station will have
the same protection as the ProfessionalPLUS and Operator Stations.
A TFTP server application can be installed on the Management station. A TFTP server can
be used to flash Ethernet switches or archive Ethernet switch configurations. Do not
confuse a Management station with a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
station that contains additional network management software. The Management station
is a basic PC with a web browser that can access the switch or firewall using its IP address
and is capable of displaying graphics, switch network statistics, bar and line graphs, and
firewall logs.

422
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

To manage switches and the firewall using traditional management software from third
parties, you must install Java software on the Management station. DeltaV workstations,
including the Management station, that are connected to a DeltaV Control Network
should never make connections to the Internet. To install Java on a Management station,
you must download Java from the Internet to a USB flash drive or other media on a
computer that is not connected to the DeltaV Control Network and then install Java from
the USB flash drive to the Management station. Refer to “Downloading Java Software for
use on a Management Station” in DeltaV Books Online for information on how to
download Java from the Internet to a USB flash drive.
Refer to KBA NK-1600-0290 for information about managing the firewall IPD using
HiView.
Emerson cannot be responsible for the operation of a DeltaV system if these requirements
for a Management station are not strictly followed.

G.8.1 Connecting the Management Station

Connect the Management station to the Primary and Secondary Control Networks with
shielded twisted pair cable as shown in the figures in this chapter. This enables the
Management station to access any switch or DeltaV Firewall IPD on the network and
creates one central location for switch and/or firewall management.
Qualified Ethernet cables that are described in all DeltaV network figures in this section
must be used to connect a Management station to the DeltaV Control Network. When
considering cable shielding, treat the Management station like a DeltaV device.
Additionally for switches, the Management station can be connected to the switch
through the “Comm Port” of the Management station and the “Console Port” of the
switch. The Console Port of the switch is a low-speed serial connection. This port is used to
set up the switch for Telnet and web management and to give the switch an IP address,
name, and password protection. However, the Network Device Management Center
(NDCC) can also perform these functions when the switch is connected to one of the
supported networks.
When not using NDCC switch management from the DeltaV console, the switch needs an
IP address to be managed from anywhere on the network using the Management station’s
web browser or Telnet. Optionally, the serial connection can be kept intact and the link
can be used to observe network statistics, configure ports, and save switch data to the
Management station. The disadvantage of serial port management is that the
Management station must be physically moved from switch to switch to make the
physical connections to each switch’s Console port.

G.9 Managing Switches and the DeltaV Firewall IPD

DeltaV Smart Switches, Cisco switches, and the DeltaV Firewall IPD can be managed from
the Management station to monitor general network health or for troubleshooting
purposes.
Refer to DeltaV Books Online for information on:
• Using Telnet and Web-based switch management for DeltaV Smart Switches
• Command line, Telnet, and Web-based switch management for Cisco switches

423
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

• Configuring Cisco switches for use with the DeltaV system

• Managing the firewall IPD

Related information
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station

G.10 Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses

The DeltaV system automatically assigns IP addresses to the DeltaV nodes. In addition,
there are reserved IP addresses that can be used on the DeltaV system for optional
equipment. The first table shows the IP addresses that are reserved for external Network
Time Protocol Servers. The second table shows the IP addresses that are reserved for
switches and the DeltaV Firewall IPD. You can copy and keep these tables for your records.
Be sure to read the important information following the second table.
Note
If the Network Time Protocol Server is a DeltaV workstation, it is automatically assigned an
IP address.

Table G-27: Reserved IP Addresses for the Network Time Protocol Server
Primary Network Ethernet Secondary Network Ethernet
Reservations Reservations
Server Address Server Address
Primary NTP 10.4.128.1 Primary NTP 10.8.128.1
server server
Backup NTP 10.4.128.2 Backup NTP 10.8.128.2
server server

Table G-28: Reserved IP Addresses for Switches and the DeltaV Firewall IPD
Checklist Primary Ethernet Reservation Secondary Ethernet
Reservation
Pri. Sec. IP Address Device name IP Address Device name
10.4.128.16 10.8.128.16
10.4.128.17 10.8.128.17
10.4.128.18 10.8.128.18
10.4.128.19 10.8.128.19
10.4.128.20 10.8.128.20
10.4.128.21 10.8.128.21
10.4.128.22 10.8.128.22
10.4.128.23 10.8.128.23
10.4.128.24 10.8.128.24
10.4.128.25 10.8.128.25

424
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

Table G-28: Reserved IP Addresses for Switches and the DeltaV Firewall IPD
(continued)

Checklist Primary Ethernet Reservation Secondary Ethernet

Reservation
Pri. Sec. IP Address Device name IP Address Device name
10.4.128.26 10.8.128.26
10.4.128.27 10.8.128.27
10.4.128.28 10.8.128.28
10.4.128.29 10.8.128.29
10.4.128.30 10.8.128.30
10.4.128.31 10.8.128.31
10.4.128.32 10.8.128.32
10.4.128.33 10.8.128.33
10.4.128.34 10.8.128.34
10.4.128.35 10.8.128.35
10.4.128.36 10.8.128.36
10.4.128.37 10.8.128.37
10.4.128.38 10.8.128.38
10.4.128.39 10.8.128.39
10.4.128.40 10.8.128.40
10.4.128.41 10.8.128.41
10.4.128.42 10.8.128.42
10.4.128.43 10.8.128.43
10.4.128.44 10.8.128.44
10.4.128.45 10.8.128.45
10.4.128.46 10.8.128.46
10.4.128.47 10.8.128.47
10.5.128.16 10.9.128.16
10.5.128.17 10.9.128.17
10.5.128.18 10.9.128.18
10.5.128.19 10.9.128.19
10.5.128.20 10.9.128.20
10.5.128.21 10.9.128.21
10.5.128.22 10.9.128.22
10.5.128.23 10.9.128.23
10.5.128.24 10.9.128.24

425
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

Table G-28: Reserved IP Addresses for Switches and the DeltaV Firewall IPD
(continued)

Checklist Primary Ethernet Reservation Secondary Ethernet

Reservation
Pri. Sec. IP Address Device name IP Address Device name
10.5.128.25 10.9.128.25
10.5.128.26 10.9.128.26
10.5.128.27 10.9.128.27
10.5.128.28 10.9.128.28
10.5.128.29 10.9.128.29
10.5.128.30 10.9.128.30
10.5.128.31 10.9.128.31
10.5.128.32 10.9.128.32
10.5.128.33 10.9.128.33
10.5.128.34 10.9.128.34
10.5.128.35 10.9.128.35
10.5.128.36 10.9.128.36
10.5.128.37 10.9.128.37
10.5.128.38 10.9.128.38
10.5.128.39 10.9.128.39
10.5.128.40 10.9.128.40
10.5.128.41 10.9.128.41
10.5.128.42 10.9.128.42
10.5.128.43 10.9.128.43
10.5.128.44 10.9.128.44
10.5.128.45 10.9.128.45
10.5.128.46 10.9.128.46
10.5.128.47 10.9.128.47

Emerson recommends that 10.4.128.17 and 10.8.128.17 be assigned to a TFTP server

and/or an Ethernet Management station. (A TFTP server and an Ethernet Management
station can be created on the same device.) A TFTP server can be used to flash Ethernet
switches or archive Ethernet switch configurations. Refer to “Managing Cisco Switches” in
Books Online for more information. It is recommended that the remaining addresses in
this block be assigned to the managed Ethernet switches.

426
 Control Network Specifications
D800001X312 April 2021

G.11 DeltaV Zones

DeltaV Zones is a combination of hardware and software for connecting separate DeltaV
systems or Zones. An Inter-Zone Server (IZS) must be installed in each DeltaV system to
implement zones. The Inter-Zone Servers are connected by an Inter-Zone Control Network
(IZCN). The only function of the Inter-Zone Servers and the Inter-Zone Control Network is
to communicate inter-zone operating data between systems. Refer to DeltaV Books
Online for complete information on implementing zones, zone-to-zone data
communication, and security considerations.
The following figure shows a simple Inter-Zone Control Network in which two DeltaV
systems are connected. It shows how the Inter-Zone Servers connect to the DeltaV
network and to each other.

Figure G-88: Simple Inter-Zone Control Network

1

Zone A
Operator
Inter-Zone ProPLUS Station A
Server A Station A

Inter-Zone
Control
Network

1
Primary 1
1

Secondary 1 1
Primary 1

1 Controller A
Secondary

1 Zone B
Inter-Zone ProPLUS
Server B Station B Operator
Station B
2

Primary
1
1 1
1
Controller B
Secondary

2 2

1 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an
isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

427
Control Network Specifications
April 2021 D800001X312

2 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller’s RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller’s DC
ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground
is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

G.12 1420 Wireless Gateway

The 1420 Wireless Gateway integrates signals from HART wireless devices into the DeltaV
system. Refer to the documentation that ships with the 1420 Wireless Gateway for
specifications and information on how to properly mount the Gateway and connect it to
the DeltaV system.

428
 DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
D800001X312 April 2021

H DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

Bulk power supplies supply power to the system or to field devices. Power to the system is
isolated from power to field devices. The following figure shows one method of providing
system power and bussed field power with Legacy Bulk Power Supplies.

Figure H-1: System Power and Bussed Field Power Example with Legacy Bulk Power
Supplies

You can use DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies, DeltaV Bulk Power Supplies, or third-party
bulk power supplies. There are three types of DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies:
• Legacy Bulk AC to 24 VDC Power Supply (Panel and DIN-rail mounted) – Accepts
120/230 VAC power and supplies 24 VDC power to field devices and System Power
Supplies (Dual DC/DC).
• Legacy Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power Supply (Panel and DIN-rail mounted) – Accepts
120/230 VAC power and supplies 12 VDC power to System Power Supplies (DC/DC)
and System Power Supplies (Dual DC/DC).
• Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC Power Supply – Accepts 24 VDC power and supplies 12
VDC power to System Power Supplies (DC/DC). This power supply is no longer available
from Emerson Process Management.
Note
Refer to the DeltaV™ S-series and CHARMs Hardware Reference manual for information on
the DeltaV Bulk Power supplies.

429
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
April 2021 D800001X312

Related information
System Power Guidelines

H.1 Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC

and Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power Supplies
Specifications
Table H-1: Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 and AC to 12 VDC Power Supply
Specifications
Item Specification
AC input Current 120/230 VAC nominal, 90 VAC to 264 VAC
range, 47 Hz to 63 Hz; single-phase
• 3.6 A for 12 VDC
• 4.5 A for 24 VDC

Output power rating 60°C • 24.6 VDC at 12.0 A

• 12.3 VDC at 12.0 A

Output power rating 70°C • 24.6 VDC at 9.0 A

• 12.3 VDC at 9.0 A

Inrush current 40/25 A maximum (hot/cold start)

Hold-up time 20 ms (from 90 to 264 VAC input)
Ripple and Noise 1% PK to PK max (Bandwidth 20 MHz)
Output overvoltage protection 110% - 120%
Power factor 0.98 at full rated load
Input protection Internally fused, non-replaceable fuses.
Note
The internal fuse is for an internal fault condition
only. Shorts and overload will not cause the fuse
to fail.

Alarm relay contact rating 30 VDC at 2.0 A, 250 VAC at 2.0 A

Redundancy output isolation diode Integrated in unit Isolation diode not required
Dimensions on horizontal DIN rail • Height (max): 13.5 cm (5.3 in.)
• Width (max): 24.0 cm (9.5 in.)
• Depth (max): 10.6 cm (4.2 in.)

430
 DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
D800001X312 April 2021

Connections
Table H-2: Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power
Supply Connectors
Connector Description
Input 120/230 VAC
AC+ AC line
AC - AC neutral
Protective Ground
Output 24 VDC
ENA Output Enable (Wire from ENA to ENA RTN is
connected at the factory)
V OUT DC Voltage Output (+)
V OUT DC Voltage Output (+)
RTN DC Voltage Return (-)
RTN DC Voltage Return (-)
SHARE Connection required for redundancy and load-
sharing applications
ENA RTN Output Enable Return (wire from ENA to ENA
RTN is connected at the factory)
Alarm contacts 250 VAC, 30 VDC
RELAY + Relay contacts +
RELAY - Relay contacts -

Images

Figure H-2: Top View Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12
VDC Power Supply
24 cm (9.5 in.)

10.6 cm
(4.2 in.)
ENA RTN
SHARE
V OUT
V OUT
RTN
RTN
ENA
AC+

AC

431
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure H-3: Front View Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12
VDC Power Supply

24 cm (9.5 in.)

AC OK

DC OK

MAGNETEK

13.5 cm 12V 12A

(5.3 in.)

H.2 Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and

Bulk AC to 12 VDC
Specifications
Table H-3: Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC
Item Specification
AC input 120/230 VAC nominal, 90 VAC to 264 VAC
range, 47 Hz to 63 Hz, single-phase
Output rating 24 VDC at 12.5 A 12 VDC at 25 A
DC output power options 300 W at 60°C
Input 5A
Inrush current 100/40 A maximum (hot/cold start )
Hold-up time 20 ms (from 90 to 264 VAC input)
Ripple and Noise 1% PK to PK max (Bandwidth 20 MHz)
Output overvoltage protection 125% (±5%)
Power factor 0.98 at full rated load

432
 DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
D800001X312 April 2021

Table H-3: Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC

(continued)

Item Specification
Fuse protection 15 A, 250 VAC 3AB or equivalent, non-
replaceable fuses.
Note
The internal fuse is for an internal fault condition
only. Shorts and overload will not cause the fuse
to fail.

Dimensions with mounting plate • Height: 12.70 cm (5 in.)

• Width: 39.37 cm (15.5 in.)
• Depth: 6.35 cm (2.5 in.)

Images

Figure H-4: Top View, Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12
VDC Power Supply
39.37 cm (15.5 in.)
1.27 cm 1.90 cm (0.75 in.)
(0.5 in.) 3.17 cm (1.25 in.)

DC Output
bus bar
connections
12.70 cm
Slotted (5.0 in.)
mounting
holes

1.27 cm 1.09 cm (0.43 in.)

(0.5 in.)
Fan Mounting
holes

433
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure H-5: End View, Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12
VDC Power Supply
12.70 cm
1 (5.0 in.)

6.35 cm 2
(2.5 in.)

1. DC Output bus bar connections

2. AC input terminals

H.3 Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC

Specifications
Table H-4: Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC specifications
Item Specification
DC input voltage 24 VDC nominal (30 VDC maximum)
Output rating 12 VDC at 25 A
DC output power options 300 W at 60°C and altitude < 914 m (3000 ft)
Power requirement 20 A
Inrush current 25 A/peak (cold start)
Hold-up time 20 ms after loss of nominal DC input voltage for
specified load regulation
Fuse protection GMA-15, 15 A/125 V, non-replaceable fuses
Note
The internal fuse is for an internal fault condition
only. Shorts and overload will not cause the fuse
to fail.

Dimensions • Height: 12.70 cm (5 in.)

• Depth: 30.50 cm (12 in.)
• Width: 6.35 cm (2.5 in.)

Weight 1.6 kg (3.5 lb)

434
 Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

I Enclosure and Power Dissipation

Guidelines
This section explains how to select an enclosure and provides power dissipation
information.
Note
All enclosures must conform to applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
In addition, when designing enclosures for the European Union you must ensure that the
appropriate EU Directives have been considered as required (for example, 73/23/EEC Low
Voltage Directive and 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility, with amendments)

I.1 Selecting an Enclosure

To choose an enclosure for your DeltaV system, consider the following items:
• System environment
• Wire management
• Heat dissipation
You can choose from a wide variety of suitable enclosures to protect your system from
adverse environmental conditions. The enclosures range from simple sheet metal boxes to
NEMA 4X-rated enclosures. Select the appropriate type for your specific application.
Figure I-1 and Figure I-2 show example arrangements for mounting your DeltaV system in
a horizontal enclosure. Figure I-3 shows an example arrangement for mounting your
DeltaV system in a vertical enclosure. These figures indicate areas available for wire
management. You can access wiring through gland plates or through conduited entries.
The enclosure supplier can help you select the proper arrangement for your application.
The enclosure must be designed to dissipate the heat generated within the enclosure
properly and to maintain an ambient temperature in the enclosure that is below the rated
temperature for any devices located in the enclosure. The information you need to
properly design the enclosure includes:
• Maximum external ambient temperature for the application
• Ambient rating of any equipment mounted in the cabinet
• Power dissipation of each device
The internal temperature of the enclosure cannot exceed the rated temperature for any
devices located in the enclosure.

435
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure I-1: Enclosure Example #1

436
 Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure I-2: Enclosure Example #2

437
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure I-3: Enclosure Example #3

I.2 Power Dissipation Considerations

The power dissipated within the enclosure generates heat. The enclosure supplier uses
power dissipation figures to determine the air flow requirements needed to maintain the

438
 Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

allowable heat rise. As the internal heat rise increases, the allowable external ambient
temperature decreases.
The power dissipation in an enclosure is dependent on the power requirements of the
enclosed equipment, including the:
• Power required to operate devices in the enclosure
• Field power dissipation within the cabinet
• Power dissipated by the power supplies located in the enclosure
The following table lists maximum power dissipation for each DeltaV component. To
determine total power dissipation in an enclosure, sum the power requirements of all
components to be mounted within the enclosure.
Note
The power dissipation for each DC-powered discrete and analog device includes the loss of
a power supply which is 75% efficient. If the power supply is not included in the enclosure
or a supply with a different efficiency is used, adjust the dissipation accordingly.

Product Type Power

Controllers (MD Plus and MX) 14 W
Remote Interface Unit 6.0 W
I/O Subsystem
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA 10.1 W
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 10.1 W
AI, 8-Channel, 1-5 VDC 10.1 W
AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA 11.9 W
AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 11.9 W
AS-Interface 9.6 W
DeviceNet 11.4 W
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 3.6 W
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 2.9 W
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 3.4 W
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 3.4 W
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated 3.6 W
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact 3.6 W
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 5.7 W
DO, 8-Channel, 120/230 VAC, Isolated 6.1 W
DO, 8-Channel, 120/230 VAC, High Side 6.1 W
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 4.9 W
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High Side 3.7 W + load dependent power dissipation (25
W maximum at 24 V)1

439
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Product Type Power

DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 3.0 W + load dependent power dissipation (27
W maximum at 24 V)2
Fieldbus H1 card 10.2 W
Multifunction 8.2 W
Profibus DP 10.1 W
RTD, ohms 2.7 W
Sequence of Events 3.5 W
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 5.1 W
Thermocouple, mV 5.9 W
Series 2 I/O Cards
Series 2 AI, 4-20 mA with HART 8.4 W
Simplex/ Redundant 9.1 W (per card)
Series 2 AI, 16-channel, 4-20 mA HART 12.7 W
(Simplex)
Series 2 AO, 4-20 mA with HART 10.2 W
Simplex/ Redundant 10.2 W (per card)
Series 2 AS-Interface (Simplex) 9.6 W
Series 2 DeviceNet (Simplex) 11.4 W
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC Dry Contact 3.7 W (per card)
Simplex/ Redundant
Series 2 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC Dry Contact 5.7 W
(Simplex)
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 3.7 W (per card)
Simplex/ Redundant
Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 3.0 W + load dependent power dissipation (27
(Simplex) W maximum at 24 V)3
Series 2 H1 6.1 W (per card)
Simplex/ Redundant
Series 2 Isolated Input (Simplex) 5.9 W
Series 2 Profibus (Simplex) 10.1 W
Series 2 RTD, ohms (Simplex) 2.7 W
Series 2 Thermocouple (Simplex) 3.5 W
Series 2 Serial 5.1 W (per card)
Simplex/ Redundant
Intrinsically Safe I/O Cards
I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20, mA, HART 9.8 W
I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20, mA (and HART) 11.3 W

440
 Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Product Type Power

I.S. DI, 16-Channel 7.6 W
I.S. DO, 4-Channel 10.1 W
Power Supplies 4
Legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk AC to 12 VDC 12 W
Power Supply
Legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC 12 W
Power Supply
Legacy Panel-mounted Bulk AC to 12 VDC 22 W
Power Supply
Legacy Panel-mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC 22 W
Power Supply
Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC Power Supply 14.5 W
System Power Supply (AC/DC) 4.4 W
System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) • 12 VDC Input: 11.4 W
• 24 VDC Input: 26.4 W

DeltaV SIS Components

Simplex Logic Solver 16.0 W
Redundant Logic Solvers 24.0 W
SISNet Repeaters 9.6 W (per Repeater)
Auxiliary Relay Modules, Energize to Actuate 4.65 W
and De-Energize to Actuate, 24 VDC
Auxiliary Relay Diode Module 2.25 W
Miscellaneous Components
Fieldbus H1 carrier 5.2 W5
Media Converter 5.1 W
Single Port Fiber Switch 8.2 W
Four Port Fiber Switch 8.4 W
I.S. LocalBus Isolator 1.2 W
I.S. System Power Supply 1.5 W

1 Power dissipation in this card is based on a full load of 3 A at 24 V. Actual dissipation is

determined by the following equation: Supply Voltage x Actual Load Current (8 channels) x [(1/
Power Supply Efficiency) - 1] A typical value for eight channels driving a 24 V solenoid is 16.4 W.
2 Power dissipation in this card is based on a full load of 3.2 A at 24 V. Actual dissipation is
determined by the following equation: Supply Voltage x Actual Load Current (32 channels) x [(1/
Power Supply Efficiency) - 1]
3 Power dissipation in this card is based on a full load of 3.2 A at 24 V. Actual dissipation is
determined by the following equation: Supply Voltage x Actual Load Current (32 channels) x [(1/
Power Supply Efficiency) - 1]
4 Refer to the DeltaV S-series and CHARMs Hardware Reference manual for power dissipation for
DeltaV Bulk Power Supplies.

441
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

5 Does not include I/O card dissipation or 2.2 W power supply dissipation. (Assumes power supply
is not in the same enclosure as the H1 carrier.)

I.3 Example Enclosure Selection Calculations

Assume the system consists of the following components:

Quantity Product Type Power Dissipation

1 Controller (MD Plus and MX) 14 W
1 AI, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART 10.1 W
1 AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA 11.9 W
1 DI, 8-channel, 24 VDC, isolated 3.6 W
1 DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, high side (driving 8 3.7 W + 16.4 W
solenoids)
2 DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, isolated 12.2 W
2 DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, isolated 6.8 W
1 System power supply (AC/DC) 4.4 W
1 Bulk AC to 24 VDC power supply 22 W
Total power 105.1 W

Assume ambient temperature is 35°C. The DeltaV components are rated for an ambient
temperature of 60°C. Therefore, the enclosure design temperature rise must be less than
60 - 35 = 25°C with 105.1 W of heat dissipation within it.
If the surface area of the enclosure is insufficient to dissipate the heat, you can use cooling
options such as fans or blowers to improve heat dissipation.
Note
The actual temperature rise varies with layout, enclosure location, and other factors. If the
application is critical or if the exact conditions are undetermined, follow your standard
corporate/plant safety standards. Cabinet manufacturers recommend a safety margin of
25%.

442
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

J System Power Guidelines

This section contains important information about DeltaV system power. Refer to the
DeltaV Power and Grounding manual for additional information.

J.1 System Power Supply (AC/DC)

One System Power Supply (AC/DC) is sufficient for many small systems. The power supply
provides 1.25 A of LocalBus power, enough for:
• 8 discrete I/O cards
or
• 8 analog I/O cards
or
• 4 serial I/O cards
or
• 4 Series 2 H1 cards
Refer to the installation worksheets for complete information on calculating system power
for all I/O card combinations.
For systems that require additional power, use another System Power Supply (AC/DC) for
load sharing. For systems that require redundant power, connect a second System Power
Supply (AC/DC).
Other options for systems that require additional power are the System Power Supply
(Dual DC/DC) with a bulk power supply. These options do not require an additional two-
wide carrier and are good choices when future expansion is anticipated.

Related information
Installation Worksheets

J.2 System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)

When it is operated on 12 VDC, the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) is rated for a
maximum of 13 A of LocalBus power which is sufficient for most large DeltaV systems.
When it is operated on 24 VDC, the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) is rated for a
maximum of 8 A (4.5 A for older models) of LocalBus power. For systems that require
additional power, use another System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC). For systems that
require redundant power, use a second System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC).

443
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure J-1: Simplex dual DC/DC system power supply with 12 VDC input
Terminal Strip
Top View
Carrier
DIN rail mounted
DC Power Bus (+) Fuse
Block

12 VDC 12 VDC
From DC/DC 12 VDC Return
Power Supply 2 1 (Ground)
or AC/DC Bulk
Power Supply 12 VDC
Return

DIN rail mounted

DC Return Bus (−)

Dual DC/DC
System Power
Supply

Notes:
1 A fuse block and fuse are optional. If you are providing DC power to several DC/DC
passthrough system power supplies by the same bulk power supply, fuse the line to
each supply. .
2 Always use pre-formed metal shorting bars to ensure a good connection. Do not use individual
jumper wires.

444
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure J-2: Redundant dual DC/DC system power supply with 12 VDC input
Terminal Strip
Top View
Carrier

Fuse
Block 12 VDC
12 VDC Return
(Ground)

Secondary Dual Primary Dual

1 DC/DC System 1 DC/DC System
Power Supply Power Supply

2 2

DIN rail mounted DIN rail mounted

DC Power Bus (+) DC Return Bus (−)
12 VDC 12 VDC 12 VDC 12 VDC
Return Return

From DC Bulk From DC Bulk

Power Supply Power Supply

Notes:
1 Use separate DC power busses as shown. Then, for optimum power redundancy, connect
each system power supply to separate DC bulk power supplies.
2 Always use pre-formed metal shorting bars to ensure a good connection. Do not use
individual jumper wires.

445
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure J-3: Simplex dual DC/DC system power supply with 24 VDC input
Terminal Strip
Top View
Carrier

DIN rail mounted

1
DC Power Bus (+) Fuse
Block

24 VDC
From DC
Bulk Power 3 2
24 VDC
Supply
24 VDC
Return 24 VDC Return
(Ground)

DIN rail mounted DC

DC Return Bus (−) Return
Reference
Ground
Dual DC/DC
System Power
Supply
To DC Gnd Bus
in enclosure

Notes:
1 Use the left-hand terminal screw only.
2 A fuse block and fuse are optional. If you are providing DC power to several DC/DC passthrough system power
supplies by the same bulk power supply, it is recommended that you fuse the line to each supply.
3 Always use pre-formed metal shorting bars to ensure a good connection. Do not use individual jumper wires.

446
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure J-4: Redundant dual DC/DC system power supply with 24 VDC input
Terminal Strip
Carrier
Top View

Fuse
Block

24 VDC

24 VDC Return
(Ground)

DC
Secondary Dual Primary Dual Return
1 DC/DC System 1 DC/DC System Reference
Power Supply Power Supply Ground

3 3

DIN rail mounted DIN rail mounted

DC Power Bus (+) DC Return Bus (−)
24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
Return Return

From DC Bulk From DC Bulk To DC Gnd Bus

Power Supply Power Supply in Enclosure

Notes:
1 Use separate sets of DC power busses as shown. Then, for optimum power redundancy, connect each system
power supply to separate DC bulk power supplies.
2 Use the left-hand terminal screw only. Only one ground wire is necessary because the return side of both DC
power supplies is internally connected to the ground terminal of either terminal strip.
3 Always use pre-formed metal shorting bars to ensure a good connection. Do not use individual jumper wires.

J.3 100-240 VAC to 12 VDC 15 A DeltaV Bulk Power

Supply
Installation notes
• The following information applies only to part number KJ1503X1-BA1. For other DeltaV
bulk power supplies with similar characteristics, you can obtain documentation from
Emerson Global Support Center at 800-833-8314.
• Install this bulk power supply on a horizontally oriented DIN rail with the label text
right-side up.
• Keep the following installation clearances: 40 mm on top, 20 mm on the bottom, 5
mm on the left and right sides when the device is loaded permanently with more than

447
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

50% of the rated power. Increase this clearance to 15 mm if the adjacent device is a
heat source such as another power supply.

Specifications
Table J-1: 100-240 VAC to 12 VDC 15 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply
Item Specification
Output voltage 12 VDC
Output adjustment range 12-15 VDC
Output current • 15-13.5 A continuous
• 22.5-20.3 A for 4 seconds (typical)

Output power • 180 W continuous at 12 VDC

• 270 W for 4 seconds at 12 VDC (typical)

Output ripple < 50 mV peak-to-peak at 20 Hz to 20 MHz

Output holdup time AC input
• 72 ms typical at 100 VAC, 12 V, 7.5 A
• 31 ms typical at 100 VAC, 12 V, 15 A
• 72 ms typical at 120 VAC, 12 V, 7.5 A
• 32 ms typical at 120 VAC, 12 V, 15 A
• 72 ms typical at 230 VAC, 12 V, 7.5 A
• 32 ms typical at 230 VAC, 12 V, 15 A
DC input
• 31 ms typical at 110 VDC

Operational temperature range -25°C to + 70°C

Output derating at higher temperature 5 W/°C at +60°C to +70°C
Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Shock 15 g half sine wave for 6 ms, 10 g half sine wave
for 11 ms
Vibration 1.6 mm peak to peak from 2 to 17.8 Hz, 2 g
from 17.8 to 500 Hz
AC input voltage • 100-240 VAC ± 15%
• 110-150 VDC -20%/+25%

AC mains frequency 50-60 Hz ± 6%

AC input current • 1.65 A at 120 VAC
• 0.93 A at 230 VAC

AC power factor • 0.98 at 120 VAC

• 0.92 at 230 VAC

448
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Table J-1: 100-240 VAC to 12 VDC 15 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply (continued)
Item Specification
AC inrush current • 10 A peak maximum at 100 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 5 A peak typical at 100 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 10 A peak maximum at 120 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 4 A peak typical at 120 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 10 A peak maximum at 230 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 7 A peak typical at 230 VAC over entire
temperature range

AC efficiency • 91.5% at 120 VAC

• 91.8% at 230 VAC

AC losses • 16.7 W at 120 VAC

• 16.1 W at 230 VAC

DC input voltage 100-300 VDC ±20%

DC input current 1.78 A at 110 VDC
DC power factor 1 or N/A at 110 VDC
DC inrush current • 10 A peak maximum
• 5 A peak typical

DC efficiency 91% at 110 VDC

DC losses 17.8 W at 110 VDC
Dimensions Height: 12.4 cm (4.9 inches)
Width: 6 cm (2.4 inches)
Depth: 11.7 cm (4.6 inches)

Terminals and wiring

Bistable, quick-connect spring-clamp terminals with IP20 finger safe construction are
used. The terminals are shipped in the open position and are suitable for field installation.
Use wire that complies with local codes and regulations.

Wire type Input spring-clamp Output spring-clamp DC-OK-Signal spring-

terminals terminals clamp terminals
Solid wire Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge:
6 mm2; 10 AWG 6 mm2; 10 AWG 6 mm2; 10 AWG
Stranded wire Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge:
4 mm2; 11 AWG 4 mm2; 11 AWG 4 mm2; 11 AWG

449
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Connectors and LEDs

The following image shows the connectors and LEDs on the bulk power supply. The labels
on the input and output terminals are self-explanatory (Neutral (-), Line (+), protective
earth ( ), positive (+) and negative (-) output). Additional information about the relay
contact operation follows the image. Refer to the Related information section for
information on the LEDs.

Figure J-5: Connectors and LEDs on the 100-240 VAC to 12 VDC 15 A DeltaV Bulk
Power Supply
Output terminals DC OK relay contact

Output voltage potentiometer

(factory set at 12 VDC)

DC OK LED (green)
Overload LED (red)

Input terminals

DC OK Relay Contact operation

The DC OK relay contact monitors the bulk power supply's output voltage. It is
synchronized with the DC OK LED.
• Closed contact: the output voltage has reached the adjusted output voltage level.
• Open contact: voltage has dipped to more than 10% below the adjusted output
voltage. Short dips are extended to a signal length of 250 ms. Dips shorter than 1 ms
are ignored.
• Reclosed contact: the output voltage has exceeded 90% of the adjusted voltage.
• Contact ratings maximum resistive load: 60 VDC at 0.3 A, 30 VDC at 1 A, 30 VAC at 0.5
A
• Contact ratings minimum permissible load: 1 mA at 5 VDC

450
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

J.4 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 5 A DeltaV Bulk Power

Supply
Installation notes
• The following information applies only to part number KJ1503X1-BB1. For other DeltaV
bulk power supplies with similar characteristics, you can obtain documentation from
Emerson Global Support Center at 800-833-8314.
• Install this bulk power supply on a horizontally oriented DIN rail with the label text
right-side up.
• Keep the following installation clearances: 40 mm on top, 20 mm on the bottom, 5
mm on the left and right sides when the device is loaded permanently with more than
50% of the rated power. Increase this clearance to 15 mm if the adjacent device is a
heat source such as another power supply.

Specifications
Table J-2: 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 5 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply
Item Specification
Output voltage 24 VDC
Output adjustment range 24-28 VDC
Output current • 5-4.5 A continuous
• 7.5-6.7 A for 4 seconds (typical)

Output power • 120 W continuous

• 180 W for 4 seconds (typical)

Output ripple < 50 mV peak-to-peak at 20 Hz to 20 MHz

Output holdup time AC input
• 66 ms typical at 100 VAC, 24 V, 2.5 A
• 34 ms typical at 100 VAC, 24 V, 5 A
• 66 ms typical at 120 VAC, 24 V, 2.5 A
• 34 ms typical at 120 VAC, 24 V, 5 A
• 127 ms typical at 230 VAC, 24 V, 2.5 A
• 65 ms typical at 230 VAC, 24 V, 5 A
DC input
• 34 ms at 110 VDC (typical)

Operational temperature range -25°C to + 70°C

Output derating at higher temperature 3 W/°C at +60°C to +70°C
Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Shock 15 g half sine wave for 6 ms, 10 g half sine wave
for 11 ms

451
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Table J-2: 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 5 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply (continued)
Item Specification
Vibration 1.6 mm peak to peak from 2 to 17.8 Hz, 2 g
from 17.8 to 500 Hz
AC input voltage • 100-240 VAC +10% /-15%
• 110-300 VDC ± 20%

AC mains frequency 50-60 Hz ± 6%

AC input current • 1.10 A at 120 VAC
• 0.62 A at 230 VAC

AC power factor • 0.99 at 120 VAC

• 0.91 at 230 VAC

AC inrush current • 15 A peak maximum at 100 VAC over entire

temperature range
• 8 A peak typical at 100 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 15 A peak maximum at 120 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 9 A peak typical at 120 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 15 A peak maximum at 230 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 11 A peak typical at 2300 VAC over entire
temperature range

AC efficiency • 91% at 120 VAC

• 92.7% at 230 VAC

AC losses • 11.0 W at 120 VAC

• 9.4 W at 230 VAC

DC input voltage 110 to 300 VDC ±20%

DC input current 1.19 A 110 VDC
DC power factor 1 or N/A at 110 VDC
DC inrush current • 15 A peak maximum
• 8 A peak typical

DC efficiency 91% at 110 VDC

DC losses 11.9 W at 110 VDC
Dimensions Height: 12.4 cm (4.9 inches)
Width: 4 cm (1.6 inches)
Depth: 11.7 cm (4.6 inches)

452
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Terminals and wiring

Bistable, quick-connect spring-clamp terminals with IP20 finger safe construction are
used. The terminals are shipped in the open position and are suitable for field installation.
Use wire that complies with local codes and regulations.

Wire type Input spring-clamp Output spring-clamp DC-OK-Signal spring-

terminals terminals clamp terminals
Solid wire Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge:
6 mm2; 10 AWG 4 mm2; 11 AWG 4 mm2; 11 AWG
Stranded wire Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge:
4 mm2; 11 AWG 2.5 mm2; 14 AWG 2.5 mm2; 14 AWG

Connectors and LEDs

The following image shows the connectors and LEDs on the bulk power supply. The labels
on the input and output terminals are self-explanatory (Neutral (-), Line (+), protective
earth ( ), positive (+) and negative (-) output). Additional information about the relay
contact operation follows the image. Refer to the Related information section for
information on the LEDs.

Figure J-6: Connectors and LEDs on the 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 5 A DeltaV Bulk Power
Supply
Output DC OK
terminals relay contact

Output voltage potentiometer

(factory set at 24.1 VDC)

DC OK LED (green)
Overload LED (red)

Input terminals

453
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

DC OK Relay Contact operation

The DC OK relay contact monitors the bulk power supply's output voltage. It is
synchronized with the DC OK LED.
• Closed contact: the output voltage has reached the adjusted output voltage level.
• Open contact: voltage has dipped to more than 10% below the adjusted output
voltage. Short dips are extended to a signal length of 250 ms. Dips shorter than 1 ms
are ignored.
• Reclosed contact: the output voltage has exceeded 90% of the adjusted voltage.
• Contact ratings maximum resistive load: 60 VDC at 0.3 A, 30 VDC at 1 A, 30 VAC at 0.5
A
• Contact ratings minimum permissible load: 1 mA at 5 VDC

J.5 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 10 A DeltaV Bulk Power

Supply
Installation notes
• The following information applies only to part number KJ1503X1-BB2. For other DeltaV
bulk power supplies with similar characteristics, you can obtain documentation from
Emerson Global Support Center at 800-833-8314.
• Install this bulk power supply on a horizontally oriented DIN rail with the label text
right-side up.
• Keep the following installation clearances: 40 mm on top, 20 mm on the bottom, 5
mm on the left and right sides when the device is loaded permanently with more than
50% of the rated power. Increase this clearance to 15 mm if the adjacent device is a
heat source such as another power supply.

Specifications
Table J-3: 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 10 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply
Item Specification
Output voltage 24 VDC
Output adjustment range 24-28 VDC
Output current • 10-9 A continuous
• 15-13.5 A for 4 seconds (typical)

Output power • 240 W continuous

• 360 W for 4 seconds (typical)

Output ripple < 50 mV peak-to-peak at 20 Hz to 20 MHz

454
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Table J-3: 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 10 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply (continued)
Item Specification
Output holdup time AC input
• 51 ms typical at 100 VAC, 24 V, 5 A
• 26 ms typical at 100 VAC, 24 V, 10 A
• 53 ms typical at 120 VAC, 24 V, 5 A
• 27 ms typical at 120 VAC, 24 V, 10 A
• 55 ms typical at 230 VAC, 24 V, 5 A
• 28 ms typical at 230 VAC, 24 V, 10 A
DC input
• 26 ms typical at 110 VDC

Operational temperature range -25°C to + 70°C

Output derating at higher temperature 6 W/°C at +60°C to +70°C
Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Shock 15 g half sine wave for 6 ms, 10 g half sine wave
for 11 ms
Vibration 1.6 mm peak to peak from 2 to 17.8 Hz, 2 g
from 17.8 to 500 Hz
AC input voltage • 100-240 VAC ±15%

AC mains frequency 50-60 Hz ± 6%

AC input current • 2.22 A at 120 VAC
• 1.22 A at 230 VAC

AC power factor • 0.98 at 120 VAC

• 0.92 at 230 VAC

AC inrush current • 10 A peak maximum at 100 VAC over entire

temperature range
• 5 A peak typical at 100 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 10 A peak maximum at 120 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 4 A peak typical at 120 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 10 A peak maximum at 230 VAC over entire
temperature range
• 7 A peak typical at 230 VAC over entire
temperature range

AC efficiency • 92.6% at 120 VAC

• 93.5% at 230 VAC

455
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Table J-3: 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 10 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply (continued)
Item Specification
AC losses • 19.1 W at 120 VAC
• 16.7 W at 230 VAC

DC input voltage 110 to 150 VDC -20%/+25%

DC input current 2.37 A at 110 VDC
DC power factor 1 or N/A at 110 VDC
DC inrush current • 10 A peak maximum
• 5 A peak typical

DC efficiency 91.8% at 110 VDC

DC losses 21.4 W at 110 VDC
Dimensions Height: 12.4 cm (4.9 inches)
Width: 6 cm (2.3 inches)
Depth: 11.7 cm (4.6 inches)

Terminals and wiring

Bistable, quick-connect spring-clamp terminals with IP20 finger safe construction are
used. The terminals are shipped in the open position and are suitable for field installation.
Use wire that complies with local codes and regulations.

Wire type Input spring-clamp Output spring-clamp DC-OK-Signal spring-

terminals terminals clamp terminals
Solid wire Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge:
6 mm2; 10 AWG 6 mm2; 10 AWG 6 mm2; 10 AWG
Stranded wire Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge:
4 mm2; 11 AWG 4 mm2; 11 AWG 4 mm2; 11 AWG

Connectors and LEDs

The following image shows the connectors and LEDs on the bulk power supply. The labels
on the input and output terminals are self-explanatory (Neutral (-), Line (+), protective
earth ( ), positive (+) and negative (-) output). Additional information about the relay
contact operation follows the image. Refer to the Related information section for
information on the LEDs.

456
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure J-7: Connectors and LEDs on the 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 10 A DeltaV Bulk
Power Supply
Output terminals DC OK relay contact

Output voltage potentiometer

(factory set at 24.1 VDC)

DC OK LED (green)
Overload LED (red)

Input terminals

DC OK Relay Contact operation

The DC OK relay contact monitors the bulk power supply's output voltage. It is
synchronized with the DC OK LED.
• Closed contact: the output voltage has reached the adjusted output voltage level.
• Open contact: voltage has dipped to more than 10% below the adjusted output
voltage. Short dips are extended to a signal length of 250 ms. Dips shorter than 1 ms
are ignored.
• Reclosed contact: the output voltage has exceeded 90% of the adjusted voltage.
• Contact ratings maximum resistive load: 60 VDC at 0.3 A, 30 VDC at 1 A, 30 VAC at 0.5
A
• Contact ratings minimum permissible load: 1 mA at 5 VDC

457
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

J.6 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 20 A DeltaV Bulk Power

Supply
Installation notes
• The following information applies only to part numbers 1X00781H01L and KJ1503X1-
BB3. For other DeltaV bulk power supplies with similar characteristics, you can obtain
documentation from Emerson Global Support Center at 800-833-8314.
• Install this bulk power supply on a horizontally oriented DIN rail with the label text
right-side up.
• Keep the following installation clearances: 40 mm on top, 20 mm on the bottom, 5
mm on the left and right sides when the device is loaded permanently with more than
50% of the rated power. Increase this clearance to 15 mm if the adjacent device is a
heat source such as another power supply.

Specifications
Table J-4: 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 20 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply
Item Specification
Output voltage 24 VDC
Output adjustment range 24-28 VDC
Output current • 20-17 A continuous
• 30-26 A for 4 seconds (typical)

Output power • 480 W continuous

• 720 W for 4 seconds (typical)

Output ripple < 100 mV peak-to-peak at 20 Hz to 20 MHz

Output hold-up time • 64 ms typical at 100 VAC, 24 V, 10 A
• 32 ms typical at 100 VAC, 24 V, 20 A
• 64 ms typical at 120 VAC, 24 V, 10 A
• 32 ms typical at 120 VAC, 24 V, 20 A
• 99 ms typical at 230 VAC, 24 V, 10 A
• 51 ms typical at 230 VAC, 24 V, 20 A

Operational temperature range -25°C to + 70°C

Output derating at higher temperature 12 W/°C at +60°C to +70°C
Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Shock 15 g half sine wave for 6 ms, 10 g half sine wave
for 11 ms
Vibration 1.6 mm peak to peak from 2 to 17.8 Hz, 2 g
from 17.8 to 500 Hz
AC input voltage • 100-240 VAC ±15%

458
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Table J-4: 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 20 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply (continued)
Item Specification
AC mains frequency 50-60 Hz ± 6%
AC input current • 4.56 A at 120 VAC
• 2.48 A at 230 VAC

AC power factor • 0.95 A at 120 VAC

• 0.90 a at 230 VAC

AC inrush current • 13 A peak maximum at 100 VAC

• 11 A peak typical at 100 VAC
• 13 A peak maximum at 120 VAC
• 9 A peak typical at 120 VAC
• 13 A peak maximum at 230 VAC
• 7 A peak typical at 230 VAC

AC efficiency • 92.4% at 120 VAC

• 93.9% at 230 VAC

AC losses • 39.6 W at 120 VAC

• 31.4 W at 230 VAC

DC input voltage 110-150 VDC -20%/+25%

DC input current 4.6 A at 110 VDC
DC power factor 1 or N/A at 110 VDC
DC inrush current • 13 A peak maximum
• 10 A peak typical

DC efficiency 92% at 110 VDC

DC losses 41.8 W at 110 VDC
Dimensions Height: 12.4 cm (4.9 inches)
Width: 8.2 cm (3.2 inches)
Depth: 12.7 cm (5 inches)

Terminals and wiring

Bistable, quick-connect spring-clamp terminals with IP20 finger safe construction are
used. The terminals are shipped in the open position and are suitable for field installation.
Use wire that complies with local codes and regulations.

Wire type Input spring-clamp Output spring-clamp DC-OK-Signal spring-

terminals terminals clamp terminals
Solid wire Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge:
6 mm2; 10 AWG 6 mm2; 10 AWG 6 mm2; 10 AWG

459
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Wire type Input spring-clamp Output spring-clamp DC-OK-Signal spring-

terminals terminals clamp terminals
Stranded wire Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge: Maximum wire gauge:
4 mm2; 11 AWG 4 mm2; 11 AWG 4 mm2; 11 AWG

Connectors and LEDs

The following image shows the connectors and LEDs on the bulk power supply. The labels
on the input and output terminals are self-explanatory (Neutral (-), Line (+), protective
earth ( ), positive (+) and negative (-) output). Additional information about the relay
contact operation follows the image. Refer to the Related information section for
information on the LEDs.

Figure J-8: Connectors and LEDs on the 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 20 A DeltaV Bulk
Power Supply
Output terminals DC OK relay contact

Output voltage potentiometer

(factory set at 24.1 VDC)

DC OK LED (green)

Overload LED (red)

Input terminals

DC OK Relay Contact operation

The DC OK relay contact monitors the bulk power supply's output voltage. It is
synchronized with the DC OK LED.
• Closed contact: the output voltage has reached the adjusted output voltage level.

460
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

• Open contact: voltage has dipped to more than 10% below the adjusted output
voltage. Short dips are extended to a signal length of 250 ms. Dips shorter than 1 ms
are ignored.
• Reclosed contact: the output voltage has exceeded 90% of the adjusted voltage.
• Contact ratings maximum resistive load: 60 VDC at 0.3 A, 30 VDC at 1 A, 30 VAC at 0.5
A
• Contact ratings minimum permissible load: 1 mA at 5 VDC

J.7 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 40 A DeltaV Bulk Power

Supply
Installation notes
• The following information applies only to part numbers 1X00797H01L and KJ1503X1-
BB4. For other DeltaV bulk power supplies with similar characteristics, you can obtain
documentation from Emerson Global Support Center at 800-833-8314.
• Install this bulk power supply on a horizontally oriented DIN rail with the label text
right-side up.
• Keep the following installation clearances: 40 mm on top, 20 mm on the bottom, 5
mm on the left and right sides when the device is loaded permanently with more than
50% of the rated power. Increase this clearance to 15 mm if the adjacent device is a
heat source such as another power supply.

Specifications
Table J-5: 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 40 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply
Item Specification
Output voltage 24 VDC (nominal)
Output adjustment range 24-28 VDC
Output current • 40-34.3 A continuous
• 60-51.5 A short term (4 seconds)

Output power • 960 W continuous

• 1440 W short term (4 seconds)

Output ripple < 100 mV peak-to-peak at 20 Hz to 20 MHz

Output hold-up time • 54 ms typical at 100 VAC, 24 V, 20 A
• 27 ms typical at 100 VAC, 24 V, 40 A
• 54 ms typical at 120 VAC, 24 V, 20 A
• 27 ms typical at 120 VAC, 24 V, 40 A
• 54 ms typical at 230 VAC, 24 V, 20 A
• 27 ms typical at 230 VAC, 24 V, 40 A

Operational temperature range -25°C to + 70°C

461
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Table J-5: 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 40 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply (continued)
Item Specification
Output derating at higher temperature 24 W/°C at +60°C to +70°C
Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Shock 15 g half sine wave for 6 ms, 10 g half sine wave
for 11 ms
Vibration 1.6 mm peak to peak from 2 to 17.8 Hz, 2 g
from 17.8 to 500 Hz
AC input voltage 100-240 VAC -15%/+10%
AC mains frequency 50-60 Hz ± 6%
AC Input current • 8.6 A at 120 VAC
• 4.5 A at 230 VAC

AC power factor • 0.99 at 120 VAC

• 0.99 at 230 VAC

AC Inrush current • 25 A peak maximum at 100 VAC

• 18 A peak typical at 100 VAC
• 22 A peak maximum at 120 VAC
• 16 A peak typical at 120 VAC
• 16 A peak maximum at 230 VAC
• 9 A peak typical at 230 VAC

AC efficiency • 93.6 % at 120 VAC

• 94.6 % at 230 VAC

AC losses • 65.6 W at 120 VAC

• 54.8 W at 230 VAC

Dimensions Height: 12.4 cm (4.9 inches)

Width: 12.5 cm (4.92 inches)
Depth: 12.7 cm (5 inches)

Terminals and wiring

Screw terminals with IP20 finger safe construction are used. The terminals are suitable for
field and factory wiring. Use wire that complies with local codes and regulations.

Wire type Input screw terminals Output screw terminals DC-OK spring-clamp
terminals
Solid wire Maximum wire gauge: 6 Maximum wire gauge: 16 Maximum wire gauge: 1.5
mm2; 10 AWG mm2; 6 AWG mm2; 16 AWG
Recommended tightening Recommended tightening
torque: 1 N · m; 9 lb. · in. torque: 2.3 N · m;
20.5 lb. · in.

462
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Wire type Input screw terminals Output screw terminals DC-OK spring-clamp
terminals
Stranded Maximum wire gauge: 4 Maximum wire gauge: 10 Maximum wire gauge: 1.5
wire mm2; 12 AWG mm2; 8 AWG mm2; 16 AWG
Recommended tightening Recommended tightening
torque: 1 N · m; 9 lb. · in. torque: 2.3 N · m;
20.5 lb. · in.

Connectors and LEDs

The following image shows the connectors and LEDs on the bulk power supply. The labels
on the input and output terminals are self-explanatory (Neutral, Line, protective earth,
positive (+) and negative (-) output). Additional information about the relay contact, shut
down and remote control operations, and the parallel and single use selector follows the
image. Refer to the Related information section for information on the LEDs.

Figure J-9: Connectors and LEDs on the 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 40 A DeltaV Bulk
Power Supply
Parallel use and
single use selector

Output voltage potentiometer

(factory set at 24.1 VDC)

DC OK LED (green)

Overload LED (red)

DC OK relay contact

Shut down and remote

control input

Input Output
terminals Terminals

463
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

DC OK Relay Contact operation

The DC OK relay contact monitors the bulk power supply's output voltage. It is
synchronized with the DC OK LED.
• Closed contact: the output voltage has reached the adjusted output voltage level.
• Open contact: voltage has dipped to more than 10% below the adjusted output
voltage. Short dips are extended to a signal length of 250 ms. Dips shorter than 1 ms
are ignored.
• Reclosed contact: the output voltage has exceeded 90% of the adjusted voltage.
• Contact ratings maximum resistive load: 60 VDC at 0.3 A, 30 VDC at 1 A, 30 VAC at 0.5
A
• Contact ratings minimum permissible load: 1 mA at 5 VDC

Shut down and remote control input operation

The shut down feature enables a signal switch or an external voltage to switch the power
supply output off. The shutdown occurs immediately; the restart is delayed for up to 350
ms. In a shutdown condition, the output voltage is < 2 VDC and the output power is < 0.5
W. The voltage between different minus pole output terminals must be below 1 VDC
when units are connected in parallel. The following image shows the various wiring
options. When multiple power supplies are connected in series, only wiring option A with
individual signal switches is allowed. Option C requires that the voltage source has current
sink capability. Do not use a blocking diode.

Parallel and single use selector

Set the jumper to Parallel Use mode when power supplies are connected in parallel to
increase the output power. In order to share the load current between the individual
power supplies, parallel use regulates the output voltage such that the voltage at no load
is approximately 4% higher than at nominal load. A missing jumper is the same as Single
Use mode.

J.8 12-48 VDC 20 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply

Redundancy Module
Installation notes
• The following information applies only to part numbers 1X00924H01L and KJ1503X1-
BC1. For other DeltaV redundancy modules with similar characteristics, you can obtain
documentation from Emerson Global Support Center at 800-833-8314.

464
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

• Install this redundancy module on a horizontally oriented DIN rail with the label text
right-side up.
• Keep the following installation clearances: 40 mm on top, 20 mm on the bottom,
5 mm on the left and right sides when the device is loaded permanently with more
than 50% of the rated output current. Increase the side clearance to 15 mm if the
adjacent device is a heat source such as a power supply.
• This redundancy module can be used in one-to-one and n-to-one redundant systems.
Use diodes or other switching arrangements to isolate the redundant power supply
outputs from each other.
• Connect the two input channels to the 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 10 A DeltaV Bulk Power
Supply for redundant applications.

Specifications
Table J-6: 12-48 VDC 20 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Module
Item Specification
Input voltage 12-48 VDC ±25%
Input voltage range 9-60 VDC
Input current • 2x 0-10 A continuous
• 2x 0-16 A for 5 seconds

Output current • 0-20 A continuous

• 20-32 A for 5 seconds
• 25 A at continuous overload/short circuit

Input to output voltage drop • 0.78 VDC at 2x 5 A input (typical)

• 0.85 VDC at 1x 10 A input (typical)
• 0.85 VDC at 2x 10 A input (typical)

Power losses • 0 W at no load (typical)

• 7.8 W at 2x 5 A input (typical)
• 8.5 W at 1x 10 A input (typical)
• 17 W at 2x 10 A input (typical)

Temperature range -40°C to +70°C operational

Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Shock 15 g half sine wave for 6 ms, 10 g half sine wave
for 11 ms
Vibration 1.6 mm peak to peak from 2 to 17.8 Hz, 2 g
from 17.8 to 500 Hz
Derating 0.5 A /°C at +60°C to +70°C
Dimensions Height: 12.4 cm (4.9 inches)
Width: 3.2 cm (1.25 inches)
Depth: 10.2 cm (4.0 inches)

465
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Terminals and wiring

Bistable, quick-connect spring-clamp terminals with IP20 finger safe construction are
used. The terminals are shipped in the open position and are suitable for field installation.
Use wire that complies with local codes and regulations.

Wire type Input and output spring-clamp terminals

Solid wire Maximum wire gauge: 6 mm2; 10 AWG
Stranded wire Maximum wire gauge: 4 mm2; 11 AWG

Connectors

Figure J-10: Connectors on the 12-48 VDC 20 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy
Module
Input 1 Input 2

Chassis ground
(optional)

Output
terminals

Wiring for redundancy

The 12-48 VDC 20 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Module can be used in one-to-
one and n-to-one applications.
Note
For both one-to-one redundancy and n-to-one redundancy, it is recommended that, if
possible, you use separate mains systems for each power supply.

466
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure J-11: Wiring for one-to-one redundancy at up to 10 A

Faliure
Monitor

10A
Load

Optional

N
L
N
L
PE

Figure J-12: Wiring for n-to-one redundancy at up to 30 A

Faliure
Monitor

60A
Load

Optional Optional

N
L
PE

467
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

J.9 12-24 VDC 40 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply

Redundancy Module
Installation notes
• The following information applies only to part number KJ1503X1-BD1. For other
DeltaV redundancy modules with similar characteristics, you can obtain
documentation from Emerson Global Support Center at 800-833-8314.
• Install this redundancy module on a horizontally oriented DIN rail with the label text
right-side up.
• Keep the following installation clearances: 40 mm on top, 20 mm on the bottom, 5
mm on the left and right sides when the device is loaded permanently with more than
50% of the rated output current. Increase the side clearance to 15 mm if the adjacent
device is a heat source such as a power supply.
• This redundancy module can be used in one-to-one and n-to-one redundant systems.
Use diodes or other switching arrangements to isolate the redundant power supply
outputs from each other.
• Connect the two input channels to the 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 20 A DeltaV Bulk Power
Supply for redundant applications.

Specifications
Table J-7: 12-24 VDC 40 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Module
Item Specification
Input voltage 12-28 VDC ±30%
Input voltage range 16.8-36.4 VDC
Input current • 2x 0-20 A continuous
• 2x 20-32.5 A for 5 seconds

Output current • 0-40 A continuous

• 40-65 A for 5 seconds
• 65 A at continuous overload/short circuit

Input to output voltage drop • 72 mV at 2x 10 A input (typical)

• 112 mV at 1x 20 A input (typical)
• 140 mV at 2x 20 A input (typical)

Power losses • 700 mW at no load (typical)

• 2.15 W at 2x 10 A input (typical)
• 2.65 W at 1x 20 A input (typical)
• 6.3 W at 2x 20 A input (typical)

Temperature range -40°C to +70°C operational; no derating required

Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing

468
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Table J-7: 12-24 VDC 40 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Module (continued)
Item Specification
Shock 15 g half sine wave for 6 ms, 10 g half sine wave
for 11 ms
Vibration 1.6 mm peak to peak from 2 to 17.8 Hz, 2 g
from 17.8 to 500 Hz
Dimensions Height: 12.4 cm (4.9 inches)
Width: 3.6 cm (1.4 inches)
Depth: 12.7 cm (5.0 inches)

Terminals and wiring

Screw terminals with IP20 finger safe construction are used. The terminals are suitable for
field and factory wiring. Use wire that complies with local codes and regulations.

Wire type Input screw terminals Output screw terminals

Solid wire Maximum wire gauge: 6 mm2; 10 Maximum wire gauge: 16 mm2; 6
AWG AWG
Recommended tightening torque: Recommended tightening torque: 1.2
0.8 N · m; 7 lb. · in. N · m; 10.6 lb. · in.
Stranded wire Maximum wire gauge: 4 mm2; 12 Maximum wire gauge: 10 mm2; 8
AWG AWG
Recommended tightening torque: Recommended tightening torque:
0.8 N · m; 7 lb. · in. 1.2 N · m; 10.6 lb. · in.

469
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Connectors

Figure J-13: Connectors on the 12-24 VDC 40 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy
Module
Output terminals

Chassis ground
(optional)

Input 1 Input 2

Wiring for redundancy

The 12-24 VDC 40 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Module can be used in one-to-
one and n-to-one applications.
Note
For both one-to-one redundancy and n-to-one redundancy, it is recommended that, if
possible, you use separate mains systems for each power supply.

470
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure J-14: Wiring for one-to-one redundancy at up to 20 A

Faliure
Monitor

20A
Load

N
L
PE

Figure J-15: Wiring for n-to-one redundancy at up to 60 A

Faliure
Monitor

20A
Load

N
L
PE

471
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

J.10 12-24 VDC 80 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply

Redundancy Module
Installation notes
• The following information applies only to part number KJ1503X1-BD2. For other
DeltaV redundancy modules with similar characteristics, you can obtain
documentation from Emerson Global Support Center at 800-833-8314.
• Install this redundancy module on a horizontally oriented DIN rail with the label text
right-side up.
• Keep the following installation clearances: 40 mm on top, 20 mm on the bottom, 5
mm on the left and right sides when the device is loaded permanently with more than
50% of the rated output current. Increase the side clearance to 15 mm if the adjacent
device is a heat source such as a power supply.
• This redundancy module can be used in one-to-one and n-to-one redundant systems.
Use diodes or other switching arrangements to isolate the redundant power supply
outputs from each other.
• Connect the two input channels to the 100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 40 A DeltaV Bulk Power
Supply for redundant applications.

Specifications
Table J-8: 12-24 VDC 80 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Module
Item Specification
Input voltage 12-28 VDC ±30%
Input voltage range 16.8-36.4 VDC
Input current • 2x 0-40 A continuous
• 2x 40-65 A for 5 seconds

Output current • 0-80 A continuous

• 80-130 A for 5 seconds
• 130 A at continuous overload/short circuit

Input to output voltage drop • 50 mV at 2x 20 A input (typical)

• 85 mV at 1x 40 A input (typical)
• 95 mV at 2x 40 A input (typical)

Power losses • 700 mW at no load (typical)

• 2.7 W at 2x 20 A input (typical)
• 3.6 W at 1x 40 A input (typical)
• 8.3 W at 2x 40 A input (typical)

Temperature range -40°C to +70°C operational; no derating required

Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing

472
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Table J-8: 12-24 VDC 80 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Module (continued)
Item Specification
Shock 15 g half sine wave for 6 ms, 10 g half sine wave
for 11 ms
Vibration 1.6 mm peak to peak from 2 to 17.8 Hz, 2 g
from 17.8 to 500 Hz
Dimensions Height: 12.4 cm (4.9 inches)
Width: 4.6 cm (1.8 inches)
Depth: 12.7 cm (5.0 inches)

Terminals and wiring

Screw terminals with IP20 finger safe construction are used. The terminals are suitable for
field and factory wiring. Use wire that complies with local codes and regulations.

Wire type Input screw terminals Output screw terminals

Solid wire Maximum wire gauge: 16 mm2; 6 Maximum wire gauge: 35 mm2; 2
AWG AWG
Recommended tightening torque: Recommended tightening torque: 2.5
1.2 N · m; 10.6 lb. · in. N · m; 22 lb. · in.
Stranded wire Maximum wire gauge: 10 mm2; 8 Maximum wire gauge: 35 mm2; 2
AWG AWG
Recommended tightening torque: Recommended tightening torque: 2.5
1.2 N · m; 10.6 lb. · in. N · m; 22 lb. · in.

473
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Connectors

Figure J-16: Connectors on the 12-24 VDC 80 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy
Module
Output terminals

Chassis ground
(optional)

Input 1 Input 2

Wiring for redundancy

The 12-24 VDC 80 A DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Module can be used in one-to-
one and n-to-one applications.
Note
For both one-to-one redundancy and n-to-one redundancy, it is recommended that, if
possible, you use separate mains systems for each power supply.

474
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure J-17: Wiring for one-to-one redundancy at up to 40 A

40A
Load

Faliure
Monitor

N
L
PE

Figure J-18: Wiring for n-to-one redundancy at up to 120 A

120A
Load

Faliure
Monitor

N
L
PE

J.11 Sizing the I.S. System Power Supply

The I.S. System Power Supply accepts locally available 24 VDC (nominal) power and
converts it to 12 VDC for powering I.S. I/O cards. Each I.S. power supply is rated at 5 A and
can power from eight to fifteen cards depending upon the type and mix of cards. You can
have up to ten I.S. power supplies and add an additional power supply for redundancy.
(The total number of I.S. power supplies for a redundant system is eleven.) When using
multiple I.S. system power supplies, intersperse the power supplies among the cards.
Note
The I.S. Power Supply supplies 60 W and draws 80 W for 24 VDC bulk power supply
calculations at the rated load.

475
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

J.12 Legacy Bulk Power Supplies for System Power

The legacy bulk AC to 12 VDC and 24 VDC to 12 VDC power supplies provide 12 VDC
power to the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) for one or more controllers and their
associated I/O subsystems. However, if you are using the bulk power supply to provide
power for more than one DeltaV system or for other equipment, refer to the I/O card
specifications or use the simplified calculations in the installation worksheet to determine
if there is sufficient capacity.

Related information
I/O Cards
Installation Worksheets

J.13 Sizing the Legacy Bulk Power Supply for Bussed

Field Power and System Power
The legacy bulk AC to 24 VDC power supply provides power to field devices and System
Power Supplies (Dual DC/DC). In general, AI cards, AO cards, and dry contact DI cards use
small amounts of current. Thus, the legacy bulk AC to 24 VDC power supply provides
enough power for approximately 40 of these types of I/O cards.
If you are supplying power to DO cards with high side switches, you must evaluate the
power requirements carefully. Refer to the manufacturer’s specifications for your field
devices to determine the load.

J.14 Using Multiple System Power Supplies

There are three reasons to use more than one power supply for a system application:
• To provide load sharing if more than 100 percent of the output of a single supply is
required
• To supply separate power supplies for redundant equipment
• To provide a backup for one or more power supplies in a system
Do not use different product types in multiple system power supply applications. Use the
same product type with the same input voltage (12 VDC or 24 VDC) for either load sharing
applications or redundant applications that use multiple system power supplies.
Note
Your individual requirements for system availability determine where to provide
redundancy in a system. Corporate/plant standards or “Hazardous Operations
Procedures” for your site often provide guidelines.

The system power supplies provide OR-ing diodes to isolate faults on one supply from the
output provided by the other supply.
Different system constraints apply to each type of DeltaV Power Supply. The following
sections discuss considerations for each type of power supply.

476
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

J.14.1 System Power Supply (AC/DC)

The System Power Supply (AC/DC) converts AC input power to 12 VDC for the I/O
subsystem (I/O power is expressed as LocalBus power in the power calculation
worksheets). In addition, it converts some input power to supply the requirements of the
controller if it is mounted directly to the left of the controller or on the right slot of a
second 2-wide power/controller carrier.
Note
The left slot of the second 2-wide power/controller carrier will NOT provide power to the
controller, only to the I/O subsystem.

Supplying System Power to the I/O

For some system sizes, I/O power requirements cannot be met by a single supply. In these
cases, you must use multiple supplies for load sharing. By adding a second system power
supply (or more) and additional carriers, you can increase the power available for the I/O.
You may need as many as four supplies for a full system of analog I/O cards.
For load sharing, mount the second supply in either slot of the second power/controller
carrier. Additional supplies mount to the left of the second supply or on a third power/
controller carrier, if needed. The following figure shows an example of four system power
supplies used for load sharing.

477
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure J-19: System Power Supply Mounting for Load Sharing with a Simplex
Controller

Note
In an application requiring redundant power to the controller rather than load sharing, the
second system power supply in Figure J-1 would provide only 15 W to the I/O and 10 W to
the controller. Refer to “Supplying Redundant System Power to the Controller”. Refer also
to Table J-9 for information on LocalBus current provided to the I/O in various controller/
power redundancy situations.

Extending System Power to the I/O

The LocalBus power is specified and limited to 8 A. Some cards consume up to 0.5 A of
system power each. Because of this, a system with several cards such as AS-Interface,
Profibus, DeviceNet, and Fieldbus cards can exceed the ratings.
Note
The 8-wide carriers must be left-aligned when using 1-wide extenders.

The following image shows power injected for two system power supplies mounted on the
2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier. The power is supplied to the left 1-Wide Horizontal
Carrier Extender positive and negative (+ and -) screw terminals with the jumper removed.

478
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

In addition to supplying DC power, the system power supplies on the 2-Wide Horizontal
Carrier provide additional filtering for the local extended railbus.

Figure J-20: Extended Power Diagram

Field Power

CB1 CB1

CB1 CB1

Primary
AC

Enclosure PE Ground Lug

Enclosure Door
Secondary
AC Adjacent Enclosure

Chassis
Ground

To DIG

Field Power Field Power Field Power Field Power

Power Supply

Power Supply
Controller

Controller
System

System

Fuse

Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse

Fuse

Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse

Fuse
Fuse

Fuse

Fuse
Fuse
Shield Bar Jumper Wire

Field Power Field Power Field Power Field Power

Jumper Shield Bar Jumper Wire

Field Power Field Power Field Power Field Power

Power Supply

Power Supply
System

System

Shield Bar Jumper Wire

Field Power Field Power Field Power Field Power

Isolated
Bus

DC Ground
To DIG Jumper Shield Bar Jumper Wire

479
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Supplying Redundant System Power to the Controller

To provide redundant power to the controller, install a secondary system power supply in
the right slot of the second power/controller carrier, as shown in the following figure. You
must mount the secondary supply in the right slot of the second carrier to provide power
to the controller.

Figure J-21: System Power Supply Mounting for Redundant Controller Power

If you require redundant power to the controller and additional system power supplies for
I/O load sharing, you must mount the secondary system power supply for the controller in
the right slot of the second carrier, as shown in Figure J-3.

LocalBus Current Provided to the I/O Based on Controller/Power Redundancy

The following table shows the LocalBus current provided to the I/O based on the number
of System Power Supplies (AC/DC) and the controller/power redundancy used in the
configuration.
Table J-9: LocalBus Current Provided to the I/O
Number of System Controller/Power Redundancy
Power Supplies
(AC/DC) Simplex Controller Simplex Controller Redundant Controller
and Simplex Power and Redundant and Redundant
Power Power
1 1.25 A N/A N/A

480
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Table J-9: LocalBus Current Provided to the I/O (continued)

Number of System Controller/Power Redundancy
Power Supplies
(AC/DC) Simplex Controller Simplex Controller Redundant Controller
and Simplex Power and Redundant and Redundant
Power Power
2 3.35 A 1.25 A 1.25 A
3 5.45 A 3.35 A 2.50 A
4 7.55 A 5.45 A 4.6 A
5 9.65 A; current limited 7.55 A 6.7 A
to 8.0 A due to carrier
limitations
6 11.75 A; current 9.65 A; current limited 8.8 A; current limited
limited to 8.0 A due to to 8.0 A due to carrier to 8.0 A due to carrier
carrier limitations limitations limitations

Related information
Installation Worksheets
Using OR-ing Diodes with Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

J.14.2 System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)

The System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) provides 12 VDC LocalBus power to the I/O
subsystem when it is operated on either 12 VDC or 24 VDC input power. In addition, it
converts some input power to supply the requirements of the controller if it is mounted
directly to the left of the controller or on the right slot of a second 2-wide power/controller
carrier.

Supplying System Power to the I/O

You can add a second system power supply to provide I/O power redundancy. The second
supply mounts in the right slot of the second 2-wide power/controller carrier, as shown in
the following figure. Power this supply from a separate bulk power supply to provide
power if the primary bulk supply fails.

481
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure J-22: System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) Mounting for Redundant Power

Supplying Redundant Power to the Controller

To provide redundant power to the controller, install a secondary system power supply in
the right slot of the second power/controller carrier as shown in the preceding image. You
must mount the secondary supply in the right slot to provide power to the controller.
The power conversion from 12 VDC is done inside of the system supply. Because of this,
you could decide that it is acceptable to supply power to both system supplies from a
single bulk supply if your application can support that single point of failure.

J.15 Using Multiple Legacy Bulk Power Supplies for

Redundancy and Load Sharing
The legacy Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC power supplies are available as both
DIN rail and panel-mounted units. Both types of power supplies can be used in redundant
systems and the legacy DIN rail-mounted supply can be used in systems requiring load
sharing as well as redundancy. The legacy DIN rail-mounted supply contains an integrated
OR-ing diode to isolate power supply faults. Refer to “OR-ing Diodes” for usage
information. The legacy panel-mounted power supply cannot be used in systems that
require load sharing.

482
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

If you have redundant system power supplies, connect the redundant legacy Bulk AC to 12
VDC power supplies to different System Power Supplies (Dual DC/DC) on each controller
and I/O subsystem.
The legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC power supply provides 24 VDC power to
field devices and System Power Supplies (Dual DC/DC). This power supply provides
enough power for approximately 40 AI, AO, and dry contact DI cards.

J.15.1 Using OR-ing Diodes with Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

The legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk Power Supplies have an integrated OR-ing diode to
isolate power supply faults and are set at 12.3 or 24.6 VDC. If the legacy DIN rail-mounted
Bulk Power Supply is used in a system that requires redundancy or load sharing, connect
the SHARE terminals on the top of the power supplies to terminal strips or bus bars. One or
both of the VOUT (+) and RTN (-) connections must go to the same location.

Figure J-23: Connecting the Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk Power Supply for
Redundancy or Load Sharing

To terminal strips or
bus bars
+ +
share

AC+ AC VOUT RTN

Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply

Connect one or both share

+ and - to the
same location +

+ +
share

AC+ AC VOUT RTN

Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply

If the legacy panel-mounted Bulk Power Supply or a bulk power supply without OR-ing
diodes from another manufacturer is used in a system that requires redundant power, use
external OR-ing diodes (such as the Weidmuller USA #998786 dual rectifier diode module)
to isolate power supply faults. Because an external OR-ing diode has a nominal .7 V drop,
the output of each supply must be adjusted to account for the drop or the voltage to the
carriers might be too low. The recommended adjustments, after the OR-ing diodes, are:
• 12.3 VDC for a 12 VDC bulk power supply
• 24.6 VDC for a 24 VDC bulk power supply

483
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Verify these voltages with one bulk power supply disabled to ensure operation in a fault
condition.
Note
The system power supply shuts down if the input power exceeds 12.6 V. Do not adjust a
12 V bulk power supply to more than 12.3 V at the input to the system power supply.

If additional 12 VDC power is required for a carrier that is powered by a bulk power supply
without integrated OR-ing diodes, connect the primary and secondary bulk power
supplies through OR-ing diodes with the output going only to the extender cable, not to
the system power supplies as shown in Figure J-26.
The following table shows the current provided to the system based on the number of
legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk Power Supplies (AC to 12 and 24 VDC) and whether simplex
or redundant power is used in the configuration. Figure J-24 shows the connections for
four DIN rail-mounted Bulk Power Supplies. A fifth supply can be connected in the same
manner for redundancy.
Table J-10: Bulk Power Provided to the System
Number of legacy Bulk Power System Current Provided by System Current Provided by
Supplies (AC to 24 VDC and Simplex Power Redundant Power
AC to 12 VDC)
1 12 A N/A
2 24 A 12 A
3 36 A 24 A
4 48 A 36 A
5 N/A 48 A

484
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure J-24: Connecting Multiple Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk Power Supplies
Terminal
strips or bus bars
+ +

share
AC+ AC VOUT RTN

Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply
share
+

AC+ AC + + share
VOUT RTN

Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply

+ +
share

AC+ AC VOUT RTN

Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply

+ +
share

AC+ AC VOUT RTN

Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply

Figure J-25 shows power and grounding for an AC System Power Supply and DeltaV bulk
power supplies. Note that the 2-wide carrier must be connected to the DC Ground.

485
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure J-25: Power and Grounding for an AC System Power Supply

AC

DC Ground
Isolated
Bus
To DIG
Enclosure PE Ground Lug
Enclosure Door
To DIG Adjacent Enclosure

Chassis
Ground

–++ – –++ –

Series 2 Series 2 Series 2 Plus Series 2 Series 2 Series 2

Power Power Power Power Power Power Power/Active Power/Active Power Power
Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error
Active Active Active Ch. 1 Ch. 1 Port 1 Port 1 Ch. 1 Ch. 1
Standby Standby Standby Ch. 2 Ch. 2 Ch. 2 Ch. 2
Ch. 3 Ch. 3 Ch. 3 Ch. 3
Ch. 4 Ch. 4 Ch. 4 Ch. 4
Ch. 5 Ch. 5 Ch. 5 Ch. 5
Ch. 6 Ch. 6 Ch. 6 Ch. 6
Ch. 7 Ch. 7 Ch. 7 Ch. 7
Ch. 8 Ch. 8 Ch. 8 Ch. 8

AC/DC Controller Fieldbus H1 Fieldbus H1 AI Card AO Card Profibus DeviceNet DI Card DO Card
Power Supply MD Plus Interface Interface 4-20mA 4-20mA DP 24 VDC 24 VDC
HART Isolated Isolated

Figure J-26 shows power and grounding for a 12 VDC System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
used with legacy bulk power supplies. Note that the 2-wide carrier is not connected to
ground because the legacy 12 VDC Bulk Power Supplies are connected to the isolated
common ground reference or to the DeltaV instrumentation ground.
Figure J-26 also shows:
• How to provide redundant 24 VDC bussed field power
• The recommended method for connecting 12 VDC redundant legacy bulk power
supplies to redundant system power supplies
• How to extend 12 VDC bulk power to the carriers

Providing Redundant 24 VDC Bussed Field Power

In Figure J-26, the legacy 24 VDC Bulk Power Supplies are connected together to provide
the redundant bussed field power. The OR-ing diodes are integrated into the power
supply.

Connecting Redundant 12 VDC Legacy Bulk Power to Redundant System Power

Supplies
As shown in Figure J-26, the recommended method for connecting redundant legacy bulk
power supplies to redundant system power supplies is to connect the primary legacy bulk
power supply directly to the primary system power supply and to connect the secondary
legacy bulk power supply directly to the secondary system power supply. Do not connect
the legacy bulk power supplies together because a single high-voltage failure in either bulk
power supply could cause both system power supplies to reset which in turn causes both
controllers to reset. OR-ing diodes are not required in this situation.

486
 System Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

Extending 12 VDC Legacy Bulk Power to the Carriers

Also shown in Figure J-26 are OR-ing diodes used for extending 12 VDC power to the
carrier when OR-ing diodes are not integrated into the bulk power supply. The primary and
secondary legacy bulk power supplies are connected through OR-ing diodes with the
output going to the extender cable not to the system power supply.

Figure J-26: Power and Grounding for a 12 VDC System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
with Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

AC+ AC + + AC+ AC + AC+ AC + + AC+ AC + +

VOUT RTN VOUT RTN VOUT RTN VOUT RTN

share

share

share

share
Bulk AC to 12 VDC Bulk AC to 12 VDC Bulk AC to 24 VDC Bulk AC to 24 VDC
power supply power supply power supply power supply

+ +

8 DC cards 8 DC cards 24 VDC

2-Wide carrier bussed
field power
8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier

8 DC cards 8 DC cards
1-Wide carrier
+ +
extender
8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier

+
+ +

OR-ing diodes
(only required if not 8 DC cards 8 DC cards 24 VDC
integrated into power bussed
supply) field power
8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier

DC reference +
ground

8 DC cards 8 DC cards

8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier

Carrier
To isolated common ground reference Isolated local shield bar
or DeltaV instrumentation ground (DIG) ground reference

Figure J-27 shows power and grounding for a 24 VDC System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
used with legacy bulk power supplies. It also shows connections for providing 24 VDC
bussed field power. In Figure J-27. The legacy bulk power supplies are connected together
to provide power to the system power supplies and to provide bussed field power. The OR-
ing diodes are integrated into the legacy bulk power supply. Note that in Figure J-27 the 2-
wide carrier is connected to the isolated common ground reference or to the DeltaV
instrumentation ground.

487
System Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure J-27: Power and Grounding for a 24 VDC System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
with Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
+
+
AC+ AC + + AC+ AC + +
VOUT RTN VOUT RTN

share

share
Bulk AC to 24 VDC Bulk AC to 24 VDC
power supply power supply
+

24 VDC bussed
field power
8 DC cards 8 DC cards
2-Wide carrier

8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier 1-Wide carrier

extender

DC
reference 8 DC cards 8 DC cards
ground

8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier

1-Wide
carrier
extender
Carrier
shield
bar

To isolated common ground reference

or DeltaV instrumentation ground (DIG) Isolated local
ground reference

For grounding information for DeltaV Bulk Power supplies refer to Figure J-20.
.

488
 Bussed Field Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

K Bussed Field Power Guidelines

Many of the I/O cards use 24 VDC bussed field power to power their devices. These cards
are designed to operate at 21.6 to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC ±10%). To minimize field wiring, you
can connect a power source directly to the I/O interface carrier to provide power to field
devices that are connected to these cards. It is recommended that the power source is a
DeltaV Bulk Power Supply or Legacy Bulk Power Supply. Be sure that the power supply
allows the voltage to the carrier to be within the 21.6 to 26.4 VDC range required for the
cards that use bussed field power. Some I/O cards use a voltage other than 24 VDC and
others do not use bussed field power to power their associated field devices. Refer to the
S-series and CHARMs Hardware Reference manual for information on the DeltaV Bulk Power
Supplies.
Note
The bussed field power connection on the top of the carrier provides power to the field
through the I/O cards only. Extending power from this connection to additional field
devices is not supported or appropriate.

If the system requires redundant bulk power supplies or multiple bulk power supplies for
load sharing, it is recommended that the DeltaV Bulk Power supplies are used in
conjunction with DeltaV Redundancy Modules.

Related information
System Power Guidelines
I/O Cards

K.1 Implementing Bussed Field Power for

Applications using DI and DO Cards
Observe the following guidelines if you implement bussed field power for applications that
use DI and DO cards.
If you use DeltaV discrete input cards (isolated or dry contact) to sense a contact closure in
a field device, use an arc suppression device at the contact. This arc suppression device can
be an R-C snubber or a varistor, as shown in the following figure for isolated discrete
inputs.

489
Bussed Field Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure K-1: Arc Suppression Device Examples for Contact Closure Detection (Isolated
Discrete Input Cards)

The following table lists example R-C values based on the load provided by the input card
and the formulas provided in the Sizing R-C Snubbers topic.
Table K-1: Example R-C Values
Load from Input Card R Value C Value
24 VDC 5 kΩ 2.4 nF
120 VAC 60 Ω 0.12 nF
230 VAC 115 Ω 0.01 nF

If you use DeltaV isolated discrete input cards to sense solid state devices such as triacs,
you may need to place some resistance in parallel with the input to avoid false triggering
due to leakage currents. Size the resistor so that the voltage level generated by leakage
current through the switch is less than the upper limit for OFF voltage at the input card.
The resistor wattage must support the following calculation for dissipation when the
switch is ON:

V
Watts = Vx
R
where:
V=voltage
R=resistance
You can use DeltaV dry contact discrete input cards to sense a solid state device only if the
leakage of the switch is less than the upper limit for OFF current of the input card. The
following table lists the upper limit of the OFF current for the DeltaV input cards.
Table K-2: Current Limits for Input Cards
Input Card Voltage Level Upper Limit of OFF Current
24 VDC 1 mA
120 VAC 0.56 mA
230 VAC 0.28 mA

490
 Bussed Field Power Guidelines
D800001X312 April 2021

If you use DeltaV AC discrete output cards (high-side or isolated) to drive inductive loads
such as relay coils, it is recommended that the kickback from the coil be suppressed at the
coil with an R-C snubber or a varistor. Figure K-2 is a wiring diagram example for a high-
side discrete output. Sizing for the suppressor is load-dependent; refer to the Sizing R-C
Snubbers topic and to the documentation for the field device or suppressor.

Figure K-2: Examples for Driving Inductive Loads with AC Output Cards (High-Side
Discrete Output)

If you use DC discrete output cards to drive inductive loads such as solenoid valves and
relay coils, it is recommended that the kickback from the inductive load is suppressed at
the device by a parallel reverse-biased diode (such as a 1N4004). The following figure is a
wiring diagram example for a high-side discrete output. Connecting the snubber diode at
the load ensures that the output channel circuitry is protected from the inductive kickback
in all configurations. Additionally, it suppresses the electrical noise that would otherwise
have been generated on the wiring and potentially coupled onto adjacent field wiring.

Figure K-3: Example for Driving Inductive Loads with DC Output Cards (High-Side
Discrete Output)

If your field device has low current requirements, you can connect a loading resistor in
parallel with your load to limit the effect of leakage currents on DeltaV discrete AC output
cards. Size the resistor to provide a total load of 10 mA and to handle the heat dissipation
for this load. For example, a 12 K Ω, 2 W resistor is appropriate for 120 VAC and a 23 K Ω, 3
W resistor is appropriate for 230 VAC.

491
Bussed Field Power Guidelines
April 2021 D800001X312

In electrically noisy environments, place one varistor in parallel with the field terminal
blocks at the I/O card and another varistor in parallel with the bussed field power
connection to the carrier. Size the varistor for 20% above the nominal line voltage.

Related information
Sizing R-C Snubbers

K.2 Sizing R-C Snubbers

R-C (resistor-capacitor) snubbers are used to suppress arcing when a contact is opened or
to suppress kickback when a coil is de-energized. Pre-assembled R-C snubbers are
available in a variety of ratings (Quencharc® and RIFA RC-units are two trade names) or
you can assemble R-C snubbers from discrete components. Because the resistor is in series
with the capacitor, the wattage requirements are low (less than 0.25 W).
Use the following calculations to size the R-C snubber that is appropriate for your
application. Always round up to the next value available.

DC Applications

For example, using a 24 VDC source, and driving a 0.5 A load:

AC Applications

for each 10 V·A of steady state load

For example, using a 120 VAC source and driving a 0.5 A load:

492
 Controller Redundancy
D800001X312 April 2021

L Controller Redundancy
The DeltaV system supports redundant controllers. The following figure shows a simple
system with redundant controllers and a redundant Control Network.

Figure L-1: Redundant Controller Network Example

Workstation Controller
Unshielded Controller
connectors
Primary hub

ScTP Cat. 5(e)

cable maximum ScTP Cat. 5(e)
length: cable maximum
100 m (330 ft) length:
Secondary hub
100 m (330 ft)

LEGEND:
= Shielded connectors

L.1 Installing a Redundant Controller

Note
A simplex controller cannot be made redundant by using the following steps after VCAT is
enabled.

1. Assign an appropriate redundancy license to the simplex controller you want to

make redundant in DeltaV Explorer.
2. Plug in a second 2-wide carrier to the left of the current 2-wide carrier. Ensure that it
has the correct pins and supports redundancy.
3. Insert the appropriate power supply in the left slot of the left 2-wide carrier and plug
in the power cord to supply power.
4. Insert a controller (the controller type should match what is already in the right 2-
wide carrier) into the right slot of the left 2-wide carrier.
5. The added controller's Power LED should turn on and the Error LED should blink for a
few seconds. Then, all 6 of the LEDs should turn on for about 2 seconds, followed by
the LEDs turning off except for the Power LED, which should always remain on. At
this point, the Standby LED and the two communications LEDs should start to blink
(Standby Controller becomes commissioned). Observe that the LEDs behave as
described; the LEDs are the controller's tell-tales.
6. Download the ProfessionalPLUS workstation in DeltaV Explorer.

493
Controller Redundancy
April 2021 D800001X312

7. Download the setup data to the controller. The two communications LEDs should
continue to blink for a few minutes and the Standby LED should turn on solid
(Standby Controller becomes configured). The Standby Controller is now ready to
take over if the Active Controller fails.

L.2 Powering Redundant Controllers

A redundant controller system requires an additional two-wide carrier to support the
additional controller and power supply. The following figure shows a redundant controller
installation.

Figure L-2: Redundant Controller Installation Example

Refer to the preceding image:

• Controller 1 receives 5V and 3.3V power from power supply 1.
• Controller 2 receives 5V and 3.3V power from power supply 2.
• Both power supplies provide 12V, load sharing power to the I/O cards.
For redundant I/O power, ensure that there is enough power for the active controller and
I/O if one power supply fails. If the two power supplies are not capable of providing
redundant power to the controllers and I/O cards, you can install an additional carrier and
power supplies to the left of the controller carrier.

494
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

M DeltaV Vertical Carriers

There are two types of DeltaV vertical carriers: VerticalPLUS and Legacy Vertical.
VerticalPLUS carriers can be used for DeltaV basic process control systems as well as for
DeltaV Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS). Legacy Vertical carriers cannot be used for
DeltaV SIS. The next section describes the VerticaPLUS carriers. Refer to the related topics
for information on Legacy Vertical carriers.
For both vertically and horizontally mounted systems, the LocalBus, including all cabling,
cannot be longer than 6.5 m (21.3 ft).
Note
In this Appendix, references to left and right, top and bottom, assume that you are facing
the equipment.

Important
The vertical carriers are mounted properly when the lettering is in the upright position.

Important
Vibration will cause vertical carriers to slip down on the DIN rail and disconnect from the
carrier above it. It is highly recommended that you install a stop on the DIN rail to prevent
the carriers from slipping.

Related information
Legacy Vertical Carriers
DeltaV System Equipment
Installing the DIN Rail Stop

M.1 VerticalPLUS Carriers

DeltaV VerticalPLUS carriers can be used for DeltaV Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) and
DeltaV basic process control systems. The Installing Your DeltaV SIS™ Process Safety System
Hardware manual provides instructions for installing SLS 1508 hardware. VerticalPLUS
carriers mount on standard 35 mm. (1.38 in.) T-type DIN rails.
There are several types of VerticalPLUS carriers:
• 4-wide power/controller carrier
• 4-wide SISNet Repeater carrier
• 4-wide power carrier
• left and right 8-wide I/O interface carriers
• left and right 1-wide carrier extenders

Related information
DIN Rail Recommendations

495
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

M.2 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carriers

The 4-wide VerticalPLUS power/controller carrier holds up to two controllers (primary and
secondary) and two system power supplies. The 4-wide VerticalPLUS power/controller
carriers install on the top left of a vertical system. The 96 pin connector on the bottom of
the carrier connects to the top of a left, 8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface carrier.

Figure M-1: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier

M.3 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carriers

The 4-wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater carrier holds a primary and secondary SISNet
Repeater. The 4-wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater carrier installs on the top right of a
vertical system. The 96 pin connector on the bottom of the carrier connects to the top of a
right, 8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface carrier. The VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater carrier
contains D-shell connectors for extending power to other carriers and BNC connectors for
extending local peer bus signals or terminating the local peer bus. Refer to the Installing
Your DeltaV SIS™ Process Safety System Hardware manual for information on how SISNet
Repeaters are used in DeltaV SLS 1508 systems and for information on the local peer bus.

496
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure M-2: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier

M.4 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carriers

The 4-wide VerticalPLUS power carriers hold redundant power supplies if additional
system power is required. This carrier can be installed on the DIN rail anywhere in the
cabinet. Connect the DC reference ground when using a legacy 24 VDC bulk power supply
only. The DC reference ground connection is not required for a legacy 12 VDC bulk power
supply.

Figure M-3: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier

+ +
- -
12 VDC output + + 12 VDC output
- -
DC reference DC reference
ground for 24 ground for 24 VDC power
VDC power only only

M.5 8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carriers

8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface carriers hold I/O cards and Logic Solvers and contain
connectors for inserting system and field power. For carrier numbering and card
addressing positions, refer to Figure M-5. The following figure shows the 8-wide
VerticalPLUS I/O interface carriers.

497
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure M-4: Left and Right 8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Carriers

Latch Acess
Hole Latch Acess
Hole

Latch Acess
Latch Acess Hole
Hole

498
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure M-5: Carrier Numbering and Addressing Positions

49-56

Carrier #8
Addressing
Positions
57-64

M.6 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders and

Cables
The 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extenders and cables are used to extend power and local
peer bus signals from a left to a right 8-wide VerticalPLUS carrier and from a right to a left
8-wide VerticalPLUS carrier.
There are two types of 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extenders and cables:

499
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

• Left 1-wide carrier extender

• Right 1-wide carrier extender
• D-shell connector cable to extend power and LocalBus signals
• BNC connector cable to extend local peer bus signals for SIS systems
Note
For SIS systems, the local peer bus must be terminated by 120 ohm BNC terminators at
either the 1-wide carrier extender connected to the last 8-wide carrier or at a 4-wide
SISNet Repeater carrier. The termination location depends upon the carrier configuration.
Refer to the Installing Your DeltaV SIS™ Process Safety System Hardware manual for
information on terminating SLS 1508 systems.

Left 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender

The Left 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender connects to the bottom of a left 8-wide
VerticalPLUS carrier or to the top of a right 8-wide VerticalPLUS carrier.

Right 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender

The Right 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender connects to the bottom of a right 8-wide
VerticalPLUS carrier or to the top of a left 8-wide VerticalPLUS carrier.

Figure M-6: Left and Right 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders

Cables for VerticalPLUS Systems

The 25 pin D-shell connector cable connects to the D-shell connectors labeled A on the 1-
wide VerticalPLUS carrier extenders to extend power. Cable is available in the following
lengths.
• 0.4 meters (1.3 feet)
• 0.8 meters (2.6 feet)
• 1.1 meters (3.6 feet)
• 1.5 meters (4.9 feet)
• 1.9 meters (6.2 feet)
The BNC connector cable connects black-to-black and white-to-white between 1-wide
VerticalPLUS carrier extenders to extend the local peer bus for SIS systems. Refer to the
Installing Your DeltaV SIS™ Process Safety System Hardware manual for information on the
local peer bus.

500
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Related information
1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders

M.7 Installing VerticalPLUS Carriers

Carefully plan the location of all carriers on the DIN rail before installing the carriers. You
will install a DIN rail stop first to prevent the carriers from slipping down on the DIN rail and
then install the carriers after the stop is in place.

M.7.1 Installing the DIN Rail Stop

Vibration will cause the vertical carriers to slip down on the DIN rail and disconnect from
the carrier above it. Before installing the carriers, install a DIN rail stop to prevent the
carriers from slipping. The stop should be at the lowest position on the DIN rail. The DIN
rail stop (KJ4010X1-BS1) can be purchased from Emerson.

Figure M-7: DIN Rail Stop

1. Be sure the arrow on the front of the stop is pointing upward towards the device. If
the arrow is pointing downwards away from the device, the screws on the DIN rail
stop could damage pins extending from the device.
2. First hook the end with the deeper notch over the DIN rail and then hook the end
with the more shallow notch over the other side of the DIN rail.
3. Screw the stop onto the DIN rail being careful not to overtighten the screws. Be sure
that both sides of the DIN rail stop are properly secured. The torque limits are
specified on the DIN rail stop.

501
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

M.7.2 Installing and Removing the Carriers

After installing the DIN rail stop, install the carriers. Latches on the back of the carriers are
used to snap the carriers into place on the DIN rail. Typically, a 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier
extender is installed after the DIN rail stop is installed.

Installing VerticalPLUS Carriers

1. Position the carrier on the DIN rail and push it against the DIN rail to snap it into
place.
2. Slide the carrier down on the DIN rail until it meets the DIN rail stop.
3. Snap the next carrier onto the DIN rail following the instructions in Step 1.
4. Connect each carrier to the adjacent carrier by sliding together the pins on the ends
of the carriers.
5. Connect ground wiring as shown in the following figure. Connect only one ground
wire for each group of carriers on a DIN rail.

502
 D800001X312

AC
AC

Bus
Primary

Isolated
Secondary

Field
To DIG

Power
Error
Power
Pow Pow Pow Pow

AC/DC
Erro er Erro er Erro er Erro er
Act Act Act Act

Power Supply
r r r r
Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive
ndb ndb ndb ndb
y y y y

Pow Pow Pow Pow

Erro er Erro er Erro er Erro er
Act r Act r Act r Act r
Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive
ndb ndb ndb ndb
y y y y

Error
Active
Power

Standby

MD Plus
Controller
DC Ground
Pow Pow Pow Pow
Erro er Erro er Erro er Erro er
Act r Act r Act r Act r
Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive
ndb ndb ndb ndb
y y y y

Pow Pow Pow Pow

Error
Power
Erro er Erro er Erro er Erro er
Act Act Act Act

AC/DC
r r r r
Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive

Power Supply
ndb ndb ndb ndb
y y y y

Error
Active
Power

Standby

MD Plus
Controller
Sta Sta Sta Sta
ndb Act ndb Act ndb Act ndb Act
y Erro ive y Erro ive y Erro ive y Erro ive
Pow r Pow r Pow r Pow r
er er er er

Sta Sta Sta Sta

ndb Act ndb Act ndb Act ndb Act
Erro ive
y Erro ive
y Erro ive
y y Erro ive
Pow r Pow r Pow r Pow r
er er er er

Sta Sta Sta Sta

ndb Act ndb Act ndb Act ndb Act
y Erro ive y Erro ive y Erro ive y Erro ive
Pow r Pow r Pow r Pow r
er er er er

Sta Sta Sta Sta

ndb Act ndb Act ndb Act ndb Act
y Erro ive y Erro ive y Erro ive y Erro ive
Pow r Pow r Pow r Pow r
er er er er
To DIG
Figure M-8: Ground Wiring for System Power Supplies

Pow Pow Pow Pow

Erro er Erro er Erro er Erro er
Act r Act r Act r Act r
Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive
ndb ndb ndb ndb
y y y y
Ground
Chassis

Pow Pow Pow Pow

Erro er Erro er Erro er Erro er
Act r Act r Act r Act r
Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive
ndb ndb ndb ndb
y y y y

Pow Pow Pow Pow

Erro er Erro er Erro er Erro er
Act r Act r Act r Act r
Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive
ndb ndb ndb ndb
y y y y

Pow Pow Pow Pow

Erro er Erro er Erro er Erro er
Act r Act r Act r Act r
Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive Sta ive
ndb ndb ndb ndb
y y y y
Field
Power

Enclosure Door
Adjacent Enclosure
Enclosure PE Ground Lug

503
April 2021
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

Removing VerticalPLUS Carriers

1. Use the largest flat blade screw driver that will fit through the latch access holes on
the carrier.
2. Turn the latch cam approximately one quarter turn to the right as indicated on the
graphic printed on the carrier top.

M.7.3 Extending LocalBus Power to Other Carriers

When VerticalPLUS carriers are installed on separate DIN rails, carrier extender cables are
used to extend LocalBus power. Extender cables connect to 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier
extenders. A standard installation uses one extender cable; however, dual extender cables
can also be used.
The following figure shows a standard installation with one carrier extender cable used to
extend power from the left to the right carriers.

504
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure M-9: Power Extended from Left to Right Carriers

505
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

Related information
1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders and Cables

Extend power from left to right 8-wide VerticalPLUS carriers

Be sure that the DIN rail stops are in place on both DIN rails. Refer to “Installing the DIN Rail
Stop”.
This procedure is for an installation with 6 carriers.
1. Connect a left 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender to the last 8-wide carrier on the
left side (carrier 3) by sliding together the 96 pin connectors on the carriers.
2. Connect a right 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender to the first 8-wide carrier on
the right side (carrier 4) by sliding together the 96 pin connectors on the carriers.
3. Connect the 25 pin D-shell (male) connector on the extender cable to the D-shell
connector labeled A on the left 1-wide carrier extender and fasten the retainer
screws.
4. Connect the 25 pin D-shell connector on the other end of the cable to the D-shell
connector labeled A on the right 1-wide carrier extender and fasten the retainer
screws.

Related information
Installing the DIN Rail Stop

Extending power from right to left 8-wide VerticalPLUS

carriers
This procedure is for an installation with up to 8 carriers.
Note
If a 4-wide SISNet Repeater carrier is installed on the top right, there is no need for a 1-
wide carrier because power can be extended from the D-shell connectors on the SISNet
Repeater carrier.

1. Connect the left 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender or SISNet Repeater carrier to
the last 8-wide carrier on the right side (carrier 6) by sliding together the 96 pin
connectors on the carriers.
2. Connect the right 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender to the first 8-wide carrier on
the left side (carrier 7) by sliding together the 96 pin connectors on the carriers.
3. Connect the 25 pin D-shell (male) connector on the extender cable to the D-shell
connector labeled A on the right 1-wide carrier extender or SISNet Repeater carrier
and fasten the retainer screws.
4. Connect the 25 pin D-shell connector on the other end of the cable to the D-shell
connector labeled A on the left 1-wide carrier extender and fasten the retainer
screws.

506
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure M-10: Power Extended from a Left to Right Carrier and Right to Left
Carrier

M.7.4 Inserting System Power

To decide when to use external system power, calculate the power used per position on
the carrier. Add these values to determine if they exceed the power supply’s capabilities. If
the calculation at a given position exceeds the power supply’s capabilities:
• Locate the power jumper that is just before this position (count from the power supply
end).
• Insert additional power at this node.

507
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

If multiple power supplies are used, be sure they are grounded at the same point.
1. Remove the jumper.
Warning
Removing the jumper removes all 12 VDC power to all cards on all downstream
carriers. When 12 VDC power is removed, cards are unable to hold the last value.

2. Insert 12 VDC power:

• + to the center terminal
• - to the - terminal

Figure M-11: Remove Jumper to Insert Additional System Power

M.7.5 Using Bussed Field Power with VerticalPLUS Carriers

The bussed field power connectors on the VerticalPLUS carriers differ from those on the
horizontal and Legacy Vertical carriers; however, some basic principles apply to all carrier
types. Before connecting or extending bussed field power to VerticalPLUS carriers, read
the important information in "Connecting Bussed Field Power".

Related information
Connecting Bussed Field Power

Extending Bussed Field Power to VerticalPLUS Carriers

Before extending bussed field power to VerticalPLUS carriers, read the note and warning in
"Extending Bussed Field Power".
Bussed field power can be extended to VerticalPLUS carriers if the addition of the next I/O
card does not exceed the 13 A rating of the connection to the source. The following figure
shows the screw terminal assignments on the VerticalPLUS carriers’ bussed field power
connections.
Warning
For VerticalPLUS carriers, field power for one I/O card can be extended to additional I/O
cards only if they have the same field voltage requirements.

508
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure M-12: Screw Terminal Assignments on VerticalPLUS Carriers’ Bussed Field

Power Connections

+ Field Power
Connections

- Field Power
Connections

4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5

If the bussed field power supplies one I/O card only and is not extended to additional I/O
cards such as in redundant card applications, connect the wiring to the assigned screw
terminal connections on the I/O interface carrier as shown in Figure M-13.

CAUTION
Ensure that the factory installed jumpers are removed from the connectors if only one I/O
card is to be powered.

509
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure M-13: Bussed Field Power Wiring for One Power Supply Per I/O Card on
VerticalPLUS Carriers

Second Supply First Supply

+ Field Power Connection - Field Power Connection

DC AC DC AC

+ L - N
- N + L

Second Supply First Supply

- Field Power Connection + Field Power Connection

Warning
When supplying 250 VAC to adjacent bussed field power connections, be sure both
sources are the same phase.

If the bussed field power is extended to two I/O cards, connect the wiring to the assigned
screw terminal connections on the I/O interface carrier as shown in the following figure. Be
sure that jumpers are installed as shown in the figure.

510
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure M-14: Bussed Field Power Wiring for One Power Supply Per Two Cards

Second Supply First Supply

+ Field Power Connection Add Jumper Wires - Field Power Connection
to Extend Power

DC AC DC AC

+ L - N
- N + L

Second Supply First Supply

- Field Power Connection + Field Power Connection

Warning
When supplying 250 VAC to adjacent bussed field power connections, be sure both
sources are the same phase.

If the bussed field power is extended to four I/O cards, connect wiring to the assigned
screw terminal connections on the I/O interface carrier as shown in the following figure. Be
sure that jumpers are installed as shown in the figure.

511
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure M-15: Bussed Field Power Wiring for One Power Supply Per Four I/O Cards

Add Jumper Wires

to Extend Power
Supply Connection
DC AC

Return - N
Optional Wires to
Extend Power to
Supply + L
Next Connector Slots
Supply Return Connection

Related information
Extending Bussed Field Power

M.7.6 Legacy Vertical Carriers

DeltaV Legacy Vertical carriers mount on standard 35 mm. (1.38 in.) T- or G-type DIN rails.
for more information on vertical DIN rails.
There are 4 types of Legacy Vertical carriers for mounting vertically in a cabinet:
• Two types of 4-wide power/controller carriers
• Two types of 8-wide I/O interface carriers
There are two separate cable lengths for connecting the 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O
interface carriers:
• 1 meter bottom cable extender
• 2 meter top cable extender
If you are installing Legacy Vertical carriers in high vibration areas, it is highly
recommended that you install a DIN rail stop to prevent the carriers from slipping down on
the DIN rails.

512
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure M-16: 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier

Legacy Vertical
Power/Controller Carrier
(Front View)

1 J3

DC Return
Reference
Ground (24
VDC ONLY)

To DC Gnd
Bus in
Enclosure

Note
Use the DC return reference ground only with a DC/DC system power supply powered by
24 VDC. Do not use it for 12 VDC input.

Related information
DIN Rail Recommendations
Installing the DIN Rail Stop

4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carriers

The 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers supply power and communications
connections for vertically mounted controller(s) and I/O cards. There are two types of 4-
wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers:
• Top 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers connect to the left Legacy Vertical
8-wide I/O interface carrier. The 96 pin connector is at the bottom of this carrier. (The
left 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carrier holds cards 1-8 from top to bottom.)
• Bottom 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers connect to the right 8-wide
Legacy Vertical I/O interface carrier. The 96 pin connector is at the top of this carrier.
(The right 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carrier holds cards 8-1 from top to
bottom.)
Up to two controllers (primary and secondary) and two system power supplies mount on
the 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers. The following figure shows the top
and bottom 4-wide Legacy Vertical carriers.

513
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure M-17: 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carriers

8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carriers

The 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carriers provide power and communications
connections for the I/O subsystem. There are two types of 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O
interface carriers:
• Left 8-wide I/O interface carrier (card positions 1-8 from top to bottom)
• Right 8-wide I/O interface carrier (card positions 8-1 from top to bottom)
The following figure shows the left and right 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carriers.

514
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure M-18: Left and Right 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carriers

Note
The 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O carriers are designed with a split high-side power plane and
a shared common return plane. A jumper bridges both high-side planes for a continuous
conductive path. If additional power is required, you can break this high-side path and add
another power source to the unpowered end.

To decide when to use external power, calculate the power used per position on the
carrier. Add these values to determine if they exceed the power supply’s capabilities. If the
calculation of a given position exceeds the power supply’s capabilities:
• Locate the power jumper that is just before this position (count from the power supply
end).
• Insert additional power at this node.

515
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

If multiple power supplies are used, be sure they are grounded at the same point.

Adding External Power to a Legacy Vertical System

Figure M-19: Remove Jumper to Add Power

1. Remove the jumper on the 8-wide I/O interface carrier.

Warning
Removing the jumper removes all 12 VDC power to all cards on all downstream
carriers. When 12 VDC power is removed, cards are unable to hold the last value.

2. Insert 12 VDC power:

• + to the center terminal
• - to the - negative terminal

CAUTION
On the right 8-wide Legacy Vertical carriers removing the jumper only disconnects
the 96 pin carrier connector; it does not disconnect the 48 pin cable connector.

This caution only applies if power is extended to a right 8-wide Legacy Vertical
carrier with a cable connected to it. As an example, in the configuration shown in
the following figure power should be extended at carriers 3 and 5. This allows
carriers 1 and 2 to receive power from the system power supply; carriers 3 and 4 to
receive power extended at carrier 3; and carriers 5, 6, 7, and 8 to receive power
extended at carrier 5.

516
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure M-20: Extending Power at Right 8-Wide Legacy Vertical Carriers

1 2 3 4
Top
4-wide carrier

1
Bussed field

7
2

2
power connector 6
C7

3
4

4
5
C1 C6

4
5

5
3
6

6
2

7
1
8

8
8
1

1
7
2

2
6
3

3
4

4
5
C2 C5
C8

4
5

5
3
6

6
2
7

7
1
8

8
Remove jumper and Remove jumper
extend power here 8 and extend power
1

here
7
2

6
3
4

C3 C4
4
5

3
6

2
7

1
8
2

The following figure shows a typical Legacy Vertical configuration with six, 8-wide
I/O interface carriers.

517
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure M-21: Typical Legacy Vertically Mounted Configuration

LEFT RIGHT

DIN Rail DIN Rail

Mounting Mounting

Top Position
Vertical
4-Wide
Mounted
Carrier
DIN Rail

Carrier #1 Carrier #6

Addressing Addressing
Positions Positions
01 - 08 41 - 48

Carrier #2
Carrier #5
Addressing
Addressing
Positions
Positions
09 - 16
33 - 40

Bussed
Field
Power
Connector

Carrier #3 Carrier #4

Addressing Addressing
Positions Positions
17 - 24 25 - 32

Bottom Cable Extender

Another Legacy Vertical configuration uses the top cable extender to bridge a left to
right 8-wide I/O Interface carrier, as shown here.

518
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure M-22: Top Cable Extender Bridging Left and Right Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carriers
LEFT RIGHT LEFT
DIN Rail DIN Rail DIN Rail
Mounting Mounting Mounting

Top Position
Vertical
4-Wide Carrier
Mounted
DIN Rail

Carrier #5
Carrier #4
Addressing
Addressing
Positions
Positions
Carrier #1 33 - 40
25 - 32
Addressing
Positions
Top Cable Extender
01 - 08

Bussed
Field
Power
Connector

Carrier #2

Addressing
Positions
09 - 16 Carrier #3

Addressing
Positions
17 - 24

Bottom Cable Extender

Another Legacy Vertical configuration, shown in the following figure, shows a

bottom 4-wide Legacy Vertical carrier connected to a right 8-wide Legacy Vertical
I/O interface carrier. A top cable extender bridges the right I/O carrier to a left I/O
carrier on the back side of the cabinet.

519
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure M-23: Bottom 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Carrier

Carrier #2 Top Cable Extender

Addressing Carrier #3
Positions Addressing
09 - 16 Positions
17 - 24

Carrier #1
Carrier #4
Addressing Bussed
Positions Addressing
Field Positions
01 - 08 Power 25 - 32
Connector

Bottom
Position
4-Wide
Carrier

DIN Rail

DIN Rail

Cables for Legacy Vertical Systems

Two types of cables are used to connect the 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O carriers:
• The bottom cable extender connects a left I/O carrier (card position 1-8) to a right I/O
carrier (card positions 8-1) at the bottom of the DIN rails. The bottom cable extender
exits in a downward direction.
• The top cable extender connects a right I/O carrier (card position 8-1) to a left I/O
carrier (card positions 8-1) on the opposite side of the cabinet at the top of the DIN
rails. The top cable extender exits in an upward direction.
The figures in "4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carriers" show how the bottom
cable extender is used in a typical legacy vertical configuration and how the top cable
extender is used as a bridge.
Note
Failure to use the correct cables can result in a corrupt addressing scheme.

520
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Related information
4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carriers

Calculating the Total Length of a Legacy Vertical System

For both vertically and horizontally mounted systems, the length of the LocalBus,
including all cabling is the same; it cannot exceed 6.5 m (21.3 feet). The LocalBus at this
length can support eight, 8-wide carriers, one, 4-wide carrier, one, bottom cable extender,
and one, top cable extender. However, there is a difference in how maximum length is
calculated for Legacy Vertical systems. The following figure shows a standard Legacy
Vertical configuration for an eight carrier, 64 card system.

Figure M-24: Standard Configuration for an Eight Carrier Legacy Vertical System
1 2 3 4
Top
4-wide carrier

8
1

1
Bussed field
7
2

2
power connector 6
C7
3

3
4

4
5

C1 C6
4
5

5
3
6

6
2
7

7
1
8

Top cable extender 8

(2-meters/78.74 inches)
8
1

1
7
2

6
3

3
4

4
5

C2 C5
C8
4
5

5
3
6

2
7

7
1
8

8
1

7
2

6 Notes
3
4

C3 C4 Each carrier (C1-C8) is 22 inches long

C1 addressing positions 01-08
4
5

3
6

C2 addressing positions 09-16

2 C3 addressing positions 17-24
7

C4 addressing positions 25-32

1
8

C5 addressing positions 33-40

C6 addressing positions 41-48
2

C7 addressing positions 49-56

C8 addressing positions 57-64
Bottom cable extender
(1 meter/39.37 inches)

The length to carriers 6 and 7 (C6 and C7) is not counted in the overall length calculation
since C6 and C7 are considered spurs and are not in series with the rest of the system. Spur
lengths are equal to or less than the total system length.
Refer to preceding figure. There are three carrier ends: 6, 7, and 8. For a vertically
mounted system, the signal path starts at the first carrier. The following table shows how
to calculate the lengths to the three carrier ends. The cable lengths are 1m. (39.37 in.) or
2m (78.74 in.) and the carrier lengths (C) are 22 inches.

521
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

Table M-1: Cable Length Calculations

Total length to the end of Calculation
carrier:
6 C1 + C2 + C3 + 1m + C4 +C5 + C6 = 14.3 ft
7 C1 + C2 + C3 + 1m + C4 +C5 + 2m + C7 = 20.8 ft
8 C1 + C2 + C3 + 1m + C4 +C5 + 2m + C8 = 20.8 ft

Note
Do not connect additional carriers to spurs as this will corrupt the addressing scheme.
Referring to Figure M-24, if you connect a carrier to the end of carrier 6, it will become
carrier 7. In the addressing scheme shown in the figure, carrier 7 already exists at the end
of the 2 meter cable.

Related information
DeltaV System Equipment

DIN Rail Recommendations

The following figure shows suggested spacing for vertical DIN rail installation.

Figure M-25: Vertical DIN Rail Installation

Installing the 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller

Carriers
1. Mount the DIN rail at the appropriate location.

522
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

2. Turn the screws counter-clockwise on the power/controller carrier to disengage the

latch.
3. Place the carrier on the rail and tighten the screws clockwise to latch.
Note
The middle two screws are for G-rail mounting and the outer screws are for T-rail
mounting.

Installing the 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carriers

Refer to the following figure when performing these steps.

Figure M-26: 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier Installation

Previously
Mounted T-Rail or G-Rail
Top Position
4-wide Carrier

T-Rail Latch Screws

G-Rail Latch Screws

Bussed Field
Power Connector

Carrier
Push Push
Shield
and and
Bar
Hold Hold

Wiring
Point for
Shield
Bar

Previously
Mounted
Bottom
Position
Push
4-wide Carrier
and
Hold

1. Mount the DIN rail at the appropriate location.

2. Connect each 8-wide carrier to any adjacent carriers by sliding the 96-pin
connectors at the top or bottom of the carriers together. Hold the carrier in position
to ensure that it does not fall.
3. Turn the screws counter-clockwise to disengage the latch. With the carrier on the
rail, tighten the screws clockwise to latch.

523
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

Note
The middle two screws are for G-rail mounting and the outer screws are for T-rail
mounting.

4. If you are mounting 8-wide carriers on separate rails, use the bottom cable extender
for a left-to-right bridge and the top cable extender for a right-to-left bridge.
5. Install ground wiring as shown in the following figure. For a good connection, use a
signal ground cable and a block spade terminal, sized for AC/DC system power.

Figure M-27: Ground Wiring for System Power Supplies

Enclosure PE Ground Lug
Enclosure Door
To DC Return To AC Ground
Adjacent Enclosure
Isolated
Bus
DC Chassis
To DIG Ground To DIG Ground

Power Power Power Power

Error Error Error Error
Active Active
Standby Standby

AC/DC Controller AC/DC Controller

Power Supply MD Plus Power Supply MD Plus

Pow r
Erro ive
I/O Carrier

er
Erro er

Act
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

ndb
y

DC
ndb
Act

Pow r
Erro ive y

er
Shield Bar
Erro er

Act ndb
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

y
ndb
Act

Reference
Ground

Pow r
Erro ive

er
Erro er

Act
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

ndb
y
ndb
Act

Pow r
Erro ive y

er
Erro er

Act ndb
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

y
ndb
Act

Pow r
Erro ive

er
Erro er

Act
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

ndb
y
ndb
Act

Pow r
Erro ive y

er
Erro er

Act ndb
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

y
ndb
Act

Bussed
Field
Pow r
Erro ive

er
Erro er

Act
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

ndb
y
ndb
Act

Power
Pow r
Erro ive y

er
Erro er

Act ndb
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

Connects to
y
ndb
Act

Connector
Jumper Bar on
Next I/O Carrier
Pow r
Erro ive

er
Erro er

Act
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

ndb
y
ndb
Act

Pow r
Erro ive y

er
Erro er

Act ndb
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

y
ndb
Act

Pow r
Erro ive

er
Erro er

Act
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

ndb
y
ndb
Act

Pow r
Erro ive y

er
Erro er

Act ndb
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

y
ndb
Act

Pow r
Erro ive

er
Erro er

Act
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

ndb
y
ndb
Act

Pow r
Erro ive y

er
Erro er

Act ndb
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

y
ndb
Act

Pow r
Erro ive

er
Erro er

Act
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

ndb
y
ndb
Act

Pow r
Erro ive y

er
Erro er

Act ndb
Pow

Sta
r
Sta ive

y
ndb
Act

Related information
Cables for Legacy Vertical Systems

524
 DeltaV Vertical Carriers
D800001X312 April 2021

Installing the Cables

Use the bottom cable extender to connect a left Legacy Vertical I/O carrier to a right
Legacy Vertical I/O carrier at the bottom of the DIN rails. Use the top cable extender to
connect a right Legacy Vertical I/O carrier to a left I/O carrier on the opposite side of the
cabinet at the top of the DIN rails.
Note
Be sure that the bottom cable extender exits in a downward position and the top cable
extender exits in an upward position.

CAUTION
Be careful when inserting sockets and plugs. The connectors are fragile and bend easily.
Ensure that the pins are straight before connecting the cable ends.

1. Connect the plugs and sockets on the carriers.

2. Tighten the two mounting screws on each cable end.

525
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
April 2021 D800001X312

526
 Installation Worksheets
D800001X312 April 2021

N Installation Worksheets
This appendix provides worksheets to calculate your system power supply requirements
and includes a checklist that you can use to create your own worksheets to document your
installation.

N.1 Installation Information Checklist

Document the following information about your system and archive it for use in the event
that any problems arise.
• Create a diagram of the Control Network equipment and cables, include:
— Equipment location
— Cable routing
— Cable lengths
— Type of connectors at each end of the cables
— The manufacturer and type of cable
— Boot color on the cables
— Certification report for each 10BaseT cable
— Certification report for each fiber-optic cable
• Create a diagram of the power supplies and power and ground wiring, include:
— Power supply locations
— Power sizing calculations (Refer to the tables in this chapter.)
— Wiring routing
— Wiring gauges and lengths
— Current flow through the wiring (measured after startup)
• Document the sizing and heat rise calculations for any enclosures
• Document each I/O terminal block and I/O card types for each slot

Related information
I/O Cards
Power Dissipation Considerations

N.2 Worksheets for Calculating Power

Requirements
Use the tables in this chapter to calculate your power supply requirements for system
power supplies and legacy bulk power supplies for non-I.S. systems.

527
Installation Worksheets
April 2021 D800001X312

Use the Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power Requirements to determine the
number of power supplies required for Intrinsically Safe systems and add the total number
of I.S. power supplies to the Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power.
Make a copy of the tables and use them for each DeltaV system in your plant. If you are
using redundant power, remember to include calculations for redundant system power.

Calculating Power Requirements

Follow these steps to calculate your power requirements:
• For products that use 12 VDC LocalBus power and 24 VDC bussed field power, use the
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power to
record quantity for each product and multiply quantity by the required amperage to
determine the:
— 12 VDC LocalBus power requirements for each product
— 24 VDC bussed field power requirements for each product
Enter the totals in the appropriate column (12 VDC or 24 VDC) in the Worksheet for
Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power. Add the total
amperage requirements to get a subtotal of amperage requirements for all products and
enter the subtotal as Subtotal 1.
• For products that use 24 VDC power, use the Worksheet for Products Using Only 24
VDC Power to record quantity for each product and multiply quantity by the required
amperage to determine the:
— 24 VDC power requirements for each product
— Number of Intrinsically Safe power supplies (if I.S. cards are used) required for I.S.
systems and add the total number of I.S. power supplies to the worksheet. Use the
Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power Requirements to determine the
number of I.S. power supplies.
— Enter the totals in the 24 VDC column in the worksheet.
— Add the total amperage requirements to get a subtotal of amperage requirements
for all products and enter as Subtotal 2 at the end of the worksheet.

24 VDC Systems
• For 24 VDC systems, use the Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 24 VDC
Power Input to determine the:
— Number of system power supplies required to power the I/O cards.
— Amperage required from the legacy bulk 24 VDC power supplies to power the
system power supplies and bussed field power requirements.

12 VDC Systems
• For 12 VDC systems, use the Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC
Power to determine the:
— Number of system power supplies required to power the I/O cards.
— Amperage required from the legacy bulk 12 VDC Power Supplies to power the
system power supplies and 24 VDC bussed field power requirements.
Use the Worksheet for Bulk Power Requirements to determine the number of legacy bulk
power supplies required.

528
 Installation Worksheets
D800001X312 April 2021

Related information
Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power Requirements
Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Power Input
Worksheet for Bulk Power Requirements

N.3 Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus

Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power
Use this table to calculate the power requirements for products that use 12 VDC LocalBus
power and 24 VDC bussed field power.
Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power
Product Type Quanti Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type
ty
12 VDC LocalBus 24 VDC Bussed Field 12 VDC 24 VDC
Power Power
Controllers 0.01 0.01
Remote 0.01 0.01
Interface Unit
I/O Cards
AI, 8-Channel, 0.150 0.300
4-20 mA
AI, 8-Channel, 0.150 0.300
4-20 mA,
HART
AI, 8-Channel, 0.150 0.100
1-5 VDC
AO, 8- 0.150 0.300
Channel, 4-20
mA
AO, 8- 0.150 0.300
Channel, 4-20
mA, HART
AS-Interface 0.300 N/A
DeviceNet 0.600 N/A
DI, 8- 0.100 N/A
Channel, 24
VDC, Isolated

529
Installation Worksheets
April 2021 D800001X312

Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power (continued)
Product Type Quanti Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type
ty
12 VDC LocalBus 24 VDC Bussed Field 12 VDC 24 VDC
Power Power
DI, 8- 0.100 0.040
Channel, 24
VDC, Dry
Contact
DI, 8- 0.100 N/A
Channel, 120
VAC, Isolated
DI, 8- 0.100 N/A
Channel, 120
VAC, Dry
Contact
DI, 8- 0.100 N/A
Channel, 230
VAC, Isolated
DI, 8- 0.100 N/A
Channel, 230
VAC, Dry
Contact
DI, 32- 0.075 0.150
Channel, 24
VDC, Dry
Contact
DO, 8- 0.150 N/A
Channel,
120/230 VAC,
Isolated
DO, 8- 0.150 N/A
Channel,
120/230 VAC,
High Side
DO, 8- 0.150 N/A
Channel, 24
VDC, Isolated
DO, 8- 0.150 depends upon field
Channel, 24 devices (max 3 A total
VDC, High each card)
Side
DO, 32- 0.150 depends upon field
Channel, 24 devices (max 3.2 A
VDC, High- total each card)
Side
Fieldbus H1 0.600 N/A
card

530
 Installation Worksheets
D800001X312 April 2021

Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power (continued)
Product Type Quanti Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type
ty
12 VDC LocalBus 24 VDC Bussed Field 12 VDC 24 VDC
Power Power
Media 0.300 N/A
Converter
Multifunction 0.250 N/A
Profibus DP 0.600 N/A
RTD, ohms 0.160 N/A
Sequence of 0.075 0.075
Events
Serial Card, 2 0.300 N/A
Ports, RS232/
RS485
Thermocoupl 0.350 N/A
e, mV
Series 2 I/O Cards 2
Series 2 AI, Simplex: 0.150 Simplex: 0.300
4-20 mA with Redundant: 0.250 Redundant: 0.200
HART (each card) (each card)
Series 2 AI, 0.150 0.600
16-Channel,
4-20 mA,
HART Simplex
Series 2 AO, Simplex: 0.150 Simplex: 0.300
4-20 mA with Redundant: 0.250 Redundant: 0.200
HART (each card) (each card)
Series 2 AS- 0.300 N/A
Interface
Simplex
Series 2 DI, 8- Simplex: 0.150 Simplex: 0.040
Channel, 24 Redundant: 0.150 Redundant: 0.020
VDC Dry (each card) (each card)
Contact
Series 2 DI, 8- 0.100 N/A
Channel, 24
VDC Isolated
Simplex
Series 2 DI, 8- 0.100 N/A
Channel, 120
VAC, Dry
Contact
Simplex

531
Installation Worksheets
April 2021 D800001X312

Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power (continued)
Product Type Quanti Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type
ty
12 VDC LocalBus 24 VDC Bussed Field 12 VDC 24 VDC
Power Power
Series 2 DI, 8- 0.100 N/A
Channel, 120
VAC Isolated
Simplex
Series 2 DI, 0.075 0.150
32-Channel,
24 VDC, Dry
Contact
Simplex
Series 2 DO, Simplex: 0.150 Simplex: depends
8-Channel, 24 Redundant: 0.150 upon field devices;
VDC, High- (each card) (max 3 A total each
Side card)
Redundant: depends
upon field devices;
(max 1.5 A each card)
Series 2 DO, 0.150 N/A
8-Channel, 24
VDC Isolated
Simplex
Series 2 DO, 0.150 N/A
8-Channel,
120/230 VAC
High Side
Simplex
Series 2 DO, 0.150 N/A
8-Channel,
120/230 VAC,
Isolated
Simplex
Series 2 DO, 0.150 depends upon field
32-Channel, devices
24 VDC, High- (max 3.2 A total each
Side Simplex card)
Series 2 H1 Simplex: 0.300 N/A
Redundant: 0.300 N/A
(each card)
Series 2 0.350 N/A
Isolated Input
Series 2 0.600 N/A
DeviceNet
Series 2 0.600 N/A
Profibus DP

532
 Installation Worksheets
D800001X312 April 2021

Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power (continued)
Product Type Quanti Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type
ty
12 VDC LocalBus 24 VDC Bussed Field 12 VDC 24 VDC
Power Power
Series 2 0.210
Thermocoupl
e
Series 2 0.100 0.075
Sequence of
Events
Simplex
Series 2 Serial Simplex: 0.300 N/A
Redundant: 0.300 N/A
(each card)
Subtotal 1

1 Require no LocalBus current as controllers are powered separately by the system power supply.
2 For Series 2 cards in redundant applications, the numbers shown in the table are for each card of
a redundant pair. For example, the power required for a redundant pair of Series 2 DO cards is .
300 A at 12 VDC and a maximum of 3 A at 24 VDC for 24 VDC field power.

533
Installation Worksheets
April 2021 D800001X312

N.4 Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC

Power
Table N-2: Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power
Miscellaneous Products
Product Type Quantity Amps Required for Each Total for Product Type
Product
12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
H1 carrier input N/A 0.020 (carrier N/A
power N/A only)
Bussed field 0.500 (max
power with cards)
Bussed field
power: Add
the current
required for
the cards
installed on
the carrier
unless
accounted for
elsewhere in
the calculation
in the table for
products that
use 12 V
LocalBus
power and 24
VDC bussed
field power.
Logic Solver N/A 1 plus DO field N/A
power (4 max)
Redundant Logic N/A 2 plus DO field N/A
Solvers power
SISNet N/A 0.300 (per N/A
Repeaters Repeater)
Auxiliary Relay N/A 0.010 plus N/A
Modules, field power (5
Energize to max)
Actuate and De-
Energize to
Actuate, 24 VDC
DeltaV Smart Switches and Media Modules
FP20-6TX2TX N/A 0.221 N/A

534
 Installation Worksheets
D800001X312 April 2021

Table N-2: Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power (continued)
Miscellaneous Products
Product Type Quantity Amps Required for Each Total for Product Type
Product
12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
FP20-6TX1MM1 N/A 0.271 N/A
TX
FP20-6TX1SM1T
X
FP20-6TX1SMLH
1TX
FP20-6TX2MM N/A 0.321 N/A
FP20-6TX2SM
FP20-6TX2SMLH
MD20-8 N/A 0.208 N/A
MD20-16 N/A 0.500 N/A
MD20-24
MD30-8 N/A 0.317 N/A
MD30-16 N/A 0.609 N/A
MD30-24
MD2-4TX1 N/A 0.034 N/A
MD2-4TX1-PoE
MD3-4FX/M2 N/A 0.292
MD3-4FX/M4
MD3-4FXS2
MD2-2FXM2 N/A 0.142
MD3-2FXM2/2T
X1
MD3-2FXM4/2T
X1
MD2-2FXS2
MD3-2FXS2/2TX
1
MD3-1FXS2/3TX
1
Power Supplies
I.S. System N/A 3.4
Power Supply
(Refer to the
table for IS
System Power
requirements for
calculations.)

535
Installation Worksheets
April 2021 D800001X312

Table N-2: Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power (continued)
Miscellaneous Products
Product Type Quantity Amps Required for Each Total for Product Type
Product
12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Fieldbus Power N/A Refer to N/A
Supply manufacturer'
s
specifications.
I.S. Fieldbus N/A Refer to N/A
Power Supply manufacturer'
s
specifications.

Subtotal 2 N/A

N.5 Worksheet for System Power Requirements -

24 VDC Power Input
To calculate the number and type of system power supplies required to power the system
based on the 12 VDC LocalBus power requirements calculated in the Worksheet for
Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power, use the following
table for systems in which the system power supply is powered by a 24 VDC supply or use
the Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC for systems in which the system
power supply is powered by a 12 VDC supply. Remember to not exceed 8 A on the
horizontal carrier and 15 A on the vertical carrier and remember to include calculations for
redundant system power. Add Subtotal 1 from Worksheet for Products Using 12 V
LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power and Subtotal 2 from the Worksheet for
products Using Only 24 VDC Power to do the calculation
Table N-3: System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Input
Product Type Quantity Amps Required for Each Total for Product Type
Product
12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
System Power N/A 7.5 max N/A
Supply (Dual
DC/DC) 24 V
input
Provides 8.0
Amps @ 12 V
(Subtotal
1 /8.0 A =
Quantity)1

536
 Installation Worksheets
D800001X312 April 2021

Table N-3: System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Input (continued)

Product Type Quantity Amps Required for Each Total for Product Type
Product
12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Redundant NA 1.0 max2 N/A
system Power
Supply (Dual
DC/DC) 24 V
input for
either Simplex
or Redundant
controllers (if
applicable)
Add for Subtotal 3 N/A
Subtotal 3
Add Subtotal 1 Subtotal 1 N/A
(24 VDC only)
from
Worksheet for
Products
Using 12 V
LocalBus
Power and 24
VDC Bussed
Field Power.
Add Subtotal 2 Subtotal 2 N/A
from
Worksheet for
Products
Using Only 24
VDC Power
Add Subtotals Grand Total N/A
1, 2, and 3 for
total 24 VDC
power
required.

1 Older models of the Dual DC/DC System Power Supply provided 4.5 A of +12 V power and
required 4.0 A input from +24 V power.
2 If your system requires redundant system power, a redundant system power supply can be added
to either a 2-wide horizontal carrier, (may require an additional 2-wide carrier) or to the 4-wide
vertical carrier.

Example Calculation for 24 VDC Input

As an example, suppose your calculations from the Worksheet for Products Using 12 V
LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power showed that the total 12 VDC LocalBus
power requires 6.1 A. Calculate the number of power supplies that you will need as
follows:
6.1 A/8.0 A/supply = 0.76 or 1 system power supply for simplex
power

537
Installation Worksheets
April 2021 D800001X312

If redundant power is required, an additional 2-wide carrier is necessary for a horizontally

mounted DeltaV system. Use the Worksheet for Legacy Bulk Power Requirements to
calculate the number of bulk supplies required to power the system for each type based
on the 12 and 24 VDC power requirements calculated in the Worksheet for System Power
Requirements - 24 VDC Power Input.

Related information
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Power Input

N.6 Worksheet for System Power Requirements -

12 VDC Input
For systems in which the system power supply is powered from a 12 VDC supply, use the
following table to calculate the number and type of system power supplies required to
power the system based on the 12 VDC LocalBus power requirements calculated in the
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power.
Remember to not exceed 8 A on the horizontal carrier and 15 A on the vertical carrier and
remember to include calculations for redundant system power. Add Subtotal 1 from the
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power and
Subtotal 2 from the Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power to do the
calculation.
Table N-4: System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input
Product Type Quantity Amps Required for Each Total for Product Type
Product
12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
System Power 1.81 N/A N/A
Supply (Dual
DC/DC) 12 V
input
Provides 13
Amps @ 12 V
(Subtotal 1 /13
A = Quantity)
Redundant 1.82 N/A
System Power
Supply for
either Simplex
or Redundant
controllers (if
applicable)
Add for Subtotal 4 N/A
Subtotal 4

538
 Installation Worksheets
D800001X312 April 2021

Table N-4: System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input (continued)

Product Type Quantity Amps Required for Each Total for Product Type
Product
12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Add Subtotal 1 Subtotal 1
from
Worksheet for
Products
Using 12 V
LocalBus
Power and 24
VDC Bussed
Field Power.
Add Subtotal 2 Subtotal 2
from
Worksheet for
Products
Using Only 24
VDC Power
Add Subtotals Grand Total
1, 2, and 4 for
total 12 and
24 VDC power
required.

1 The current required for I/O cards is included in the calculations in Table N-1 and is transferred
from Table N-1 to Table N-4 as Subtotal 1. The system power supply requires 1.8 A from the Bulk
12 VDC Power Supply to provide the power for each controller (one controller assumed for each
system power supply.) If on a large system, the current exceeds: the 8 A limit for horizontally
mounted systems, the 15 A limit for vertically mounted systems, or the 13 A system power
supply limit, use the cable extender and split the 12 VDC as described in Appendix J
2 The system power supply requires 1.8 A from the Bulk 12 VDC Power Supply to provide the power
for each controller (one controller assumed for each system power supply.)

Example Calculation for 12 VDC Input

Suppose your calculations from the Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power
and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power showed that the total 12 VDC power requires 6.1 A.
Calculate the number of power supplies required as follows:
6.1 A/13 A/supply =.47 or 1 system power supply for simplex power
and 2 system power supplies for redundant power.
If on a large system, the currents exceeds: the 8 A limit for horizontally mounted systems,
the 13 A system power supply limit, or the 15 A limit for vertically mounted systems, use
the cable extender and split out the 12 VDC as described in "System Power Guidelines" for
horizontal systems and "DeltaV Vertical Carriers" for vertical systems.

Related information
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power
Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power
System Power Guidelines

539
Installation Worksheets
April 2021 D800001X312

DeltaV Vertical Carriers

N.7 Worksheet for Bulk Power Requirements

Use the following table to calculate the number of legacy bulk supplies required to power
the system for each type based on the 12 VDC and 24 VDC power requirements calculated
in Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input.
Table N-5: Bulk Power Requirements
Product Type Quantity Total Amps Needed for Total Amps Available for
System system
12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Legacy DIN N/A N/A
rail-mounted
Bulk Power
Supply 12 VDC
Provides 12
Amps each
(Grand Total
Table N-3 or
Table N-4 / 12
A = Quantity)
Legacy DIN N/A N/A
rail-mounted
Bulk Power
Supply 24 VDC
Provides 12
Amps each
(Grand Total
Table N-3 or
Table N-4 /12
A = Quantity)
Redundant N/A N/A
Legacy DIN
rail-mounted
12 VDC Bulk
Power Supply
(if applicable)
Redundant N/A N/A
Legacy DIN
rail-mounted
24 VDC Bulk
Power Supply
(if applicable)

540
 Installation Worksheets
D800001X312 April 2021

Table N-5: Bulk Power Requirements (continued)

Product Type Quantity Total Amps Needed for Total Amps Available for
System system
12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Legacy Panel- N/A N/A
mounted Bulk
Power Supply
12 VDC
Provides 25
Amps each
(Grand Total
Table N-3 or
Table N-4 /25
A = Quantity)
Legacy Panel- N/A N/A
mounted Bulk
Power Supply
24 VDC
Provides 12.5
Amps each
(Grand Total
Table N-3 or
Table N-4 /
12.5 A =
Quantity)
Redundant N/A N/A
Legacy Panel-
mounted 12
VDC Bulk
Power Supply
(if applicable)1
Redundant N/A N/A
Legacy Panel-
mounted 24
VDC Bulk
Power Supply
(if applicable)1

1 An OR-ing diode is required for redundant bulk power supplies. Refer to Appendix I for
information.

N.8 Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power

Requirements
Use the following table to size I.S. power for I.S. systems and add the total number of
required I.S. power supplies to Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power.

541
Installation Worksheets
April 2021 D800001X312

Table N-6: I.S. System Power Requirements

Product Type Quantity Amps Required for Total for Product
Each Product Type
I.S AI, 4-20, mA, 8- 0.600
Channel with HART
I.S. AO, 4-20 mA, 8- 0.630
Channel (with HART)
I.S. DI, 16-Channel 0.350
I.S. DO, 4-Channel 0.560
I.S. LocalBus Isolator 0.060
Grand total
I.S. System Power
Supply (5 A max each)
Provides 5 A @ 12 V
(Grand Total / 5A =
Quantity)
Redundant I.S. System
Power Supplies (1 max)
Total number of power
supplies (add to the
Worksheet for
Products Using Only 24
VDC Power )

Related information
Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power

542
 Intrinsically Safe I/O
D800001X312 April 2021

O Intrinsically Safe I/O

The DeltaV system includes the following Intrinsically Safe I/O components:
• I/O cards
— I.S. DI, 16-Channel
— I.S. DO, 4-Channel
— I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20, mA HART
— I.S AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA and I.S AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA HART
• Terminal Blocks
— I.S. 8-Channel terminal block
— I.S. 16-Channel terminal block
• I.S. Power Supply
• I.S. LocalBus Isolator
• Right and left hand carrier extenders
• Carriers
— I.S. 8-Wide carrier
— Power Supply carrier
— Isolator carrier
Warning
Be sure that your I.S. I/O cards and terminal blocks are compatible before plugging in I/O
cards. Card damage can result if an I/O card and terminal block are incompatible.

Warning
In any hazardous area installation it is important to read and follow the device
manufacturer's design and installation documents. Failure to follow the documentation
could result in an unapproved and unsafe application. Additionally, in hazardous locations
follow your plant's procedures for making the area safe during installation and
maintenance operations.

You can use both I.S. and non-I.S. I/O cards within one DeltaV system. However, you must
separate the I.S. cards from the non-I.S. cards with a LocalBus Isolator to protect the I.S.
cards from damaging voltages. Only one LocalBus Isolator can be used in the DeltaV
system. Plan your I/O subsystem carefully because you cannot add non-I.S. cards beyond
the LocalBus Isolator. If you use multiple I.S. system power supplies, intersperse the power
supplies among the cards. Refer to DeltaV™ Scalable Process System with Zone 0 Field Circuits
Installation Instructions (Part Number - 12P1990) for detailed information on wiring
multiple I.S. system power supplies. This manual is on the DeltaV Documentation Library
DVD. The following figure shows a LocalBus Isolator separating non-I.S. and I.S. cards.

543
Intrinsically Safe I/O
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure O-1: DeltaV Intrinsically Safe I/O Overview

Non-IS IS

Localbus
System Power Isolator
Supply
Non-IS I/O Cards IS IS I/O Cards RH Carrier
Controller (Gray Terminal Blocks) Power Supply (Blue Terminal Blocks) Extender

LH Carrier IS I/O Cards IS I/O Cards IS I/O Cards

Extender

Important
Field power is provided by the I.S. I/O cards. Do not connect to the connectors on the top
of the I.S. 8-wide carrier.

The following figure shows the grounding requirements for an I.S. I/O subsystem.

544
 Intrinsically Safe I/O
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure O-2: Grounding Requirements for I.S. I/O

Isolated
Common Ground
Reference

Dedicated
Plant Ground
Grid Point

IS
Localbus Power
Isolator Supply

Carrier Shield Bar

Several documents pertaining to Hazardous Area installations are on the DeltaV

Documentation Library DVD.

Related information
Intrinsically Safe I/O Interface Keying
Hazardous Area Installation Manuals, NAMUR Installation Manuals, and ATEX Instruction
Sheets

O.1 Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator

The I.S. LocalBus Isolator separates non-I.S. components such as I/O cards and controllers
from I.S. components. The following figure shows the I.S. LocalBus Isolator dimensions.
Table O-1: I.S. LocalBus Isolator Specifications
Item Specification
Input 12 V @ 60 mA maximum
Output 12 V @ 60 mA maximum
Power dissipation within module 1.2 W maximum
Mounting LocalBus Isolator carrier

The controller is non-I.S. You must always use an I.S. LocalBus Isolator to isolate the
controller from I.S. cards.

545
Intrinsically Safe I/O
April 2021 D800001X312

Figure O-3: I.S. LocalBus Isolator Dimensions

O.2 Intrinsically Safe Carrier Extenders

I.S. carrier extenders bridge two I.S. carriers to make one complete I.S. system. I.S. carrier
extenders can be used to build a system around obstacles such as cabinet walls or pipes.

546
 Intrinsically Safe I/O
D800001X312 April 2021

Figure O-4: Right and Left I.S. Carrier Extenders

547
Intrinsically Safe I/O
April 2021 D800001X312

548
 Product Type Numbers for DeltaV M-series Hardware
D800001X312 April 2021

P Product Type Numbers for DeltaV M-

series Hardware
The following table shows the product type numbers for all DeltaV non-SIS hardware
products.
Table P-1: DeltaV M-series hardware products cross referenced to product type
numbers
Product Type Number DeltaV Product Name
KC3011X1-BA1 AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus card
KC3020X1-BA1 Redundant DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side Series 2 Plus
card
KC3021X1-BA1 Redundant DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact Series 2 Plus
card
KC3030X1-BA1 Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus card
KC4011X1-BA1 4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block
KC4011X1-BB1 Redundant Discrete Output 40 Pin Mass Termination Block
KC4011X1-BC1 Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Input Terminal Block
KC4011X1-BD1 Redundant 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block
KC4011X1-BE1 Redundant 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block
KC4011X1-BF1 Redundant H1 4-Port Terminal Block
KC4011X1-BH1 Redundant Discrete Input 40 Pin Mass Termination Block
KC4011X1-BL1 Simplex H1 4-Port Terminal Block
KC4011X1-BP1 Simplex 4-Wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block
KC4011X1-BS1 Simplex 2-Wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block
KJ1501X1-BC3 System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
KJ1700X1-BA1 Fiber-Optic Media Converter
KJ1710X1-BA1 Single Port Fiber Switch
KJ1740X1-BA1 Four Port Fiber Switch
KJ2003X1-BB1 MD Plus Controller
KJ2005X1-BA1 MX Controller
KJ2004X1-BA1 Remote Interface Unit
KJ3001X1-BA1 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card
KJ3001X1-BB1 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card
KJ3001X1-BG1 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card
KJ3001X1-BJ1 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card

549
Product Type Numbers for DeltaV M-series Hardware
April 2021 D800001X312

Table P-1: DeltaV M-series hardware products cross referenced to product type
numbers (continued)
Product Type Number DeltaV Product Name
KJ3001X1-CA1 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card
KJ3001X1-CB1 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card
KJ3002X1-BA1 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card
KJ3002X1-BB1 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA card
KJ3002X1-BC1 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA card
KJ3002X1-BD1 AI, 8-Channel, 1-5 VDC card
KJ3002X1-BE1 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card
KJ3002X1-BF1 RTD, ohms card
KJ3002X1-BG2 Thermocouple, mV card
KJ3224X1-BA1 Series 2 Thermocouple, mV card
KJ3003X1-BA1 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485
KJ3003X1-EA1 Interface terminal block
KJ3004X1-EA1 Fieldbus H1 terminal block
KJ3005X1-BA1 AS-Interface card
KJ3006X1-BA1 Multifunction card
KJ3007X1-BA1 Profibus DP card, pre-Series 2
KJ3007X1-EA1 Profibus DP terminal block
KJ3008X1-BA1 Sequence of Events card
KJ3009X1-BA1 DeviceNet card
KJ3201X1-BA1 Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card
KJ3201X1-EA1 Redundant Discrete terminal block
KJ3202X1-BA1 Series 2 DO, 24 VDC, High-Side card
KJ3203X1-BA1 Series 2 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card
KJ3204X1-BAI Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High Side card
KJ3206X1-BA1 Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card
KJ3207X1-BA1 Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC Isolated card
KJ3207X1-BB1 Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact card
KJ3208X1-BA1 Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated
KJ3209X1-BA1 Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120/230 VAC, Isolated card
KJ3210X1-BA1 Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120/230 VAC High Side card
KJ3211X1-BA1 Series 2 Sequence of Events card
KJ3212X1-BA1 Series 2 Multifunction card
KJ3221X1-BA1 Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card

550
 Product Type Numbers for DeltaV M-series Hardware
D800001X312 April 2021

Table P-1: DeltaV M-series hardware products cross referenced to product type
numbers (continued)
Product Type Number DeltaV Product Name
KJ3221X1-EA1 Redundant Analog Output terminal block
KJ3222X1-BA1 Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card
KJ3222X1-EA1 Redundant Analog Input terminal block
KJ3223X1-BA1 Series 2 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART
KJ3223X1-EA1 16-Channel Analog Input terminal block
KJ3225X1-BA1 Series 2 RTD, ohms card
KJ3231X1-BA1 Series 2 Isolated Input card
KJ3231X1-EA1 Isolated Input terminal block
KJ3241X1-BA1 Series 2 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485
KJ3241X1-EA1 Redundant Interface terminal block
KJ3242X1-BA1 Series 2 H1 card
KJ3242X1-EA1 Series 2 Simplex H1 terminal block
KJ3242X1-FA1 Series 2 Redundant H1 terminal block
KJ3243X1-BA1 Series 2 Profibus DP card
KJ3243X1-BB1 Series 2 Plus Profibus DP card
KJ3244X1-BA1 Series 2 DeviceNet card
KJ3245X1-BA1 Series 2 AS-Interface card
KJ4001X1-BA3 2-Wide Power/Controller Carrier
KJ4001X1-BB1 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier
KJ4001X1-BE1 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier with Shield Bar
KJ4001X1-BH1 2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier
KJ4001X1-CA1 I/O terminal block
KJ4001X1-CB1 Fused I/O terminal block
KJ4001X1-CC1 4-Wire terminal block
KJ4001X1-CD1 10-Pin Mass termination block
KJ4001X1-CE1 16-Pin Mass termination block
KJ4001X1-CF1 24-Pin Mass termination block
KJ4001X1-CG1 Thermocouple, mV terminal block
KJ4001X1-CH1 RTD, ohms terminal block
KJ4001X1-CJ1 32-Channel terminal block
KJ4001X1-NA1 One-wide right carrier extender
KJ4001X1-NB1 One-wide left carrier extender

551
Product Type Numbers for DeltaV M-series Hardware
April 2021 D800001X312

Table P-1: DeltaV M-series hardware products cross referenced to product type
numbers (continued)
Product Type Number DeltaV Product Name
KJ4001X1-HC1 and KJ4010X1- Left Carrier Extender
BF1
KJ4001X1-HB1 and KJ4010X1- Right Carrier Extender
BG1
KJ4002X1-BF2 D-shell cables for connecting left and right one-wide carrier
extenders
KJ4002X1-BA1 Left 8-Wide Legacy Vertical Carrier
KJ4002X1-BB1 Right 8-Wide Legacy Vertical Carrier
KJ4002X1-BC2 Top 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Carrier
KJ4002X1-BD2 Bottom 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Carrier
KJ4002X1-BE1 Top Extender Cable Assembly
KJ4002X1-BF1 Bottom Extender Cable Assembly
KJ4002X1-BA1 Left 8-Wide Legacy Vertical Carrier
KJ4003X1-BA1 Left 8-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier
KJ4003X1-BB1 Right 8-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier
KJ4003X1-BC1 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier
KJ4003X1-BD1 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier
KJ4003X1-BE1 Right 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender
KJ4003X1-BF1 Left 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender
KJ4003X1-BG1 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier
KJ4003X1-BH1 VerticalPLUS Standard Cable
KJ4003X1-BH2 VerticalPLUS Short Cable
KJ4010X1-BS1 DIN rail stop
KJ6001X1-BA2 Fieldbus H1 Carrier with Enclosure
KJ6001X1-CA2 Fieldbus H1 Carrier

552
 Glossary
D800001X312 April 2021

Glossary
This glossary includes explanations of the symbols, acronyms, and terms used in this
manual.

Units Used in This Manual

Symbol Units
Ω, kΩ ohm, kilo-ohm
°C degrees Celsius
°F degrees Fahrenheit
A ampere
BTU British thermal units
cm centimeter
dB decibel
g gram
Hz hertz
in. inch
in-lb inch-pounds
kB kilobyte
kg kilogram
kJ kiloJoule
lb pound
Mb Megabit
Mbps Megabits per second
MB Megabyte
MHz Megahertz
m meter
mA milliampere
mm millimeter
ms millisecond
mV millivolt
Nm Newton-meter
nF nanoFarad
pF picoFarad
s second

553
Glossary
April 2021 D800001X312

Symbol Units
V volt
V·A volt-ampere
W watt
µF microFarad

Acronyms Used in This Manual

Acronym Definition
AC Alternating Current
A/D Analog-to-Digital
AI Analog Input
AO Analog Output
AWG American Wire Gauge
CD Compact Disk
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSA Canadian Standards Association
DC Direct Current
DIMM Double In-line Memory Module
DI Discrete Input
DIN Deutsche Institut für Normung
DO Discrete Output
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
FCC Federal Communications Commission
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
ISA Instrument Society of America
ISO International Standards Organization
LAN Local Area Network
LED Light-Emitting Diode
MDI Medium Dependent Interface
MIL Military Standard
NVM Non-Volatile Memory

554
 Glossary
D800001X312 April 2021

Acronym Definition
OLE Object Linking and Embedding
OPC OLE for Process Control
OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
RAM Random-Access Memory
ROM Read-Only Memory
SIMM Single In-Line Memory Module
UL Underwriters Laboratory
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
VAC Volts Alternating Current
VDC Volts Direct Current

Terms Used in This Manual

Term Definition
2-wide power/controller carrier Assembly that provides power and communications
connections for the DeltaV Controller and the DeltaV System
Power Supply.
4-wide I/O interface carrier Assembly that provides power and communication
connections for the DeltaV I/O Interface with 4 I/O card slots.
8-wide I/O interface carrier Assembly that provides power and communication
connections for the DeltaV I/O Interface with 8 I/O card slots.
10BaseT IEEE standard for a 10-Megabit per second (Mbps) baseband
network on twisted-pair wiring.
American Wire Gauge (AWG) Usual system of wire size measurement in the United States. A
14 AWG wire has a cross-sectional area of 2.08 mm; a 000
AWG wire has a cross-sectional area of 85.02 mm. Note that
the smaller the AWG value, the larger the wire.
Bit Electrical equivalent of a 0 or a 1 that represents the basic unit
of computer communication.
CD-ROM Compact disk used as a computer information storage
medium. CD-ROMs can store a large amount of information.
Central processing unit (CPU) Portion of a computer that manipulates and modifies data and
carries out software instructions.
Control Network Communications network for the DeltaV system.
Daisy chain To connect one device to another in sequence.
Deutsche Institute für Normung The German standards organization.
(DIN)

555
Glossary
April 2021 D800001X312

Term Definition
Device Piece of electronic hardware that performs one or more
prescribed functions.
Diagnostics One or more programs in a computer or microprocessor that
can detect and pinpoint a hardware fault or a configuration
error.
Ethernet Local area network (LAN) specification that uses baseband
signaling at 10 Megabits per second (Mbps).
Federal Communications A United States government communications standards
Commission (FCC) group.
Fiber-optic cable Thin, transparent fibers of glass or plastic that transmit data
through pulses of light from a laser or light-emitting diode
(LED).
Hub Device in a network that consolidates wiring connections and
routes communications. All communications devices on a
hub-based network connect to one or more hubs.
Institute of Electrical and Independent technical organization that defines standards for
Electronic Engineers (IEEE) the electrical, electronic, and computer industries.
IEEE 802.3 Set of specifications from the Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers (IEEE) for local area networks (LANs). This
specification provides standards for media access control.
Input/Output (I/O) Signal reception and transmission or signal interfacing. Input,
for an instrument, involves accepting and processing signals
from field devices. Output, for an instrument, involves
converting commands into electrical signals to field devices.
International Standards International organization that defines manufacturing
Organization (ISO) standards.
Instrument Society of America Independent organization that defines instrumentation
(ISA) standards.
Intrinsically Safe field circuits Circuits that are designed to limit the amount of energy
provided to field devices to levels below those that are
required to ignite specific types of hazardous materials under
fault and no fault conditions.
Intrinsically Safe I/O Equipment that contains intrinsically safe field circuits.
Light-emitting diode (LED) Electronic component that generates a small focused beam of
light in response to a current passing through the component.
Local Area Network (LAN) Communications network within a limited physical area that
provide high-speed data transmission.
LocalBus A DeltaV Power/Controller Carrier, its associated DeltaV I/O
Interface Carriers, and the cables that connect them.
Megabit (Mb) One million binary bits.
Military standard (MIL) Standard requirements as set by United States military
organizations.
Node Communication device, such as a workstation or controller,
attached to the Control Network.

556
 Glossary
D800001X312 April 2021

Term Definition
Object linking and embedding Software standard governing the relationship between
(OLE) software document files.
OLE for Process Control (OPC) Software standard for OLE applications in process control.
Operating range A sensor type's input signal range over which the accuracy is
stated.
Port Physical connection between an electronic device and a cable.
Random-access memory (RAM) Type of semiconductor memory. The user can read from and
write to RAM as often as desired.
Read-only memory (ROM) Type of semiconductor memory. Information is stored
permanently on ROM; the user can examine ROM contents as
often as desired but cannot change the contents.
Single in-line memory module Plug-in random-access memory (RAM) unit for a computer.
(SIMM)
Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Independent organization that defines electrical standards.
Uninterruptible power supply Battery that supplies continuous power to a computer system
(UPS) if there is a failure or an interruption in the AC power source.

557
Glossary
April 2021 D800001X312

558
 Index
D800001X312 April 2021

Index
Numerics AO, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA (HART) specifications 139
AS-Interface card
1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender LEDs 68
dimensions 115 AS-Interface specifications 145
10-Pin Mass Termination Block 240 ATEX Instruction Sheets 94
10/100BaseT Ethernet cards 325 Auto-sense I/O cards 89
16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block 224
1771 256, 263, 265, 269, 272, 274, 277, 279
2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier
B
dimensions 99 Books Online 93
installing 30 Bulk power supplies
specifications 99 using multiple 482
32-Channel Terminal Block 223 Bulk power supply
4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier ground wiring 51
installing 522 input wiring 51
specifications 116 installing 51
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier mounting plate 51
dimensions 112 wiring for bussed field power 32
specifications 112 Bussed field power
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier connecting 31
dimensions 111 extending 32
specifications 111 wiring 32
4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier Bussed field power guidelines 489
specifications 113
40-Pin Mass Termination Block 243
8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier C
installing 31
Cable
specifications 105
Category 5 46
8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier
color-coded boot 48
dimensions 117
fiber-optic 46
specifications 117
fiber-optic specifications 364
8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carrier
installling 48
dimensions 114
testing 57
specifications 114
Cable accessory specifications 365
Cable shields 45
A Cables for legacy vertical systems 520
Calculating system power requirements 527
Adding external power 107 Cards, See I/O Cards
AI 16-channel cards Carrier
LEDs 65 installing ground wiring for 31
AI 8-channel cards Carrier extenders
LEDs 63 Left and right horizontal carrier extenders 106
AI 8-Channel, 1–5 VDC specifications 133 one-wide horizontal extenders 99
AI Signal Conditioning 256 one-wide VerticalPLUS extenders 99
AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART specifications 135 Carrier shield bar 28
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA specifications 127 Carriers
AI/AO Mass Connection Board 287 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender 115
Airborne contaminants 95 2-wide horizontal power 100
AO 8-Channel card 2-wide horizontal power/controller 99
LEDs 66 4-wide 101
AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus specifications 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller 116
142 4-wide VerticalPLUS powe 112

559
Index
April 2021 D800001X312

Carriers (continued) DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Modules (continued)

4-wide VerticalPLUS power/controller 111 12-48 VDC 20 A 464
4-wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater 113 DeltaV Control Network
8-wide horizontal I/O interface 105 connecting to a LAN 50
8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface 117 example fiber-optic and twisted-pair network 408
8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface 114 DeltaV Controller 15
Fieldbus H1 118 DeltaV Controller Firewall
I.S. 8-wide horizontal 121 specifications 413
I.S. LocalBus isolator 122 DeltaV Diagnostics
I.S. power supply 120 starting 88
number supported on the LocalBus 15 status indicators 89
specifications 99 DeltaV documentation 93
Category 5 cables DeltaV Explorer
requirements for using 46 starting 88
CE statement 24 status indicators 89
Class I Division 2 installations 23 using 89
Components DeltaV Fiber Switches, See Single Port Fiber Switch and Four
controllers 315 Port Fiber Switch
I/O subsystem 125 DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches
System Power Supplies 319 power specifications 363
Connecting power to the system 51 DeltaV I/O subsystem 15
Context sensitive help 93 DeltaV installation manuals 93
Control Network DeltaV IP addresses
connecting to a LAN 50 reserved 424
description 45 DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches
extending with media converters 369 power specifications 353
installation requirements 46 DeltaV media modules 344
installing 48 DeltaV Remote Network
setting up 45 setting up 53
status indicators 89 DeltaV RM Smart Switches and media modules 355
Control Network examples 368 DeltaV RM100 Smart Switches
Controller Firewall power specifications 358
LEDs 62 DeltaV Smart Switches
Controllers environmental specifications 95
environmental specifications 95 DeltaV System Overview 15
installing 39 DeltaV Zones 427
LEDs 59 DeviceNet card
LEDs 68
DeviceNet specifications 147
D DI 8-channel card
DeltaV LEDs 69
environmental specifications 95 DI Mass Connection Board 290, 295
help on using DeltaV applications 93 DI Plus Mass Connection Solution 295
installing 23 DI Signal Conditioning 263, 265, 269, 272
overview to the system 15 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact specifications 160
system equipment 15 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact specifications 155
DeltaV Application Station 45 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated specifications 156
DeltaV Books Online 93 DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact specifications 157
DeltaV Bulk Power Supplies DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated specifications 159
100-240 VAC to 12 VDC 15 A 447 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 149
100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 10 A 454 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 153
100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 20 A 458 Dimensions
100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 40 A 461 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender 115
100-240 VAC to 24 VDC 5 A 451 2-wide horizontal power/controller carrier 99
DeltaV Bulk Power Supply Redundancy Modules 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carrier 116
12-24 VDC 40 A 468 4-wide VerticalPLUS power carrier 112
12-24 VDC 80 A 472 4-wide VerticalPLUS power/controller carrier 111

560
 Index
D800001X312 April 2021

Dimensions (continued) Fiber Switches (continued)

8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carrier 117 LEDs 62
8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface carrier 114 Fiber-optic cable
H1 carrier 118 specifications 364
H1 carrier enclosure 118 Fiber-optic cables 46
I.S. 8-wide horizontal carrier 121 Fiber-optic media converters, See Media converters
I.S. LocalBus isolator carrier 122 Fiber-optic switch
I.S. power supply carrier 120 environmental specifications 95
DIN rail spacing for vertical carriers 522 Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus specifications 179
DIN rails Fieldbus H1 cards
installing 28 LEDs 73
DO 32-channel cards Fieldbus H1 carrier
LEDs 72 dimensions 118
DO 8-channel card enclosure 118
LEDs 71 environmental specifications 95
DO Mass Connection Board 299 Fieldbus H1 carrier enclosure
DO Mass Connection Solution 299 dimensions 118
DO Signal Conditioning 274, 277, 279 Fieldbus H1 specifications 176
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side specifications 173 Fieldbus H1 terminal block 210
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side specifications Four Port Fiber Switch
169 environmental specifications 95
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated specifications specifications 341
171 FP20 Smart Switch
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side specifications 163 LEDs 86
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated specifications 167 Fused I/O terminal blocks 209
Documentation
hazardous area 94
NAMUR 94
G
Download commands 89 GPS network time server
setting up 54
E Ground isolation 17
Ground wiring
Enclosures for bulk power supply;Bulk power supply:ground
power dissipation 438 wiring 51
selecting 435 for carrier 31
Ethernet cable for workstations 44
installation rules 363 Grounding terminals 26
Ethernet cable specifications 363
Ethernet cards 325
Ethernet hubs 45
H
Ethernet interface Hazardous area installations
DeltaV Application Station 45 documentation 94
ProfessionalPLUS 45 Hops
Ethernet switches 45 number allowed 45
Explorer, See DeltaV Explorer Hubs
Extender cables environmental specifications 95
installing 36 network example 17
Extending system power 477
Extension cables
specifications 105 I
External power
I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block 306
adding 107
I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block 304
I.S. AI 8-channel cards
F LEDs 80
I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART specifications 202
Fiber Switches I.S. AO 8-Channel HART card

561
Index
April 2021 D800001X312

I.S. AO 8-Channel HART card (continued) I/O Cards (continued)

LEDs 82 DI 8-Channel 230 VAC Dry Contact (continued)
I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (HART) specifications 203 wiring diagram 157
I.S. DI 16-channel card DI 8-Channel 230 VAC Isolated
LEDs 82 installation notes 159
I.S. DI, 16-Channel specifications 206 specifications 159
I.S. DO 4-channel card LEDs wiring diagram 159
LEDs 83 DI 8-Channel 24 VDC Isolated
I.S. DO, 4-Channel specifications 207 installation notes 153
I.S. LocalBus Isolator 545 specifications 153
I/O card keying 307 wiring diagram 153
I/O cards DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact
VIM 2 card 200 installation notes 149
I/O Cards specifications 149
AI 16-Channel 4-20 mA HART wiring diagram 149
installation notes 135 DO 32-Channel 24 VDC High-Side
specifications 135 installation notes 173
wiring diagram 135 specifications 173
AI 8-Channel 1-5 VDC wiring diagram 173
installation notes 133 DO 8-Channel 120 VAC/230 VAC High-Side
specifications 133 installation notes 169
wiring diagram 133 specifications 169
AI 8-Channel 4-20 mA wiring diagram 169
installation notes 127 DO 8-Channel 120 VAC/230 VAC Isolated
specifications 127 installation notes 171
wiring diagram 127 specifications 171
AI 8-Channel 4-20 mA HART wiring diagram 171
installation notes 127 DO 8-Channel 24 VDC High-Side
specifications 127 installation notes 163
wiring diagram 127 specifications 163
AO 8-Channel 4–20 mA (HART) wiring diagram 163
installation notes 139 DO 8-Channel 24 VDC Isolated
specifications 139 installation notes 167
wiring diagram 139 specifications 167
AS-Interface wiring diagram 167
installation notes 145 Fieldbus H1
specifications 145 installation notes 176
wiring diagram 145 specifications 176
DeviceNet wiring diagram 176
installation notes 147 I S AI 8-Channel 4-20 mA HART
specifications 147 installation notes 202
wiring diagram 147 specifications 202
DI 32-Channel 24 VDC Dry Contact wiring diagram 202
installation notes 160 I S AO 8-Channel 4-20 mA (HART)
specifications 160 installation notes 203
wiring diagram 160 specifications 203
DI 8-Channel 120 VAC Dry Contact wiring diagram 203
installation notes 155 I S DI 16-Channel
specifications 155 installation notes 206
wiring diagram 155 specifications 206
DI 8-Channel 120 VAC Isolated wiring diagram 206
installation notes 156 I S DO 4-Channel
specifications 156 installation notes 207
wiring diagram 156 specifications 207
DI 8-Channel 230 VAC Dry Contact wiring diagram 207
installation notes 157 installing 38
specifications 157 Isolated Input

562
 Index
D800001X312 April 2021

I/O Cards (continued) I/O Cards (continued)

Isolated Input (continued) Series 2 DO 32-Channel 24 VDC High-Side (continued)
installation notes 181 installation notes 173
specifications 181 specifications 173
wiring diagram 181 wiring diagrams 173
Multifunction Series 2 DO 8-Channel 120 VAC/230 VAC
installation notes 185 High-Side
specifications 185 installation notes 169
wiring diagram 185 specifications 169
number supported by single subsystem 125 wiring diagrams 169
overview 125 Series 2 DO 8-Channel 120 VAC/230 VAC
Profibus DP Isolated
installation notes 187 installation notes 171
specifications 187 specifications 171
wiring diagram 187 wiring diagrams 171
RTD ohms Series 2 DO 8-Channel 24 VDC High-Side
installation notes 189 installation notes 163
specifications 189 specifications 163
wiring diagram 189 wiring diagrams 163
Sequence of Events Series 2 DO 8-Channel 24 VDC Isolated
installation notes 192 installation notes 167
specifications 192 specifications 167
wiring diagram 192 wiring diagrams 167
Serial Card 2 Ports RS232/RS485 Series 2 H1
installation notes 195 installation notes 176
specifications 195 specifications 176
wiring diagram 195 wiring diagrams 176
Series 2 AI 8-Channel 4-20 mA HART Series 2 Isolated Input
installation notes 127 installation notes 181
specifications 127 specifications 181
wiring diagrams 127 wiring diagrams 181
Series 2 AO 8-Channel, 4-20 mA HART Series 2 Multifunction
installation notes 139 installation notes 185
specifications 139 specifications 185
wiring diagrams 139 wiring diagrams 185
Series 2 AS-Interface Series 2 Plus Profibus DP
installation notes 145 installation notes 187
specifications 145 specifications 187
wiring diagrams 145 wiring diagrams 187
Series 2 DI 8-Channel 120 VAC Dry Contact Series 2 RTD ohms
installation notes 155 installation notes 189
specifications 155 specifications 189
wiring diagrams 155 wiring diagrams 189
Series 2 DI 8-Channel 120 VAC Isolated Series 2 Sequence of Events
installation notes 156 installation notes 192
specifications 156 specifications 192
wiring diagrams 156 wiring diagrams 192
Series 2 DI 8-Channel 24 VDC Isolated Series 2 Serial Card 2 Ports RS232/RS485
installation notes 153 installation notes 195
specifications 153 specifications 195
wiring diagrams 153 wiring diagrams 195
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Series 2 Thermocouple mV
Contact installation notes 198
installation notes 149 specifications 198
specifications 149 wiring diagrams 198
wiring diagrams 149 Thermocouple mV
Series 2 DO 32-Channel 24 VDC High-Side installation notes 198

563
Index
April 2021 D800001X312

I/O Cards (continued) Isolated Input specifications 181

Thermocouple mV (continued)
specifications 198
wiring diagram 198
K
I/O carriers 15 Keying 125
I/O terminal blocks 209
I/O Terminal Blocks
installing 36 L
wiring 36
LAN
Icons 89
connecting application station to 50
Installation
connecting Control Network to 50
2-wide power/controller carrier 30
installation requirements 46
8-wide I/O interface carrier 31
LED indicators
bulk power supply 51
System Power Supply 58
bussed field power 32
LEDs
control network cable 48
AI 16-channel cards 65
controller 39
AI 8-channel cards 63
DIN rails 28
AO 8-Channel card 66
Ethernet cable 363
AS-Interface card 68
extender cables 36
Controller Firewall 62
getting started 26
controllers 59
I/O cards 38
DeviceNet card 68
I/O terminal block 36
DI 8-channel card 69
redundant I/O cards 39
DI Mass Connection Board 71
redundant I/O terminal blocks 38
DO 32-channel cards 72
requirements 46
DO 8-channel card 71
system power supply 40
DO Mass Connection Board 72
tools required 25
Fiber Switches 62
torque limits 26
Fieldbus H1 cards 73
wiring guidelines 25
I.S. AI 8-channel cards 80
workstation 44
I.S. AO 8-Channel HART card 82
installation notes
I.S. DI 16-channel card 82
VIM 2 card 200
I.S. DO 4-channel card 83
Installing redundant controllers 493
Isolated Input card 74
Inter-Zone Control Network 427
MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches 84
Inter-Zone Server 427
Media Converter 61
Interface Terminal Block 218
Multifunction card 74
Intrinsically Safe 8-wide horizontal carrier
Profibus DP card 75
dimensions 121
Remote Interface Unit 60
Intrinsically Safe Carrier Extenders 546
RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches 86
Intrinsically Safe components
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 78
8-wide horizontal carrier 121
VIM 2 card 79
LocalBus isolator carrier 122
Legacy 24 VDC to 12 VDC Bulk Power Supply
power supply carrier 120
specifications 434
system power supply 324
Legacy AC to 24 VDC Bulk Power Supply
Intrinsically Safe I/O 543
specifications 430
Intrinsically Safe I/O cards
Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC Power Supply 429
using with non-I.S. I/O 543
Legacy Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power Supply 429
Intrinsically Safe LocalBus isolator
Legacy Bulk AC to 24 VDC Power Supply 429
dimensions 122
Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to
Intrinsically Safe System Power Supply 324
12 VDC power supply
IP addresses
specifications 432
filtering 45
LocalBus
reserved for DeltaV 424
number of carriers supported 15
isolated 269, 277, 279
LocalBus cable lengths
Isolated Input card
4-wide carrier 101
LEDs 74

564
 Index
D800001X312 April 2021

LocalBus cable specifications 105 Power dissipation (continued)

calculating 438
Power dissipation for DeltaV products 438
M Power guidelines 26
Management station 422 Power supplies
Marine Certified installations 23 using multiple 476
Mass Connection Boards 287 Power/controller carriers 15
Mass Connection Solutions 287 ProfessionalPLUS 45
Mass Termination Blocks 239 Profibus DP card
MD controller specifications 315 LEDs 75
MD20 Smart Switch Profibus DP specifications 187
LEDs 84 Profibus DP Terminal Block 220
MD30 Smart Switch
LEDs 84 R
Media Converter
LEDs 61 Redundant Analog Input terminal block 227
Media converters Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block 229
environmental specifications 95 Redundant controllers
extending the control network with 369 installing 493
specifications 317 Redundant Discrete Terminal Block 231
Modules, See I/O Cards Redundant H1 4-Port Terminal Block 235
Monitors Redundant H1 Terminal Block 234
touch screen 325 Redundant I/O cards
Mounting screws installing 39
torque limits on 26 Redundant I/O terminal blocks
MQ controller specifications 315 installing 38
Multifunction card Redundant Interface Terminal Block 236
LEDs 74 Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block 237
Multifunction specifications 185 Relative humidity 95
Multiple monitors 325 relay 279
Multiple power supplies 476 Remote Access Services (RAS) server 20
MX controller specifications 315 Remote Interface Unit
LEDs 60
Remote Interface Unit specifications 316
N Remote network
NAMUR installations setting up 53
documentation 94 Repeater hops
network time server maximum number of 46
setting up 54 Reserved DeltaV IP addresses 424
Network topology 368 RM100 Smart Switch
Nodes 45 LEDs 86
RM104
Smart Switch 360, 408
O Smart Switches 359
Router 45
One-wide horizontal carrier extenders 99
RTD, ohms specifications 189
One-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extenders 99
RTD, ohms Terminal Block 222
Online Help 93
Operating temperature 95
S
P ScTP
screened twisted pair 17
Plant-wide LAN 45
Sequence of Events specifications 192
PLC-5 256, 263, 265, 269, 272, 274, 277, 279
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485
Power
LEDs 78
extending 477
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 specifications 195
Power dissipation

565
Index
April 2021 D800001X312

Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART specifications 127 Shock 95

Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART specifications 139 Signal conditioning cards
Series 2 AS-Interface specifications 145 1771 256
Series 2 DI Mass Connection Solution 290 Simplex Analog Output 48-Pin Mass Terminal Block 252
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact specifications Simplex control network 48
155 Simplex H1 4-Port Terminal Block 212
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated specifications Single Port Fiber Switch
156 environmental specifications 95
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 149 specifications 341
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 153 Site preparation 25
Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side specifications Smart Switch
173 RM104 360, 408
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side Smart Switches
specifications 169 RM104 359
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated specifications
specifications 171 VIM 2 card 200
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side specifications Specifications
163 2-wide horizontal power carrier 100
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated specifications 2-wide horizontal power/controller carrier 99
167 4-wide horizontal carrier 101
Series 2 H1 specifications 176 4-wide power/controller carrier 116
Series 2 H1 terminal block 211 4-wide VerticalPLUS power carrier 112
Series 2 I/O 126 4-wide VerticalPLUS power/controller carrier 111
Series 2 Isolated Input specifications 181 4-wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater carrier 113
Series 2 Multifunction specifications 185 8-wide horizontal power/controller carrier 105
Series 2 Plus I/O Cards 8-wide vertical I/O interface carrier 117
AO 16-Channel 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus 142 8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface carriers 114
Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus 179 AI 8-Channel, 1–5 VDC 133
Series 2 Plus Profibus DP specifications 187 AI, 8-Channel, 4 mA to 20 mA, HART 127
Series 2 Plus terminal blocks AO 8-Channel, 4–20 mA (HART) 139
4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block 226 AS-Interface 145
Redundant 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block cable accessories 365
228 controllers 315
Redundant 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block DeltaV Controller Firewall 413
230 DeviceNet 147
Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Input Terminal Block DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 160
216, 217, 232 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 155
Redundant 32-Channel Discrete Output Terminal DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 156
Block 233 DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact 157
Redundant Discrete Input 40 Pin Mass Termination DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated 159
Block 248, 253 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 149
Redundant Discrete Output 40-Pin Mass Termination DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 153
Block 249, 255 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 173
Simplex 16-Channel Analog Output Terminal Block DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side 169
215 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated 171
Simplex 2-Wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 163
Block 213 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 167
Simplex 4-Wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal environmental 95
Block 214 Fieldbus H1 176
Series 2 RTD, ohms specifications 189 Fieldbus H1 carrier 118
Series 2 Sequence of Events specifications 192 Four Port Fiber Switch 341
Series 2 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 specifications I.S. 8-wide horizontal I/O interface 121
195 I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 202
Series 2 Thermocouple, mV specifications 198 I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (HART) 203
Setup commands 89 I.S. DI, 16-Channel 206
Shielding I.S. DO, 4-Channel 207
cable 45 I.S. LocalBus Isolator carrier 122

566
 Index
D800001X312 April 2021

Specifications (continued) System equipment (continued)

I.S. System Power Supply 324 workstations 15
I.S. system power supply carrier 120 System Identifier
Isolated Input 181 installing 44
Legacy 24 VDC to 12 VDC Bulk Power Supply 434 System Power Supply
Legacy AC to 24 VDC Bulk Power Supply 430 alarm contact wiring 40
legacy bulk power supplies 429 description 40
Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC installing 40
to 12 VDC power supply 432 LED indicators 58
Multifunction 185 wiring 40
Profibus DP 187 System Power Supply (AC/DC)
Remote Interface Unit 316 using multiple 477
RTD, ohms 189 System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) 321
Sequence of Events 192
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 195
Series 2 AI 8-Channel,4-20 mA, HART 127
T
Series 2 AO 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 139 Technical Service 94
Series 2 AS-Interface 145 Terminal block keying 125
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 156 Terminal block usage
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 149 AI 8-Channel, 1–5 VDC 133
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 153 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 135
Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 173 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA 127
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 127
169 AO 8-Channel, 4–20 mA (HART) 139
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus 142
171 AS-Interface 145
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 163 DeviceNet 147
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 167 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 160
Series 2 H1 176 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 155
Series 2 Isolated Input 181 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 156
Series 2 Multifunction 185 DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact 157
Series 2 Plus Profibus DP 187 DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated 159
Series 2 RTD, ohms 189 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 149
Series 2 Sequence of Events 192 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 153
Series 2 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 195 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 173
Series 2 Thermocouple, mV 198 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side 169
Series DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 155 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated 171
Single Port Fiber Switch 341 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 163
System Power Supply (AC/DC) 319 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 167
System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) 321 Fieldbus H1 176
Status indicators 89 Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus 179
Storage temperature 95 I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 202
Subnet mask 55 I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (HART) 203
Switches I.S. DI, 16-Channel 206
environmental specifications 95 I.S. DO, 4-Channel 207
System Checkout Isolated Input 181
LED indicators 58 Multifunction 185
System equipment Profibus DP 187
DeltaV Controller 15 RTD, ohms 189
DeltaV system power 15 Sequence of Events 192
I/O carriers 15 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 195
I/O subsystem 15 Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 127
legacy bulk power supplies 15 Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 139
LocalBus 15 Series 2 AS-Interface 145
power controller carriers 15 Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 155
system identifier 15 Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 156
Uninterruptible Power Supply 15 Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 149

567
Index
April 2021 D800001X312

Terminal block usage (continued) transportation 44

Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 153 Troubleshooting
Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 173 status indicators 89
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side Troubleshooting guide 90
169
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated
171
U
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 163 Uninterruptible Power Supply 15
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 167 Using multiple bulk power supplies 482
Series 2 H1 176
Series 2 Isolated Input 181
Series 2 Multifunction 185 V
Series 2 Plus Profibus DP 187
Vertical carriers 495
Series 2 Redundant AI, 8-Channel,4-20 mA, HART 127
VerticalPLUS carriers 495
Series 2 RTD, ohms 189
Vibration 95
Series 2 Sequence of Events 192
VIM 2 card
Series 2 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 195
installation notes 200
Series 2 Thermocouple, mV 198
LEDs 79
Thermocouple, mV 198
specifications 200
terminal blocks
Redundant Analog Input 48-Pin mass terminal 245
Redundant Analog Output 48-Pin Mass Terminal Block W
246
Redundant Fieldbus H1 4-Port 235 Wiring
Simplex Analog Input 48-Pin mass terminal 251 bulk power supply input 51
Simplex Analog Output 48-Pin Mass Terminal Block bussed field power 32
252 I/O terminal block 36
Simplex Fieldbus H1 4-Port 212 system power supply alarm contacts 40
Terminal blocks system power supply input 40
10-Pin Mass Termination Block 240 Wiring diagram
16-Channel Analog Input 224 AI 8-Channel, 1–5 VDC 133
32-channel 223 Wiring diagrams
4-wire I/O 209 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 135
40-Pin Mass Termination Block 243 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, and 4-20 mA, HART 4-wire
Fieldbus H1 210 127
Fused I/O 209 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, and AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA,
I.S. 16-Channel 306 HART, 2-wire 127
I.S. 8-Channel 304 AO, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 Plus 142
I/O 209 AO, 8-Channel, 4–20 mA (HART) 139
Interface 218 AS-Interface 145
Mass Termination 239 DeviceNet 147
Profibus DP 220 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 160
Redundant Analog Input 227 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 155
Redundant Analog Output 229 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 156
Redundant Discrete 231 DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact 157
Redundant H1 234 DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated 159
Redundant Interface 236 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 149
Redundant Profibus DP 237 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 153
RTD, ohms 222 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 173
Series 2 H1 211 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side 169
Thermocouple 222 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated 171
Thermocouple terminal block 222 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 163
Thermocouple, mV specifications 198 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 167
Tools Fieldbus H1 176
for DeltaV installation 25 Fieldbus H1 4-Port Series 2 Plus 179
Torque limits 26 I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 202
Touch screen monitors 325 I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (HART) 203

568
 Index
D800001X312 April 2021

Wiring diagrams (continued)

I.S. DI, 16-Channel 206
I.S. DO, 4-Channel 207
Isolated Input 181
Multifunction 185
RTD, ohms 189
Sequence of Events 192
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 195
Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 4-wire
(Simplex) 127
Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART, 2-wire
(Redundant) 127
Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART, 2-wire
(Simplex) 127, 153
Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 139
Series 2 AS-Interface 145
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 155
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 156
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 149
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 153
Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 173
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side
169
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated
171
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 163
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 167
Series 2 H1 176
Series 2 Isolated Input 181
Series 2 Multifunction 185
Series 2 Plus Profibus DP 187
Series 2 RTD, ohms 189
Series 2 Sequence of Events 192
Series 2 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 195
Series 2 Thermocouple, mV 198
Thermocouple, mV 198
Wiring guidelines 26
Workstation
environmental specifications 95
grounding 44
installing 44
multiple monitor 325
network cards used in 325
Workstation diagnostics 90

Z
Zone 2 installations 23

569
Index
April 2021 D800001X312

570
D800001X312 April 2021

571
D800001X312
2021